CO-227-2012 Schedule of Annexs PDF

CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE BUILDING FACILITY
ANNEX A
SCOPE OF WORK
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This document covers the scope of work to be carried out for the construction of a new Office Building
Facility (OBF) for the Company.
The stages of work covered by this document include as follows:
1. Construction Period – as per Project Schedule contained in Attachment 3 to this Annex A.

2. Defects Liability Period – 12 months
2.0 BREIF DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT
The Work will involve the construction of an all purpose OBF to be located within an existing Company
facility, the new building will meet the needs of the Company to deliver the continued operation and
development of the Bahrain Field. The facility will be constructed to a high standard expected of such a
building, whilst striking the optimum balance between cost and quality.
The project will be a functional design based on a Ground + 2 layout with 9,750M² GFA to accommodate
approximately 500 people along with the required facilities, externally will be lightly landscaped with
lighting and 500 covered car parking spaces to tie in with the existing recently completed works.
3.0 SCOPE OF THE DOCUMENT
This document will identify the services, material and supply necessary to complete the Work and the
responsible party for the activities/ delivery.
4.0 OVERALL RESPONSIBILITIES
Provision of Site Company

Building Design Company Design Consultant
project Management (for Company) Company
project Management (for Contractor) Contractor
Cost Management (for Contractor) Contractor
Building Construction Supervision Contractor
Building Construction Contractor
Appointment of Independent Certifier (nominated by Company) Contractor
Appointment/Management of Sub Contractors Contractor
Appointment of Company Sub Contractors Company
Coordination of Company Nominated Sub Contractors Contractor
Site Safety Regulations (for Company) Company HSE Department
Site Safety Regulations (for Contractor) Contractor
Company Contracts Administration Company SCM Department
Payment to Contractor Company Finance Department
Payment of Contractor Sub Contractors Contractor
Payment of Company Nominated Sub Contractors Contractor
Annex A – Scope of Work A-1 CO-227-2012

5.0 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1 CONSTRUCTION SCOPE

1. The Contractor scope is to construct the OBF in accordance with the drawings and specifications
issued by the Company. The Contract drawings and specifications are listed in Attachment 1 & 2
of this Annex A.
5.2 PROJECT SCHEDULE

1. The Contractor will furnish the Company with the agreed Project Schedule within fourteen (14)
days from the Effective Date.
2. The Project Schedule shall include:-
a. Fully resource loaded programme created in Microsoft Project, the programme must detail all
Contractor submittals and they must be adequately planned on a ‘just in time’ basis to allow
the Company to respond in a timely manner in accordance with the Contract.
b. Detailed Cash Flow for the Project including an ‘S-Curve’ showing duration of the project and
the expected cash requirements.
c. Project Specific Health & Safety Plan
d. All applicable items as detailed in section 5.7 below
5.3 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
1. The Contractor shall ensure that all workmanship and materials used in the project shall comply
with the design drawings and specifications listed in Attachment 1 & 2 of this Annex A.
5.4 DRAWINGS
1. The Contractor shall use the Contract Drawings included in Attachment 2 of this Annex A.
2. At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit As Built Drawings, in an editable
Autodesk DWG digital format, that are to include any changes made from the Contract Drawings
during construction of the project.
3. The Contractor shall also produce ‘shop and installation drawings’ to enable the construction of
the building and installation of the systems. These shall be submitted to the Company for review,
comment and approval prior to carrying out any works.
4. The Contractor is responsible for bringing to the attention of the Company any discrepancy
between the Drawings and Specifications.
5.5 SUB CONTRACTOR MANAGEMENT
1. The Contractor is responsible for the delivery, materials, certification, quality, safety of his
appointed Sub Contractors.
5.6 HEALTH AND SAFETY
1. The Contractor is responsible for compliance to all Company Health, Safety and Environment
guidelines.
2. The Contractor is responsible for compliance, where applicable, to Company site conditions.
5.7 INCIDENTAL/MOBILIZATION SCOPE
The Contractor shall mobilise as follows:
1. All documents submitted and accepted by Company (Bank Guarantees, Insurance Certificates,
Contractor’s schedule)

2. Contractor project Schedule is complete, meets the requirements per the Contract, and is
acceptable to Company e.g. resource loaded, logical sequence, construction methods and
estimated duration of activities necessary are incorporated to meet the milestones and completion
dates established in the Contract, identify the milestones as identified in the Contract, work as
planned is consistent with parameters of the site, and float and critical path(s) are identified.
3. All reporting systems are set up and in a format acceptable to Company (e.g. Material Tracking,
Fabrication and shipping status). Require latest status including electronic copy of resource-loaded
schedule.
4. Satisfactory evidence that Purchase Orders and/ or sub-contracts shown on Contractor schedule to
give evidence of orders placed.
5. Concrete mix design approved by Company.
6. Rebar fabrication facility is operational and in accordance with specifications.
7. Evidence of manual and non-manual manpower loading per Contract curves and mobilization of
key personnel as per Contractor 's Organization Chart.
8. Mobilization of fully functioning and certified construction equipment required for activities for at
least 30 day period after mobilization completion date complete (e.g. pile rig, cranes inspected,
tested, and certified with load charts and inspection records ) .
9. Regarding ‘construction work site’ infrastructure requirements including but not limited to -
temporary power supply/ distribution, telecommunications supply/ distribution, water supply/
storage/ distribution, grey-black waste water collection/ storage/ removal/ disposal, equipment fuel
supply/ storage, fire fighting systems (including any water supplies required – there are no main
water supplies in the existing site compound), vehicle access routes, site lighting, inspection/
sample laboratory, security, offices / meeting room / amenities, telecommunications, access to the
internet, fencing, first-aid facilities, trash storage/ collection/ disposal, and environmental cleanup
plan.
10. Safety procedures in place and all personnel have attended a Company induction and orientation.
11. Site surveys complete and site accepted by Contractor, bench marks in place.
12. Contractor offices lay down area and warehouse facilities are operational and adequately staffed.
13. Company badge system is in place and being used for all personnel.
14. Contractor has acceptable document controls in place.
15. Progress payment schedule and payment procedures are in place.
5.8 SITE PREPARATION
Contractor shall include for providing two suitably sized Work Site vehicle access points in the contractors
compound hoarding. The width of opening is to be based on the largest envisaged vehicle entering the site.
One opening will be designated as the ‘site entrance’ and one as the ‘site exit. When large vehicles/ heavy
loads are entering the site the Contractor is to provide manned Main Road traffic control measures to
ensure road safety. Material deliveries are to be scheduled for off peak periods wherever possible. Known
specific heavy traffic periods such as crane delivery, concrete pours, pre-cast slab delivery etc are to be
carefully planned/ agreed in advance with all relevant parties. All vehicles are to enter and exit the work
site forwards. No vehicles are to wait on the Main Road for access to site. The Contractor is to determine a
suitable local waiting area for all such waiting vehicles. Following completion of the main works the
Contractor shall close these accesses by making good the boundary wall and reinstating any lighting and
steel grilles previously removed and stored.
1. The site will require an element of cut and fill earthworks in order to meet the required levels
2. Part of the existing precast concrete boundary wall will require relocation to another area of the
site where an extension to the boundary will occur. New precast panels will also be required to
meet the overall expansion of the site.
3. The Contractor is to supply and install all support plinths required for temporary buildings/
structures/ equipment such as offices, amenities, cranes, generators, fuel storage, water storage,
waste water storage etc. All such support plinths are to be removed from the site on completion
of the main works.

5.9 SITE INSTALLATION SCOPE
5.9.1 GENERAL
1. This shall cover all items related to site installation works for the project, it shall include all
items required for the Works, as well as all auxiliary works.
5.9.2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
1. Installation - The site installation shall include supply, furnishing, transport, erection,
maintenance and supplementing, if required, and removal of all plant, machinery, vehicles,
scaffolding, all construction equipment, auxiliary equipment, materials, personnel and work
instruments, all temporary installations. Also included in site installation shall be such general
and/or temporary work as access roads, vehicle parking areas, storage areas, buildings, and
structures, electrical supply, medical facilities, construction of workers' and supervisors' welfare
facilities, and similar work unless included under other cost items, when such work is called for
by the Contract documents or are required for the safe and efficient execution of the work. Prior
to commencement of any installation work a drawing showing the proposed site installation
shall be submitted to Company for approval.
2. Removal - As soon as the Work is completed and upon the issuance of the Final Certificate of
Completion, the Contractor shall remove from Company's property all temporary buildings,
installations and temporary facilities. The Contractor shall leave the terrain completely clean
and with a good appearance. The Contractor shall also treat the excavations executed for his
own convenience, such as temporary roads, in a way acceptable to Company. If the Contractor
refuses to remove the temporary construction installations or if the operation is not completed
within 2 months from completion of the work, the materials and installations may be removed
by Company, and the costs shall be deducted from the Contractor's final payment.
3. Material - All equipment, machinery, materials and tools required for execution of the works
shall be workable and kept in good working conditions throughout the construction period, and
shall be listed in a schedule, which shall be subject to Company’s approval.
4. Auxiliary work which comprises but is not necessarily limited to the following, shall be: -
i. Cleaning and levelling of the area for site installation, including removal of any waste, etc.
ii. Surface drainage, soakage pits, sanitary installation, septic tank and its cleaning, removal of
foul water as directed.
iii. All water both potable and non-potable will be the responsibility of the Contractor
throughout the course of the Works.
iv. Stabilised or adequately stabilised storage areas, temporary shelters for working spaces,
etc., as required.
v. Moveable fire fighting equipment.
vi. Making good after removal of site installation.
5. Facilities at Site - The Contractor shall provide offices as required to undertake the successful
delivery of the Works. The offices shall be located at a location agreed upon with Company
prior to the start of works. No permanent work shall be commenced without suitable welfare
being made ready for use by Contractor staff.
6. Regular Cleaning of the Construction Site - During the construction period until fulfilment of
all outstanding items thereof, the Contractor shall provide a daily refuse collection and disposal
service to be loaded, transported and dumped at areas where prior permission has been obtained
from responsible authorities in order to keep the total construction site properly clean and in
safe condition. Neglecting of cleaning by the Contractor may lead to waste removal by others
and the removal costs shall be deducted from the Contractor's due payments.
7. Fencing and Signboard - The Contractor shall in relation to his work provide and maintain at his
own cost all light guards, temporary fencing and watching, complying in all respects to
concerned authorities regulations/rules, or when and where necessary or required by Company
for the protection of the work and for the safety and convenience of the public. At the entrance

to each site, a signboard shall be provided and erected by the Contractor. The signboard shall
comply with the regulations of the concerned authorities, and Company.
6.0 COMPANY PROJECT MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITIES

1. Shall issue to the selected Contractor such instructions and give professional opinions as are
necessary for the execution of the project in accordance with the Contract.
2. Shall examine and comment upon the Project Schedule issued by the Contractor and all
drawings, reports and proposals submitted by the Contractor as required.
3. Shall receive interim and final valuation recommendations from the Contractors QS, prepare
and issue interim and final valuation certificates of payment, outlining any difference which
may occur between the Contractor QS recommendation and Company’s assessment. Such
certificates are to be in a form approved by the Company.
4. Shall comment on the necessity for the inspection and testing of materials and plant supplied for
incorporation in the project and coordinate such inspection and testing.
5. Shall review the estimated final cost of the project to be submitted by the Contractor QS on a
monthly basis.
6. Shall maintain full and proper records of the progress of the project and will receive on
completion all; maintenance manuals, as-built drawings, spare part lists and all such other
records and information as are necessary for the operation and maintenance of the project
prepared by the Contractor.
7. Shall together with the Contractor and other required representatives hold site meetings at
intervals deemed necessary, generally to be chaired by Contractor.
8. Shall review on the completion of the project all final certificates relative to the project issued
by the Independent Certifier all relevant Government and Municipal authorities.
7.0 COMPANY DESIGN CONSULTANT RESPONSIBILITIES
1. Shall answer any technical queries raised by the Main Contractor, protocol of raising queries
will be agreed between the parties.
2. Shall provide clarification on any discrepancy between drawings and specifications.
3. Shall review and approve any alternative materials proposed by the Contractor.
8.0 COMPANY RESPONSIBILITIES
1. Company Project Manager shall provide overall project management, site representation,
coordination of the project for the Company, and will have the authority to act on behalf of the
Company in making decisions on technical, schedule inputs and technical approvals.
2. Company shall issue contract and ensure that the Contractor adheres to it.
3. Company shall continually monitor HSE and shall provide site representation and liaise with all
parties to ensure Company rules are adhered to.
4. Company shall ensure all approved payment requests are duly paid to Contractor in accordance
with the terms of the Contract.
9.0 SITE LOCATION PLAN
Please see following page.

10.0 CORRESPONDENCES
The Contractor shall agree and adopt the required letter format, references and procedures to be
employed during the course of the works.
All Contractors’ correspondence shall be addressed to the Company Representative and copied to:
All mail shall be delivered by the Contractor to the Company Representative .
11.0 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
All the Contractor`s requests for information shall be issued to the Company Representative
12.0 TRANSMITTAL/SUBMISSIONS
Within 20 working days of signing the Contract but before commencement of the Works the
Contractor shall provide a Submittal Schedule to the Company Representative, for review and
approval.
Prior to the commencement of the appropriate sections of the Works, the Contractor shall submit
for approval details of the proposed materials, sources of all materials, and place of manufacture
together with full documentary evidence that the materials and manufacture comply with the
Specification.
Further submissions shall be made for any change of material quality or source and the Company
Representative ’s approval obtained before the new materials or place of manufacture are used in
the Works.
The Contractor is to provide an electronic copy of all information submitted followed by 2no
paper copies for use by:-
Company Representative (2 no. sets)
Separate codes and sequential numbers are to be used for:-
SD - Shop Drawings and Schedules

MAR - Material Approval Request, i.e. samples
TS - Technical Submission
CA - Catalogues and Product Data
AB - As Built Drawings
PR - Programmes
CV - Certificate/Verification for performance
IT - Inspection and Test Results
OM - O & M Manual
MQ - Mock up and Quality Control Panels
MS - Method Statement
OT - Other
The transmittal type will be preceded by TP NEW OFFICE BUILDING FACILITY and followed
by the sequential number.
The documents shall also contain the following information:-
 Unique reference number

 Title
 Drawing size/scale (scales and dimensions to be using the metric system)
 Document description/content

 Contract package code
 Contractor’s Name (and sub-contractor’s name, if appropriate)
 First submission date (ddmmyyyy)
 Requested review return date (ddmmyyyy)
 Status
 Order and delivery status for main plant/equipment
The Contractor shall review submittals prior to submission to the Company Representative. The
review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, and that each
submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with the requirements of the Works and the Contract
Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to the specific package and/or
area of the Works will be returned without being examined and shall be considered rejected.
The Company Representative will reject submittals that are made informally or in the incorrect
format.
Submittal Status Regime
All submittal types will be returned with a status in accordance with the following regime:-
 A No objection – proceed to procurement, fabrication, installation and construction.
 B Objection with comments – proceed to procurement, fabrication, installation and

construction incorporating the Company Representative s comments.
 C Objection - Contractor to re-submit for approval following incorporation of the Company

Representative s comments prior to proceeding with the Works.
Submittal Return Periods
The Contractor is to allow in the programming of the Works for the Company Representative ’s
Time for Review of generally 3 working days.
These durations will commence from the date of receipt by, and the date of issue by, the Company
Representative .
Dating of documents
Documents will be received by the Company Representative between the following hours:
Sun - Thurs 0600 - 15:30 hours
Documents received during these times will be stamped with the date they are received.
Documents received outside of these times will be stamped with the date of the next Working
Day.
Drawings
Drawings Provided to the Contractor
The Contractor shall check and verify all Drawings, Specifications and Bills of Quantities and
shall officially comment thereon in adequate time before commencement of the work to which
they said Drawings, Specifications or Bills of Quantities relate.

The management of drawing files, set ups and confirmation of accuracy of these against hard
copies will be the Contractor’s responsibility.
Only Drawings stamped “FOR CONSTRUCTION” should be used by the Contractor for
construction purposes.
The Company Representative shall ensure that all documents are appropriately stamped.
Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Composite Coordination Drawings
Shop drawings are defined as drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for
the work by the Contractor or his subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers or distributors to
illustrate some portion of the work and includes fabrication, erection, layout, setting out drawings,
manufacturers standard drawings, schedules, descriptive literature, illustrations catalogues,
brochures, performance and test data, wiring and control diagrams and other drawings and
descriptive data pertaining to materials equipment, piping ducting and conducting systems as
requested to show that the materials, equipment or systems and position there to conform to the
Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and / or further development of all working
drawings, including construction detail drawings and shop drawings, including those of the
intended specialist supply and as particularly detailed in the Specifications. These details shall be
prepared where possible after Site dimensions have been taken or ascertained and the fabrication
shall not be commenced until such drawings have been submitted to the Company Representative
and has written approval obtained.
Where the Contract Documents require the Contractor to be responsible for the design he shall
prepare all drawings and specifications which shall be reviewed and approved by the Company
Representative .
The Company Representative`s approval of such specifications or drawings prepared by the

Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for accuracy and completeness
of the drawings, specifications and material and equipment details or for the proper planning and
coordination of all elements of the Works.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all submissions are complete and correct in
every way and no claim whatsoever will be considered for the delay in the processing of approvals
due to incomplete and / or incorrect submissions.
The term “manufactured” as used in the Contract applies to standard units usually mass-produced.
The term “fabricated” as used in the Contract means items specifically assembled or made out of
selected materials to meet individual design requirements.
Shop drawings shall establish actual detail of all manufactured or fabricated items, indicate proper
relation to adjoining work, amplify design details of mechanical and electrical installations in
proper relation to physical spaces in the structure and incorporate minor changes of design or
construction to suit actual conditions.
Product Data is defined as illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions,

brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a material
product or system for some portion of the work.
Samples are defined as physical examples submitted by the Contractor, which illustrate materials,
equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which work will be judged. In the event of
written objection by the Company Representative to a particular material, the Contractor shall
submit within 7 days of such objection, samples of 3 alternative materials for the Company
Representative ’s approval and the Company Representative shall reject or approve all or any of

these materials within the period provided for under the Construction Contract. The procedure
shall be repeated until such time as a sample of material is approved by the Company
Representative . All samples are supplied to the Company Representative at the Contractor’s cost
and shall be retained on Site until such time as the Company Representative instructs their
removal. The removal of and disposal of samples is at the Contractor’s cost.
The Contractor shall review approve and submit, with reasonable promptness and in such
sequence as to cause no delay in the work of the Company, all Shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples required by the Contract Documents.
By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples the Contractor represents
that he has determined and verified all materials, field measurements and field construction criteria
related thereto, or will do so and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained
within such submittals with the requirements of the work and of the Contract and Contract
Documents.
Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by a design
professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional`s written approval when submitted
to the Company Representative . The Company Representative shall be entitled to rely on the
adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by
such design professionals.
The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria
required by the Contractor to be designed by the Contractor or on Contractor`s behalf.
The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of
the Contract Documents by the Company Representative ’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product
Data and Samples and unless the Contractor has specifically informed the
Company Representative in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and Company
Representative has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be
relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples
by the Company Representative s consent thereof.
The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, to revisions other than those requested by the Company Representative on
previous submittals.
No portion of work requiring submission of a Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and shall
commence until the submittal has been approved by the Company Representative . All such
portions of work shall be in accordance with approved submittals.
Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The
purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals
are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to
the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.
By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the
Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field
measurements and field construction criteria thereto, or will do so, and has checked and
coordinated the information the information contained within such submittals with the
requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.
Door Hardware Contractor Submittals
i) The Hardware Contractor shall submit the following:

Finish Hardware schedule in vertical format.
ii) Hardware Schedule:
Organize hardware schedule into Hardware Sets indicating complete designations of

every item required for each door or opening.
Include the following information:
 Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item.

 Manufacturer and name of item.
 Manufacturer's template numbers for each item.
 Fastenings and other pertinent data.
 Location of hardware set cross-referenced to floor plan drawings and door and frame
schedule.
 Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule.
 Mounting locations for hardware.
 Door and frame sizes and materials.
 Keying information.
iii) Keying Schedule:
Submit a separate detailed keying schedule as agreed with Company Representative.
Contractor’s Responsibilities
All drawings prepared by the Contractor, at his own cost, shall be submitted to the Company
Representative . The Company Representative shall check the drawings in a reasonable time and
stamp them with the appropriate status. The drawings shall then be returned to the Contractor.
This shall be the only accepted and contractual method. Such approval shall not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for any discrepancies, errors or omissions in their submittals.
The Contractor shall include, in the Project Schedule, a detailed programme for the production for
the drawings and information. The programme shall be subject to the consent of the Company
Representative and must be compatible with the programme for the Works and shall include the
following in details:
 Dates of which the Contractor shall commence the drawings

 Dates on which the Contractor shall submit the drawings to the Company Representative
 Period for the Company Representative to check and approve drawings
 Date of commencement of the relevant work on the Site
 Any other information the Company Representative may request
All drawings by the Contractor shall be prepared in a clear and proper manner, with adequate
lettering size so that the drawings will be easily legible even when reproduced in a reduced scale.
They shall be drawn in black on a white background to facilitate printing bearing at the bottom
right corners the approved Contractor reference, title block and number.
All drawings by the Contractor shall be oriented to match the design drawings and shall have a
key plan identifying the location or area of the Works to which they apply. They shall also bear
indication and make reference to the geographic coordinates of the Site.
When a drawing is revised the particulars of the current revision shall be clearly marked or
clouded, to facilitate checking. All prior revision numbers and references of drawings possibly
superseded by the current issue shall also be clearly shown.

When drawings are submitted for approval without complying with these requirements, they will
be rejected.
Re-submission of drawings not approved shall be made using the same procedures as in the
original submission.
The Contractor shall ensure that drawings etc, submitted for approval are forwarded in sufficient
and reasonable time prior to the date required for approval to permit amendments to be made.
If the Company Representative should instruct the Contractor to alter, amend or re-draw any of
the drawings, which in his opinion are not satisfactory, no claim for reimbursement will be
considered. The Contractor is to comply with this requirement immediately as no claim for
additional payment or an extension of time to complete the Works will be allowed for any reason
whatsoever.
As Built Drawings
The Contractor shall provide to the Company Representative at the time for Completion of the
Works all “As Built Drawings” to the approval of the Company Representative .
These drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Company Representative.
13.0 PROGRAMME
General
The established and continual monitoring of a detailed, Critical Path Method (CPM) programme is
essential for the management of the Works. The Contractor shall be required to provide a detailed
CPM programme establishing the key dates and completion dates for the various sections of the
Works. The programme shall be managed by a competent Planning Co-ordinator.
Programme
The Contractor shall submit the Programme to the Company Representative in accordance with
the Contract.
The schedule should conform to the proposed method statement and must have all activities to
sequence the proposed method of work. In case that the method of works will have to be revised,
the corresponding schedule must also be revised accordingly and re-submitted.
Being in line with the proposed method of work, the schedule must be organised in such a way
that activities must be grouped under the physical location/area/floor/space/section/phase/stage of
each work discipline.
Activities must be identified as detailed a manner as possible so as to minimise SS (start-to-start),

FF (finish-to-finish) and SF (start-to-finish) relationships as much as possible, assuming that
increasing the number of FS (finish-to-start) relationships between the activities is the best way to
define the discretionary constraints.
Some specific guidelines on how to detail the programme of the Works are given as follows:
Activity Duration: Define work activities (other than procurement activities) so that they
are no longer than 30 (thirty) days, with not more than 5% exceeding this limit. However,
the level of detailing and maximum activity duration shall be in all cases be approved by
the Company Representative .

Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and
major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.
Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,
purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and re-submittal times of "shop/working

drawings, design and other technical submissions” in the schedule. Coordinate submittal
review times in the programme, in accordance with the Submittals Schedule.
Initial completion in preparation for Taking-Over by Employer: Indicate initial

completion in advance of date established for Completion, and allow time for Company
Representative 's administrative procedures necessary for issuance of Taking-Over
Certificate.
Utilisation of a narrative report facilitates justifying the validity of schedules since some details
such as the information mentioned in the next line item are generally not possible to indicate on
the schedule itself.
Contractual and discretionary milestones must be indicated.
All activities within the contract scope from the date of the contract agreement through the
acceptance of the works must be defined with explicit activity names under well organised activity
groups/work packages. All deliverables to be subcontracted to third parties (i.e. sub-contractors)
must also be indicated by including their own procurement activities as well. All procurement
activities (on-site and off-site) like tender documentation, tendering, procurement approval,
ordering ,producing shop drawings, fabrication, transportation and delivery to site must be
indicated.
Realistic task durations must be calculated by utilising the quantity of work, resource productivity
assumptions, resource allocations and resource calendars, and be documented and reported to the
Company Representative.
The time limits within which the submission and approval by the Company Representative of any
drawings, specifications or other submissions produced by the Contractor as the case may be are
required.
The dates by which the Company Representative is required to supply all drawings and
information with respect to each activity or group of activities.
The following scheduling aspects and activity attributes should be set up and reported where
applicable.
 Open ends,
 Hard Logic Constraints (mandatory),
 Soft Logic Constraints (discretionary),
 External Constraints (if any),
 Logical links and external dependencies,
 Work sequence (predecessors and successors),
 Lags,
 Total floats,
 Early and late start dates,
 Early and late finish dates.
 Critical path method where total float is less than or equal to 10 days (in order to show the
nearly critical activities as critical).

After the contract baseline is approved by the Company Representative, it is to be saved and the
project progress is monitored, controlled and reported against it.
The Company Representative shall within 10 days return the Programme to the Contractor with
comments.
Within 5 days of receipt of the Company Representative’s comments on the programme, the
Contractor shall submit a revised conforming programme to the Company Representative for his
consent. Upon receipt of the Company Representative’s consent, this programme will formally be
known as the Programme’, the basis against which the Works progress will be measured.
Programmes, commentaries and recommendations are to be submitted for review and comment by
the Company Representative as follows:-
The Contractor shall submit with the Contractor’s Monthly Report a progressed Programme to
show progress against the baseline and highlighting any delays, measured against the baseline
programme and details of mitigation measures taken. The Contractor shall also show labour
resource and plant resource within the monthly report.
The Contractor shall submit, with the Contractor’s Monthly Report, recommendations for
maintaining the Contract on programme including any associated costs.
The Company Representative may request that the Contractor submit weekly reports for sections
of the Works where the Company Representative considers such sections of work crucial to the
overall progress of the Works.
The Contractor shall submit to the Company Representative for his review all Contractor and
Subcontractor procurement, manufacturing, fabrication and delivery programmes.
As Prime Cost or Provisional Sum suppliers and/or subcontractors are progressively engaged, the
Contractor is to update the progressed programme to reflect the dates agreed with the suppliers
and/or subcontractors. Amendments are not to be made to the ‘Four Seasons Hotel Bahrain
Clause 14 Programme” baseline’ unless instructed by the Company Representative .
Failure to include any element of the Works required for the performance of the Contract shall not
excuse the Contractor from completing all work required within any applicable completion date of
each phase or the whole of the Project, notwithstanding the Company Representative 's approval
of the Construction Schedule.
For any proposed Variations the Contractor shall prepare a time-impact analysis to demonstrate
the effect of the proposed change on the Programme.
Programme Content
All submissions of programmes by the Contractor to the Company Representative for review,
shall conform to the following:
Each and every schedule should be submitted in two hard copies as well as in the original
electronic soft copy. Hard copies should be printed on pages having sizes that the schedule
timescale can fit into conveniently. Electronic copy could be either burnt on a CD or sent via e-
mail.
One hard colour copy of each schedule as described hereinafter;
Each page of each schedules shall contain:

 A clear descriptive title;
 A comprehensive nomenclature;
 A table indicating programme number, the data date and printing date;
 A page number indicating the total pages in the set;
 An electronic copy in PDF format.
The Company Representative shall review or return each submission to the Contractor with
comments detailing any required amendments.
Prefabrication
Where the Specification allows, the Contractor is encouraged to use prefabricated solutions for
many items of work that offer the advantage of “just in time” delivery.
14.0 COMMISSIONING PROGRAMME
The Contractor is required to submit detailed system commissioning programmes for approval by
the Company Representative prior to the commencement of the commission of any part of the
Works.
These programmes are to allow not only for MEP items, but also for the commissioning of the
building overall, the interaction and coordination of the various finishes and completion activities,
testing of interface and interaction of all fixtures, fittings and equipment.
These programmes are to be supported by an overall commissioning strategy supplemented by

detailed system commissioning method statements.
The commissioning regime shall be based on “cause and effect” strategy.
The commissioning programmes must allow for the input and involvement of the Employer and
Operator of each defined system.
Staff Training
Within the commissioning programme the Contractor is to include a series of staff training and
demonstration activities for the benefit of the Company. The staff training is to be incorporated in
the Works prior to occupancy.
The Contractor shall issue a detailed training schedule prior to the completion date for approval by
the Company Representative.
The staff training shall cover the general operation and maintenance of the materials, plant and
equipment.
The Contractor is to allow selected Company’s employees to attend the commissioning, testing,
calibration and handover sequences for the plant and equipment to permit familiarisation of the
operation, servicing and maintenance of the plant and equipment installed during the
commissioning of the Works.
15.0 PROGRESS MANAGEMENT
Project Meetings
The Company Representative and the Contractor shall schedule and administer the following
project meetings throughout the progress of the Works. Prepare agenda, conduct meetings, record

meeting results, and distribute recorded proceedings and decisions to participants and other
affected parties. Project meetings, include, but are not limited to, the following:
 Contractor’s Pre-Construction / Installation Meetings

 Progress Meetings
 Coordination Meetings
 Special/Other Meetings
Contractor’s Pre-Construction / Installation Meeting
The Contractor shall conduct pre-construction / installation meetings at the Site, when specifically
requested to by the Company Representative or as required by the Specification. The Contractor
shall prepare the agenda in each case and distribute the minutes.
Attendees: The installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators Involved or affected
by the installation and other representatives whose product or installations are, or will be
fundamentally linked to the installation. The Project Manager and Company Representative will
attend.
The meeting shall review the preparation for the particular activity under consideration at the
preconstruction / installation meeting, including requirements for the following:
Contract Documents
Options
Purchases
Deliveries
Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Quality Control samples
Review of mock-ups
Possible conflicts
Compatibility problems
Time schedules
Manufacturer's recommendations
Warranty requirements
Compatibility of materials
Acceptability of substrates
Temporary facilities
Space and access limitations
Safety
Inspecting and testing requirements
Performance results
Recording requirements
Protection
The meeting shall record significant discussions and agreements. The Contractor shall distribute
within four (4) working days, the record of the meeting to all parties concerned.
Regularly Scheduled - Weekly and Monthly Progress Meetings
Notification: The Company Representative will set dates and times for the regularly scheduled
progress meetings it is anticipated that these will be on a weekly and monthly basis with the
weekly meeting having a more specific but reduced agenda and the monthly meeting covering
more project related items. For any meetings not regularly scheduled, the Company Representative
shall give participants as much prior notice as is reasonably practical, depending upon
circumstances.
Attendees: All relevant parties and those attending the meeting shall each be represented by

persons familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Works.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other
items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the
current status of the project. Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including
review of the present and future needs of each entity present and such topics as:
 The Programme: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity
is in relation to the Programme, whether on time or ahead or behind programme.
Determine how construction behind programme will be expedited; secure commitments
from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether programme revisions are required to
ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Time for
Completion.
 Critical Work sequencing and interface requirements:
 Health Safety and Environmental Issue.
 Quality and Work standards.
 Variations.
 Insurances,
 Certificates and Payments.
 Utilities & Services,
 Status of Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and any
 other Technical Submissions.
 Material, Product Deliveries and any off-site fabrication.
 Early Warnings.
 Company Representative ’s Instructions and Requests for Information (RFI's).
 Security.
 Housekeeping.
 Working hours.
Reporting
The Contractor will in as short a time scale as is reasonably practicable following the meeting
distribute copies of minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties who should
have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous
meeting and report.
Pre-Meeting Submittals
Three (3) days before each meeting, the Contractor must, in hard copy and two back-up copies on
Compact Discs, submit the information as required by the Company Representative including but
not limited to:
 List of completed activities.

 List of current activities, with an estimate of time required for completion.
 List of any variations in starting dates and duration of outstanding
 Activities from planned dates and times for the reporting period.
 Actual percentage completion in every main activity.
 List of main activities that the Contractor plans to start during the
 following period.
 Other information required by the Company Representative .
 Shop drawings submittals status log.
 Contractor's submittals status log.
 Material procurement status log.
 Health Safety and Environmental Report and Issues

Coordination Meetings
The Contractor will be required to conduct project coordination meetings at regularly scheduled
times convenient for parties involved. These meetings are intended to be an element of the
Contractor’s management of the Works; however, the Company Representative will, at his
discretion, attend any coordination meeting. The Company Representative may schedule separate
coordination meetings if he considers it necessary and the Contractor will be required to attend
any such meeting. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other
purposes, such as regular progress meetings and special pre-installation or pre-construction
meetings.
There shall be a representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in the
coordination or planning for the construction activities involved.
In as short a time scale as is reasonably practicable following the meeting distribute copies of
minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties who should have been present.
Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. It is
expected that attendees will maintain sufficient notes during the meeting such that action is upon
issues discussed will not depend upon receipt of the minutes from that meeting
Special/Other Meetings
Special meetings may be called as required, at a place and time as mutually agreed by the
Contractor, the Employer and/or the Company Representative .
The Contractor will be required to attend Progress Meetings with the Company Representative to
report the progress of the design. Procurement and construction works. The agenda shall include:-
 Health, Environment and Safety

 Design information required
 Procurement Status
 Approval of Submittals
 Progress of Works
 Co-ordination Issues
 Programme Review
 Mitigation of Delays
 Variations
 Payments
 Quality Control
 Contractor’s Monthly Report
The Contractor shall prepare monthly progress reports in the form required by the Company
Representative and shall submit the same to the Company Representative , electronically.
The first report shall cover the period up to the end of the first calendar month following the
Commencement Date.
Reports shall be submitted monthly thereafter. The Contractor’s Monthly Report is to be issued to
the Company Representative on the 25th day of each month, or if a non-Working day on the
previous working day, in the format directed by the Company Representative .
Each monthly report shall include as a minimum the information directed to be provided by the
Company Representative . The Contractor shall submit monthly reports until the Contractor has
completed all work which is known to be outstanding at the completion date stated in the Taking-
Over Certificate for the Works.

Weekly Reports
The Weekly Reports are to cover a minimum of the items below: -
 A total of the Daily Report activities for the week,

 Inspected and Approved Works,
 Safety Inspections and outcome,
 Meetings held and outcome,
 Any Quality Control issues,
 Weekly Safety Tool Box Meetings
 Material Submitted and approved within the week,
 Update of the two week look ahead programme,
 Critical Activities and Information Required.
Progress Photographs
The Contractor shall provide and record digital colour progress photographs, taken as and when
directed by the Company Representative and in any case at intervals of not less than one month.
Sufficient photographs shall be taken in locations to properly record the progress of the Works and
the quality of the materials and workmanship. One proof copy of each shall be supplied to the
Company Representative. Each monthly set of progress photographs shall be accompanied by an
A4 size plan(s) of the Site indicating the locations and directions in which the photographs were
taken.
Eight of the photographs shall be taken from the same locations each month. These locations are
to be agreed with the Company Representative and three of which are to be an elevated vantage
position.
The photographs are to be titled by the Contractor in accordance with the Company
Representative's instructions and dated and recorded both by the Contractor and the Company
Representative's as to agreement of the date on which they were taken and their location. The
Contractor shall also affix a typed label giving the approved title and number to the photograph.
Copies shall be supplied to the Company Representative 's within 7 days of the photographs being
taken.
The Contractor shall arrange for progress photographs to be taken of each area where works are
ongoing, by a competent photographer each month and these shall be incorporated into the
Contractor’s Monthly Report.
The Contractor shall agree with the Company Representative 4no (four) locations external to the
Site from which record photographs will be taken each month.
In addition, the Contractor shall take other photographs that will support or illustrate the points
described in the summary of the progress of the Works.
All photographs are to be made available to the Company in CD format as well as contained
within the Contractor’s Monthly Report.
Progress Drawings
The Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s cost, maintain a detailed set of progress drawings,
marked up to indicate, by trade and by section, progress of the Works. These drawings shall be
copied and issued monthly to the Company Representative .

The Contractor shall maintain a proof set of the progress drawings on the wall in a public place
within the Contractor’s site offices. These drawings will be available for inspection by the
Company Representative at any time.
16.0 COST MANAGEMENT
Cost Reporting
The Contractor shall prepare and issue a monthly cost report, the summary sections of which will
be appended to the Contractor’s Monthly Report. The output shall indicate:
 An Executive Summary
 The current planned cost of the project
 A schedule of changes to the planned cost since the last staged approval including but not limited
to Order Placements, Approved Change, Pending Change and Company Representative’s
instructions
 Early Warnings for future cost risk
 Expenditure to date
 Cash flow
 Status of Insurance, Bond and Guarantees
 Claims schedule costed to indicate cost risk, Contractor’s submissions and agreed claim
settlements
Change Management Process
In the event of drawing changes, specification changes or changes from other sources the
Contractor is not entitled to a variation to cost unless the change has been accompanied by an
Company Representative s Instruction.
No instruction given on the Site by any party, including the Company Representative is valid
unless it is supported by an Company Representative’s Instruction.
All instructions to the Contractor are to be issued through email and hard copy, signed by the
Company Representative to be valid.
Change Management Documentation
The documents identified below form the mainstay of the Change Management process
Request for Change (RFC)
The RFC constitutes the Variation Submission.
The RFC is the starting point for introducing any change to the Project. It can be raised by the
Contractor or the Company Representative.
The RFC identifies:-

 The originator.
 Subject matter of the RFC
 The reason for the change
 And the elements of the project that may be affected.
On confirmation of acceptance by the Employer that an RFC has been accepted the Company
Representative will draft the Company Representative ’s Instruction with the assistance of the
Project Manager and Quantity Surveyor in Primavera Contract Manager, which on issue will be
signed by the Company Representative .

Company Representative’s Instruction (CRI).
The CRI form is the only recognised form of Company Representative’s.
The CRI will detail:-

 The Change
 The timing of implementation of the change
 Resources to be employed (where applicable to do so)
Agreed Value of Instruction (AVI)
The AVI process is administered by the Company Representative.
 Once an CRI has been issued to the Contractor the Company Representative shall endeavour
to work with the Contractor to obtain the cost and time impact of the change.
 The Contractor shall report monthly on the progress of every CRI and AVI.
 Under no circumstances are CRI’s to be allowed to accumulate for final accounts. AVIs
should be agreed on a monthly basis and within a maximum of 28 days from issue of the CRI.
Change Management Register
A “live” register detailing the current status of each step of the Change Management Procedure
will be maintained by the Contractor and will be reported on within the Contractor’s Monthly
Report.
Cash Flow Forecasts
The Contractor shall within fourteen (14) days of the Commencement Date issue a cash flow for
the full Contract Price. The cash flow shall include:-
 Forecast expenditure in line with the programme broken down by bill item and by sub-
contract, unless agreed otherwise between the Company Representative and the Contractor.
 All provisional sums
 Where broken out separately, over head costs and profits.
Interim and Final Payments
The Quantity Surveyor will be responsible for agreeing with the Contractor the specific format and
timing of applications for payment.
Within seven (7) days of issue of the Company Representative `s Certificate, the Contractor is
required to submit an original invoice for the value of the Company Representative’s Certificate.
Cost Meetings
To facilitate the cost certainty of the Works the Contractor will be required to attend cost meetings
with the Company Representative. The cost meetings will be held monthly. The minuted meeting
will review:
 Contract Price
 Status of Variation Account
 Status of Payment Account
 Commercial Issues
 Company Representative ’s Instructions Required (EI’s)
 Statement of Final Account

Cost Management Resource
The Contractor is to provide adequate Cost Management (CM) resources as part of his resource
teams to satisfy the requirements of the Contract.
This resource is to be adjusted during the course of the Contract to meet the demands of the
variation account.
Details of potential variations may be issued to the Contractor and he shall provide assistance in
estimating the cost and programme impact. The intention will be to agree in advance, where
possible, the impact on the Contract, if any, of a variation prior to its issue as an instruction.
17.0 PLANT
Bringing to site and removing from site all plant required
Notwithstanding the provisions of the Method of Measurement, items have not been included
within each Section of the Bill of Quantities for bringing to site and removing from site all plant
required for such Section.
The Contractor is to include here for the cost of bringing to and removing from site all plant
required for the following sections of the work:
 Excavation and earthwork

 Piling
 Concrete Work
 Brickwork and Blockwork
 Masonry
 Roofing
 Structural Steelwork
 Plumbing and Mechanical Engineering Installations
 Electrical Installations
 Floor Walling and Ceiling Finishings
 Drainage
Maintaining on site all plant required
Notwithstanding the provisions of the Method of Measurement, items have not been included
within each Section of the Bill of Quantities for maintaining on site all plant required for such
Section.
The Contractor is to include here for the cost of bringing to and removing from site all plant
required for the following sections of the work:
 Excavation and earthwork

 Piling
 Concrete Work
 Brickwork and Blockwork
 Masonry
 Roofing
 Structural Steelwork
 Plumbing and Mechanical Engineering Installations
 Electrical Installations
 Floor Walling and Ceiling Finishings

 Drainage
18.0 QUALITY CONTROL AND METHOD STATEMENTS
Quality Assurance
The Contractor, will be required to have an approved and certified quality management and
assurance scheme in operation.
The quality assurance scheme shall be ISO 9002 or other equally internationally recognised
scheme approved by the Company Representative.
Materials shall be obtained from supplier’s operating systems in accordance with either ISO 9002
or an in-house system approved by the Company Representative.
Quality Plan
The Contractor will be required to submit a Quality plan within fourteen (14) of contract signing.
The Quality Plan shall be structured to include the following provisions to be implemented during
the Contract:-
Organisation
 Company quality policy statement;
 Director responsible
 Organisation, resources and responsibilities;
 Resident Quality Manager;
 Accreditation
 Record keeping & audit trail
 Bonds & Warranties
 Cost Control
 Employers aspirations
 Employer operational requirements
Procedures
 Company Quality Manual & Procedures
 Contract documentation
 Control of contractors works
 Procurement and manufacturers
 Provision of stage quality checklists
 Off site quality management
 Information management
 Method statements
 Inspections and test equipment
 Workmanship
 Training
 Corrective action procedures
 Maintenance of records
 Maintenance of Test Certificates
 Handover procedures
Quality Manager
The Contractor is to have a suitably qualified Quality Manager to manage the various quality
issues on site and to ensure that all samples, mock-ups and job standards are provided in a timely
manner for the Engineer’s inspection.

Samples/Mock-ups/Job Standards
Where required by the Contract documents, the Contractor shall submit control samples of
products and materials, sections, components and finishes, indicating colour, gloss, pattern, texture
and the like.
The Contractor shall label or mark each sample stating the product name, manufacturer’s reference
number, name of colour, contact details and date, and cross reference to transmittal number.
In addition to these the Contractor is to provide a first in-place installation for each element of the
Works for the approval of the Company Representative prior to the bulk installation of any part of
the Works. The first in-place installation will form part of the permanent works if approved by the
Engineer.
The Contractor is required to obtain the Company Representative’s formal sign-off for all first in-
place installations prior to proceeding with the remaining installation of that element.
Samples, if approved by the Company Representative, will be the minimum standard
Costs of any tests as required in the specifications and scheduled in the Contract documents are to
be borne by the Contractor.
Operation and Maintenance Manual
The Contractor is to review with the supplier of each and every product included in the Permanent
Works and include in all material submissions the recommended:-
 Cleaning method
 Cleaning agents and detergents etc.
 Frequency of cleaning
 Frequency of regular plant, equipment system servicing
 Manufacturers recommended list of consumable parts and equipment
The Contractors Quality Manager will be responsible for capturing all such approvals and
inserting these documents into the operation and maintenance Manual.
Method Statements
The Contractor shall submit detailed method statements describing how the Works are to be,
procured, constructed and completed.
The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications to ascertain the specific requirements for
each element of the Works.
Within fourteen (14) days of the Commencement Date the Contractor shall submit and present to
the the General Method Statement to the Company Representative, describing how each Phase of
the Works is to be, procured, constructed, commissioned and handed over.
The General Method Statement is to be supplemented during the duration of the Contract by
detailed method statements that described how key works are to be undertaken.
In addition to the above all hazardous work activities are to be described by the issue of detailed
method statement with hazard analysis/risk assessment/job safety analysis.
All method statements are to be issued to the Company Representative for his approval.

Each method statement shall be structured and prepared by the Contractor in the following
format:-
 Scope of Works
 Access/Egress
 Lighting
Safety
Task
 Plant and Equipment
General
Plant and Equipment Schedule
Personal Protective Equipment
Power
Working Platforms
 Materials
 Sequence / method of work
 Programme
 Resource / Labour
 Risks and Controls
Hazards/Risks
Control Measures/Permits
3rd Party Protection
 Environmental Considerations
Technical Information
 Emergency Arrangements
General
Fire Precautions
Communication
 Training
 Supervision
 Working Hours
 Housekeeping
 Other Information
In addition to the above the Contractor shall amplify the provisions of the method statements with
layout drawings, Site Location Plan, design drawings, sequence drawings, craneage plans and
traffic management.
If any part of the Contractor’s work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of other
contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Company Representative any
defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. His failure to
inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other contractor’s work, except as to
defects, which may develop in the other contractor’s work after its execution.
To ensure the proper execution of his subsequent work the Contractor shall measure work already
in place and shall at once report to the Engineer any discrepancy between executed work and the
drawings.
Independent Test House
The Contractor shall arrange for the testing of all materials when specified in the Specifications at
an independent certified testing authority approved by the Company Representative, unless
otherwise agreed by the Company Representative.

Refer to the technical Specifications and consult with the Engineer for details of the materials to
be tested.
Tests and Inspections
The Contractor shall agree the dates and times of tests and inspections with the Company
Representative, seven (7) calendar days in advance, to enable the Company Representative and
other affected parties to be present. On the previous Working Day to each such test or inspection,
the Contractor is to confirm that the work is ready. In the case where the work will not be ready,
the Contractor shall agree a new date and time with the Engineer and inform all parties.
Test Certificates
The Contractor shall submit a copy of each test certificates to the Company Representative within
a time period agreed between the Contractor and the Company Representative depending on the
specifics of the tests being carried out the Contractor shall keep all the test certificates on the Site.
Inspection and Testing Costs
Wherever the inspection and testing show that the work, materials or goods are not in accordance
with the Contract, the Contractor shall bear all costs on rectification of Works which fail to
comply with the Conditions of Contract. The Contractor shall also bear all costs necessary for re-
inspecting and re-testing as necessary. Under no circumstances shall such activity be considered as
grounds for an extension of time.
Thermometers
Provide on the Site and maintain in accurate condition: -
 A maximum and minimum thermometer for measuring the atmospheric shade

temperature on the Site.
 A digital thermometer for measuring the concrete and ground temperature.
Inspections by the Company Representative
The Contractor is to provide a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours written notice to the Company
Representative for all inspections during normal working hours and forty eight (48) hours notice
for inspections to be carried out during abnormal working hours. The Contractor is to carefully
plan and co-ordinate all abnormal working hour inspections closely with the Company
Representative.
Location of Materials in the Works
The Contractor shall employ suitable systems of work that allow tracking of all batched materials
and their final location in the Works.

ATTACHMENT 1
TO
ANNEX A
SPECIFICATIONS
Attachment 1 to Annex A – Specifications A1/A-1 CO-227-2012

TATWEER PETROLEUM-BAHRAIN FIELD
DEVELOPMENT COMPANY W.L.L.
(Tatweer Petroleum)
Construction of New Office Building Facility
Contract No: CO-227-2012
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 0 ARCHITECTURAL & BUILDING WORKS

DIVISION 1 ELECTRICAL WORKS
DIVISION 2 PLUMBING & DRAINAGE
DIVISION 3 AIR CONDITIONING & MECHANICAL VENTILATION
DIVISION 4 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 230
CO-229-2012 – Attachment 1 to Annex A – Specifications
DIVISION 0 ARCHITECTURAL AND BUILDING WORKS -
INDEX TITLE
PART 1 : ROOFING
PART 2 : WALL TILES
PART 3 : WALL CLADDING
PART 4 : FLOOR TILES
PART 5 : ACOUSTIC MULTIFOLD SLIDING PARTITION
PART 6 : ARCHITECTURAL EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
PART 7 : EPOXY DUST PROOF HARDENER
PART 8 : ENTRANCE MATS
PART 9 : SKIRTING
PART 10 : CEILING
PART 11 : PAINTING AND DECORATION
PART 12 : HANDRAILS & BALUSTERS
PART 13 : DOORS
PART 14 : WINDOWS
PART 15 : ELEVATOR
PART 16 : IRON MONGERY
PART 17 : SANITARY WARE & FITTINGS
PART 18 : MIRRORS
PART 19 : PANTRY COUNTER & CABINETS
Page 2 of 230
PART 20 : INTERLOCK PAVING BLOCKS
PART 21 : PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS
PART 22 : PARTITION SYSTEM
PART 23 : LANDSCAPING
PART 24 : NAME DIRECTORY
PART 25 : ROLLER BLINDS
PART 26 : FLOOR TRIM
PART 27 : MISCELLANEOUS
PART 28 : SKYLIGHT
PART 29 : CLADDING WITH WOODEN VENEER ON WALLS / PARTITIONS
PART 30 : GYPSUM PARTITION SYSTEM
PART 31 : SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SUBMITALLS
PART 32 : TEMPORARY SCREEN NETTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

WORKS
Page 3 of 230
1.0 ROOFING:
1.1 Roof insulation and water proofing system
1) All water proofing works shall be carried out by approved water proofing specialist
contractor.
2) The insulation and complete water proofing system shall be carried out as shown on
the drawing with details of flashing etc.
3) 60mm thick 32 kg/cum extruded polystyrene insulation board shall be put on torch
applied water-proofing membrane on the whole area of the roof with 350 mm corner
dressing on 65 mm thick light weight concrete screed including Geotex separation
layer, pre-cast concrete tiles on top as indicated in the drawing.
The light weight screed shall be laid in panels to slope 1:100 towards the rain water outlet.
Expansion joints and flashing are to be provided as per the site requirement and approved
shop drawing. Contractor shall carry out water test with flooding of entire area for a minimum
of 48 hours or as detailed by the Engineer. Water proofing for wet areas shall be as shown in
the drawings.
2.0 WALL TILES:
Wall tiles shall be water-resistant porcelain tiles as specified in the Schedule of Finishes and
as approved by the Engineer. Backing mortar shall be cement sand (1:3). Wall tiles shall be up
to height as specified in the drawings. Joint spacer and corner plastic beads to be used for tile
work. Anti-fungus grouting to be used for pantry and toilet tiles. Grout material and colour to be
approved by the Engineer.
3.0 WALL CLADDING WITH WOODEN VENEER:
Wall cladding veneer shall be 1mm thick walnut design with book-match (or as per engineer’s
approval) fixed to 12mm thick MDF panels. MDF panels to be fixed to plastered and levelled
wall surface with GI channel frame-work.
4.0 FLOOR TILES:
(a) Porcelain, where specified:
Page 4 of 230
Floor tiles shall be non-slip porcelain 10mm thick, as specified in the Schedule of Finishes
and as approved by the Engineer. Floor tiles shall be laid on a cement and sand mortar in
accordance with regulations or with approved adhesive when laid on power float slab.
Necessary expansion joints shall be provided and shall be sealed with Polysulphide
sealant. For wet areas (toilets/kitchens), porcelain tiles shall be of non-slippery type. Anti-
fungus grouting to be used for pantry and toilet tiles. Grout material and colour to be
Floor tiles shall continue below cabinets. Floor tiling pattern if required shall be as per the
contractor’s design duly approved by the architect.
(b) Matt finish, where specified:
Stairs shall be with readymade bull nosing of the same type of tiles for the riser & thread
All stairs floor tiles finish shall be of non-skid type
Thread shall be w/ three grooves & bull nose
Floor tiles shall be of ‘MAX ceramica AMORE’ or approved equivalent.
Note: Side face of the stair shall be painted finish.
(c) Carpet Tile Flooring:
Provide 600x600 mm carpet tiles, seam sealers, adhesives, and other related materials
that are compatible with one another and with substrates under conditions of service and
application.
Provide self levelling compound to prepare surface to receive carpet.
.
Carpet to be of style “Variation III” by MANNINGTON or equal.
Specifications:
Construction: Enhanced Textured Loop
Face fiber: 100% Antron Lumena Type 6,6 Nylon
Dye method: solution
Page 5 of 230
Guage: 1/10 (39.37 per 10 cm)
Pile thickness: .100 inches(2.54 mm)
Tufted yarn weight: 20 oz/sq yd
Primary backing : 100% synthetic
(d) Raised Floor, where specified:
Raised floor shall be 300mm height, 600 x 600 mm & 300mm height, 400 x 600 mm
cementitious infill 35mm thick heavy duty panels (USF) and with provision for cable outlet
boxes & accessories.
Floor surface finishes:
 8mm thk.600 x 600 mm carpet tiles (Locations: Cubicle areas, offices)
 10mm thk. 600x 600 mm homogeneous ceramic tiles (Locations: corridors)
 Static dissipative (HPL) Heavy duty as per Client requirement (Locations: Server
closet, UPS rooms)
 Parquet & carpet rolls/carpet tiles (Locations: Executive Department)
Raised floor shall be 450mm height, 600mm x 600 mm & 450mm height, 400mm x
600mm cementitious infill 35mm thick heavy duty panels (USF) For Main Server room
only) with provision for cable outlet boxes & accessories
Floor surface finishes:

 Static dissipative (HPL) Heavy duty as per Client requirement
 Unitile Perforated air flow panel heavy duty (Wherever required)
Raised floor shall be of ‘UNITILE’ or approved equivalent.
(e) Marble / Granite, where specified:
 ALL GRANITE/MARBLE SHALL BE WITH STAIN PROOFING APPLIED AT THE

BACK AND SHALL COMPLY WITH THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF CP 298, BE TOP
QUALITY AND OF CONSISTENT COLOUR RANGE AND TEXTURE, FREE FROM
VOIDS, EARTH VEINS AND LAMINATION OR STRUCTURAL WEAKNESS.
The supply and fixing of marble shall be sub-contracted to a firm which has successfully
completed the works similar to the quality specified for a period of not less than 5 years
and is equipped to provide the quantity required.
Page 6 of 230
The sub-contractor/supplier shall be responsible for completing the detailing of the work
based on the drawings, this specification and other information provided, liaison with the
Engineer, Contractor and others as necessary to ensure the co-ordination.
Granite / marble shall be 20mm thick to floors, wall, skirting, risers and step guard and
30mm thick to steps as per schedule of finishes.
Granite & marble tiles for internal areas shall be fixed solid on a bed of cement and sand
(1:4) mix, minimum 50mm thick, with tight joints grouted with approved waterproof grouts.
Gypsum floor protection with adequate thickness shall be applied to the granite / marble
& subsequently cleaned off. All granite / marble flooring should be levelled, grinded,
polished and cleaned.
5.0 ACOUSTIC MULTIFOLD SLIDING PARTITION:
Acoustic sliding folding partitions are custom-built, hinged wall panels.

The moveable walls are easy to open and close, and can be locked in either the open or closed
position.
Acoustic partitions shall be mounted on floor track & top hung. (Color fin. to approval).
Pass doors design shall be vision glazed (optional).
Acoustic multifold systems shall be supplied with sound ratings from Rw35dB to 44dB.
with Class 1 and Class 0 SSF (Surface Spread of Flame) fire certification.
Type: Sliding folding partitions

Operation: Manual
Sound reduction (Rw dB): 35-45
panel width (mm): 600mm
panel height (mm): 2400mm
Acoustic multifold sliding partition shall be BEEHIVE FOLDING PARTITIONS or approved

Equivalent make
Contractor to provide sufficient Mild steel framing & bracing (Plenum space) above the top track of the
multifold sliding partition and bottom track shall be sitting on 200mm thk. Block work. Design as per
Engineer approval
Page 7 of 230
6.0 ARCHITECTURAL EXPANSION JOINT COVERS ON INTERIOR:
 Floor joint cover on screed shall be Standard duty type
GFS series – Standard duty

surface mounted joint covers incorporating a single gasket
Floor to floor cover
to floor covers
Model GFS-80 105

Joint width 20(mm)
Exposed surface 105 (mm)
Floor to wall cover
Model GFSW-80
Joint width 20(mm)
Exposed surface 62(mm)
 Floor joint cover on raised flooring shall be standard duty type
W series – Standard duty

Easy to install stainless steel
available.supplied in 3m lengths with all the necessary fastening accessories.
Floor to floor covers
Model Joint width (mm) Movement ± (mm) Stainless steel
Fixing method: Clip 15-35mm
W70 Clip 25
 Wall & ceiling joint covers shall be standard duty type
Wall or ceiling covers

Model Joint Exposed surface Movement ± (mm)
SM-100N 25 127
Corner wall or wall to ceiling covers

Model Joint Exposed surface (mm) Movement ± (mm)
SMC-100N 25 76
Page 8 of 230
Architectural expansion joint cover shall be ‘CS ALLWAY’ or approved equivalent make.
7.0 EPOXY DUST PROOF HARDENER:
Provide Epoxy dust proof hardener to the flooring as per Schedule of Finishes to the approval
of the Engineer. The material should be guaranteed for minimum of Five years against peeling
and discolorations.
8.0 ENTRANCE MATS
Entrance mats shall be of the size as described on the drawings and at the locations as
shown. It shall be recessed type, with aluminum frame with snap- in corner locks.
Treads infill shall be vinyl, of the colour approved by the engineer, mounted on mill finished
aluminum T-section rails with vinyl support cushions.
9.0 SKIRTING:
(a) Where specified, provide 10mm (thick) x 100mm (high) porcelain tiles of approved colour
with round pencil edge.
(b) Where specified, provide 1mm thick x 100mm high stainless steel skirting (grade-304),
brush finish, fixed on wooden plywood.
(c) Where specified, provide 20mm x 100mm MDF skirting with moulding on top edge.
Moulding design to be approved by the Engineer.
10.0 CEILING:
Ceiling finish shall be as specified in Schedule of Finishes. All toilets and wet areas shall be
provided with moisture resistant material. The suspension system for complete ceiling shall be
designed to provide proper supports for the ceiling and associated light fittings, grill and
diffusers and other Electro-mechanical fittings and fixtures. The Contractor shall provide mock
up sample as directed by Engineer for approval.
a. Decorative gypsum board ceiling :

Plain gypsum board ceiling, with 50 mm shadow gaps at the edges. 12.5 mm thick
gypsum board, 1 hr fire rated, on G.I. metal frame, including skimming, priming and
painting. Access panels shall be with concealed frames as required. Design to be
b. Moisture resistant grid ceiling for wet areas :

600 mm x 600 mm, Moisture Resistant vinyl faced tiles installed into 24mm galvanized
Page 9 of 230
steel concealed grid suspension systems.
 All block work & drywall partitions shall be terminated below beam/slab with false
ceiling to be plastered and painted.
 All drywalls & ceilings along corridors, staircase 1 areas shall be 16mm. Thk. gypsum
boards of 1 hr. Fire rated
 All drywalls within glass panel partitions, glass & wooden doors locations shall be
13mm. Thick gypsum boards of 1 hr. Fire rated & partition extended above ceiling
shall be provided With sufficient bracing, acoustical sealant between the soffit &
partition with Rock wool insulations. Design to be approved by the Engineer
 All drywalls shall be provided with Rockwool insulations.
 All corridor wall shall be two (2) layers of 16mm thk gypsum board of 1 hr. fire rated
with rockwool insulations
11.0 PAINTING AND DECORATION:
The following BS codes shall apply to the work described in this section.
CP 231, BS 242, BS 244, BS 245, BS 280, BS 1070, BS 2521, CP 3012, BS 3698, BS 3900,
BS 4232, BS 4652, BS 5493.
a. Internal Walls, Columns, and Gypsum board works like (ceiling, wall panelling, etc)
unless otherwise specified shall be finished with one coat of Primer, 2 coats filler, 2
coats approved make silk phenomastic emulsion washable paint to be applied in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
b. External Walls, unless otherwise specified shall be finished with 2 coats exterior quality
soft acrylic textured paint.
c. 2.0m height of semi-gloss paint top coat on all corridor & staircase (colour to appvl.)
12.0 HANDRAILS & BALUSTERS:
Handrail and Balustrade for internal staircases,external ramps & steps to be 50mm Ø S.S.
pipe brush finish. Refer detail drawings.
13.0 DOORS:
Access control system to be provided for doors demarcated in architectural drawings.
All doors shall have acrylic panel door nameplates, mentioning the description of the room.
Door nameplates shall be interchangeable type.
Page 10 of 230
10.1 Wooden doors:
1. All Door frames shall be 50 mm solid oak and shall be polished. Flush doors shall
be semi-solid (50% solid), core doors internally in accordance with BS 459 part 2 or
3 as required and of the size and thickness shown on the drawings with 4mm thick
oak veneer finish and 30 mm solid oak lipping. In case of fire doors, door frames
shall be lacquer spray painted in same colour as the veneer.
2. Fire rated doors are to be provided as per Civil Defence requirements. All
emergency exit doors shall be provided with suitable ironmongery such as panic
latches etc.
10.2 Aluminium doors:
1. Doors shall be swing type, flush, sliding with provision for glass or louvered
openings (if required as per schedule) indicated on schedules.
2. Frames: Technal or similar, powder coated (color to be approved by the engineer).
3. Panels: Powder coated aluminium louvered panels (polyurethane cores of honey

comb construction).
10.3 Automatic sliding doors:
Automatic Bi-parting, single (wherever indicated in drawings) / double panel frame less
glass door as per manufacturer’s specifications.
1) Glazing: 8 mm thick clear tempered glass as shown in the drawings and door schedule
with stainless steel rails as per manufacturer’s details. Shop drawings to be submitted
by the contractor before execution for approval of the Engineer.
Standard Features:
1. Operator with cover – powder coated in standard RAL colour.
2. Photocells for presence detection (automatic reversing) – the door reverses direction if
any obstruction/ presence is detected.
3. Floor guides.
4. Activator (radar for motion sensing).
5. Programme selector switch - functions-off, exit, auto, auto partial, auto width, open,
reset.
Page 11 of 230
6. Electromechanical lock - keeps the door in closed position. Controlled by the
programme selector switch.
7. Emergency battery back-up unit - keeps the door operational during a short power
failure.
8. Electronic emergency unit (eeu) - used if a door is required to be closed or opened in

the event of a power failure.
9. Panic breakout unit (psb) - enables the door/side screens to be swung open outwards
in the event of an emergency.
10. Interlocking - used between two operators when the first operator must close before
the other one can open.
11. Mechanism for automatic sliding doors shall be submitted with sample and technical
data sheet for engineer's approval.
14.0 WINDOWS:
1. Aluminium
Technal or similar, powder coated.
2. Glazing
Double glazed (6mm glass + air gap + 6mm glass) tempered glass. External glass
shall be tinted reflective glass (shade as per approval). Internal glass shall be clear
glass. Glass should conform to BS-6262 for thickness & type in terms of wind
resistance, safety & security.
15.0 ELEVATOR:
Machine room less elevator, capacity 11 persons rated speed 1.6 m/sec.
With Side drop/ Rear drop counterweight
Car decoration :
 Car wall – Hairline Stainless Steel, colour & design as selected / approved.
 Car door (900mm width)- Stainless Steel with etching, colour & design as selected /
approved.
 Flooring – Granite as selected / approved.
 C.O.P. - Hairline Stainless Steel, colour & design as selected/approved.
Page 12 of 230
 Ceiling – Painted Steel Sheet, colour & design as selected/approved
 Landing Door (fireproof)/ Jamb/ Transom – Hairline Stainless Steel, colour & design as
selected / Approved.
 One wall opposite to the door shall be with full mirror
 2 to 4-car group control
For Service Lift shall be the same feature of finishes & specs but without mirror
 Car door (1000mm width)

 1-car selective collective
Lift shall be Mitsubishi or approved equal
16.0 IRON MONGERY:
Ironmongery will be as specified on drawings and to the approval of the Engineer.

All external doors shall be provided with the following ironmongery of IBS UK or equivalent
make.
(i.) concealed type drop weather seals

(ii.) heavy duty stainless steel bearing type hinges per door leaf
(iii.) Lever handles
(iv.) Door closer
All locks to be provided with 3 keys each. All keys shall be clearly labeled.
17.0 SANITARY WARE & FITTINGS:
Sanitary ware fittings shall be of GROHE, TWYFORD or equivalent make.
The contractor is to allow for the fixing of all items as per drawings and as per
manufacturer’s specifications.
(i.) Water closet

(ii.) Fittings & hand spray
(iii.) Wash basins and mirrors

(iv.) Soap tray
(v.) Toilet paper holder
(vi.) Wash basin with fittings
(vii.) Ablution sink with seat
(viii.) Electrical hand dryers (wherever specified in details).
Page 13 of 230
18.0 MIRRORS :
Mirror shall be 8 mm thick float glass, full silvered with protective coating from behind and
with edges beveled and shall be fixed with silicon sealant on tiles with S.S bolts.
The mirror shall be equal to the width of the vanity units or equal to the width of wash
basins where pedestal wash basins are provided or as indicated in the drawing.
19.0 PANTRY COUNTER & CABINETS:
20mm thick corian counter top w/ 200mm height backsplash and with pre-laminated board
shutter cabinets below the counter. Contractor to provide shop drawings for approval of
the consultant prior to execution at site.
20.0 INTERLOCK PAVING BLOCKS:
Concrete interlock paving blocks shall be in accordance with BS 6717 except as amended
herein. Blocks shall be rectangular, normal dimensions 200 x 100mm. Thickness of blocks
shall be 60mm pedestrian and 80mm for other areas (parking & internal roads), and shall
be laid as per pattern and design provided by the Engineer. The interlocking paving must
be enclosed within horizontal or vertical standard road kerbs and the interlock paver shall
be laid on 50mm sand laying course on 150 mm granular sub base 300 mm thk. Colour to
be approved by the Engineer.
All blocks shall have chamfered edges (5mm chamfer) in the following areas: Passages,
Pavements, External areas up to road edges and as shown in the drawings, particular
specification and schedule of finishes.
21.0 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS:
Pre cast concrete kerbs shall be hydraulically pressed kerbstone and shall comply with
BS. 340, Kerb stone shall be 150 x 250mm half battered section to form a bull-nose
shape, the transverse strength of the kerb shall not be less than 13.3KN.
22.0 PARTITION SYSTEM:
Glass Partitions with door:
Glass Partitions shall be 12mm thick tempered glass with etching film as per approved
design/pattern on SS channels and necessary satin finished SS ironmongery.
Page 14 of 230
All glass partitions with false ceiling above shall be covered with double layer gypsum and
glass wool /Rockwool insulation up to soffit of slab/beam.
23.0 LANDSCAPING:
21.1 Contractor shall allow for removal of existing soil up to depth of 500 mm and provide
agricultural soil and necessary planting material in order to provide landscaping /
ground cover as shown in the detail drawings, and as approved by the Engineer.
21.2 Contractor shall also provide the landscape area with necessary irrigation / drainage
system.
24.0 NAME DIRECTORY:
Sign made out of SS frame with coloured acrylic sheet.

Contractor to propose design for approval of client.
25.0 ROLLER BLINDS:
Automated window control system: roller blinds with 5% openness with Somfy rolling
mechanism ref. ALTUS 40RTS
Roller blinds and black out roller blinds to be of Hunter Douglas or equal make.
Technical Specifications:
YARN
Composition – Polyester 22% PVC 78%
Openness factor - approx 5%
Thickness – 0.68MM ±5%
Weight per m² - 480 g ±5%
Fire resistance - FR(USA) (NFPA 701-89 small scale testing)
Colour fastness – 6-7/8 (white colour base)
Tear Resistance – warp 11.9 daN±5%
Breaking Resistance – warp 159.0 daN±5%
UV-resistance – Min 3 (white colour base)
Page 15 of 230
Automated window control system: SC black out roller blinds with with Somfy rolling
mechanism ref. ALTUS 40RTS
Composition – 100% polyester

Weight per m² - 360gsm ± 15 (ISO 2286-2)
Thickness – 0.47 ± 0.07mm (ISO 2286-3)
Stiffness – warp 115 ± 15mm (ASTM D1388)
Breaking strength – warp 2000 ±200 N
Elongation – warp 30 ± 5% (ISO 13934-1)
Tearing resistance – warp 45 ± 5N (ASTM D2261-96)
Colour fastness to light - >4 (AATCC 16-2004)
UV protection factor – UPF: 500+
26.0 FLOOR TRIM:
a) Proprietary trim in brass finish to be provided at all junctions of carpet and parquet
& tile flooring as specified
b) SS square edge 5mm wide 30 mm deep trim to be provided wherever specified.
27.0 MISCELLANEOUS:
a) All services wood covers to receive finishing as per room planned finished by Main
Contractor. All D.B. covers, telephone, T.V., electrical pull boxes junction boxes, etc. Shall
have wooden polished or painted shutters to approval.
b) All exposed service pipes including water supply, drainage and rain water disposal under the
ceiling or along walls/ columns shall be boxed in 12mm thick marine ply and painted to
match surrounding surfaces.
28.0 SKYLIGHT:
Low-E (VE) Tempered Laminated Glass VE 3-42

1/4” (6mm) gray VE-42#2
.030” (.76mm) PVB
1/4” (6mm) clear
Performance Data
Product Code VE 3-42
Page 16 of 230
Transmittance
Visible Light 20%
Solar Energy 13%
U-V* <1%
Reflectance
Visible Light-Exterior 8%
Visible Light-Interior 10%
Solar Energy 10%
NFRC U-Value
Winter 0.97 Btu/(hr x sqft x °F)
Summer 0.88 Btu/(hr x sqft x °F)
European U-Value 5.4
Shading Coefficient 0.44
Relative Heat Gain 101 Btu/(hr x sqft)
Solar Factor (SHGC) 0.38
LSG 0.53
*Ultra-violet defined as 300 to 380 nanometers (nm)
 Tempered Laminated glass shall be of ‘VIRACON’ or approved equivalent.

 Frames: Technal or similar, powder coated (color to be approved by the engineer).
29.0 CLADDING WITH WOODEN VENEER ON WALLS/ PARTITIONS:
Wall cladding veneer shall be 1mm thick walnut design with book-match (or as per
engineer’s approval) fixed to 18mm thick MDF panels. MDF panels to be fixed to plastered
and levelled wall surface with GI channel frame-work.
30.0 GYPSUM PARTITION SYSTEM:
Structure : Inside structure shall be in galvanized steel studs.
Boards : Two layers of gypsum board, thickness 13 mm or more . Fire rated in

areas specified by local fire authorities / Civil Defense Department.
All partitions should be up to soffit of slab/ beam and with 50mm glass
wool insulation
Performances:
* Noise attenuation: ISO 717 – 1 (Europe), 44 db R’w (up to 54 dB at 2000 Hz)
* Inflammability: All materials class M0 or M1.
* Stability as per International Standards.
Page 17 of 230
31.0 SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SUBMITTALS:
Prior to the installation of any work and procurement of items, Contractor shall
submit complete shop drawings and material submittals for consultant approval.
32.0 TEMPORARY SCREEN NETTING DURING CONSTRUCTION WORKS
Suitable screen netting shall be provided during construction works to maintain neatness of
the palace premises.
Adequate fencing / screen netting shall be provided to cover and secure the entire
boundary wall during modification works.
Extent of such screening shall be done as shown on the drawing or depending on the
methodology adopted by the contractor with the approval of the client/ engineer.
Page 18 of 230
DIVISION 1 ELECTRICAL WORKS -
INDEX TITLE
PART 1 : GENERAL
PART 2 : PANEL BOARDS & DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
PART 3 : CABLES AND EARTHING
PART 4 : CONDUITS, CABLE TRAYS & TRUNKING
PART 5 : SWITCHES, ISOLATORS AND CONTACTORS
PART 6 : FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 7 : STANDBY GENERATOR SET
PART 8 : LIGHT FITTING
PART 9 : STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
PART 10 : MODULAR UPS
PART 11 : ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 12 : MATV SYSTEM
PART 13 : MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
PART 14 : TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
PART 15 : BUILDER’S WORK
Page 19 of 230
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 This particular specification relates to the supply and delivery, installation, testing,
putting into commission and maintaining for a period of 12 months of the completion of
the electrical installation as described herein and shown on drawing for the proposed
PROJECT.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORKS
The extent of the electrical installation appertaining to these works shall comprise of
preparation of detailed working drawings, supply and delivery, installation, erection and
connection of all materials and equipment shown on the drawings, and as required by
the applicable codes and best practice whether or not all such accessories are shown
on the drawings, and in accordance with this specification.
Without restricting the generality of the foregoing the electrical installation covered
under the scope of this contract shall include, but not be limited to the following:-
a. Supply, install and connect main electrical panel board including the main
cables from substation as shown on drawing and as described in specification.
b. Supply, installation and connection of sub main panel boards, distribution

boards, isolators and all required cabling for inter connection as shown on
drawings.
c. Final circuits for lighting and small power including all wiring accessories.
e. Supply, installation and final connection of all light fittings as shown on

drawing.
f. Supply and installation of all wiring accessories as shown on drawings.
g. Supply and installation of an automatic Fire Detection/Alarm System as shown

on drawing.
h. Supply and installation of a Complete Access Control System as shown on

drawings and as specified herein.
i. Supply and installation of conduits, trunking and junction boxes for Central
Antenna system as indicated on drawings and specified herein.
j. Supply and installation of the complete earthing system as per E.D.D.

Regulations.
Page 20 of 230
k. Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of structured cabling for
Voice/Data system using Cat. 6 type UTP (4 pair) cable and fibre backbone
cables including the necessary trunking, floor outlet boxes, cable trays, racks,
patch panels, patch cards etc.
l. Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of a standby Generator Set as

shown on drawing as specified herein.
m. Coordination with E.D.D. and other statutory authorities to carry out the
required inspection in order to obtain permanent power connection for the
project.
n. Preparation of working drawings.
o. Preparation of As Built drawings and maintenance and operation manuals for

review and final approval prior to formal submission.
p. Testing, commissioning and familiarisation of operations/controls, preventive

maintenance and regular service requirements of all electro-mechanical
equipment to Employer's maintenance staff.
1.3 INSPECTION
The Contractor shall carry out all the tests that may be required by and as per IEE
requirements to the Engineers satisfaction.
1.4 APPLICABLE CODES
All electrical work appertaining to the works shall be executed in strict accordance with
the last published Regulations and Standards including any revisions thereto, at the
date of execution of the works of the:
a 17th Edition Regulations for Electrical Installations of Buildings issued by the

Institution of Electrical Engineers.
b The Electricity Distribution Directorate (EDD) Regulations
c Standards of TRA for Telephone System.
d Rules and Regulations of the Fire Officers Committee (FOC) and Local Fire
Service Directorate.
1.5 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM
1) 11,000 Volts
(a) Voltages : 11 KV + 6%, 3 Phase 3 wire
Page 21 of 230
(b) Frequency : 50 Hz + 2%
(d) Fault Level : 350 MVA at 11KV
(e) Fault Duration : 3 Sec.
2) 400 Volts
The electrical supply system for this project shall be as follows:-

(a) Voltages : 400 Volts + 6%, 3 Phase 4 wire
(b) Frequency : 50 Hz + 2%
(c) Neutral : Solidly earthed
(d) Fault Level : 31 MVA at 400 Volts
(e) Fault Duration : 0.5 Sec.
Page 22 of 230
1.6 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
All electrical apparatus and equipment shall be so designed and constructed that they
operate satisfactorily and without any deterious effect for prolonged and continuous
periods in the condition as specified in EDD Regulations, Section 3, regarding ambient
temperature, humidity and altitude. All the de rating factors should be applied so that
capacity and rating of all electrical equipment is suitable for Bahrain climatic conditions.
For plant and machine rooms an ambient temperature of 55oC and relative humidity of
98% shall be assumed.
1.7 DEGREES OF PROTECTION OF ENCLOSURES (I.P)
Unless otherwise indicated specifically on drawings the following degree of protection

complying to BS 5490, IEC 529 and EDD regulation clause 307 shall be provided for
all equipment to withstand the external influences of solid bodies and water.
a. External : IP 65
b. Enclosed Room, classified

as a plant area including
mechanical or plumbing services : IP 54
c. Electrical Room, with controlled

environment for temperature,
moisture, dust and maintained as
residential and office areas. : IP 31
1.8 APPLICATION AND CO-ORDINATION WITH E.D.D.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary coordination with E.D.D. relevant
departments to submit the necessary application to E.D.D. to process the capital
contribution invoice and to obtain the E.D.D. approval of completed electrical works.
1.9 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY
The electrical drawings are generally diagrammatic and are not intended to show the
exact physical location or configuration of work except where actual dimensions are
indicated.
The specifications and tender drawings shall be read conjointly and the tenderer shall,
before submitting his tender, draw the Engineer's attention to any discrepancies,
which, in his opinion, may be unsuitable, undesirable or inconsistent with his
guarantees and responsibilities under the Contract. Verification must be obtained
before sending in the tender. No extra payment will be allowed for any extra work
caused by any discrepancy of misunderstanding.
The tender drawings are prepared essentially so that, in conjunction with the
Page 23 of 230
specification, a correct engineering interpretation may be put on the design scheme for
the works and an estimate of cost prepared.
The Employer's specification and drawings shall be interpreted in accordance with

good installation practice relevant to the circumstances.
The Contractor's responsibility will begin from EDD’s L.V. Panel Board located in EDD
substation and will consist of supply, installation, connection, testing, commissioning
and maintenance of all materials and equipment required to complete the installation
as shown on the drawings, in accordance with these specifications and in any case to
comply with I.E.E. Regulations and to be approved by the Local Authorities.
For Air-conditioning units shown on drawing the electrical contractor’s responsibility

ends up to the isolator to be provided for units.
For all other HVAC equipment, the necessary power cabling from the respective sub
main panel boards to control panels of individual equipment shall be provided by the
Electrical Contractor. Supply and installation of HVAC Control Panels shall be by the
HVAC Contractor. Cabling from control panel to equipment including the supply and
installation of local isolators/stop-lock push buttons shall be by the electrical contractor.
The final connections to equipment, control wiring, wiring for thermostats etc. shall be
the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.
1.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION AND NOTICES
Where an assemblage of switchgear is operating at a voltage in excess of 250 volts a

warning notice shall be suitably fixed immediately adjacent to the switch-gear and in a
prominent position with a legend printed in red letters on a white background stating
the maximum voltage present.
All items of electrical equipment to be installed by Contractor shall be provided with

suitable legend plastic (trafolyte) identification labels and warning notices.
Identification labels shall be constructed from 3 layers, 2 mm thick TRAFFOLYTE and

shall be securely screwed or bolted to the equipment housing. Stick on labels shall not
be used.
All warning notice labels shall be bi-lingual in Arabic and English. All lettering shall be
in block capitals standing 13 mm high and labels shall be at least 20 mm high.
For the lighting and small power systems all labels shall have a Black legend on a
White background. Distribution Panelboard title label legend characters shall be 8 mm
high. Local isolator, enclosed circuit breaker, HVAC control devices, and similar types
of equipment title and/or circuit number label legend characters shall be 6 mm high.
Circuit number identification label shall be provided against each MCB way and shall
be securely screwed to DB front cover.
Page 24 of 230
For circuit identification of switches and socket outlet plate embossed plastic labels
shall be provided to Architect’s approval.
1.11 THE SYSTEM
Power from EDD substation shall be extended to the Main LV Panel located in the
Main Electrical Room. Power shall be made available to all LV sub main panel boards
and DBs using armoured cables. Final circuits are connected from the respective DBs
installed at different location. The size and type all distribution boards and cables are
as shown on drawing.
A Standby Generator set shall also be installed as indicated. It shall feed all
emergency supply distribution boards located in the building, CCUs and UPS unit.
1.12 BALANCING OF LOADS
Care should be taken by the Contractor in connecting the various loads on the circuits
to assure that the loads are balanced as much as possible on the three phases. The
unbalanced load between phases should not exceed 12%.
1.13 SHORT CIRCUIT RATING
The whole distribution network forming part of this installation shall be capable of
carrying without permanent distortion or deterioration both 3-phase and 1-phase short
circuit fault currents that may be encountered at any part of the system.
The short circuit rating of all MCB and MCCBs shall be according to Local Authority
regulations and all the calculations supporting the proposed panel boards short circuit
ratings should be submitted by the Contractor for Engineer's approval as required at
the time of material submittal.
The selection and rating of all MCCBs through out the installation shall be so arranged
that proper discrimination is ensured during operation of these MCCBs.
1.14 ROUTING OF CABLES
The routing of all the cables although some are shown on drawings, shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall therefore prepare his own routing
layout drawing before commencement of any installation for the Engineer's
agreement.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to check at the stage of tender the runs of
all cables in relation to structural restrictions so that all materials, such as trays, ducts,
supports etc are included in his tender.
1.15 FINAL CIRCUITS
Page 25 of 230
Generally, PVC insulated cables, from the distribution boards, shall be drawn into
conduits, installed in slabs or walls or floors or through flush floor trunking, as may be
required to the various lighting points, switches and small power outlets forming part of
the installation as shown on drawings.
Where armoured cables are shown, these shall be routed through ducts, or trays as
may be required, upto the various power points and distribution boards.
1.16 POSITION OF POINTS AND SWITCHES
The contractor shall ascertain from the Employer the exact positions of all fittings
including power points, socket outlets and lighting points before commencing the
actual works.
The contractor shall include without any extra claim for any variation of lighting and
socket outlet points up to a radius not exceeding 1000 mm from positions shown or
agreed if deemed necessary due to any physical feature in the finished ceiling and for
any variation in positions of socket outlets, lighting switches or similar fittings.
1.17 TYPE OF INSTALLATION
The whole of the installation shall be recessed unless otherwise specified and the
Contractor shall make all provisions necessary to facilitate the connections of cables,
wires, conduits from or onto distribution boards which will be surface mounted unless
otherwise stated in the following clauses or indicated on drawings.
1.18 ALIGNMENT OF ACCESSORIES
The contractor shall pay every particular attention to the method of fixing of switch
boxes and socket outlet boxes so that they will, when completed, be level and in an
exact position relative to the finished plaster to permit the cover plates to be fixed
accurately.
Where the conduit work is specified to be concealed the contractor shall take full
responsibility for the alignment of all such boxes and shall ascertain a definite datum
line, from which all measurements can be taken and shall ascertain also the thickness
of walls, depths of finished plaster and final finishes of all wall surfaces.
The contractor shall be held fully responsible for any faults or inaccuracies in this
respect.
1.19 EARTHING AND BONDING OF THE SYSTEM
The Contractor shall be required to carry out the complete permanent earthing for the
electrical installation and the equipotential bonding of all extraneous metal parts of the
Page 26 of 230
building as per the specification and he shall include a price in his tender.
The earth leakage protection to all parts of the installation shall be afforded by means
of a combination of current operated earth leakage circuit breakers and direct earthing
system as shown on drawings.
The earthing installation shall be provided with an earthing lead connected to an

effective earth electrode or electrodes such as copper strips or rods, which shall be
buried in the ground in basement floor. The earthing system shall be in accordance
with I.E.E. and local Authority Regulations, and shall satisfy the tests specified in these
Regulations and it shall become approved by the Local Electricity Authority as per their
regulations and requirements.
Neither building steel framework nor water pipes, separately or jointly, shall be used as
the sole earth electrode of the installation. From the main earthing terminal in the Main
Panel the Contractor shall be responsible to carry out the complete earthing and
bonding of the installation to give an effective earth continuity as described in E.D. D.
Regulation, Section 6.
1.20 ACCESSORY PLATES
In general all accessories, such as lighting switches, socket outlets, spur and D.P.
switches etc., shall have off-white plastic cover plates, unless otherwise stated or
instructed by the Employer.
In all areas where the installation is specified to be surface, all accessory plates shall
be metal clad (stainless steel satin finish).
All lighting switches shall be capable of switching inductive loads without being
derated.
All socket outlets shall be furnished complete with their appropriate plug tops.
1.21 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
The following mounting heights shall be taken as a general guide to the mounting of
the various items from the finished floor level. Final approval shall be obtained from the
Architect for exact mounting height. All distances are measured from the centre line of
each item:
Lighting Switches 1200mm

Socket outlets 300mm/above bench/
1200mm in plantrooms.
Telephone outlets 300mm
Weatherproof socket outlets 1200mm
Push-buttons/Break Glass Units 1200mm
Spur and D.P. switches 1200mm
Page 27 of 230
Distribution Boards 1800mm
Wall mounted Exit signs Directly above doors
However, the contractor shall confirm these heights as acceptable to the employer
before proceeding with the installation of boxes/conduits at site.
1.22 INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION
All equipment supplied by the Contractor shall be suppressed to avoid interference to

radio and television reception.
All equipment/fittings supplied shall conform to the relevant safety requirements of the
EC Council directives on electro-magnetic compatibility and low voltage.
1.23 SEPARATION OF SERVICES
Lighting, power, socket outlets, control cables, telephones, fire alarm outlets shall
each be run in separate conduits and no wiring associated with one service shall be
installed in any conduit box or enclosure containing wires associated with a different
service.
1.24 SPECIAL NOTES
Before final commissioning of any equipment referred herein the Contractor shall
check, for tightness, all clamps, screwed and bolted connections regardless whether
these were made before delivery of the equipment to site or not. The Sub-Contractor
shall also ensure that all fusible links and trip settings are correctly calibrated to give
discrimination and protection to the circuits and equipment forming this installation.
1.25 SAMPLES
Samples of all fittings and accessories shall be provided by the contractor at no extra
cost whenever deemed necessary by Employer for inspection/approval.
All samples shall be stored in a safe place on site until the completion of works.
1.26 QUALITY ASSURANCE
All major electrical materials/equipment to be installed shall be manufactured by

quality licensed manufacturers. The Quality Assurance Scheme of the proposed
manufacture must have obtained the approval of a third party quality assurance
institution such as the British Standard Institution.
The manufacturer’s quality licence shall be submitted for reference/record at the

request of the Engineer.
Page 28 of 230
All product/system proposed for this project should carry a third party quality license
mark.
All warranties required to be produced are to be submitted in original and shall in

separate plastic folder.
Contractor shall submit the following documents as required by the Engineer during
the material/equipment submittal stage:-
a) Compliance statement.
b) EDD’s approval certificate for any electrical product and for all materials to be
used in the project.
Materials and products of the same kind and nature shall be the standard product of
one manufacturer and of the same source and an assembly of several components
including enclosures, shall be the standard modular project of the same manufacturer
of such kind of equipment supported by published catalogue (in English) giving full
technical details of all components and finished product or assemblies, standards
applicable and evidence that the manufacturer has been involved for at least five (5)
years with the professional upto-date production of such equipment.
1.27 TESTING & TEST REPORTS
On completion or, as instructed by the Engineer the contractor shall carry out the tests
on the installation in the presence of the Engineer and Employer and no section of the
installation shall be energised until tests desired by the Engineer are completed and
proved to his satisfaction.
The installation will not be deemed to be complete until the approval of Electricity
Distribution Directorate and the Client has been obtained and the electrical power
supplied.
1.28 PRACTICAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
Upon practical completion of the works and when the Contractor has satisfied the
Employer that all equipment is in an operating condition and that all tests and
adjustments and the work described herein, have been completed by the contractor,
the Employer shall issue the practical completion certificate.
1.29 SHOP DRAWINGS AND AS BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit in triplicate, within thirty days (30) after the award of
contract, shop drawings of all installations for Engineer’s approval.
Contractor shall also be responsible to prepare and submit composite co-ordinated

drawings for Engineer’s review/approval of the route and location of all services.
Page 29 of 230
All mechanical, electrical and any other relevant installations shall be shown on each
composite drawing and the contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the
agreement of the Engineer to the proposals illustrated.
Before the issue of practical completion certificate and within fifteen days (15) after the
completion of works, 3 sets of CDs containing all As Building Drawings in electronic
form using Autocad 2006 or higher and three sets hard prints of As Built Drawings to
be submitted.
The contractor shall also be responsible for submitting 3 CDs of the operation and
maintenance manual in electronic form using Word 2000 or higher and three sets hard
copy in a stiff vinyl binder. Title shall be printed neatly on both front and the spin of the
binder to the Engineer’s approval.
The operating and maintenance manual shall include a brief description of the system,
instruction on how to operate the system or breakers, list of spare accessories
required, details of required maintenance with suggested frequency of maintenance,
details of local supplies, original catalogues of equipment/materials installed, a set of
prints of approved “As Built Drawings”.
1.30 TEMPORARY POWER SUPPLY
Contractor shall comply with EDD’s Regulations, Section 13 regarding the temporary
power supply.
1.31 SAFETY
The contractor shall be responsible to strictly adhere to the safety regulations as laid
by the Ministry of Labour and Social Affairs. The Contractor shall also comply with
EDD Regulations section 13 as regards to the safety of equipments.
1.32 FIRE PARTITION WALLS
Internal Fire barrier of appropriate rating shall be provided when trunking/cable tray
passes through walls and floors forming of fire zones within the building.
1.33 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS
Contractors having valid Grade I licence shall only be considered to carry out the
electrical work of this project.
Page 30 of 230
PART 2 : PANEL BOARDS & DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
INDEX
2.1 Panel Boards
2.2 Distribution boards
2.3 Control Panels
2.4 Air Circuit Breakers
2.5 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
2.6 Residual Current Circuit Breakers and Over Current

Protection devices (RCBO)
2.7 Miniature Circuit Breakers.
2.8 Fuses
2.9 Busbars
2.10 Motor Control Panel Construction
2.11 Electric Motor Starters, Switchgear
2.12 Sealing of Equipment
2.13 Testing and Commissioning
Page 31 of 230
2.1 PANEL BOARDS
All Panel Boards shall be vermin proof fully tropicalised and protected against climatic
conditions.
Main L.V. panel boards shall be floor mounted and constructed to form an integrated
assembly of cubicles and shall be Form – 3B, Type 2 construction. Panels must be
Type Tested and certified by ASTA or approved equivalent agency according to IEC
60439-1/BSEN 60439-1: 1999. Local manufacturer if proposed, shall be a franchised
panel builder or licensed Panel Builder of the original manufacturer and documentation
shall be produced in this regard along with the submittal. Warranty shall be provided
from the original manufacturer for the complete system including bus bar and
enclosure system.
The enclosure shall be powder coated to an approved colour. The painting process
shall include removal of moisture on the sheet steel surface using and applying
thermosetting polyester powder using automatic guns. Polymerization of the powder
shall take place when the components are cured at about 200ºC, forming a
continuous integrated coating. A fairly uniform coating of at least 70-80 microns shall
be provided.
Main distribution board enclosure shall be fabricated of minimum 2mm thick electro-
galvanized sheet steel folded and welded construction. The enclosure shall be of
simple and robust construction designed for a variety of dimensions obtainable by
means of standardized basic elements. Main distribution board shall consist of several
enclosures of equal height and depth mounted side by side to form a composite board
of uniform assembly. Each section of main distribution board shall be made up of 4
distinct functional spaces: Vertical and horizontal busbars, switchgear components,
cable connection and auxiliaries
Complete pages of type test certificate shall be submitted along with submittal for
consultant review.
Unless specified otherwise, the main distribution board shall be with ingress protection
rating of IP42 as per IEC standards as minimum.
Unless specified otherwise, Main distribution boards shall be designed for front access
for the purpose of operation and access to all components and shall suit front or rear
access for cable connections and top or bottom for cable entries.
Enclosure shall be readily suitable for future extension on either side without any
modifications (after installation at site).
The busbar system shall be designed as per the pre-defined guidelines provided by
the original manufacturer. The busbar system shall be type tested by the manufacturer
at reputed laboratory for short circuit withstand capacity. The neutral and earth
busbars shall also be type tested for the short circuit withstand capacity. The fault level
rating of the busbar system shall be as per the drawings however the minimum short
Page 32 of 230
circuit withstand capacity shall be 50KA RMS for 1second. Neutral busbar shall be
able to withstand a thermal stress of atleast 60%, corresponding to the main phase
busbar rated short circuit withstand capacity.
The busbars shall be high grade electrolytic tin plated copper (with 99.9%
conductivity), rectangular and rigid construction. The phase busbars and neutral
busbars shall be arranged systematically in a busbar chamber/ alley. The busbars
shall be color sleeved throughout the length for phase identification (except for the
distribution busbars of the withdrawable sections). The busbars shall be shrouded
completely using metallic partitions and/or polycarbonate shrouds as applicable. The
busbar assembly shall be shrouded (at least IP20) by shrouds so that no live parts are
accessible. Phase identification shall be done systematically. Use of bakelite sheets
for shrouding will not be permitted
Prior to procurement, the contractor shall submit to consultant, a detailed technical

submittal from the panel builder and shall obtain specific approvals for the main
distribution boards. The technical submittal shall include but not limited to the following:
- Company Profile and Quality management system
- Executed project list with details of Client, Consultant, Project & Order value
- Franchising agreement from the original manufacturer
- Type test certificates for the main distribution board
- Compliance statement to the specifications
- Front, Side and Plan view of the main distribution board with dimensions
- Fixing details / Foundation plan with dimensions
- Detailed component arrangement of the main distribution board
- Detailed technical specification of the proposed main distribution board
- Single line diagram
- Power & Control schematics (where applicable)
- Technical write-up for the control system (if applicable)
- Component list including the model no., type, ratings, quantity and origin
- Catalogue copy of each component
- One set of original catalogue (If requested)
Page 33 of 230
- Routine test & Functional test formats
- Test certificate specimen
A discrimination study between Main, Submain and Final distribution Boards circuit
Breakers shall be submitted along with drawings for approval with supportive
documents.
All components used in the panel board manufacturing shall have a Type Test
Certificate or have U/L listing.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Unless specified otherwise Main Distribution board / L.V. Panel shall conform in
design, material, construction and performance to the latest editions of the
International recommendations (IEC standards) and its corresponding British /
European standards (BSEN standards) and in particular to the following publications:
- Low Voltage Switchboard
IEC 60439-1
- Degree of protection
IEC 60529
In addition to the above listed standards, the local authority regulations shall also be
adhered to.
SITE CONDITIONS
For general climatic conditions, refer and comply the specified project site conditions.
The main distribution boards shall comply and perform satisfactorily at the below listed
special design conditions as minimum:
Ambient temperature : 50ºC

Relative humidity : 95% (at 55ºC)
All submain panels are to comply with IEC 60439 Part 1; 1999, Form 4b.
Main incoming switching device and outgoing switching devices up to 630A shall be
accommodated in a fully draw-out type compartment of the main distribution board
and where the main switching device rating exceeds 630A, they shall be of fully
withdrawable type switching device in fixed enclosure version.
The main distribution board shall be assembled using various combinations of
Page 34 of 230
enclosure such as draw-out and fixed cubicles versions (from same model of
enclosure) to form a uniform and composite panel. The general external appearance
and construction of fixed version and draw-out version enclosures shall be similar and
it shall be possible to assemble various combinations of draw-out or withdrawable type
incoming switching devices, draw-out type and/or fixed type of distribution feeders etc.
easily.
Main distribution boards shall be rated on the basis of voltage, current, frequency and
the symmetrical breaking capacity of incorporated switching devices.
The electrical system for all main distribution boards shall be 415 / 380V, 50Hz 3phase
and neutral, 4-wire solidly earthed. The main distribution boards shall be suitable for
operating voltage up to 1000V.
Unless specified otherwise, the fault level withstand capacity of the main distribution
board busbar system rated up to 2500Amps shall be 50KA RMS for 1second as
minimum standard. The breaking capacity of the switching devices shall be 50KA as
minimum standard. The type test certificate shall be submitted for consultant engineer
verification, to prove the fault level withstand capacity of the main distribution boards.
Even under extreme conditions of short circuit or mal-operation there shall be no
danger to persons in the vicinity of the assembly.
Enclosure system for all main distribution boards and motor control centers rated up to
5000A to be of same model from one manufacturer. Enclosure system shall be
available as fixed & withdrawable versions and also in Form 3B as per IEC standards.
Main distribution board shall restrict the internal arcs faults within the compartment to
ensure maximum safety to the operating personnel and also to minimize the down
time for replacement and repairs. Type test certificate shall be carried out to verify the
arc containment within the compartment as per AS 3439-1 standards. Certificates
shall be submitted for consultant verification
The interiors of the cubicle shall be fitted with ACB's, MCCB's, RCCB's, gland plates,
contactors, relays etc. as detailed on drawing. The terminal blocks are to be suitably
spaced and sized to accommodate all incoming and outgoing cables.
The front section of the cubicle shall be fitted with the incoming and outgoing MCCB's,
and all complete with crank handle operating mechanism.
Busbars and connections to all equipment shall be of hard-drawn, high conducting

electro-tinned copper bar. Cable connections from busbars will not be permitted.
The resistance of any length of conductor containing a joint shall not be greater than
that of an equal length of similar conductor without a joint.
Page 35 of 230
Adequate bracing of auxiliary busbar connections will be required in order to comply
with the overall MVA rating of the switchboards.
The neutral busbars of the switchboard shall be rated same as that of the rating of the
phase busbars. Each panel shall have a copper earth bar, 6 x 25mm, which shall run
along the bottom side of the panels for safety grounding.
All busbars, including auxilliary busbar connections to individual MCCBs, shall be

continuously phase identified as follows:
Neutral - N
Phases - L1,L2,L3
Earth - PE
When looking on the front of a MCCB, reading from left to right the connections shall
be:
L1, L2,L3 and N.
All connections made by the manufacturer shall be tight and means of ensuring that
they remain tight shall be supplied.
The busbars shall be 4 pole and rated as indicated on the Drawings and the current
density shall not be more than 1,000 amps per sq.in.
Busbars and enclosures shall be suitable to be drilled and plated to enable future
extension without difficulty. The minimum thickness of frame work enclosure for panel
and switchboards should not be less than 2 mm and for doors not less than 1.5 mm.
The sheet metal used shall be galvanised zinc coated.
All current ratings, shown on drawings, must be for a continuous ambient temperature
of 50oC.
The contractor shall supply and erect suitable mild steel angle framework to provide a
means of mounting all switchgear and fusegear, distribution boards, starters, etc.
where these can be neatly grouped. The complete framework shall be firmly secured
to the wall and/or floor by means of expanding bolts.
Each section of the cubicle shall be fitted with an anti-condensation heater controlled
by a humidity sensor. The cubicle shall be fitted with an earth bar with all items bonded
and a removable neutral/earth link adjacent to the incoming cable terminations. Items
forming part of this switchboard shall be rated for operation in an ambient temperature
of 50oC. Designation labels shall be traffolyte (fixed by screws) and inscribed in
English and Arabic as specified elsewhere. The switchboard shall be painted to a
colour advised by the Engineer.
The design of the switchboards shall provide adequate ventilation.
Page 36 of 230
The switchboards shall be equipped with A.C.B's, MCCB's and RCCB's as detailed on
the drawings and all the components shall be from the same manufacturer.
All MCCB panels shall be equipped with the following:-
Multifunction digital meters to indicate the Voltage,Current, KwH, Frequency

and Power factor.
The short circuit breaking capacity of the main LV Panel shall be equal to or greater
than 50KA.
The short circuit breaking capacity of the Submain Panels shall be equal to or greater
than 30 KA or as indicated on drawings.
Unless otherwise specified the panels shall be designed to accept bottom entry of
cables and shall be of rear access type. The rear access shall only be provided for
access for termination of cables, all other equipments shall be accessible / operable
from the front of panel. Where front access type is specified, the panel shall be
designed completely for front access only.
Each panel section (cable compartment) shall be provided with thermostatically

controlled panel heater.
Each section shall be arranged typically as described below and as per the details
shown in the drawings:
Incomer section (Transformer Incoming)

Transformer Incomer panel shall be a 3compartment enclosure with Top & Bottom
compartment dedicated for metering / controls and the Middle compartment shall be
dedicated for the circuit breaker. It shall comprise of but not limited to the following:
Bottom Compartment
- Incomer supply cables
Middle Compartment
- Main Incoming circuit breakers with rating and type as per the drawing.
Top Compartment
- Any control component for Incoming circuit breaker.
- Digital power meter to indicate various electrical parameters
- Phase indication lamps (R,Y,B) wired to the line side of the circuit breaker.
- KWH energy meter
Page 37 of 230
Incomer section (Generator Incoming)
Generator Incomer panel shall be a 3compartment enclosure with Top & Bottom
compartment dedicated for metering / controls and the Middle compartment shall be
dedicated for the circuit breaker. It shall comprise of but not limited to the following:
Bottom Compartment
- Incomer supply cables
Middle Compartment
- Main Incoming circuit breakers with rating and type as per the drawing.
Top Compartment
- Any control component for Incoming circuit breaker.
- Digital power meter to indicate various electrical parameters
- Phase indication lamps (R,Y,B) wired to the line side of the circuit breaker.
- KWH energy meter.
Bus coupler / Bus Tie section

The Bus Tie / Bus Coupler Panel shall be a 3compartment enclosure to match with
the incomer panels. The Top & Bottom compartment can be used for accommodating
the common controls of the incoming and the bus tie circuit breakers. The Middle
compartment shall be dedicated for the circuit breaker. It shall comprise of but not
limited to the following:
Notes:
- Where ACB’s are used as incoming or bus coupler, the front face of the ACB shall be
accessible for operation from the front without opening the front door.
- Where MCCB’s are used as incoming or bus coupler circuit breakers an extended
operating handle shall be provided at the front face of the panel front door for
operation. All such door handles shall be door interlocked wherever required.
Outgoing section(s)
The outgoing section(s) enclosure shall accommodate the outgoing circuit breakers
which shall be arranged in a systematic and symmetrical manner. It shall comprise of
but not limited to the following:
Each panel shall have various fixed or draw out compartments with individual doors for
each compartment and each compartment / drawers shall accommodate the
following:
- Circuit breakers with rating and type as specified in the drawings.
- Any other controls, which may be part of the outgoing circuit breakers.
Page 38 of 230
Notes:
- All circuit breakers and other controls pertaining to a feeder shall be accommodated in
its own compartment, which shall have its own lockable door. Keys for all such door
shall be common.
- Moulded case circuit breaker in each compartment shall be equipped with an
extended operating handle extended to the front face of the door for operation. All
such door handles shall be door interlocked, wherever required.
- Air circuit breaker front face shall be accessible without opening the door.
- Circuit breakers and other control components shall be fully accessible after opening
the panel door; however no live parts shall be exposed.
- All the bus bar connections / terminations to the outgoing circuit breakers shall be
taken from the rear side of the circuit breaker, which shall be shrouded properly using
metallic / poly carbonate sheets. All the mccb terminals shall be fully shrouded with
original terminal shrouds from the mccb manufacturer, in such a that way no live parts
are exposed, when the front door is opened.
- Opening of the front door shall give access to the circuit breaker for rating adjustments
etc.
- Maximum 2nos. air circuit breakers shall be installed in one enclosure, provided that
sufficient space for cable termination is provided and de-rating of circuit breaker is
carried out as per manufacturer recommendations.
- Maximum 2nos.moulded case circuit breakers, rated at 800Amps shall be installed in
one enclosure, provided that sufficient space for cable termination is provided.
- Maximum 9nos. of moulded case circuit breakers (rated less than 250Amps) shall be
installed in one enclosure, provided that sufficient cable termination is provided.
- All Partitioning and shrouding shall comply the requirements of Form-3, Type-2
construction as per IEC standards.
Type test
The main distribution board and the components as applicable shall be type tested in
accordance with the IEC standards to verify the specified fault level withstand capacity
from a reputed and approved type testing laboratory and certified by an competent
authority.
The following 7 type tests as specified in IEC 60439-1standards to comply with

requirements of TTA equipment shall be carried out at recognized test laboratories
and certificates from approved test witnessing authority shall be provided for each type
test:
1. Verification of temperature-rise limits (IEC Clause 8.2.1);

2. Verification of the dielectric properties (IEC Clause 8.2.2);
Page 39 of 230
3. Verification of short-circuit withstand strength (IEC Clause 8.2.3);
4. Verification of the effectiveness of the protective circuit (IEC Clause 8.2.4);
5. Verification of clearances and creepage distances (IEC Clause 8.2.5);
6. Verification of mechanical operation (IEC Clause 8.2.6);
7. Verification of the degree of protection (IEC Clause 8.2.7).
Type test certificates shall be submitted to the consultant engineer for verification.
Routine test
The panel assembler shall perform the routine test and provide the test certificates as
defined in IEC standards. The routine test shall include but not limited to the following:
1. Inspection of the assembly including inspection of wiring and electrical operational

test (IEC Clause 8.3.1);
2. Dielectric test & Insulation resistance test (IEC Clause 8.3.2 & 8.3.4);
3. Checking of protective measures and of the electrical continuity of the protective
circuits (IEC Clause 8.3.3)
4. Functional test as per the approved test procedure.
Routine test certificates and test readings shall be submitted to the consultant
engineer for verification.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Unless specified otherwise, all panel board components shall conform in design,
material, construction and performance to the latest editions of the International
recommendations (IEC standards) and its corresponding British / European standards
(BSEN standards) and in particular to the following publications :
- Low Voltage Switchboard IEC 60439-1

- Degree of protection IEC 60529
- L.V Circuit Breaker IEC 60947-1 to 5
- Switch-Disconnector IEC 60947-1 to 5
- Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker IEC 61008
- Earth Leakage Relay IEC 60755 & IEC 60364-4 & 5
- Contactor IEC 60947-1 & IEC 60947-4-1
- Over Load Relays IEC 60947-1 & IEC 60947-4-1
Page 40 of 230
- Electronic Soft Starter IEC 60947-2, IEC 60068-2 & IEC 60664-1
- Electronic Variable Frequency Drive IEC 60947-2, IEC 60068-2 & IEC 60664-1
- Starter Assemblies IEC 60947-1 & IEC 60947-4-1
- Control Relays IEC 60947-5-1, 15 & IEC 60255-1
- Impulse Relays IEC 60669-1 & 2
- Timers IEC 60144, IEC 60158-1 & IEC 60255-5
- Protection Relays IEC 60947-1, IEC 6034-11 & IEC 60755
- Programmable Logic Controller IEC 60801-2, 3, 4, 5 & IEC 60255-4
- Man Machine Interface Unit IEC 60068-2, 27 & IEC 61131-2
- Push Buttons & Indication Lamps IEC 60947-5-1 & 4
- Terminal Blocks IEC 60947-7-1
- Analogue Metering Equipments IEC 60414
- Digital Metering Equipments IEC 60688, IEC 61036 & IEC 61268
In addition to the above listed standards, the local authority regulations shall also be
adhered to.
All MCCB's in the LV Panels shall be of the selective type to provide full discrimination
on the downstream circuit breakers.
MCCBs of current limiting type shall also be installed on panel boards as indicated on
the drawing.
The ratings of all MCCB's and RCCB's to be incorporated in the panels are shown on
the drawings. However, the exact rating of necessary MCCBs based on the final
equipment selection to be agreed with the Engineer by the contractor.
All front covers shall have suitable labels inscribed both in English & Arabic to denote
the purpose of each item with one such label inscribed to show a line diagram of the
interconnections between units.
Cast brass sweating socket terminals shall be provided for incoming cables and brass
blocks for clamping screws of adequate and approved dimensions for outgoing sub-
circuit cables.
Gland plates for the termination of cables shall be of a non-magnetic material.
The cubicles are to be complete with steel baseplates and neoprene gaskets for
protection against dust and water. All ferrous metal work of the Switchboard is to be
given a de-rusting and a de-greasing process before the application of a primer coat
and then to be finished with a good quality paint.
Page 41 of 230
All factory-built assemblies shall undergo a series of works tests at the manufacturer’s
premises in the presence of Engineer’s and Employer’s representatives for panel
boards and motor control centres.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Distribution boards shall be of the totally insulated surface and/or concealed mounted
pattern of approved manufacturer.
Distribution Boards shall be supplied and installed comprising either iron clad surface
wall mounting units or fabricated from zinc coated electro-galvanised sheet steel with
epoxy powder coated finish as approved by Engineer’s representative. Doors to be
stiffened and should be with chrome plated heavy duty handle and hinges. Distribution
shall be manufactured and tested to BS EN 60439 Part 1 and 3. Thickness of the
sheet metal to be of 1.5 mm.
The units shall comprise a main Isolator and single pole and triple pole Mcbs rating
and numbers as indicated on the drawings. The circuit breakers shall comply fully with
the requirements of BSEN 60898 and IEC 60947-2.
Mcbs shall be interchangeable, without modifications to the distribution board,

throughout the standard range of current ratings 5 amps to 50 amps. All Mcbs shall be
suitable to 50oC. All Mcbs are to be provided with a positive contact indicators
complying to the latest IEE Regulations. A separate terminal lug or socket shall be
provided for each neutral and earth conductor. All space provisions in DB shall be
closed with purpose made dummy plates.
Protection of neutral is not required and therefore all assemblies shall be single phase
and neutral (SP & N) triple pole (TP) or triple pole and neutral (TP & N). All final sub-
distribution boards shall comprise of Mcbs except where otherwise specified.
Where shown on drawings, the DBs are to incorporate earth leakage devices of the
required sensitivity. These devices shall provide protection against earth leakage
faults, and should fully comply to local authority requirements.
The distribution boards shall be fitted with circuit designation labels adjacent to each
Mcb way. Included on the designation labels shall be the phase to which the Mcb is
connected. Circuit designation labels shall be in engraved traffolyte screw fixed. A
drawing pocket to be provided in the inside of the front cover of DB and install a chart
indicating the final circuit details, cable size, and Mcb rating of distribution board. The
list shall be prepared with non-soluble black ink on white cartridge paper and con-
tained within a framed PERPEX fronted board. The characters shall not be less than
3mm high.
2. 3 CONTROL PANELS
Page 42 of 230
The control panels shall be constructed to contain the required isolators, fuse,
breakers, main door interlock, control interlocks, starters, run/trip lights labels. All
these should be neatly arranged in an approved manner for easy identification and
following up of the system. All provisions for BMS interfacing shall be provided in the
control panels. Thickness and material/finish of control panel enclosure shall be of the
same as that of MCCB panel board.
a) Mechanical Control panel
All mechanical control panels other than shown on this drawing are to be
supplied and installed by the mechanical contractor.
The details of all mechanical control panels to be installed shall be to the

required sequence of operation of mechanical equipment and shall be
submitted to the Engineer's review/approval.
Generally, all mechanical control panel shall be fitted with a door mounted
padlockable isolator in both the ON and OFF positions to prevent
unauthorised operation. Each control panel shall be complete with phase
failure relays, star/delta change over on start up with variable time delay,
cascade starter timers to minimise starting load during the restoration of main
power supply, speed regulators as may be required, mains healthy indicator
lamps etc.
2.3. AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
The Air circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 60947-2 utilization category-B. The
breaking performance shall be such that Service breaking capacity (Ics) should be
equal to the Ultimate breaking capacity (Icu). The breaking capacity selected shall be
in line with the drawings / data sheets provided.
The ACBs shall have a rated operational voltage of 690V AC (50/60Hz) and rated
insulation voltage 1000V AC (50/60Hz). The ACBs shall be fully tropicalised (T2) as
standard.The ACBs shall have one size from 800A to 2500A. The main contacts shall
be encased in a reinforced polyester casing and offer double insulation from the
operators on the breaker front face. Circuit breakers of rating 1200A and above shall
be ACB type.
All ACB’s shall be drawout type and of 3 or 4 pole as indicated on the drawing. The
drawout operation shall be possible through a closed door, while the racking handle
shall be stored on the ACB in such a manner as to be accessible without defeating the
door interlocking. Bus-coupler ACBs shall be of the 4 pole type. Insulated safety
shutters shall be provided over the incoming and outgoing main circuits and over the
auxiliary circuits in all drawout ACBs.
The ACB’s shall be operated via a stored energy mechanism for instantaneous
Page 43 of 230
opening and closing. The mechanism shall be charged manually (or electrically if
required as per Single line diagram). Closing and opening operations can be initiated
from the local push buttons on the circuit breaker front face (or by remote control).
Microprocessor based intelligent and user friendly control-trip unit device shall be part
of each air circuit breaker. Control-trip unit shall be installed flush front with the front
face of the air circuit breaker. Control-trip unit setting adjustments, LCD screen
displays and LED fault indications shall be available and accessible from the front of
the circuit breaker. Control-trip units shall be equipped with a digital high-resolution
LCD screen display and simple navigational buttons to navigate between the screens
and it shall be possible to directly access the parameters. Text shall be displayed in
desired language. The control unit cover shall be lead sealed to prevent uncontrolled
access to the dials and protect the settings.
Where applicable and/or required, Control-trip units shall be capable of adjusting the
slope of the overload protection curve (IDMT setting) and thus ensure coordination
with fuse type or medium voltage protection systems
Where applicable and/or required, It shall be possible to include a communication with

supervision system at any time as an option.
Control-trip unit device shall be interchangeable at site with different versions of

control-trip unit without any modification to the circuit breaker. Control-trip units of
circuit breaker shall be with a facility to connect a test kit to check the operation of the
control-trip unit. The trip units shall not augment the overall volume of the ACB.
ACB shall be able to integrate in to a supervisory & control system, wherever

specified. It shall be possible to install trip units with communication options on to the
circuit breaker and hooked up on to the communication bus. The interface units or
communication modules shall support the system to communicate on either Modbus
bus or Digipact bus. Communication functions shall be independent of the control unit
The ACBs shall be equipped with shunt trip mechanism for tripping.
The ACB’s shall be equipped with a solid state microprocessor based control unit for
protection against Overload, Short-circuit and earth fault and shall have the following
function:
 LT (Adjustable Long time protection).

 ST (Adjustable Short time protection with Time delay
 I (Instantaneous protection)
 Earth Fault Protection.
 Local fault trip Indicator.
 Differentiated Fault trip indicator.
 Remote fault trip indication with remote indication out put.
 Local pre alarm indication
Page 44 of 230
 Three phase load bar graph Indicator
 In built digital Ammeter
 Provision to adapt communication facilities in future.
The ACB section of the switch board shall be in separate cubicle separated from other
parts of the switch board. This section shall not have any outgoing feeders.
The gland plate for the incoming cables shall be non-ferrous material with brass
compression type glands, earthing tags and shrouds.
ASTA or equivalent certification shall be provided for the short Circuit rating for the
MCCBs
Buscouplers shall be 4 pole type but without protection releases.
2.4 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Contactor to provide MCCBs as indicated on the tender drawings of the outgoing

feeders. They shall be triple pole, 400volts,50Hz with magnetic shortcircuit and
thermal over load protection complying with IEC 60947-2 category A. MCCB shall be
of interrupting capacity as indicated in the drawing .
The breaking performance shall be such that Service breaking capacity (Ics) should
be equal to the Ultimate breaking capacity (Icu). The breaking capacity selected shall
be in line with the drawings / data sheets provided. The MCCBs shall have a rated
operational voltage of 690V AC (50/60Hz) and rated insulation voltage 1000V AC
(50/60Hz). The MCCBs shall be fully tropicalized (T2) as standard.The MCCBs shall
be capable of limiting currents.
MCCBs upto 250A rating shall be equipped with Thermal-Magnetic trip units. The trip
units shall have adjustable Thermal protection, Fixed magnetic protection for ratings
upto 160A and adjustable thermal and magnetic protection for ratings greater than
200A. MCCBs over 250A shall be equipped with Electronic trip units having the
following function:
For circuit breakers with Electronic trip unit, rated up to 630Amps

- Long time Ir shall be adjustable between 0.4 to 1x In (up to 48 settings)
- Short time Isd shall be adjustable between 2 to 10 x In (up to 8 settings)
- Instantaneous Ii shall be fixed at ≥ 11 x In
- Over load indication when the current exceeds the long time trip threshold
For circuit breakers with Electronic trip unit, rated above 630Amps
- Long time Ir shall be adjustable between 0.4 to 1x In (up to 9 settings)
- Short time Isd shall be adjustable between 1.5 to 10 x In (up to 9 settings)
- Instantaneous Ii shall be adjustable between 1.5 to 10 x In (up to 9 settings)
- Over load indication when the current exceeds the long time trip threshold
Page 45 of 230
Circuit breaker for motor protection shall be equipped with a specially designed motor
protection trip unit (magnetic trip unit). Electrical characteristics of motor protection
circuit breakers shall at least meet the below given settings adjustment requirements.
For circuit breakers with magnetic trip unit, short circuit protection (magnetic) Im shall
be as follows:
- Adjustable between 6 to 14 x In (for MCCB rated up to 100A)
- Adjustable between 9 to 14 x In (for MCCB rated above 100A and up to 500A)
For circuit breakers with Electronic motor protection trip unit, rated up to 250Amps
- Over load (long time) Ir shall be adjustable between 0.6 to 1 x In (up to 10
settings)
- Short circuit (short time) Isd shall be fixed at 13 x Ir
- Short circuit (instantaneous) Ii shall be fixed at 15 x In
- Phase imbalance protection (integral protection)
- Motor over load indication by LED, when the current exceeds 1.05 Ir
For circuit breakers with Electronic motor protection trip unit, rated above 250Amps
and up to 500A
- Over load (long time) Ir shall be adjustable between 0.4 to 0.8 x In (up to 40
settings)
- Short circuit (short time) Isd shall be adjustable between 6 to 13 x Ir (up to 8
settings)
- Short circuit (instantaneous) Ii shall be fixed at 15 x Ir
- Phase imbalance protection (integral protection)
- Motor over load indication by LED, when the current exceeds 1.05Ir
It shall be possible to supply power either from the upstream or downstream side
MCCBs shall be designed to prevent access to live parts when the cover is removed
From 100 A to 630 A rating frame, MCCBs breaking unit shall be made with a double
rotary contact to limit let through energy on the installation
It shall be possible to use the same field installable auxiliary contacts for signalising
different functions, as: open/ closed position, fault signal, electrical fault (including
electrical leakage) signal
MCCBs shall comprise a device, designed to trip the circuit-breaker in the event of
high-value short-circuit currents. This device shall be independent of the thermal-
magnetic or electronic trip unit. Trip unit shall be easily interchangeable and easily
secured to the MCCB without removing the breaker from the panel.
It shall be possible to equip MCCBs with an auxiliary contact signalizing an electrical
fault operated by the trip unit. It shall be possible to adjust the long time protection with
a knob without any additional power supply or when the main is off. Electronic trip unit
shall be fitted with thermal memory. The self-test will be of positive logic and visible
through the flashing of a green LED in case the self-test occurred correctly (on the
complete tripping chain, including current transformers, PCB and actuator) and the
extinction of the LED in case the self-test failed.
When using the electronic trip unit it shall be possible to differentiate remotely the type
Page 46 of 230
of fault (overload or short-circuit). Four-pole devices shall be equipped with adjustable
neutral protection:
as standard with a 3-position setting : - neutral not protected - neutral tripping threshold
equal to half the phase value - neutral threshold equal to the phase value
Ground fault protection

It shall be possible to deactivate the ground fault protection.
It shall be possible to adjust the ground fault protection down to 16A
Measurements of electrical parameters (current, voltage, power, energy, power factor,
etc) shall be possible
Accuracies of the entire measurement system, including the sensors: shall be
Current: Class 1 as per IEC 61557-12
Voltage: 0.5 %
Power and energy: Class 2 as per IEC 61557-12
It shall be possible to display measurements of electrical parameters simultaneously
through MODBUS communication system and a front display module.
Measurement chain shall be independent from the protection chain.
Rogowski CT shall be used to ensure accurate measurements from low current up to
high currents.
The addition of an add-on earth leakage module shall not be changed MCCB
accessories or options possibilities.
MCCBs shall be designed according to Eco-design complying with ISO 14062
Especially MCCB’s materials shall be of halogen free type
ASTA or Equivalent Certification shall be provided for the short Circuit rating for the
MCCBs
2.5 RCBO
Compact protection devices which combine the over current functions of an MCB with
the earth fault function of an RCD in a single unit whose terminals are protected
against contact with fingers and shall comply with the following requirements:
a) Residual current operated circuit breakers with integral over current protection
which shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61009.
b) It shall have their own in built short circuit protection up to its rated value.
c) On the triple pole and four pole RCBO’s each pole shall have a separate
magnetic /hydraulic time delay tripping mechanism and shall be enclosed in a
moulded all insulated case. The toggle assemblies of all three poles shall be
internally interlinked for simultaneous isolation of all three poles under faulty
conditions, and be so arranged that the overload tripping characteristics and
calibrations of each pole shall be completely unaffected by the loading of the
neighbouring pole or poles.
All brass parts shall be electroplated and all steel parts cadmium-plated and all
Page 47 of 230
contacts silver-plated.
d) The time delay tripping mechanism and calibration shall be unaffected by

fluctuating and high ambient temperatures. The RCBO’s shall not trip out
through the overload protection at full load but shall detect and isolate a
sustained overload of 35% above rated load at 55oC.
e) RCBO’s shall be SP, DP, or TP and N and of the current rating all as specified
elsewhere or approved. Each RCBO’s shall be provided with spring-washers
at each cable termination.
f) RCBO’s shall have a rated short-circuit breaking capacity of 6000 A

(minimum).
All RCBO’s are to be provided with a positive contact indicator complying to the latest
IEE Regulations.
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER (RCCB)
Current operated residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) shall comply with IEC
61008/BSEN 61008. They shall consist of a current transformer, tripping coil with
contactor assembly, main supply contacts, ON/OFF switch, test button and trip free
mechanism all mounted on a robust body of insulated material. The number of poles
and the rated current shall be as detailed on the drawings and the terminal sizes shall
be suitable for the cables to be connected.
The sensitivity of the breakers shall be such that they are capable of detecting earth
leakages of 30 milli amps and the operating time shall not exceed 200 milli seconds
under earth fault conditions. The withstanding capacity shall not be less than 3 kA;
tripping time shall be unaffected by temperature changes and shall not be possible to
hold the trip mechanism closed under fault conditions.
ELCB shall be of filtering type to avoid nuisance tripping.
The windings and coils shall be suitably tropicalized for operating in a relative humidity
of 98%. All contacts shall be of robust construction and be of non-welding, self-wiping
and self-aligning type designed for a minimum of 10,000 switching operations.
2.6. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER
The Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) whose terminals are protected against contact
with fingers and shall comply with the following requirements:
On the triple pole and four pole MCB's each pole shall have a separate magnetic
/thermal time delay tripping mechanism and shall be enclosed in a moulded all
insulated case, shall be bolted at the ends, the toggle assemblies of all three poles
shall be internally interlinked for simultaneous isolation of all three poles under faulty
Page 48 of 230
conditions, and be so arranged that the overload tripping characteristics and calibra-
tions of each pole shall be completely unaffected by the loading of the neighbouring
pole or poles.
All brass parts shall be electroplated and all steel parts cadmium-plated and all
contacts silver-plated.
The time delay tripping mechanism and calibration shall be unaffected by fluctuating
and high ambient temperatures. The MCB's shall not trip out through the overload
protection at full load but shall detect and isolate a sustained overload of 35% above
rated load at 55oC.
Miniature circuit breakers shall be SP, DP, or TP and N and of the current rating all as
specified elsewhere or approved. Each miniature circuit breaker shall be provided with
spring-washers at each cable termination.
MCB's shall have a rated short-circuit breaking capacity of 9000 - 10000 (minimum)
with type C tripping characteristics.
The MCB's shall be suitable for full operation under the site conditions and shall
comply with BS EN 60898 AND IEC 60947-2 with any amendments made thereto.
All MCB's are to be provided with a positive contact indicator complying to the latest
IEE Regulations and shall be with trip-free mechanism.
All MCBs shall be of Bolt on type and current limiting in nature.
ASTA or equivalent certification shall be provided for the short circuit rating for the
MCBs.
2.8 FUSES
All fuses shall be of the totally enclosed high rupturing capacity, cartridge type of the
correct rating for the wiring and circuit to be protected.
HRC fuses or RCBO’s shall be provided for each way of distribution board and each
way of switch fuse and fuse-switch unit. Each fuse shall be selected in accordance
with the circuit to be protected and not in accordance with the rated capacity of the
fuse way of switch.
Fuses protecting motor circuits shall be rated in accordance with the motor
manufacturer's recommendations and according to the starting method.
Fuses protecting group motor circuits shall be rated in accordance with the combined
starting currents of the motors which are arranged to start simultaneously plus the full
load running current of the remaining motors.
Page 49 of 230
Spare fuses shall be provided for all switchboards and fuseboards representing 10%
of the number of circuit fuses of each rating initially in use. These fuses shall be
handed to the Engineer at the completion of the electrical works who will hand them to
the Employer's representative when the whole works are handed over on practical
completion.
2.9 BUSBARS
Busbars shall be of the high conductivity hard drawn copper, electro- tinned and
adequate cross-section to carry the required full load current after temperature
derating. The busbars shall be mounted on non-hygroscopic insulators of sufficient
numbers to withstand distortion under full load conditions.
Neutral bars shall have the same cross section as the main busbars and shall have
equal number of terminals for outgoing cables as the number of ways on the board.
Where the installation of single phase circuits from multi-phase boards is required
suitable provision shall be made for these by the incorporation of additional neutral
bars and/or terminals.
2.10 MOTOR CONTROL PANEL CONSTRUCTION
Motor Control Panels shall be provided in plant rooms/as shown on drawings. The
panels shall be complete with main door interlock, isolator, Ammeters, Voltmeters and
panel alive lamp. The panels shall be constructed of heavy gauge Zinc coated sheet
steel of 2mm for load bearing members and 1.6mm for all non-load bearing members
like doors, covers etc, with epoxy power coated finish. All indicator lights, isolators,
starters etc. shall be fully labelled in engraved traffolyte screw fixed.
The panels shall be cubicle and floor mounted type.
The Motor Control Panel shall be suitable for front access for maintenance and
comply with BS EN 60439: Part I 1999 Form 3, Type 2 minimum and shall be sealed
to IP 54 of BS EN 60529 as suitable.
All panels are to be provided with anti-condensation heaters with built in thermostats.
The terminal connector bar shall be located in the top of the panel for cables upto
16mm and shall have tunnel type connectors. Cables above this capacity shall have
lug/bolted type connectors. The incoming and outgoing cables shall be from the top
and/or bottom to suit the site conditions.
Provision shall be made within the cubicle for the termination of XLPE armoured
cables, having removable top entry gland plates. Subsequent compression lugs shall
have termination clearance via copper bus bar extensions.
Where a group of starters is directly, or indirectly controlled by one push button or

switch, or where the equipment controlled works in a common system, it shall be
Page 50 of 230
arranged for cascade starting allowing an interval of at least 15 seconds between the
final switching action of one and the initial switching action of the one following to
reduce the total starting current in any instant.
All motors shall have Class F insulation as minimum requirement.
Starters shall be clearly labelled with front engraved plastic labels as specified
elsewhere. Generally starters shall be fixed adjacent to the motor. Emergency stop
switches shall be of the lock off; turn to reset type and shall be located as required by
CP 1011, IEE regulations and to E.D.D. Regulations, Section 8.
All electrical motors, including window A/C units, fluorescent light fittings etc. shall
comply with EDD Regulation Section 3, Clause 313 for power factor.
2.11 ELECTRIC MOTOR STARTERS, SWITCHGEAR
All starters shall be automatic unless otherwise specified.
Each starter shall be housed in a dustproof casing, having front access door.Each
starter shall be complete with the following:
On-load isolators to isolate all power and control circuits simultaneously.
Thermal trips for overload.

Single phase preventors.
No-volt trip coils with auto reset.
All necessary auxiliary contacts, switches etc.
Contactor coil arranged to operate on 230V line voltage AC supply.
Ammeter with protective fuse for all 3 phase starters.
Auxiliary contacts and fuses for all necessary control circuits etc.
Remote/local control switch. This switch shall work in 24 volt control circuits only and
not the 230V line voltage contactor coil circuit.
Local ON/OFF or ON/DUTY/STANDBY/OFF where motors with automatic change

overs or where two-speed motor the ON shall be replaced with HIGH/LOW switch.
The control switches shall work in the 24 Volt control circuit only and not on the 230
line voltage.
230/24 Volt double wound transformer. This transformer shall be supplied from the
switched side of the on-load isolator to ensure correct control and signal indication.
Page 51 of 230
This transformer shall feed the control circuits and pilot lights in the starter and the
various control panels associated with the starter.
RUN/DUTY/STANDBY/FAULT or RUN/FAULT pilot lights or if a two speed motor,

then the RUN shall be replaced with HIGH/LOW.
All starters required to be installed shall be automatic and shall be built in the Control
Panels. All starters for motors rated above 3.75 KW shall be star/delta.
2.12 SEALING OF EQUIPMENT
All unused holes in distribution boards and similar equipment shall be plugged off to
exclude dust and vermin. Where ventilation is necessary the relevant openings shall
be covered with small mesh wire screens fitted with air filter to prevent the entry of
insects and vermin, through the louvers.
All cable entry plates and covers on switchgear, distribution boards and similar
equipment shall be fitted with cork-neoprene gaskets. Doors shall be fitted with
silicone rubber or neoprene gaskets.
Insulation shall in all cases be PVC or similar non-deteriorating material.
2.13 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
All major equipment such as switchgear, distribution boards, control panels, MCCs
etc. shall be tested in accordance with relevant B.S. Copy of certificate is to be
submitted from an independent test laboratory.
Page 52 of 230
PART 3 : CABLES AND EARTHING
INDEX
3.1 General
3.2 Types of Cables
3.3 Cable Manufacturer
3.4 Identification
3.5 Installation of cables - general
3.6 Termination of Cables
3.7 Cable Sockets
3.8 Terminating glands
3.9 Cabling and Wiring Systems
3.10 Single Core PVC cables and trunking
3.11 Wiring for Final Circuits Generally
3.12 Earthing and Bonding
Page 53 of 230
3.1 GENERAL
All cables and flexible cords shall be made of copper and manufactured by approved
manufacturers. Preferably only one make of each type of cable or flexible cord shall be
used in the installations. Parallel runs of multi-core cables shall not be used. If, parallel
cables are to be used single core cable shall only be used.
Generally, PVC insulated high conductivity copper cables from distribution boards and
panel boards shall be drawn in to conduits installed in false ceiling, slabs, walls as may
be required to the various lighting points, switches and small power outlets forming
part of the installation as shown on the drawing. The minimum size of cable to be
used should be 2.5mm2.
Where XLPE armoured cables are shown, they shall be routed through ducts and
cable trays as may be required upto various panel boards equipment and distribution
boards.
3.2 TYPE OF CABLES
a. PVC Insulated Cables:
PVC insulated cables intended for installation within conduit/trunking systems

shall be copper cored insulated with PVC compound applied by extrusion and
manufactured in accordance with BS 6004. Cores shall be coloured as
detailed within the latest IEE Regulations. They shall be 450/750V grade.
Minimum size of cable used for lighting system shall be 2.5 mm2. 1.5 mm2
cable shall be used for earthing only.
Use of this type of cable shall be limited to installations where the maximum
continuous conductor operating temperature is not expected to exceed 70oC.
Where temperature are likely to exceed 70oC high temperature PVC insulated
or 85oC rubber insulated, textile braided and compounded cables shall be
used.
b. PVC Insulated PVC Sheathed Cables:
These cables shall be PVC insulated and sheathed to BS 6004 : 1969

including latest amendments. Where twin and multicore cables with integral
protective conductors are to be used the Contractor shall ensure that the size
of the protective conductor is not less than that specified for the circuit to be
installed. Cable shall be copper conductor type and shall be 450/750 volt
grade.
c. Flexible Cords:
Page 54 of 230
Flexible cords shall be PVC insulated to BS 6500: 1969, 300/500 volt grade.
They shall be circular finished with a PVC sheath.
d. Mineral Insulated Copper Cables (MICC)
Those cables shall be high conductivity copper cored mineral insulated with
copper sheath and, PVC over sheath manufactured, tested to BS 6207: 1991
and LPCB approved to BS EN 60702 - Part 1.
e. Fire Resistant Cable
For Fire Alarm installation light duty (300/500V) 1.5mm2, 2 core anealed
copper conductors, LSOH sheath cable shall be provided.
Fire resistant cable shall meet IEC 331 test requirements and shall comply to
BS 7629. The cable shall also meet BS 6387 Category, CWZ.
f. XLPE/SWA/PVC Cables
Armoured XLPE insulated multicore cables shall be manufactured in

accordance with BS 5467: 1977. They shall be XLPE insulated and bedded
single wire armoured with PVC over-sheath. Single core cables are aluminium
wire armoured. Unless otherwise stated within the specification, sheath colour
for medium voltage cables shall be black and cables shall be copper cored. All
cables of this project shall be of the same manufacture.
g. LSOH Cable
Fore smoke extract system, fireman’s lift, sprinkler pumps smoke ventilating
fans, staircase pressurisation system LSOH, 600/1000V, armoured cable shall
be provided.
Cable shall be fire resistant to IEC 331.
Cable shall comply with BS 6387 Categories CWZ and LPCB approved.
3.3 CABLE MANUFACTURER
Cables of all types shall have their outer sheath embossed to denote the voltage rating
and the name of the manufacturer.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
Each cable listed on the contractor's cable schedule or as detailed on the approved
Drawings, shall be identified by an embossed non-corrodible label securely fastened
to the cable, giving the cable schedule reference number, the cable core size, the
number of cores and the service of the cable.
Page 55 of 230
Identification shall be provided at all intersections and junctions of routes, where
cables enter or leave ducts, at 12 m. intervals along every buried cable, and at 30m
intervals where cables are in concrete trenches, cable trays or above ground as
applicable.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CABLES - GENERAL
Cables shall be delivered to site with the manufacturer's seals, labels or other proof of
origin intact. These labels and seals shall be retained for inspection by the Engineer or
his representative.
Each drum length of cable shall be allotted a distinctive and separate reference
number. This number must appear on the Test Sheets covering the respective length
of cable and must also be clearly marked on the cable drum.
The arrangements of cables and all methods of installation shall be subject to approval
by the Engineer or his representative.
Cables shall be installed in one length from terminal point to terminal point. The radius
of each bend or change in direction of the route of any cable shall not be less than the
minimum stated on the current issue of Electricity Directorate Regulations, the IEE
regulations, the relevant BS specifications, or the cable manufacturer's
recommendations whichever is the greater.
Single core cables carrying alternating current for three phase working shall be laid
strictly in accordance with the IEE regulations.
Within 14 days of the cable installation together with all jointing having been completed
the sub-contractor shall arrange for voltage tests to be carried out in accordance with
relevant testing clauses.
a. Cable direct in the ground
The contractor shall excavate trenches along approved cable routes to the
depths shown on the Contractor's approved Drawings.
All loose rock, stones and other sharp materials shall be removed from the
trench.
The Contractor shall supply washed sieved sand, cable warning tiles and
marker bases and plaques. He shall distribute these materials along the
trench route at such intervals and quantities as may be necessary.
The Contractor shall lay, level and compact sand in the bottom of the trench to
a depth of 150 mm before laying the cables. After laying the cables he shall
then cover with a further 150mm of sand, level and compact and lay approved
Page 56 of 230
cable tiles. Thermal resistivity of backfill shall be 2oC m/Watts.
The Contractor shall backfill the trench with fine selected material to a depth of
150 mm to 250 mm from the finished surface level as shown on the drawings
and compact to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall lay the
warning tape in position and then complete the backfilling and compaction to
the Engineer's satisfaction. There shall be a minimum clean cover of 350 mm
above the protective covers.
The Contractor shall accurately locate and install all route and joint marker
bases, which are to be engraved in English/Arabic. The marker bases and
plaques shall be in accordance with the Contractor's approved drawings.
The spacing between cables shall be maintained at 150mm throughout the

run. All possible precautions shall be taken to ensure that cross joints do not
occur. As soon as cables are laid, but before they are covered, the Contractor
shall accurately record the position and depth of all cables and make provision
for cable markers to be installed where necessary.
He shall then notify the Engineer so that the cables and the records are
inspected before any covering is commenced.
b. Cables in ducts
Where cables are shown on the Drawings as being in ducts, the cables shall
be drawn into ducts and manholes provided, complete with temporary
tapering wooden plugs of suitable diameter to prevent the ingress of soil into
the ducts.
The removal of temporary plugs, rodding and cleaning of the ducts shall be
carried out by the Contractor. After drawing cables through the ducts they shall
be sealed by foam.
c. Cables In Conduits
The lead and return conductor cables and all phase conductors of 3-phase
circuits shall in each case be drawn into the same conduit or trunking.
Excessive bunching of small cables in large conduits will not be permitted. For
final circuits not more than five cables shall be run in the same conduit where
this conduit is feeding outlet boxes unless otherwise indicated. Where final
circuits are being run straight back to the distribution board, not more than
eight cables shall be drawn in a single conduit.
No conduit shall enclose more cables than the number indicated in Appendix
12 of the IEE Regulations.
Page 57 of 230
d Cable in concrete trenches
Cables in concrete trenches shall be installed on a support system comprising

of suitable cable trays mounted on a heavy gauge galvanized steel channel
fixed to the walls either by rawl bolts or by projecting type expanding bolt or
cast into the walls by the Contractor.
All cables laid in enclosed trenches shall comply with IEE Regulations tables
9A and 9C.
e Cable fixed to steel work, concrete walls or Roof Slab
XLPE insulated cables installed on steelwork, concrete or roof slabs shall be

installed on suitable cables trays and supports.
All steelwork required for supporting cable trays, shall be galvanised and
painted and shall be supplied and fixed by the Contractor.
For all cables trays on roof, suitable cable tray covers as specified elsewhere
shall be provided.
f. Cable in saddles
For installation of MICC cables, suitable fixing saddles shall be used.
All runs shall be neat and free from kinks. Care shall be taken in the routing to
avoid risk of damage or interference with other equipment.
g. Cables in Manholes
Cables passing through manholes shall be laid in an orderly manner and

arranged with the minimum number of cross-overs. Adequate cable supports
shall be provided.
3.6 TERMINATION OF CABLES
All cables shall be colour coded in accordance with the IEE Regulations. In the final
sub-circuits cores shall be identified by the colours red, yellow or blue as appropriate.
Tapes and sleeves will not be permitted.
The Contractor shall allow for at least 300mm of the cable to be cut off immediately
before the termination is made. This applies to all cable ends.
3.7 CABLE SOCKETS
Where cable lugs, terminals, or sweating sockets are employed, they shall be of
correct bore to suit the cable which they are intended to connect. The cables shall be
Page 58 of 230
of a good fit in the sockets which shall be of adequate bore to contain all strands; the
filling in of surplus spaces with solder will not be permitted. All cable sockets, clamps,
etc., shall be made in strict accordance with BS 91.
Bolts and stems shall be of the correct size for the cable sockets and shall be secured
in all cases by lock nuts.
3.8 TERMINATING GLANDS
All terminating glands shall be provided by the Contractor. The glands shall be with
inner and outer seals suitable for steel wire armoured cables. The Contractor shall drill
and tap for the installation of the glands where necessary.
The glands shall be fitted with PVC shrouds and earthing rings. The Contractor shall
carry out all work involved in terminating the cables supplying cable glands, cable lugs,
PVC shrouds, tape, etc. all subject to approval of the Engineer or his representative.
3.9 CABLING AND WIRING SYSTEMS
Plastered walls shall be wired in PVC single core cables drawn into PVC conduits and
these installations shall be of the concealed, or flush type.
Wiring for fire alarm systems shall be carried out in MICC sheathed cable.
3.10 SINGLE CORE PVC CABLES AND TRUNKING
Cables drawn into trunking and conduit shall be single core PVC insulated, 450/750
Volt grade having copper conductors of not less than 2.5mm2 cross-sectional area
and complying with BS 6004.
The cables shall be looped progressively from point to point, and no joints will be
permitted.
The number and size of cables in any trunking or conduit shall not exceed that given in
the current editions of the IEE Regulations. Cables shall be installed in such a manner
that it is possible to withdraw any number from the trunking or conduit without
disturbing the remainder.
It is essential for a separate earth conductor to be drawn into the conduits, whether
those conduits are steel or PVC types.
Cables installed in vertical trunking shall be adequately supported at centers not

exceeding 3.000m.
3.11 WIRING FOR FINAL CIRCUITS GENERALLY
Page 59 of 230
PVC insulated cables in final circuits shall be subjected to the correction factors set out
by Appendix 9 of the IEE Regulations. No connections or joints shall be made in the
cable runs unless specifically agreed to in writing by the Engineer for each and every
case. Where agreed joints shall be made at fixed terminal blocks fitted in purpose
made boxes.
Final circuit wiring to be installed in areas and spaces where such wiring may be
subject to ambient temperatures in excess to that recommended for PVC insulated
wiring shall be elastomer insulated cables where the ambient temperature does not
exceed 85 degrees Celsius.
Single core cables shall be used and shall be coloured to discriminate between the
different conductors. Red, yellow, blue and black shall be used to indicate phase and
neutral cables.
A minimum length of 2.00 m of cable shall be left at each lighting or similar outlet for
connections to lighting fittings ceiling roses, etc., except where tube pendants are
required.
No reduction of the cross-sectional area of the conductors will be allowed at switch or

other terminals. Conductors shall be efficiently secured by screws, nuts and spring
washers or other proved means.
3.12 EARTHING AND BONDING
The whole of the installation shall be carried out and earthed in accordance with
chapter 54 of the IEE Regulations, and section 6 of EDD Regulations.
The Contractor shall supply, install and connect all equipment necessary for an
efficient earthing system. All copper earthing cable terminations shall be tinned. All
cables shall be PVC sheathed and coloured Green/Yellow.
A dedicated earthing system, consisting of 25x3mm copper tape, earth terminal at

each telephone room of every level, suitable earth pit etc. shall be provided for
earthing of telephone/data equipment.
In general any circuit protective conductor shall have a cross-section not less than half
of the largest line conductor which it is designed to protect.
No main bonding or equipotential link conductor shall be less than 6.0 sq. mm. The
supplementary bonding conductors will be subject to a minimum cross sectional area
of 2.5 sq. mm.
The contractor shall allow for the bonding to earth of the appropriate pipework and
ductwork of all other services as necessary.
Page 60 of 230
The interconnecting cables shall be carried out with a minimum 6.0 sq. mm. copper
PVC coloured green/yellow insulated, earth wire and earthing clips to comply with BS
951.
All electrical equipment and apparatus and accessories in the installation shall be
bonded effectively to earth by means of a standard copper conductor with PVC
insulation the size of which shall be either calculated in accordance with IEE
Regulations 543-2 or selected in accordance with 543-3.
Electrodes shall be 20 mm diameter 1200mm long copper rods of suitable combined

length when driven to such a depth that they penetrate the lowest summer ground
water table by not less than 3 metre. Combinations of rods shall be driven to achieve
the required value of resistance. Rods shall be complete with connecting ferrules,
driving caps and substantial brass tapeclamps as required. Each rod forming part of
the system shall be housed at ground level in an earth pit. The earth clamps shall be
triangular type to BS CP1013.
Where a main earth is specified this shall consist of a number of specified earth rods
driven into the ground. These rods shall be connected to each other and to the main
earth test point using triangular clamps fixed to the head of each rod and earth tape.
The earth tape shall be buried 750 mm below ground level and rise vertically along
side each rod to enter the clamp. Each rod shall have a concrete cover over it set in
flush with final ground level unless the earth rod is installed through the bottom of a
cable manhole or draw-in-pit, in which case the cover shall be permanently marked
"Electrical Earth".
All metal work, within 2 m of any switch, switched socket or other electrical outlet shall
be effectively bonded to the electrical earthing system in accordance with the current
edition of the IEE Regulations. The frames of low voltage switchboards shall be
bonded to incoming supplies and distribution cables by means of 25 x 3 mm copper
strips and all circuits trunking and metal enclosures, the sheaths of all metallic covered
cables and cases and enclosures of switchgear, fusegear. All apparatus of an
electrical nature, shall be so connected as to effectively form a continuous bonded
earthing system, directly connected to the earth point. Every copper tape connection
shall be made with not less than 10 mm diameter brass bolt and nuts and contact
faces shall be tinned.
Main switchboards shall be effectively bonded to an earth point by means of 70 sq.

mm copper tape. The connection of the tape to the earth point shall be made in a
position and manner agreed by the Engineer. A bolted link in this earthing tape shall
be provided to facilitate testing.
The entire electrical installation, together with the armouring or metallic sheathing of all
cables, shall be electrically continuous throughout forming a completely bonded earth
system.
Page 61 of 230
All apparatus or parts thereof shall be solidly connected to the cable bonding system in
an approved manner by copper conductors secured by substantial bonding clamps.
All conduits shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity for MICC cable shall be
obtained through the copper sheath and via the earth wire tinned to the pot. Earth
tapes or wires shall be used. All cable glands shall be complete with a brass earthing
ring.
The earth pole and each box of switches, socket outlets and the metallic parts of
lighting fittings shall be effectively earthed by means of cables.
Conduit boxes shall be drilled and tapped to a size not less than 2BA for earth
connections by means of a cadmium plated terminal type washer.
The contractor will be responsible to install all earth leakage protection equipment that
may become necessary, for complying with chapter 54 of the IEE Regulations.
The earthing of all metal clad fittings and accessories and the earth contact pins of all
three-pin sockets outlet shall be established by the circuit protective conductor, or by
the conduit or metal cable sheath.
Each of the electrodes when tested separately shall have a resistance to the mass of
earth not exceeding 0.5 ohm.
Page 62 of 230
PART 4 : CONDUITS, CABLE TRAYS & TRUNKING
INDEX
4.1 Galvanized Conduit and Accessories
4.2 Installation of galvanized conduit.
4.3 Conduit Boxes
4.4 Conduit Terminations
4.5 Fixings
4.6 PVC Conduits and Accessories.
4.7 Flexible Conduits
4.8 Cable Trunking
4.9 Cable Trays
4.10 Conduits on steel work
4.11 Conduits: Surface Installation
4.12 Conduits :In-situ Construction
4.13 Installation Generally
4.14 Separation of Services
4.15 Conduits at Expansion Joints
Page 63 of 230
4.1 GALVANISED CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES
Conduit, conduit accessories, boxes etc. for locations and as required elsewhere shall
be galvanised heavy gauge welded steel tube.
Unless otherwise specified the whole of conduit and conduit fittings shall be
completely in accordance with BS 4568 and shall be heavy gauge class 4 hot dipped
galvanised inside and outside.
Galvanized conduit shall be used for all conduit specified to be installed in the outdoor
open air, damp, or high-humidity situations, shafts, plant rooms, transformer room,
swimming pool area and shall be coated suitably to protect from corrosion to
Architect’s approval.
4.2 INSTALLATION OF GALVANISED CONDUIT
Conduit runs on the surface of walls and ceilings shall be fixed at a maximum spacing
of 1200mm on vertical runs and 900mm on horizontal runs by cast iron distance
saddles. Saddles shall also be fixed at 225mm either side of bends, sets and all
boxes.
Surface conduits shall be installed throughout in horizontal and vertical runs and
where several conduits follow similar routes, they shall be grouped into neat closely
spaced multiple runs.
The conduit installation shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout

and all terminations shall be made in BS conduit boxes switch and socket outlet
boxes, or in the enclosures of electrical equipment.
The ends of all conduits shall be carefully reamered to remove all burrs or sharp
edges on the inside after the screw threads have been cut.
Dirt, paint, rust or oil on the screwed threads of the conduit, sockets and accessories
must be carefully removed prior to erection. The ends of the conduit shall be cut
square and the length of screw thread shall only be sufficient to allow for the proper
butting of the ends of the conduit. Running joints in conduit shall be reduced to a
minimum and a locknut shall be used to secure the socket.
Vice marks shall be removed and covered with the zinc paint to prevent the formation
of rust, and all exposed screw threads at running joints shall be covered with a suitable
primer immediately after erection.
Where conduits cross expansion joints, the Contractor shall allow for the installation of
expansion couplers at the position of the expansion joints.
Earth connections shall be run between the nearest conduit box each side of the
coupling by drilling and tapping the back of each conduit box to a size not less than
Page 64 of 230
M4.0 and making the earth connection by means of a terminal washer and brass
screws.
Where conduit pass from inside of the building to the outside, free circulation of air
shall be prevented by the insertion of a conduit box which shall be filled with a plastic
compound. All exposed conduits to be painted to match the surrounding finishes to
Architect’s approval.
4.3 CONDUIT BOXES
No elbows, bends or tees, solid or inspection type shall be used, junctions being made
at malleable iron circular junction boxes manufactured in accordance with BS:31 Class
B.1 (standard) and Class B.3(loop-in) or BS 4568 (Metric).
Boxes shall be drilled and fixed securely. Raised back circular junction boxes shall be
used for all surface conduit work.
Boxes shall be provided with cast iron lids secured by No. M4.0 brass roundhead
screws.
Standard boxes with spout outlets shall be used in shallow ceiling voids. Loop-in
boxes shall be used in deep ceiling voids.
Adaptable boxes of non-standard size shall be constructed of not less than number 12
SWG sheet steel with welded corner or best quality cast iron of appropriate thickness
without knockouts and finished to match that of the adjacent conduits.
All boxes shall be of size suitable to avoid undue packing of cables and minimum
space of 12 mm must be left between any two conduit holes.
In each spout or socket the thread shall be formed to the full length of the fitting.
4.4 CONDUIT TERMINATIONS
All conduit terminations shall be either (a) in long threaded spouts in conduit boxes
incorporating a shoulder for the proper butting of the conduit, or (b) in clearance holes
as may be provided on switch-fuses, fuseboards, adaptable boxes, nonspouted switch
boxes etc. Where conduits terminate in clearance holes the Contractor shall provide a
socket, a lead compression bush and a brass male bush for each termination.
4.5 FIXINGS
Fixing shall not be less than 38mm No.8 wood screws with plastic plugs in concrete or
blockwork and not less than 25mm No.8 wood screws in structural timber. No fixing
shall be made to building boards or to plaster, but only to concrete, blockwork, timber,
structure and breeze or tile partitions. Boxes which are used as point boxes, and all
switch and socket outlet boxes shall be fixed by means of two No.8 wood screws.
Page 65 of 230
Boxes for surface conduit from which fluorescent fittings are suspended, shall be fixed
by means of a small expanding metal device.
Countersunk stainless steel screws shall be used for fixings where special
countersunk holes have been drilled or provided. Roundheaded stainless steel screws
shall be used for other fixings. Screw heads shall have burrs and sharp edges
removed before wiring commences and the Contractor shall ensure that screws are
driven into their correct depth.
Where conduits are attached to steelwork, the Contractor shall provide clips
individually designed for the size of the conduit and the size and section of the steel
member.The spacing shall be as described in connection with saddles.
Conduits concealed in walls shall be fixed in chases by galvanizing crampets.
Fixings for use with galvanized conduit shall be galvanized spacing saddles or
suspension clips. Where special fixings or straps require to be used they shall be
painted with one coat of red lead oxide paint and one coat of oil-bound or acrylic paint
before fixing and after all necessary drilling and forming have been completed.
4.6. PVC CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES
Conduits in plaster and concrete shall be a heavy gauge type 'A' super high impact
P.V.C. smooth inside and outside. It shall be coloured white and comply with BS: 4607
'Non-metallic Conduits and Fittings for Electrical Installations', Part I. The conduit and
conduit accessories shall be of Egatube Limited, Decoduct or approved equal
manufacture and the manufacturer's installation instructions shall be deemed to form
part of this specification.
PVC conduits shall be free from imperfections and not smaller than 20mm diameter.
The conduit shall be protected from mechanical damage and climatic conditions
during transport and whilst stored on site.
PVC conduit and accessories shall be fully protected to prevent the ingress of
moisture, plaster, dust or any other foreign matter during the construction work.
No conduits shall have more than two right angle bends in any run, nor installed in
runs of more than 10 meters without the interposition of a draw box.
The installation shall be fitted with circular junction boxes or adaptable boxes and not
tees, elbows,or manufactured bends unless permission is given by the Engineer. All
joints in the conduit installation shall be glued.
Conduits shall not be concealed before inspection and shall be complete before
having cables drawn in. Concealed conduits shall be run in such a manner that
where run in concrete, no movement takes place when the concrete is poured. The
Contractor shall ensure that when the pouring is carried out the conduits are not
Page 66 of 230
damaged.
All conduit boxes shall be standard circular white rigid PVC to B.S where applicable,
fitted with overlapping circular lids secured in position with brass screws, and shall
have plain bored entries. Where two or more conduits run parallel, the boxes shall be
of the adaptable type having dimensions adequate for the number of conduits
entering. The edge of each conduit box shall be flush with the finished surface.
Socket outlet boxes and switch boxes shall be of galvanised steel.
Conduits to be installed in floor slabs shall be securely fixed to shuttering or reinforcing

bars.
4.7 FLEXIBLE CONDUITS
Flexible conduits, where called for specifically, shall be of metal construction with PVC
finish.
Effectiveness of earthing shall not be dependent upon the continuity of the metal and a
separate earth conductor shall be run throughout the conduit for this purpose.
Flexible conduit shall be terminated on to the equipment concerned by means of

purposely manufactured fittings as supplied by the conduit manufacturer.
Where conduits are specified to be connected to apparatus or plant having a definite

movement, vibration or requiring adjustment in their position (e.g. motors, motorised
valves, insertion thermostats, dampers, pressure switch) flexible conduits and fittings
of metallic type to BS 731 shall be provided. Each end shall be provided with an
internally rifled split brass adaptor or sweated with timman's solder into threaded brass
sweating glands and shall terminate in a suitable size brass double female adaptor
box and fixed motor type connector.
Earth continuity through flexible conduits shall be provided by a separate green/yellow

coloured PVC covered copper stranded earth-wire of appropriate size drawn into the
flexible conduit. The brass adaptors specified shall be drilled to enable the earth-wire
to be drawn out at each end when the earth wire shall be soldered to the brass
adaptors to alternatively positively connected to a substantial earth terminal. Where
the flexible is connected to plant (e.g. motors) the earth-wire shall be minimum 1.5 sq.
mm. The protective conductor shall be drawn into a flexible conduit and connected
externally and visibly to terminals on the two boxes.
No flexible conduit shall exceed 600 mm nor be less than 300 mm unless otherwise
specified.
No conduit shall be smaller than the equivalent of 20mm size.
Page 67 of 230
4.8 CABLE TRUNKING
Cable trunking shall consist of butting sections constructed from 1.6mm minimum,
high grade sheet steel rust-proofed by hot dip galvanizing after manufacture to BS EN
ISO 1461 (BS 729) . The lids shall be made from the same material and shall be
removable over the whole length of the trunking and secured at centres not greater
than 450 mm by cadmium plated mushroom head screws or similar. These screws
shall locate into 'hank bushes' fixed in the trunking. The trunking shall be provided with
lips on its opening side to form a tray and clips shall be inserted at centres not greater
than 600mm to retain the cables in position when the lids are removed. Where
trunking is mounted with the openings in the downward direction the two sides of each
component shall be provided with lips.
Cables connected to supplies emanating from different sections of the main

distribution switchboard shall not be installed in the same trunking.
Adjoining lengths of trunking shall be correctly aligned and the two sides at right
angles to the cover shall be joined to its corresponding side of the adjacent trunking by
means of an internal fishplate connector not less than 1mm thick attached by means
of not less than No.8 cadmium plated steel mushroom headed 4.76mm screws
passing through clearance holes, shakeproof washers and nuts. Two pairs of screws
on either side of the joints shall be connected by tinned copper braids with split
soldering washers under the nuts, to provide electrical continuity across the
joints.Trunking shall be fixed to walls with No.12 roundhead wood screws of length
depending on the material in which the fixing is made.
All tees, reducers and angles for trunking shall have folded and welded fillet type
corners.
Internal fire barriers of appropriate rating shall be provided where trunking passes
through walls and floors forming fire zones within the building and where trunking
connects to fuseboards and switch units.
Where cables are in the same trunking compartment and connected to different
distribution fuseboards i.e., single phase and three phase power circuits, they shall be
distinguished by separating the cables with insulated distance pieces or taping
together at intervals of 1.80m with a marker or disc for ease of identification.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary supporting devices for trunking and
adequate allowance shall be made for expansion and contraction of long runs of
trunking and at expansion joints in the building structure.
All G.I. trunking proposed to be installed shall be manufactured completely in

accordance with BS 4678 Part 1: 1971.
All exposed G.I. Trunking shall be painted to match the surroundings to Architect’s
approval.
Page 68 of 230
Cavity floor trunking to be supplied shall be in 2 metre lengths, divided in to 3
compartments (350mm x 60mm). The lid shall be fixed by means of quick release
clips. The sides of the trunking shall have 3 nos. 25/20 mm knock outs at every 1.0mt
interval to allow conduit connection to remote 3 compartment service out let boxes.
Fly-over must be provided where a conduit connection to a remote service out let box
is required.
Connection to remote outlet boxes shall be using PVC coated GI flexible (Kopex)
conduit and accessories.
4.9 CABLE TRAYS
Multiple runs of XLPE or MICC cables shall be fixed by clips onto perforated cable
trays of adequate width for disposing the cables at single depth with a width allowance
of 25%, for additional cables. The trays shall be galvanised heavy duty type with a
50mm return on both edges.
The cable tray shall be fixed to the wall or ceiling by means of expanding bolts. Where
fixed to a wall, a suitable packing shall be inserted behind the tray so that it is 50mm
away from the wall. The fixings shall be spaced not more than 90mm apart.
Where cable trays are required to be fixed horizontally the Contractor shall make
allowance for approved brackets and supports as indicated on the drawings in
positions where steelwork is not being provided.
Cable trays shall be manufactured from 1.6mm minimum galvanised sheet steel in
accordance with BS EN ISO 1461 and B.S. 729.
All tees, intersections, vertical or horizontal bends shall be purpose made units by the
manufacturer. All cable tray supports shall be of the ample strength to support cables
and shall be at centres in order to prevent sagging of the tray.
Allowance shall be made for the expansion and contraction of the cable trays at all
corners junctions, accessory positions etc.
Manufacturer’s name shall be embossed on every section of cable tray.
The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the installation of cable trays regarding
the alignment of all runs. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to check at
tender stage the runs of all cable trays in relation to structural restrictions.
All cable trays to be installed on roof shall be complete with 16 SWG solid flatcovers
with flanges and shall be suitably painted to Architect’s approval.
Page 69 of 230
4.10 CONDUITS ON STEEL WORK
Where conduits are specified to be fixed to structural steelwork they shall be fixed by
approved purpose-made clips to or be in lieu of support spacer saddles. Such clips
shall designed for the size of conduit and the size and section of the steel member.
All conduit boxes including boxes on and in which fittings are mounted shall be
securely fixed to the building fabric by means of not less than 2No. countersunk
screws correctly placed. The fixing holes shall be countersunk to obviate the screw
heads projecting into the box.
4.11 CONDUITS: SURFACE INSTALLATION
Where conduits are specified to be installed on the surface they shall be fixed by
means of spacer bar saddles or distance spacing saddles or suspension clips which
shall allow the conduit to be run into all accessories thereby obviating special sets or
bends for the purpose. The contractor shall pay particular attention to the "Protection
against corrosion of exposed metalwork of wiring systems" as outlined in Appendix 10
of the IEE Regulations.
4.12 CONDUITS: IN-SITU CONSTRUCTION
These conduits shall be solidly fixed at each end before entering conduit fittings or
apparatus. No sockets or fittings shall be used along the lengths of these runs in free
air.
Conduit boxes shall be laid on the concrete shuttering and held in place in an
approved manner so that they are rigidly fixed while the concrete is being poured.
The Contractor shall arrange for a competent person to be in attendance during the
pouring operating to ensure that damage to the conduit does not occur and that
conduit is in sound condition and is properly and efficiently installed.
4.13 INSTALLATION GENERALLY
All conduit shall be run in an approved manner with adequate ventilation as directed
by the Engineer or specified herein.
The capacity of all installed conduits shall comply with the recommendations stated in
Appendix 12 of the IEE Regulations. No conduit of less than 20mm diameter shall be
used. All conduits in walls, slabs etc. shall be considered as GI Conduit.
In all situations, conduits shall be firmly screwed into all fittings. In each case the total
length of the thread shall be engaged in accordance with the Table I of BS 31. Ring
type locking nuts shall be used where necessary. All conduit ends shall be cut clean
and reamered and all burrs shall be removed.
Page 70 of 230
The whole of the conduit system in any particular section shall be completed and
swabbed through to remove any dirt or loose matter before cables are drawn-in.
Where conduit is installed in concrete slabs or in spaces formed in hollow floors and
are required to cross other conduit or obstruction each conduit shall be set to form the
minimum possible diversion.
Each conduit system shall be mechanically and electrically continuous throughout to

ensure that each cable is fully protected and where heavy gauge conduit is specified,
to ensure that the installation is watertight.
The conduit installation shall comply in all respects with Chapter 52 of the IEE
Regulations. During the erection of the conduits, the sub-contractor shall carry out
tests to check the impedance in accordance with IEE Regulations Part 6 and shall
record full particulars of the tests and submit a copy of each record to the Engineer at
regular intervals specified by him. Earth loop testing apparatus shall be used for the
tests.
Special care shall be taken to prevent dirt of rubbish entering the conduit work during
the erection. Screwed metal caps or plugs only shall be used for protecting open
ends. Plugs of waste, wood, paper, etc. shall not be used.
Except where specified to be fixed on the surface, all conduit shall be concealed in
ceiling voids, ducts and pipe shafts or installed in chases in the construction fabrics
behind applied finishes.
The position of all wiring points and the route and arrangements of each cable and
conduit shall be marked out on site by the sub-contractor for the agreement of the
Engineer prior to the commencement of installation. No additional payment will be
allowed by the Engineer for the running of cables or conduits out of the direct line.
4.14 SEPARATION OF SERVICES
Lighting, power, and any other services shall be run in separate conduits and no wiring
associated with one service shall be installed in any conduit box or enclosure
containing wiring associated with a different service.
Where it is not practicable to maintain adequate clearance between conduit and pipes
for other services, contact shall be prevented by the installation of insulation, heat-
resistant distance pieces or sleeves.
Where it is not possible to prevent contact with any other pipes or metalwork an
efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduits and
the metalwork subject to the prior agreement by the Engineer.
In all situations where a concealed conduit leaves a ceiling, floor or wall a joint shall be
Page 71 of 230
made so that the conduit coupling is left accessible at or near to the point where the
conduit becomes exposed.
4.15 CONDUITS AT EXPANSION JOINTS
Where it is necessary for a conduit to be installed and cross an expansion joint formed
in cast in-situ concrete, the conduit shall terminate flush with the face of the joint and at
one side of the joint in a screw-to-slip solid coupler. The conduit shall bridge the joint
from the other side of the joint to engage the slip section of the coupler to allow not
less than 12 mm movement in the conduit without separation in the continuity of the
conduit. Between the ultimate conduit boxes installed on each side of the joint an
earthing conductor shall be installed within the conduit of coloured green/yellow PVC
covered copper of size determined in accordance with Section 543 of the IEE
Regulations and secured to the back of each box with number 2BA screws and
suitable connectors.
Page 72 of 230
PART 5 : SWITCHES, ISOLATORS AND CONTACTORS
INDEX:
5.1 Time Switches
5.2 Weatherproof 13A Socket Outlets
5.3 Weatherproof Switches
5.4 Lighting Switches
5.5 Dust tight covers
5.6 Final Circuit Switches
5.7 Fused Spur Boxes: Switches
5.8 Fused Switches, Switch fuses and switches
5.9 Local Isolation Switches
5.10 Socket Outlets: Switched
5.11 Final Circuits: 13 AMP Socket Outlets
5.12 Telephone Outlet Boxes
5.13 AC contactors.
5.14 Mounting of Control Equipment and Isolators
Page 73 of 230
5.1 TIME SWITCHES
Time switches shown on the drawings shall be of the programmable quartz type
equipped with digital display and be capable to control one or multi outputs/channels.
The time switches shall be equipped with a 24 hr memory back up in case of mains
failure, weekly programs of maximum 30 minutes switching interval and manual
override. Where these time switches are shown to be mounted on control panels
these shall form an integral part of the control panel and be readily accessible for each
operation. Each time switch shall be marked accordingly and set by the Contractor to
operate at the times indicated by the Engineer.
5.2 WEATHERPROOF 13A SOCKET OUTLETS
Where socket outlets are shown to be exposed in the outdoor open air or installed in
plant room, these shall be square pin to BS 1363, weather and dustproof, galvanized
and of the surface mounted type. All weatherproof socket outlets shall be of the
switched pattern unless otherwise shown on drawings and shall be IP 65 rated.
They shall be of the screwed type cap on chain and they must be provided complete
with 13A fused plug-tops.
5.3 WEATHERPROOF SWITCHES
Where lighting switches are shown to be exposed in outdoor open air or installed in
plant room, these shall be 15A SP, weather and dustproof, galvanized and of the
surface mounting type and shall be IP 65 rated.
5.4 LIGHTING SWITCHES
All switches controlling the lighting in switchrooms and plantrooms and surface
switches shall be of metal clad finish fixed on epoxy coated G.I. boxes of surface type.
For flush installations the lighting switches shall be 15 amp rated and complete with
earth terminals and moulded white plastic cover plates.
All switches are flush type and the boxes shall be of adjustable grid pattern unless
otherwise specified. Each switch shall be provided with an integral means of
effectively earthing the switch dolly to the box and to the conduit. At each position
where lighting switches are grouped, a multiple-gang box shall be used.
All switches to be positioned 1.30 m above finished floor at center line, and must be
located on the opposite side of the door hinges, unless otherwise specified elsewhere.
Client’s/Architect’s approval for the switches mounting height shall be obtained.
Page 74 of 230
5.5 DUST TIGHT COVERS
The lids or covers of all boards, isolators, boxes, etc., which are subject to the effects
of outside air are to have dust tight gaskets fitted to prevent the ingress of fine
windblown sand.
5.6 FINAL CIRCUIT SWITCHES
Generally switches shall be of the AC only type in metal boxes with adjustable grid for
flush work and cover plate of the overlapping type of white plastic finish and securely
fixed to the walls by at least two screws.
5.7 FUSED SPUR BOXES :SWITCHES
Switched fused spur boxes shall comprise a SP switch and removable fuse cartridge
to BS 1363 with overlapping cover plate finished to match the lighting assemblies, all
mounted in cast iron or pressed steel boxes. The fuse cartridge in each spur box shall
have the correct rating for the apparatus to which it is connected. Switched fused spur
boxes shall be of the same manufacture as the socket outlets.
5.8 FUSED SWITCHES, SWITCH FUSES AND SWITCHES
Fused switches, switch-fuses and switches shall be of the type actuated by a quick
make-and-break movement, the spring being in tension or compression only during
the operation of making or breaking contact. Switch contact slips shall be of phosphor
bronze and mounted on individual porcelain bases, enclosed in cases of cast iron or
pressed steel with hinged dust-tight lids interlocked with the switch section to prevent
opening with the switch closed or closing the switch with the lid open and suitable for
conduit entry.
Neutral links shall be of bolted-down, switched pattern and enclosed in the same case
as the switch-fuse or switch.
All connections shall terminate in substantial mechanical clamps.
All switch fuse unit located outdoor shall have enclosures protected to IP 65
(minimum) rating.
All switch fuses and fuse-switches shall be fitted with ASTA Certified HRC standard
cartridge fuse links to comply with BS 88.
5.9 LOCAL ISOLATION SWITCHES
Where specified these shall be of the air break pattern with the appropriate number of
HRC fuses if applicable, the whole enclosed in a surface mounting metal or agreed
moulded plastic case of robut construction or iron clad case as appropriate. The
mechanism shall be provided with a positive interlock.
Page 75 of 230
All isolators located outdoor shall have enclosures protected to IP 65 (minimum)
rating.
Isolator switches positioned on equipment at the remote end of feeder cables shall be
provided with solid links
5.10. SOCKET OUTLETS: SWITCHED
All general purpose switched socket-outlets shall be 13 amp 3 pin shutterd sockets
with neon indicator controlled by a single pole switch conforming to BS 1363.
For flush installations the socket outlets shall be of white moulded plastic finish.
All socket outlets are to be complete with plug tops of the same manufacturer.
5.11 FINAL CIRCUITS: 13 AMP SOCKET OUTLETS
Generally 13-amp socket outlets shall be served by a ring circuit having conductors of
the size specified or agreed and both ends of the ring brought into the terminal of an
RCBO in the appropriate distribution board.
5.12 TELEPHONE OUTLET BOXES
Boxes for telephone outlets shall be of deep pattern to accommodate 4 numbers 25

mm conduits.
For telephone outlet locations as shown on drawing. RJ 45 outlet in moulded white

plastic cover plate shall be provided.
5.13 AC CONTACTORS
AC contactors indicated to be installed to control certain services as shown on drawing

shall be of the "Block type" enclosed pattern appropriate for the voltage operation
specified. Enclosure and reactive ratings shall apply where appropriate and generally
to a maximum of 50%.
Contactors shall comply with BS 775 and shall be for AC3 class duty.
Those for general purposes, or lighting, depending upon their requirement shall have
the number of main contacts and neutral links of a continuous current rating to the
associated circuit indicated on the drawings.Full allowance shall be made for any de-
rating necessary to cater for tungsten loads.
For arc control, contactors shall be provided with de-ion splitter type shields and all
moving and fixed contacts shall be silver faced.
Page 76 of 230
Magnet assemblies shall be of the normally open clapper type, energised by a coil
connected via a low voltage A.C control circuit.
Each contactor together with its associated magnet assembly terminals, contacts, coils
and transformer shall be mounted on an insulated sub-base which shall be contained
in a totally enclosed metal box of heavy construction.
The control circuit shall be switched in the AC section and one extra auxiliary contact,
whether or not used initially, shall be fitted in each contactor.
Stud type terminals shall be mounted on a substantial base for external circuits.
Cables shall be connected to terminals by means of solder or compression type lugs.
Fuses shall be provided within the contactor enclosures for protecting the coil circuits.
Mains failure changeover contactors shall be generally in accordance with the

requirements of contactors given above and be complete with integral isolators.
They shall be 4 pole, rated as required, of 500volt grade and be suitable for mixed
general purpose with significant motor loads.
There shall be two auxiliary contacts, "normally open" and also an additional contact
for the standby contactor external indicating lamp.
The mains contactor shall have a red indicator lamp and the standby contactor shall
have an amber lamp each of the "pretest " transformer type mounted on the front
cover of the enclosure to indicate when the relative contactor is closed.
Each contactor shall have a DC coil and magnet system fed via an integral rectifier
suitable for operation on single phase and neutral AC.
Each changeover type contactor unit shall have a "mains" contactor and "standby"
contactor which shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked. Auxiliary contacts
and intermediate relays shall be provided to ensure that a "standby preference"
arrangement is obtained i.e, when either a "mains" or "standby" contactor is closed,
changeover will only occur when the supply is no longer available to the "closed"
contactor and also the other supply is already available or is made available to the
"open" contactor.
All contactors shall be of the same manufacture.
5.14 MOUNTING OF CONTROL EQUIPMENT AND ISOLATORS
The local load break isolators shall be mounted on the wall or on a purpose made floor
stand adjacent to equipment with operating handle padlocking facility. Isolators shall
not be mounted on equipment enclosure.
Page 77 of 230
PART 6 : FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
INDEX
6.1 Scope
6.2 Codes & Standards
6.3 Environment & Electrical Parameters
6.4 System Features
6.5 Control Panel
6.6 Repeater Panel
6.7 Microprocessor System
6.8 Outputs
6.9 Alarm Monitoring Fuctions
6.10 Multisensor Detector
6.11 Associated Ancillary Equipment
6.12 Installation
6.13 Commissioning
6.14 Training
6.15 Maintenance
Page 78 of 230
6.1 SCOPE
This specification covers design, manufacture,, delivery to site, commissioning and

performance testing of intelligent, microprocessor based fire detection, alarm,
annunciation and control system.
The contractor shall furnish, install and place in operating condition, an electrically
operated, electrically supervised, microprocessor based fire detection, alarm,
annunciation and control system as described herein. The system shall include, but
shall not be limited to, central processing unit, liquid crystal display, built-in printer,
power supplies, fire alarm initiating and indicating devices of analogue addressable
types repeater panel and cabling and accessories to provide a complete operating
system. In addition, the system shall be linked the HVAC system and the Lifts.
The supplier of the system must have, at least, 15 years experience in designing,
installing, commissioning and servicing of fire detection and alarm system, at least 10
of which must be with analogue addressable systems.
6.2 CODES & STANDARDS
Where applicable, the fire detection and alarm system, and installation, shall comply
fully with the following British Standards and/or other nominated rules and regulations:
 BS5839 Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings:
 BS5839: Pt.1: 2002 Code of practice for system design, installation and
servicing.
 BS5839: Pt.2: 1983 Specification for manual call points.
 BS5839: Pt.4: 1988 Specification for control and indicating equipment.
 BS5345: Pt.1: 1989 General recommendations.
 BS5445 Pt. 7: Components of automatic fire detection systems.
 BS5445: Pt.1: 1977 (EN 54: Pt.1: 1976) Introduction.
 BS5445: Pt.5: 1977 (EN 54: Pt.5: 1976) Heat sensitive detectors - point
detectors containing a static element.
 BS5445: Pt.8: 1984 (EN 54: Pt.8: 1982) Specification for high temperature
heat detectors.
In addition, the following definitions shall apply :
1. Fire Routine :
Page 79 of 230
The action to be carried out on incidence of a fire alarm, which shall be
agreed with the local fire authorities. This includes the method of operation of
the fire alarm system, including the system responses and stages and
interaction with other related systems.
6.3 ENVIRONMENT & ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS :
The control and indicating equipment shall operate on a mains power supply of:
240 V a.c. +10% -6% @ 50 Hz + 2 Hz
The control and indicating equipment, standard power supply unit and standard
repeater unit shall comply with the following environmental conditions:
Operating temperature range: -10 C to +55 C

Storage temperature: -20 C to +65 C
Relative humidity: up to 95% RH
(non-condensing)
IEC protection category: IP21 minimum
6.4 SYSTEM FEATURES :
The control and indicating equipment shall form the central processing unit of the
system, receiving and analysing signals from fire sensors, providing audible and visual
information to the user, initiating automatic alarm response sequences and providing
the means by which the user interacts with the system.
The control and indicating equipment shall be modular in construction to allow for
future extension of the system.
The control and indicating equipment shall be easily configurable so as to meet the
exact detection zone and output mapping requirements of the building.
The control and indicating equipment shall be microprocessor based and operate
under a multitasking software program. Operating programs and configuration data
must be contained in easily up-datable non-volatile memory (EEPROM).
The control and indicating equipment shall incorporate a real-time clock to enable
events to be referenced against time and date. This clock shall be accurate to within 1
minute per year under normal operating conditions.
It shall be possible for an engineer to perform configuration updates on site by

plugging a portable personal computer into the control and indicating equipment.
Configuration data shall be retained on a micro-floppy disk.
The company responsible for the installation shall operate an approved document
Page 80 of 230
control system for the retention of configuration data.
The control and indicating equipment shall meet the requirements of BS5839 Part 4
and shall be approved, together with associated ancillary equipment, by the Loss
Prevention Council Board (LPCB).
The control and indicating equipment shall comprise separate processors, cross-
monitoring each others correct operation, for the major functions of the systems. In
particular, different processors must be used for the main control function, the
detection input and alarm output functions, and the display and control function.
To ensure continuous stability of the system, the setting of the address code in each
addressable device shall be by a rotary switch in the detector base or smart card
technology.
For analogue addressable detectors, the address code shall be set in the base to
prevent unauthorised and potentially dangerous reconfiguration of the system.
It shall be possible to use passwords to prevent unauthorized use of manual controls

of the control and indicating equipment.
The Control Panel shall provide a 24v DC o/p and volt free relay contacts for remote
signaling devices.
Local audio alarm at the control panel shall distinct for fire detection alarms and fire
protection system alarms.
It shall be possible to override delayed alarm signals to the Local Civil Defence
Authorities (if required) by call points designated for evacuation purposes.
In case of power failure the systems shall automatically switch over to battery back-up.
6.5 CONTROL PANEL
The Control Panel shall be a 4 loop addressable panel with the following features as
indicated below. One of the loops shall be kept as spare for future use.
 The control and indicating equipment shall monitor the status of all devices on
the addressable loops for fire, short-circuit fault, open-circuit fault, incorrect
addressing, unauthorised device removal or exchange, pre-alarm condition
and contaminated detector condition.
 The control and indicating equipment shall monitor the status of all internal
connection and interfaces, including charger, battery and remote signalling
functions.
Page 81 of 230
 The control and indicating equipment shall provide the following discrete visual
indications:
POWER ON green LED indicator

FIRE ALARM dual red LED indicator
FAULT yellow LED indicator
DISABLED/ISOLATED yellow LED indicator
FIRE ZONES red LED indicator per zone
 The control and indicating equipment shall provide record of all alarm,
supervisory, and trouble events by means of memory on the panel and down
loaded to laptop computer. The print out shall include the type of signal, the
device identification, date and time of occurrence. The print out differentiates
alarm signals from all other printed indications.
 In addition to the indications provided, the control and indicating equipment

shall also have an integral 80 character back list LCD alphanumeric display.
In order that an easy identification of different information is provided, the LCD
display shall be arranged as follows:
Row 1: Event type

Row 2: Zone message
Row 3: Addressable point message
Row 4: Circuit identifier/Point number/Zone number and Number of
events in the system.
 The control and indicating equipment shall provide a set of push button
controls to enable an authorised operator to perform the following:
EVACUATE (actuates ALL alarm sounders in the system)

SILENCE (stops all currently actuated alarm sounders)
RESET (returns the control and indicating equipment
to quiescent condition)
 The control and indicating equipment shall provide a facility to manually check
all the discrete LED indicators. This shall be clearly marked LAMP TEST and
be accessible at all time.
 The control and indicating equipment shall provide a simple to operate keypad
to enable a user to access the various built-in functions, and interact with the
information displayed on the LCD. For security reasons, the control and
indicating equipment shall provide a customer configurable password code
facility for the following levels of access:
User Operator
. User Manager . User Engineer
Page 82 of 230
. Specialist Engineer . Specialist Engineer Supervisor
 Alarm Company Engineer
 The control and indicating equipment shall provide facilities to drive visual
indication LED mimic displays for each of the following zonal status:
Alarm
Fault
Isolated
 The control and indicating equipment shall provide facilities for signalling the
following system conditions to a remote (Central Station) and/or an on-site
monitoring centre. For this an RS 485 interface module PCB to be provided in
the panel.
Alarm
Pre-alarm
Fault
Zone Isolated
 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of monitoring and

controlling remote site devices, such as door release units and relays for the
control of plants and dampers, directly from the addressable loops.
 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of monitoring fire doors
such that, in the event of a fire alarm condition, an event is generated to warn
of the failure of a fire door to close. The Contractor shall allow such provision
even though it may not be shown on the drawings. Sprinkler flow switches, if
any, shall be connected even though it may not be shown on the drawings.
 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable to link to the main Fire
Alarm Monitoring System. Contractor shall limit cabling to Data cabinet
installed in PABX room.
6.6 REPEATER PANEL
Repeater Panel to be proposed shall be passive type, compact and low profile
designer and flush mounting type.
Repeater panel to be provided shall be with 2 x 40 character back lit LED and shall
repeat the LCD and LED indications of the main panel board. The panel shall also
allow the operator to command the system using the system control push buttons. For
additional security, a key switch shall be provided on the front of the repeater panel to
enable/disable certain push buttons. Test functions such as edit normal message,
lamp test, LCD test and buzzer test shall be possible through repeater panel.
Page 83 of 230
Repeater panel shall comply with EN 54 Part 2 requirements.
6.7 MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM
The control system and indicating equipment shall incorporate the following system
management facilities:
. Isolate/re-connect a particular addressable point

. Isolate/reconnect a particular detector zone
. Isolate/re-connect a particular sounder zone
. Walk-test of a selected zone to verify detectors and sounders
. View the number of alarms since power up
. View the number of software initialisations since power up
. View common alarm status
. View common fault status
. View common disabled status
. View zonal alarm status
. View zonal fault status
. View zonal isolated status
. View point address status
. Print event log
. Print points isolated
. Print points in detector Condition Monitoring fault
. Print point statuses.
Access to the facilities shall be restricted to User Engineer level or above.
The control and indicating equipment shall have an event log capable of storing up to
the last 500 events that have occurred. It shall be possible to view the content of the
log via the alphanumeric display. Events shall be displayed in chronological order in
any of the following three options:
. Newest event first

. Oldest event first
. Highest priority event first.
The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of providing audible and visual
warning when a weekly system test, as defined in BS5839: Pt.1: 2002, is required.
Page 84 of 230
The control and indicating equipment shall be capable, by means of software, of
isolating a group of selected detectors in areas of the building where maintenance
work is carried out. The detectors shall be automatically re-instated after a pre-
determined time.
The control and indicating equipment shall have a facility to enable the user to easily
change the time and date settings of the system real-time clock.
General indication & display
General display shall incorporate an assigned area for zone indication with indicators
for each zone arranged in accordance with the manufacturer's standard design.
A display diagram shall be provided. The diagram shall include a representation of the
building with a clear display of all areas covered by the fire alarm system including the
details of building entrances, circulation areas, escape routes and the division of
zones.
Display diagram shall be permanently labelled on an acrylic sheet and displayed next
to the main panel / security room.
6.8. OUTPUTS
The sounders to be provided shall be loop powered type and with strobe.
The control and indicating equipment shall be able to monitor and control the integrity
of sounders, sounder flashers via. addressable loop and address.
The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of providing a two-stage alarm
sounder facility that can be programmed, either on a zonal basis or common system
basis, to meet the requirements of the fire authority.
The control and indicating equipment shall have the facility to change, on a per
sounder zone basis, the sound output dependent upon whether the source of alarm is:
An automatic detector, for example smoke or heat

A manual call point,
An EVACUATE command, or
A non-fire event, for example plant alarm etc.
The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of generating customer

definable time delay sequences to upgrade alarm sounder responses, without the
need for external timers, as follows:
Silent to Alert
Alert to Evacuate
Silent to user defined tone.
Page 85 of 230
The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of operating voice alarm units
and monitoring the integrity of the wiring connection to individual sounders/speakers.
The control and indicating equipment shall provide an interface to drive a public
address system as described in section 9.2 of BS5839: Pt.1: 1988. The system shall
be arranged such that, in the event of a failure of the public address system, back-up
sounders are available to alert or evacuate the relevant areas of the protected
premises.
6.9 ALARM MONITORING FUNCTIONS
The control and indicating equipment shall interrogate each addressable device at
least once every 2 seconds.
The control and indicating equipment shall incorporate fire decision algorithms
specifically adapted to the response characteristics of the analogue addressable
detectors employed.
The algorithms mentioned shall perform a trend analysis of the signal received from
the analogue addressable detectors in order that non-fire events may be differentiated.
The control and indicating equipment shall be designed so that, for each type of
analogue addressable detector, the overall response time, including that for the
sensor, the signal transmission system and the fire decision algorithm, meets the
requirement of the relevant part of BS5445 (EN54).
The response time of the control and indicating equipment to two-state addressable
detectors and conventional detectors shall not exceed 10 seconds.
The control and indicating equipment shall have a special scanning sequence so that
designated manual call points provide alarm indication and warning within 1 second of
operation.
The control and indicating equipment shall have a facility to automatically adjust the
sensitivity of analogue detectors to a higher level for periods of time when the building
is unoccupied.
The control and indicating equipment shall have, as an optional software

enhancement, the ability to annunciate a pre-alarm condition designed to give the
earliest possible warning of a potential fire condition without raising the full alarm
condition.

enhancement, the ability to automatically adjust the alarm and pre-alarm threshold
levels to compensate for changes in detector sensitivity due to contamination over a
period of time.
Page 86 of 230
enhancement, the ability to provide automatic warning that a detector has reached a
level of contamination which requires that it be replaced or serviced.
6.10 MULTISENSOR DETECTOR
Multisensor detector shall comprise of optical smoke and thermistor temperature

sensors. The outputs shall be combined to give a final analogue value.
The Multisensor detectors shall be designed in accordance with the functional

requirements of BS5445: Pt.7: 1984 (EN54: Pt.7).
The Multisensor detectors shall have a sensitivity sufficient to be classified as 'B' or

better in BS5445: Pt.9: 1984 (EN54: Pt.9) test fires TF2 to TF5 inclusive and as 'C' in
test fire TF1.
The Multisensor detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Prevention
Council Board (LPCB).
6.11 ASSOCIATED ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT
1 Addressable Manual Call Points
The addressable manual call points shall monitor and signal to the control and
indicating equipment the status of a switch operated by a 'break glass'
assembly.
The addressable manual call point shall meet the requirements of BS5839:
Pt.2.
The addressable call points shall be capable of operating by means of thumb

pressure and not require a hammer.
The addressable call points shall be capable of being mounted in weather-

proof affording protection to IP65.
The addressable call points shall incorporate a mechanism to interrupt the

normal addressable loop scan to provide an alarm response within less than 1
second.
The addressable call points shall be field programmable to trigger either an

alert or an evacuate response from the control and indicating equipment.
The addressable call points shall be capable of being tested using a special
'key' without the need for shattering the glass.
The addressable call points shall provide an integral red LED to indicate
Page 87 of 230
activation.
2. Sounder Beacon
Multi-tone sounder beacon shall be provided for Mall area. It shall have a
sound output of 100 dB (A) and shall be with a powerful multiple LED flash
giving both audible and visual alarm in the event of an outbreak of fire.
3. Sounder
For enclosed rooms like electrical rooms, plant room and offices electronic
sounders shall be provided.
4. Addressable Relay Output Module
The addressable relay output module shall provide a volt free changeover
relay contact operated by command from the control and indicating
equipment.
The contacts of the addressable relay output module shall be rated at a

minimum of 1Amp at 24 V d.c.
The addressable relay output module shall monitor the relay coil for open-
circuit and transmit the fault signal to the control and indicating equipment.
The addressable relay output module shall be capable of deriving its operating
power from the addressable loop.
The addressable relay output module shall provide a red LED indication that
the relay has operated.
5. Addressable Contact Monitoring Module
The addressable contact monitoring module shall provide monitoring of the

status of switched input signals from either normally open or normally closed
contacts.
The addressable contact monitoring module shall provide a red LED indication
when the contact has operated.
The addressable contact monitor module shall be capable of deriving its

power directly from the addressable loop.
6. Addressable Sounder Driver Module
Page 88 of 230
The addressable sounder driver module shall be capable of monitoring and
driving a circuit of alarm sounders.
The output of the addressable sounder driver module shall be rated at 500mA.
The addressable sounder driver module shall be capable of operating the

sounders in a pulsing or continuous mode as determined by the control and
indicating equipment.
The addressable sounder driver module shall provide the facility to monitor the
wiring to the sounders for open or short-circuit and transmit the necessary fault
signal to the control and indicating equipment.
The addressable sounder driver module shall provide the facility to monitor for
failure of the power supply for the sounders and transmit the necessary fault
signal to the control and indicating equipment.
The addressable sounder driver module shall provide a red LED indication
that the sounder circuit has been actuated.
A maximum of 25 Nos. addressable sounder driver modules shall be in a

detector loop.
7 Sounder Booster Module
The sounder booster module shall be capable of monitoring and a driving a

heavy duty circuit of sounders up to 15 Amps.
The sounder booster module shall be capable of interfacing either to the

common sounder outputs of the control and indicating equipment or to the
output of the addressable sounder driver module.
The sounder booster module shall be designed to maintain the monitoring of

the sounder circuit and transmit a fault signal either via the addressable
sounder driver module or directly to the control and indicating equipment
8 Line Isolator Module
The line isolator module shall provide protection on the addressable loop by
automatically disconnecting the section of wiring between two zones where a
short-circuit has occurred.
The line isolator module shall derive power directly from the addressable loop.
The line isolator module shall provide an LED indication that the module has
tripped.
Page 89 of 230
9 Remote Indicator Module
The remote indicator module shall provide a remote indication for any
conventional or analogue addressable detector that may be located in an
enclosed or locked compartment.
The remote indicator module shall be driven directly from its associated local
detector.
The connection to the remote indicator module shall be monitored for open
and short-circuits.
6.12 INSTALLATION
1 General
Correct installation, combined with the use of high quality equipment,

components and cabling, ensures that the fire detection and alarm system
shall operate as designed and provide many years of trouble-free service.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall install the alarm system in accordance with the
documented installation instructions.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall provide all relevant installation documentation
required for each component of the system.
Installation of the system shall be in accordance with the recommendations

set out in BS 5839: Pt 1: 1988 (Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings
- Code of practice for system design, installation and servicing) and BS 7671
(Requirements for Electrical Installations - IEE Wiring Regulations, Sixteenth
Edition).
The Fire Alarm contractor shall be responsible for the correct siting of all
equipment and components of the system in accordance with previously
agreed plans and drawings.
All cabling and wiring shall be tested before they are connected to the fire
controller and its associated devices.
WARNING If the tests are carried out after the cables and wires have been
connected to the controller and its devices, components within the controller
and the devices will be damaged by high voltages used during testing.
2 Materials
All cabling and wiring to be used in the system shall be fire resistant cable
manufactured to BS 7629 and approved to BSI and LPCB specifications for
Page 90 of 230
use in fire detection and alarm systems.
Wiring used for driving devices requiring high currents (e.g. bells, etc.) shall
limit the voltage drop to less than 10% of the nominal operating voltage.
Cables used for the transmission of system data and alarm signals shall be in
accordance with the types recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm
system.
The ends of all cables shall be sealed by means of proprietary seals and
associated glands. No heat shall be applied to any seal or termination. Cable
tails shall be insulated by means of blank PVC sleeving anchored and sealed
into the seal.
Where protection of the cable glands is required or terminations are on

display, the glands shall be enclosed in red coloured shrouds of the
appropriate British Standard colour.
All cables to brick/concrete shall be securly fixed by means of copper saddles

sheathed with red PVC. These saddles shall be provided near bends and on
straight runs at intervals no greater than recommended in the British
Standards or by the manufacturer.
Where multiple cables are to be attached to a wall or soffit, copper saddles

shall enclose all cables and shall be secured by means of suitable masonry
plugs and two round head plated woodscrews.
Where multiple cables are to be attached to the top of horizontal trays they
shall be neatly run and securely fixed at suitable intervals. Copper or plastic
cable fixings shall be used.
At detector and sounder locations, cables shall be terminated in approved

black enamelled/galvanised BESA or MI Clamp type junction boxes. All other
devices forming part of the system shall utilise dedicated /custom back boxes.
3 Installation of Detectors
All detectors (and bases) shall be installed in accordance with guidelines set
out in BS 5839: Pt 1: 1988, BS 7671 and the installation instructions provided
by the manufacturer.
All detectors shall be installed in the exact locations specified in the design
drawings; thus providing the best possible protection.
The type of detector installed in each particular location shall be the type
specified in the design drawings.
Page 91 of 230
All detector bases shall be securely fixed to BESA boxes and allow for easy
fitting and removal of detectors.
Cable and wire entries to detector bases shall be fitted with grommets to
prevent possible damage to the insulation.
Cable and wire strain relief clamps shall be provided at all entries to detector
bases.
Cable entries of detector bases used in environments with abnormal

atmospheric or operating conditions shall be appropriately sealed to prevent
ingress of dust, water, moisture or other such contaminants.
4 Installation of Control Devices
All control devices (e.g. call points, sounders, interface modules, etc.) shall be
installed in accordance with the guidelines set out in BS 5839: Pt 1: 1988, BS
7671 and the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer.
All control devices and associated modules shall be installed in the exact
locations specified in the design drawings.
The type of control device installed in each particular location shall be the type
specified in the design drawings.
All control devices and associated modules shall be securely fixed, and if
required, marked with appropriate notices, warnings, signs as applicable.
Cable and wire enteries to all control devices and associated modules shall be
fitted with grommets or glands so as to prevent possible damage to the
insulation.
Cable and wire strain relief clamps shall be provided at entries to control
devices and associated modules as required.
Cable entries of control devices and associated modules used in

environments with abnormal atmospheric or operating conditions shall be
appropriately sealed to prevent ingress of dust, water, moisture or other such
contaminants.
5 Installation of Fire Controller Equipment
The fire controller equipment shall be installed in accordance with the

guidelines set out in BS 5839: Pt 1: 1988, BS 7671 and the installation
instructions provided by the manufacturer.
The fire controller and its associated component parts shall be installed in the
Page 92 of 230
location specified in the design drawings.
The type of fire controller and its associated component parts installed shall be
the type specified in the design drawings.
The fire controller equipment shall be securely fixed, and if required, marked
with appropriate notices, warnings, signs as applicable.
Cable and wire entries to the fire controller and associated devices shall be
fitted with grommets or glands to prevent possible damage to the insulation.
Cable and wire strain relief clamps shall be provided at entries to fire controller
and associated devices as required.
The fire alarm system mains power connections to the fire controller
equipment shall be accordance with the guidelines set out in the relevant
British Standards and the installation instructions provided by the
manufacturer.
The fire alarm system mains power isolating switch shall be coloured red and
clearly labelled ‘FIRE ALARM: DO NOT SWITCH OFF’.
Each circuit of the system shall be connected to the fire controller via
associated fuse or circuit breaker devices located within the fire controller unit.
All cables from the fire controller equipment to the detection and alarm devices
shall be clearly labelled as part of the fire detection and alarm system.
6.13 COMMISSIONING
1 General
Both the installation and the commissioning activities shall be undertaken as a

single continuous operation.
Upon completion of the installation activity, the Fire Alarm contractor shall
Test, Start-up, Commission and Handover the system to the customer.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall make use of the following documents to record
test results and details of commissioning tests:
Cable Test Sheets

 Installation Check Report
 System Layout Drawing(s)
Page 93 of 230
 System Schematic Diagram(s)
In addition, Point Description Sheets which are used to configure the text
descriptions displayed at the controller must be returned to the Fire Alarm
contractor 21 days prior to the date agreed for commencement of
commissioning. Copies of Point Description Sheets are provided to the
customer upon receipt of the order for the fire system.
2 Testing and Start-up
The Fire Alarm contractor shall be responsible for inspecting and testing the
complete system, including:
1. Detectors
2. Call Points
3. Sounders
4. Ancillary Devices
5. Fire Controller Equipment and Associated Devices
6. Auxiliary Equipment (e.g. Plant Interface Module, etc.)
7. Operating and Control Software.
The fire controller and associated devices and modules shall be tested in
accordance with the guidelines set out in BS 5839: Pt 1: 1988 and the testing
instructions provider by the manufacturer.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall start up and operate the system for a trial
period to ensure that it operates correctly.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall test all functions of the system, including the
software, to ensure that it operates in accordance with the requirements of the
design specification and relevant standards.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall undertake audibility tests during which the
sounders may be operated continuously over a period of two hours. (Should
the customer require these tests to be carried out at a separate visit, or out of
normal working hours, this can be arranged at additional cost.)
3 Commissioning
Commissioning of the system shall constitute practical completion
Following the satisfactory completion of installation, testing and start up, the
Fire Alarm contractor shall demonstrate to the customer that the system
Page 94 of 230
successfully performs all of the functions set out in the design specification.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall provide the customer with an agreed quantity
of spare parts testing equipment and consumables which are to be used
during routine maintenance and testing of the system.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall provide a customer appointed fire system
supervisor with on-site training in the use, operation and maintenance of the
system and explain the procedures to be followed in the event of fire and false
alarms. The system supervisor shall also be shown how to carry out routine
maintenance and testing procedures, and how to keep the Log Book.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall prepare a report detailing all tests performed
during installation and commissioning of the system. The report shall include
the results of the tests and details of any specific settings or adjustments
made. Any outstanding tasks or activities which are to be completed at
another time shall also be included in the report.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall present an Acceptance Certificate for

signature by the customer.
4 Handover
The Fire Alarm contractor, upon completion of the commissioning activity,

shall hand over the system to the customer.
At the time of hand over, the Fire Alarm contractor shall provide the customer
with the following documentation:
1. Copy of detailed report.

2. Component and equipment list
3. Product description sheets
4. System design specification
5. System design drawing(s)
6. System schematic diagram(s)
7. System operating and service manuals
8. Certificate of certification
9. Fire system users handbook, containing log book, routine
maintenance instructions and schedules
10. Remote monitoring link description and operating instructions (if this
option was provided).
Page 95 of 230
6.14 TRAINING
1. General
The Fire Alarm contractor shall provide the customer with details of the training
required by personnel to operate and maintain the fire detection and alarm
system.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall provide two levels of training:
System Supervisor Training

Other Staff Training
The Fire Alarm contractor and the customer shall jointly agree the number of
staff to attend the training courses.
2 System Supervisor Training
System supervisor training shall include technical training sessions provided at

the Fire Alarm contractor’s premises and on-site training given during
installation and commissioning of the system.
System supervisor training shall be given by an experienced and competent

engineer familiar with the fire system being installed.
The scope of training provided shall depend on the type, size and complexity
of the system.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall initially provide technical training in all aspects
of the system. The trainee shall then be given full instructions in the use,
operation and maintenance of the system. This shall include instruction in the
procedures to be followed in the event of fire and false alarms, routine
maintenance and testing procedures, and how to keep the Log Book.
3 Other Staff Training
Other staff training shall include training sessions provided on-site after hand
over of the system.
The training sessions shall be given by an experienced and competent

engineer familiar with the fire system installed.
The scope of training provided shall include full operating instructions in the
use of the fire system. This shall include instruction in the procedures to be
followed in the event of fire and false alarms.
Page 96 of 230
6.15 MAINTENANCE
1 General
According to the recommendations in BS 5839: Pt 1: 1988 (clause 29), fire

systems should be regularly maintained under a maintenance agreement.
Fire and planning authorities, and in certain cases insurers, have powers to
check that fire systems are maintained. Failure to maintain the fire detection
and alarm system could contribute to death or injury in the event of fire.
The customer shall be responsible for ensuring that daily, weekly and monthly
routine maintenance is carried out in accordance with the recommendations
set out in BS 5839: Pt 1: 1988 and the service and maintenance instructions
provided by the Fire Alarm contractor or manufacturer.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall provide detailed information about the
maintenance services which can be provided after hand over of the system.
If requested, the Fire Alarm contractor shall prepare and submit a draft
maintenance contract for consideration by the customer.
The draft contract shall include complete details of all materials and labour
required to maintain the system in correct working order. It shall also include
details of the testing procedures which will be carried out and specify the
proposed number of visits per year.
2 System Spares
The Fire Alarm contractor shall provide a detailed list of the system spares
which should be kept on-site for maintenance of the system.
Although the quantity of each item required is dependent upon the type and
size of installation, the system spares which should be considered for inclusion
in the list are as follows:
Multi-Sensors
Call Points
Sounders
Beacons
Door Retention Units
Fuses
The draft maintenance contract shall also include details of the system spares
which are be kept on-site for maintenance of the system.
Page 97 of 230
The Fire Alarm contractor shall guarantee the availability of all system spares
for a period of not less than ten years.
3 System Test Equipment
The Fire Alarm contractor shall provide a detailed list of the system test
equipment and consumables required on-site to maintain the system in
perfect working order.
As the quantity of each item required is dependent upon the type and size of
installation, the system test equipment and consumables which should be
considered for inclusion in the list are as follows:
Detector Head Removal Tool

Detector Base Skirt Removal Tool
Call Point Testing Tool
Detector Test Smoke Canister
Detector Test Adaptor
Aerosol Dispensing Tube
Extension Tubes
Spare Log Book
The draft maintenance contract shall also include details of the system test
equipment and consumerables which are be kept on-site for routine
maintenance and testing of the system.
The Fire Alarm contractor shall guarantee the availability of all system test
equipment and consumables for a period of not less than ten years.
Page 98 of 230
PART 7 : STANDBY GENERATOR SET
INDEX
7.1 General Requirement
7.2 Performance Requirement
7.3 Environment
7.4 Operation
7.5 Engine
7.6 Lubrication System
7.7 Cooling System
7.8 Inlet Air System
7.9 Diesel Fuel System
7.10 Exhaust System
7.11 Alternator (Generator)
7.12 Coupling System
7.13 Mounting Arrangement
7.14 Battery
7.15 Starting and Battery Charging System
7.16 Generator Control Panel
7.17 Generator Circuit Breaker
7.18 Automatic Transfer Switch
7.19 Bypass Switch
7.20 Foundation
7.21 Vibration Isolators
Page 99 of 230
7.22 Tools
7.23 Shop Drawings
7.25 After Sale Product Support
7.26 Acceptance
Page 100 of 230

7.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
a) The contractor shall supply, install and connect a 300 KVA (240.0 KW)
standby emergency diesel generating set, of the latest design complete with
diesel engine, generator, control panel, automatic transfer switch, starting
battery, radiator, exhaust piping, silencer, day tank and all other accessories in
Garage & Maintenance Building Generator Rooms.
b) The set shall be the automatic mains failure type for the continuous usage
during the interruption of EDD Power Supply.
c) The engine and generator shall be the product of one manufacturer who has
been engaged in the design and production generator sets for a minimum
period of 15 years.
d) The set shall work continuously with 10% overload.
e) The contractor shall indicate the nearest locations from which service facilities
and spare parts may be obtained.
f) The equipment furnished under this section shall be guaranteed for a period of
two years from the date of commissioning.
g) The generator set shall receive the manufacturer's standard test certificate.
7.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT

Output rating at 50oC 240.0 KW
Power factor 0.8
Duty type Standby
Rotative speed 1500 RPM
Frequency 50 hertz
Voltage 400/230
Phase 3 Phase, 4 wire
Type of excitation Brushless
7.3 ENVIRONMENT
All equipment shall be designed and suitably furnished for operation at 0 to 50oC
temperature.
Humidity – up to 95% to 98% relative humidity at a temperature in the range of 0 to

40oC.
Altitude - sea level.
Air Salinity – high.
Page 101 of 230

All equipments shall be designed for ambient temperature of 50oC.
7.4 OPERATION
Operation of the mains failure emergency generating set shall be as follows:
a) On a mains failure on one or more phases the generator set shall get a start order
with an adjustable time delay of 0 to 10 seconds. On expiry of time delay the
generator set shall start automatically and power shall be available within 15
seconds at which the automatic transfer switch shall transfer the emergency load
to the generating set.
b) The set shall remain running until the mains voltage is restored and then the load
is transferred after the expiry of an adjustable time delay of 0-15 minutes. The
engine should then go to a cool down period of adjustable time 0-15 minutes
before locking out with over crank indication.
c) Should the engine fail to start at first attempt four more starting attempts of 7-10
second duration shall be made with 15 seconds interval between successive
attempts, and before locking out with over crank indication.
7.5 ENGINE
The engine shall be Turbocharged, Water cooled Diesel engine, 4 stroke, 1500 RPM.
The engine shall be equipped with filters for fuel, lube, oil, Air intake etc., oil cooler, fuel
transfer pump and gear driven jacket water pump.
The engine governor shall be mechanical governor integral with fuel injection pump.
Class A1, 4% Speed droop and shall confirms to BS 5514.
Safety shut offs for Low Oil Pressure, High water Temperature, Over speed and
Failed to start shall be provided.
7.6 LUBRICATION SYSTEM
The engine lubrication shall be forced lubrication system. The lubrication oil pump
shall be a positive displacement type pump and integral with the engine and is gear
driven from the engine gear train. The system shall includes full flow filtration, oil
cooler etc.
7.7 COOLING SYSTEM
Water cooled with set mounted Radiator. Blower type fan. Blower type fan with fan
cowl and hand protection guard. Radiator shall be extended to the exhaust shaft with
metallic duct. Flexible section shall be provided at the point where the duct is
connected to the radiator. Suitable louvers on exhaust shaft as per Engineer’s details
Page 102 of 230

shall be provided.
Gear driven Engine Jacket water pump. The temperature of the cooling circuit shall
be controlled by Thermostat valves. The radiator shall be designed to cool the engine
at the specified temperature upto 50OC.
7.8 INLET AIR SYSTEM
The engine air cleaners are to be engine mounted with dry element. There shall be
service indicator on the filter housing which will give necessary indications when the
service is required for the air filter elements. The air inlet system shall consist of
turbocharger of axial turbine type driven by engine exhaust gases.
7.9 DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM
The fuel system consists of primary fuel filter, engine mounted fuel filter, injection
pumps, line and nozzles. The fuel supply to engine shall be maintained by a base
mounted fuel tank with capacity of 1000 Litres for a minimum of 8 hours operation.
The tank shall be supplied complete with contents indicator, fuel fill cap with breather
and strainer, fuel feed and return lines to the engine.
7.10 EXHAUST SYSTEM
a) A residential type exhaust silencer, including flexible exhaust fitting, properly sized
shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendation. The silencer
shall be mounted so that its weight is not supported by the engine. Exhaust pipe
size shall be sufficient to ensure that exhaust back pressure does not exceed the
maximum limitations specified by the generator manufacturer.
b) The muffler and all indoor exhaust piping shall be lagged by the contractor to
maintain a surface temperature not to exceed 150oF (65.5oC). The insulation shall
be installed so that it does not interfere with the functioning of the flexible exhaust
fitting.
7.11 ALTERNATOR (GENERATOR)
The Alternator shall be brushless, 300 KVA, 415/240 Volts, 3Phase, 50HZ, 1500
RPM, revolving field, solid state, single bearing, close coupled with the engine and with
enclosure of IP 23 rating. Voltage regulation shall be Volt/Hertz for fast response to
the load. Voltage regulation shall be +/-1% from no load to full load. The Windings
are to be with Class H insulation with tropicalisation.
7.12 COUPLING SYSTEM
The Engine and Generator shall be close coupled design of unit construction which
forms engine and generator into one unit of exceptional strength and perfect
alignment. The generator housing shall be directly bolted to the engine flywheel
Page 103 of 230

housing. The engine torque is transmitted through flexible disc to the generator rotor.
7.13 MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
The complete generator set shall be mounted as whole on a heavy duty fabricated,
welded steel base frame. Heavy duty bonded compound anti-vibration mountings
shall be affixed between the engine/alternator feet and the base frame. The fan, fan
drive and battery charging alternator shall be fully guarded for personal protection.
7.14 BATTERY
a) NICKEL CADMIUM storage battery to be used in conjunction with the electric

starting system shall be provided. The battery shall be rated by the battery
manufacturer in accordance with requirements set forth by the engine
manufacturer. A battery rack and necessary connection cables and clamps shall
be provided.
b) Automatic static battery charger shall be provided in side the A.T.S panel with
necessary connection to keep the batteries always on charge either from the
mains or from the generator.
7.15 STARTING AND BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM
Engine starting shall be by means of engine mounted 12 Volts DC starting motor. The
starting motor shall automatically disengage once the genset is started. The battery
charging is by means of 12 volts DC charging alternator.
7.16 GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL
The generator control panel shall be the set mounted control panel in a vibration
isolated sheet enclosure with hinged lockable door. The control panel shall be
equipped as follows:
a) Instruments
AC Voltmeter
AC Ammeter
Combined Frequency and Tachometer
Hour run meter
Coolant temp. gauge
Oil pressure gauge
DC Voltmeter
b) Controls
Auto/Manual/Off Selector switch

Voltmeter phase selector switch
Page 104 of 230

Ammeter phase selector switch
c) Safety shut down and indications for:
Low oil pressure

High water temperature
Over speed
Failed to start
Emergency stop
7.17 GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER
A 500A 3 pole MCCB shall be mounted on the set in a sheet steel box with adequate
access for incoming and outgoing cables.
7.18 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
ATS panels shall be provided in Electrical Room.
The ATS panel shall be metal enclosed free standing type panel, and shall consists of:
2 Nos. 500A 4 pole motorised MCCBs, both mechanically and electrically interlocked.
Adjustable Mains voltage sensing Relays.
Delay on start timer (adjustable) - Prevents the generator set starting on momentary
Mains interruption or during transient Mains voltage excursions.
Generator Voltage Sensing relay (adjustable).
Delay On transfer Timer (adjustable) - Allows Generator set to stabilise before transfer
of load to it from the failed or out of limits Mains supply.
Delay on transfer Timer (adjustable) - Keeps the load on Generator set until the
restored Mains supply stabilises.
Cool down Timer - Allows the generator to run at No load after transfer of the load to
the restored Mains supply.
Internal maintenance Control Switch.
Indications for:
Mains Available.
Mains on load
Generator Voltage available.
Generator on Load.
Page 105 of 230

7.19 BYPASS SWITCH
A manual BYPASS switch, 4 Pole, 500A shall be provided to by-pass the main supply
to the load in case of ATS maintenance.
7.20 FOUNDATION
The contractor has to prepare a concrete foundation as per the manufacturer's

recommendation.
7.21 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
Spring type of vibration isolators are to be fixed in between the generator set base
frame and foundation. Vibration springs shall be designed to BS 1726 (Part 1): 1987.
7.22 TOOLS
A complete set of tools necessary for the routine maintenance of the set shall be
provided.
7.23 SHOP DRAWINGS
The contractor shall submit shop drawings for the generator set including all the
installation details of the genset, foundation details, louvered openings for fresh air
intake, ventilation requirements etc for approval.
7.24 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Generator shall be tested and commissioned at site as per manufacturers standard

practice in Engineer’s and Client’s representative’s presence.
The operation of all the protective circuit and safety shut off shall be checked.
Generator windings shall be megger tested. Proper functioning of the automatic
transfer switch shall be checked. Necessary load bank for carrying out the load test to
be arranged by the contractor.
7.25 AFTER SALE PRODUCT SUPPORT
a) The generator supplier shall maintain a local parts and service facility in Bahrain.
b) Books and instructions - on completion of the installation, start-up shall be

performed by the generator set manufacturer or trained dealer service
representative. Parts books covering the engine, generator and major auxiliary
equipment shall be provided to the owner. Procedures on operating and
maintenance of the standby power system shall be explained to operating
personnel.
Page 106 of 230

c) Warranty - Equipment furnished under these specification shall be guaranteed
against and defective parts and workmanship under terms of the manufacturer's
and dealer's standard warranty. In no event it shall not be less than a period of 2
years from the date of commissioning of the system and shall include labour and
travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.
d) Schedule oil sampling - In order to forecast and minimize engine downtime, the
supplier of the equipment must provide an oil sampling analysis kit which
operating personnel shall utilize for scheduled oil samplings.
e) System service contract - The generator dealer should have the arrangement for a
system service contract and it is upto the owner's option to accept or refuse.
However, the Manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule for standby
generator sets shall be supplied by the supplier.
7.26 ACCEPTANCE
Final acceptance shall be made when the generator set has successfully completed
the on - site tests and after all defects in installation, material or operation have been
corrected. Test certificate from an independent authority shall also be submitted before
the final acceptance of the generator set. The manufacturer shall indicate in writing
that they have local representation or agent in Bahrain who can maintain and service
the units and who will stock a supply of commonly used spare parts.
Page 107 of 230

PART 8 : LIGHT FITTING
INDEX
8.1 Minimum Standard
8.2 Guarantee of Standard
8.3 Supply Voltage
8.4 Interference Suppression
8.5 General Requirements
8.6 Lamps, Tubes & Accessories
8.7 Recessed Mounted Light Fittings
8.8 Lighting Installation
8.9 Protection of Fluorescent Fittings
8.10 Emergency Lighting
Page 108 of 230

8.1 MINIMUM STANDARD
The light fittings indicated on the drawing specify the minimum standard requirements.
The light fittings proposed to be installed shall be superior as regards design,

construction, materials finish, performance and safety to the lighting fittings of
minimum standards.
8.2 GUARANTEE OF STANDARD
The Contractor shall guarantee that all light fittings, allowed for in his tender, comply
fully with the requirements of this specification.
8.3 SUPPLY VOLTAGE

The supply voltage for the light fittings will be 230V, 50Hz.
8.4 INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION
All light fittings to be provided by the Contractor shall be fitted with suppression devices
to avoid interference to radio and television reception. All fittings to be supplied shall
confirm to the relevant safety requirements of the EC council directives on
electromagnetic compatibility and low voltage. All fittings to be supplied with CE
marking on its label.
8.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The design of light fittings shall provide adequate ventilation and proper temperature
conditions of the fixture. All light fittings should be provided with earth terminal and
must be internally wired to terminal block. All internal wiring of the fixtures shall be of
the heat resistant type. High frequency electronic ballast shall be used for the light
fittings.
All fittings proposed to be installed for the project shall be suitable for the intended
application.
The light fittings shall comply with BS 4533 and BS 2818.
Samples of all fittings proposed to be installed shall be submitted for

Architect's/Engineer's review/comments.
8.6 LAMPS, TUBES AND ACCESSORIES
All light fittings should be provided complete with lamps, fluorescent tubes, switch
start/high frequency electronic ballast and fixing accessories as applicable to each
item.
In general the fluorescent tubes should be of 26 mm diameter standard type, with high
Page 109 of 230

efficiency Triphospher lamp.
The PL and fluorescent lamps to be installed shall have a colour temperature of

4000oK and shall have colour rendering index Ra > 85.
The control gear of all fluorescent, compact fluorescent and discharge lamp fittings
should be of the high power factor > 0.85.
Tungsten filament lamps shall comply with BS 161, latest edition, and fluorescent
tubes shall comply with BS 1853, latest edition.
All flourescent fittings shall be of the switch start type, with heavy duty, high power
factor control gear, electronic starter and supplied with cable termination blocks
suitable to terminate two 4.0mm2 cables.
8.7 RECESSED MOUNTED LIGHT FITTINGS
All light fittings specified to be recessed shall be suitable for mounting on suspended
ceiling and must be provided with all necessary fixing accessories. The contractor
should check with the Engineer the type of false ceiling and determine the exact finish
of the fixture prior to place any order.
8.8 LIGHTING INSTALLATION
From the appropriate distribution boards PVC insulated cables shall be drawn into
conduits and cable trunking installed to the various lighting points, switches, and other
equipment forming part of the lighting installation as shown on the drawings. Final
circuit and or flexible cables or cords for the connection of lighting fittings shall be in
accordance with the following:
Fitting on Pendants PVC insulated and sheathed or Butyl

rubber insulated.
Fittings, ceiling mounted PVC insulated and sheathed or Butyl

open (lamps not exceeding rubber insulated.
150 Watts).
Fittings totally enclosed. Silicone rubber insulated.
Fittings with lamp load Silicone rubber insulated.

between 150W and 200W
External Flood Light Silicone rubber insulated.
For recessed fittings, and wherever possible surface mounted fittings, the cabling or
conduit system shall terminate in a BS conduit box. Ceiling roses comply with BS
5733 shall be of plug in type.
Page 110 of 230

Alternatively the cabling or conduit system for surface fittings to final connection shall
terminate in a BS conduit box. Wiring shall terminate in the box with a connector and
fittings which do not overlap the boxes shall be provided with a break joint ring.
The cabling or conduit system for pendant fittings shall terminate in the box with a
connector and a flexible cord run to the lamp holder.
Where ceilings comprise accoustic tiles suspended on metal structure or plaster board
on expanded metal lathe suspended more than 100 mm from the underside of the
structural floor or roof the conduit shall be bent-formed from the underside of the
structural floor or roof to a 50 mm fixing centres conduit circular BESA box fitted flush
with the underside of the plaster.
1 No. BESA box shall be installed where the connection is required for fluorescent
lighting fittings at centres appropriate to the fixing centres of the fittings to be installed
except in case of 8' fluorescent where 2 No. BESA boxes shall be installed.
Where the light fittings are specified to be fitted flush with the underside of the
suspended ceiling the principle stated above in respect of surface mounted light fittings
shall apply also to the conduits and conduit fittings and flexible cables in association.
Where a switch is fixed out of sight of the lamp or point which it controls, it shall be
identified in an approved manner.
8.9 PROTECTION OF FLUORESCENT FITTINGS
All fluorescent light fittings and discharge lamp fittings should be equipped with internal
HRC fuse of appropriate fuse rating for protection of luminaire wiring.
8.10 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Emergency light fittings shall be as specified, comprising a rechargeable nickel

cadmium battery, for 3 Hr. duration and fuse terminal block and tube.
Emergency light shall operate automatically in the event of the failure of supply or
rupture of the local circuit fuse.
Labelling for emergency exit lights should be in both Arabic and in English.
Page 111 of 230

PART 9 : STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
INDEX
9.1 Responsibilities
9.2 System Description
9.3 Materials
9.4 UPT Cabling.
9.5 Data Backbone
9.6 Patch Panels.
9.7 Patch Cord
9.8 Cabinet.
9.9 Installation.
9.10 Labelling and organisation.
9.11 Testing.
9.12 Warranty.
9.13 Records
Page 112 of 230

9.1 RESPONSIBILITIES
1. MEP Contractor is responsible for coordination and approval from Local

Authority.
2. The proposed solution must be the latest available technology for the structure
cabling system.
3. The Specialist Contractor shall install complete end-to-end system solution as
detailed in the following sections.
4. The proposed solution must be provided with a minimum of 15 years
performance warranty for the full bandwidth.
5. Wherever the standards (EIA/TIA, Cenelec, ISO) are not ratified, the latest
“Draft” shall be referred.
6. All components pertaining to structured cabling system shall be manufactured
by one OEM and mixing of components from different manufacturers shall not
be accepted.
7. Installation shall meet Client requirements for Voice/Data Distribution and shall
confirm to Local Authority Requirements. Contractor to obtain approval on
drawings from Local Authority.
8. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing conduiting and trunking
system including internal wiring, and external cabling, all to Local Authority
approval.
9. The solution must meets specifications laid down by ISO 11801 (2002),
EIA/TIA 568B and EN50173 (2002) Structured Cabling Standards and its
latest amendments.
10. The installation shall be based on open distribution architecture supporting
high-speed networks of the present as well as future requirements for data
and voice applications.
11. The installed cabling system shall be in compliance with EIA/TIA 568B
Commercial Building Wiring standards.
12. The Scope of Work of this project is to Supply, Install, Terminate, Test, and
Document a Structured Cabling Network for the Building.
13. The distributed structured cabling network infrastructure will emanate from the
Main Distributor located in the Main Server Room at the Second Floor. The
IDF has been located at every floor.
9.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. System shall have MDF (19”) for data distribution in Main Server Room for
riser cables.
2. IDF (Floor Distribution) shall be in IT Hub rooms. IDF shall be located as
required based on the distance limitation for horizontal cables. The IDF shall
constitute of RJ45 Patch Panel housed in industry standard 19” cabinet. Size
of IDFs shall be meet the Specialist vendor requirements.
3. Redundant 24 core single mode armoured fiber optic cables shall be installed
between MDF and IDFs as data backbone.
4. It is proposed to have a uniform Horizontal Cabling System based on Cat 6
Page 113 of 230

Plus UTP cabling for Work area with outlets and Patch panels compliant to the
ISO and EIA/TIA specifications.
5. For all the user areas the Horizontal UTP cabling shall be capable of
supporting data, voice, video or any other service/standard protocol specified
in the ISO and EIA/TIA standards.
6. Modular RJ45 Socket Outlets with shutter modules shall be installed in each
work area as required. The Modular Jack shall use Insulation Displacement
Connection with 8 pins and be wired as per EIA/TIA 568B standards.
7. The outlets shall be labeled as per standard labeling scheme, in consultation
with Client requirement. The Client coordinator at the site shall mark the exact
location of the outlets before the installation is to begin.
9.3 MATERIALS
All equipment shall be from a single manufacturer and shall have 15 years warranty.
9.4 UTP CABLING
1. Independent runs of 4 Pair Cat 6 Plus UTP, LSZH (Low Smoke Zero
Halogen) cable shall be laid from outlet up to the Patch Panel mounted inside
the cabinet.
2. These cables shall be laid through conduits or trays provided in a concealed
manner by the contractor at site. As far as possible, external ducting shall be
avoided.
3. The routing of the UTP cables shall be planned to avoid fluorescent fixtures
and other possible EMI sources.
4. The cables shall be dressed and neatly organized in the trays and at the Patch
Panel location, using cable ties and arranged properly prior to termination.
5. The cables shall be clearly marked at either end using cable markers, few
centimeters away from the termination point to enable easy identification and
trouble shooting during maintenance of the network.
9.5 DATA BACKBONE
1. There shall be a single run of 24 core (125.0 + µm) single mode LSZH fibre
optic cable laid from the Building Distributor (MDF) to each IDFs in the
respective floors.
2. The fibres are terminated with SC Connectors on Rack mount fibre patch
panels at both ends.
3. The fiber optic cable shall be tight buffered, indoor type, LSZH when used
within the building and outdoor type, rodent protected when used to connect
between the buildings.
9.6 PATCH PANELS.
1. Patch Panels mounted inside the Cabinet shall be used for the termination of
all Horizontal cables on the distribution side.
Page 114 of 230

2. The cables shall be terminated in these Panels in order of sequence as per
numbering.
3. The termination, including the data outlets and the Horizontal UTP at the
Patch Panels shall be carried out according to Category 6 specifications as
per EIA/TIA standards.
4. Proper care shall be taken with regard to the following:
 To keep the PVC jackets as close to the termination point as possible.
 To avoid untwisting of individual pairs for more than 13mm
 To maintain the overall twisting of pairs
 To Terminate as per Colour Coding of 568B type of wiring at the outlet &
patch panel.
 Grounding of Patch panel & Rack.
9.7 PATCH CORD
1. Cat6 UTP Patch cords as per design shall be included for the Patch Panel
ends and the Patch panel Cords for Outlet ends.
2. Fibre Patch Cords to be included in the ratio of 1 duplex patch cord for each
fibre link.
9.8 CABINET
The Contractor to install 42U height, free standing cabinet at MDF & IDF locations as
shown on Layout Plan. This cabinet shall house the Patch panels, cord organizers
and other communication devices. The Patch panels terminating the voice tie lines
shall also be installed in this cabinet.
9.9 INSTALLATION
1. The installation shall comply with the requirements of ISO-11801 Class-E as

appropriate.
2. The maximum cable pulling tensions shall not exceed manufacturer’s
specifications.
3. The maximum cable bend radii shall not exceed manufacturer’s specifications.
4. In spaces with UTP cable terminations, the maximum bend radius for 4-pair
cable shall not exceed four times the outside diameter of the cable and ten
times for multi-pair cable. This shall be done unless this violates manufacturer
specifications.
5. During the actual installation, bend radius on 4-pair cable shall not exceed
eight times the outside diameter of the cable and ten times for multi-pair cable.
This shall be done unless this violates manufacturer specifications.
6. In telecommunications room/closets a minimum of 3m (10ft) of slack should
be lift for all cable type. This slack must be neatly managed on trays or other
support types.
7. Tie wraps shall be used at appropriate intervals to secure cable and to provide
strain relief at termination points. These wraps shall not be over tightened to
the point of deforming or crimping the cable sheath.
Page 115 of 230

8. Hook and loop cable managers should be used in the closet where
reconfiguration of cables and terminations may be frequent.
9. All grounding/earthing and bonding shall be done to applicable codes and
regulations.
10. Properly installed fire-stop systems shall be installed to prevent or retard the
spread of fire, smoke, water and gases through the building. This requirement
applies to openings designed for telecommunications use that may or may not
be penetrated by cables, wires or raceways.
11. Fire stops shall be done to applicable codes.
12. All work shall be done in a workman like fashion of the highest standards in
the telecommunications industry. All equipment and materials are to be
installed in a neat and secure manner, while cables are to be properly
dressed.
9.10 LABELLING AND ORGANISATION
1. The Cabling System shall be labeled using proper colour-coded labels and the
numbering scheme shall be as per EIA/TIA Standards.
2. Each of the RJ45 shall be uniquely numbered for proper identification.
3. Patch cables with different coloured boots shall be used for different services
such as data, voice etc for easy identification.
4. Patch Cord Organizers shall be provided for routing of patch cables within the
cabinet.
9.11 TESTING
1. All the installed UTP links shall be tested using CAT 6 test equipment such as
FLUKE DSP4300 for confirmation of channel performance as per latest
standards.
2. The test equipment used does perform testing to Level II accuracy as per
TSB40 and TSB67 and the latest requirements of CAT 6 performance, as
specified of the EIA/TIA Standards.
3. The Headroom available as installed, based on worst case NEXT or ACR,
and is also made available from the results.
4. This gives an indication of the quality of installation and the margin with which
the test values the specifications.
5. The results shall be printed and documented for future reference. Details of
the testing shall be explained in Testing and Specification Document in the
submittal.
9.12 WARRANTY
1. The system shall be supported by a manufacturer’s warranty of 20 years from

date of acceptance. The warranty will state performance levels supported for
the cabling system and its component parts. The warranty shall identify any
exceptions to the warranty cover.
2. The warranty shall state any maintenance requirement for the cabling system
Page 116 of 230

required to comply with the warranty.
3. At the completion of hand over of the cabling system a warranty certificate
shall be provided. Each product shall carry a guarantee, valid for one year, for
replacement for faulty components.
4. The warranty shall also provide a link and channel performance guarantee,
valid for 25 years and include:
- Guaranteed Parts
- Guaranteed Installation
- Guaranteed Channel Performance
- Guaranteed Application Support

- Guaranteed Quality of Service
5. The warranty shall cover Copper, fibre and wireless, Horizontal and back
bone.
6. The warranty shall be issued and administered by the manufacturer of the
cabling system. All items used in the provision of the cabling solution shall be
approved or supplied from one manufacturer.
7. The warranty shall cover both parts and labor to re-install failed links. The
manufacturer shall identify the criteria to be observed both before and during
the installation for the warranty to cover the cost for replacement of any links,
which fail during the 20-year life of the warranty. This shall include training and
certification of the installer and the installation designer.
9.13 RECORDS
1. All records shall be created by the installation Contractor and submitted at the
completion of work. The format shall be computer based and both copies and
hard copies shall be part of the As- built package.
2. Cable records must contain the identifier, cable type, termination positions at
both ends, splice information as well any damaged pairs/conductors.
3. Connecting hardware and connecting position records must contain the
identifier, type, damaged position numbers, and references to the cable
identifier attached to it.
4. Test documentation on all cable types shall be included as part of the As-built
package.
Page 117 of 230

PART 10 : MODULAR UPS
INDEX
10.1 Introduction.
10.2 Scope of supply
10.3 Quality & Standards
10.4 Environment
10.5 Operating requirements.
10.6 System Cabinet
10.7 Control System
10.8 Battery System
10.9 I nstallation and Commissioning
10.10 Training
10.11 Information required with the Tender
10.12 Documentation
10.13 Equipment Service Contract
10.14 Preferred Manufacturer
Page 118 of 230

10.1 INTRODUCTION
This specification defines the general requirements for the supply of one 40.0 KVA
(80 KVA total) N+1 redundant on-line, three phase and double conversion (rectifier &
inverter) static Uninterruptible Power System suitable for a specialized Data Centre
applications that requires a high level of reliability and service availability.
10.2 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
 1 of 40.0 KVA (N+1) redundant UPS units (Total 80.0 KVA)

 Two sealed VRLA battery systems (one for each 40.0 KVA module
 Critical spares for two years operation (for 2 Nos. modules)
 Factory Acceptance Testing
 Training
 Installation and commissioning
 O. & M. Manual.
10.3 QUALITY & STANDARDS
The UPS shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with and be compliant
with the following sections of the current revisions of the following standards:
 Design & Manufacture: ISO 14001, ISO 9001, BS EN 60146-2:2000, IEC 60146-
2:1999
 Performance: BS EN 62040-3:2001
 Safety & Construction: BS EN 62040-1-1:2003, BS EN 62040-1-2:2003, BS EN

60950-21:2003
 EMC emission & immunity: BS EN 50091-2:1996, BS EN 55022:1998, CISPR

22:1997, BS EN 61000-2-2:2002, IEC 61000-3, IEC 61000-4.
 Battery: BS 6290 part 4:1997, BS EN 60896-21:2004, BS EN 60896-22:2004, IEC

896-2, stationary lead acid batteries and Eurobat 12 years and longer.
10.4 ENVIRONMENT
The System shall be designed for continuous operation at:
 Temperature 15 to 45° C
 Relative Humidity 30 to 70%
 Altitude 100m a.m.s.l.
10.5 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
Electrical Parameters
Page 119 of 230

The UPS shall be static, three phase on-line, double conversion, solid-state employing
PWM techniques, high power transistors (IGBT) with high frequency switching mode
and shall have an internal N+1 redundant configuration.
UPS Input
Voltage 400 VAC  10%

Phase 3-PH
Wire 4-wire and ground
Frequency 50Hz  10%
Current Distortion <7% @100% load
(THDI)
Power Factor >0.98@ 50% load
Efficiency
UPS overall efficiency shall be up to 96%.
Battery
Standby time of 30 minutes at full load of 40 KVA at a room temperature of 25°C to

30°C for each module shall be provided. The total battery autonomy time shall be 30
minutes for 80.0 KVA load.
UPS output
Total Rated Capacity (N) 40.0 KVA ( N+1 ) Redundant @ 0.8

lagging P.F.
Capacity per UPS Module 40 KVA
Total Number of Ups Modules 2 Nos.
Voltage 400 VAC  1% (linear or non linear)
Phase 3-PH
Wire 4-wire and ground
Frequency 50Hz  0.05%
Voltage Distortion Ph/Ph (THD) <1 % with linear load
Voltage Distortion Ph/Ph (THD) >3% with non-linear load
Crest factor 3:1
Overload on Inverter 125% for 10 min. 150% for1 min.
The inverter output voltage regulation shall be in the range of  1% when the system is
subjected to the following operating conditions: -
i) No load to full load.

ii) With mains input voltage of  10%
iii) When load power factor between 0.8 and unity.
Page 120 of 230

iv) Under any battery voltage between maximum and minimum level.
The waveform generated shall be a pure sinusoidal wave and shall comply with the
above mentioned total harmonic distortion levels.
MODES OF OPERATION
The UPS is required to operate as an on-line, fully automatic system in the following
modes:
Normal: Under normal conditions the incoming Ac power is supplier to all UPS
modules converted into DC power through the rectifiers circuitry, which is used to
charge the standby batteries whilst simultaneously providing DC power to the inverters
circuitry. Ultimately, the inverters shall convert this DC power to a clean and regulated
AC power. Finally, inverters outputs are paralleled (synchronized) into the critical load
bus.
Power Failure: During Ac power supply failures, the inverter shall continue to supply
the critical load without interruption through the battery system.
Power Restoration: Upon restoration of commercial AC power, the system shall

automatically revert to normal mode without any break to critical load. The rectifiers
shall power the inverters while simultaneously recharging the batteries. The UPS shall
have an input power walk-in facility (soft start) to ensure the power supply does not
see high current load steps when the UPS system assumes load.
Discharging Battery: During the prolonged AC power failures and when the battery
voltage reaches to the low volt cut-off level, the inverters shall shut down awaiting auto
restarting when AC power is restored. The critical load shall be transferred
automatically from inverter output to the bypass supply through the static bypass
switch without any break.
UPS Module Failure: On failure of a UPS module (rectifier or inverter part), the faulty
module shall automatically isolatic itself from the critical output load bus and redundant
UPS module shall take over its working load without overloading the other working
UPS modules. It shall also allow the user to remove the faulty module in a safe and
easy manner and without interrupting the operation of other UPS modules during
removal or reinstallation of the faulty UPS module.
Output Overload: Upon detection of output overload, the UPS shall automatically
switch over the output to the static bypass without a break to critical load. The UPS
shall automatically revert back to normal operation without interruption when overload
condition is removed.
Maintenance Bypass: The UPS shall be equipped with a maintenance bypass facility
to connect mains (reserve power source) to the critical load without interruption (make
before break) to facilitate maintenance activities on the system. This bypass shall
completely isolate the UPS.
Page 121 of 230

UPS PROTECTION
The system shall be self-protecting against:-

i) AC supply voltage transients
ii) Internal faults
iii) Sustained overload
iv) Current surges
v) Load switching transients
The UPS system should be equipped with proper filtering systems against noise.
The UPS system shall be supplied with all the necessary filtering equipment to ensure
that it is suitable for operating from a diesel generator and for supplying non-linear
loads equipment with switch mode power supply input.
The UPS system shall have an Inrush Current protection to automatically transfer the
load to bypass and then return it automatically to inverter without interruption. While in
bypass, the UPS shall protect the load against spikes and common/normal mode
noise.
The UPS system shall have a battery low voltage protection to ensure that the battery
is not damaged by a deep discharge. The cut-off voltage level shall be set to suit the
battery manufacturer’s requirements.
The UPS shall have the capability to function normally when the batteries are removed
from the system for any reason; it shall also continue to provide protection against
spikes, noise, load steps and frequency shifts without battery back-up presence.
The UPS audible noise shall be limited to 63 dBA at one-meter distance.
The UPS shall be able to safely isolate any faulty UPS module from the critical load
but without interrupting the load or affecting the operation of other healthy UPS
modules working on the same bus.
The UPS shall be able to handle overloads as stated in (Over load on invertor) and
shall be able to safely transfer the critical load to static bypass without interrupting the
load if there limits are exceeded.
10.6 SYSTEM CABINET
The UPS cabinet shall meet the following requirements:
Be constructed to a minimum of IP 21 protection class of BS EN 60529:1992
The UPS cabinet shall be a freestanding IT enclosure with front and rear access for
maintenance and with top cable entry. It shall be equipped with leveling feet.
Page 122 of 230

Be provided with all control switches, push buttons necessary for manual and
automatic operation. It shall also have an emergency power shut down button
protected with a glass cover to prevent accidental activation.
Have all wiring adequately marked and secured to protect from heat or vibration.
Be fitted with functional labels and warning labels where appropriate.
The UPS system cabinet shall be equipped with an advance hot pluggable and
swappable N+1 redundant modular configuration and each UPS module shall have a
built in rectifier and inverter & static switch.
The UPS Module shall contain all UPS Power and control circuits including rectifier/
booster, invertor, static bypass and their control circuits as well as the CPU Board and
the paralleling control.
The UPS Cabinet shall have breakers for UPS AC input, UPS AC output and manual
bypass.
10.7 CONTROL SYSTEM
The UPS system shall be provided with redundant hot swappable control modules
with a microprocessor control system to perform start-up, shutdown, bypass-normal
operation transfers, and UPS monitoring, battery management and fault diagnosis.
The microprocessor control shall provide important functional data (information &
readings) on a liquid crystal display such as system status, fault messages and
measurement of input, battery and output parameters (power, power factor, AC
voltage ph/ph & ph/N, DC voltage, AC & DC currents, frequency, used & remaining
capacity, battery autonomy time, battery monitoring….etc.)
The microprocessor control system shall provide various alarms, detailed and clear
diagnostic information indicating the fault cause and location to troubleshoot the UPS
should a fault occur.
The system shall have the ability to store and log the events/alarms to enable the user
display the system history.
The UPS front panel displays shall have indications for:
i) Load on UPS (normal)

ii) Load on Bypass
iii) Static Bypass inhibited
iv) Over/under voltage
v) Supply failure
vi) Battery discharging
vii) Battery discharged
viii) Over temperature
Page 123 of 230

ix) Inverter overload
x) System Fault…etc.
Data related to each module shall be available on front panel.
The UPS shall include alarms extension facility through dry contacts to extend
status/alarms to BMS and serial port (RS232) and RJ-45 interface port for a remote
display. A remote indicator panel shall be provided in maintenance staff room located
at lower roof.
10.8 BATTERY SYSTEM
The Tenderer offer shall include one battery system for each UPS employing sealed
cells to provide 30 minutes standby at full load, throughout a minimum life span of ten
years. The normal approximate operating temperature is 25 to 30°C.
The battery system shall be housed in a battery enclosure;
The Battery shall be sized such that it will achieve its standby timescale at the end of
the battery design life.
The cells shall be high reliability Lead acid, valve regulated (VRLA), gas recombination
type, suitable for installation within the data centre area.
The cells shall be supplied charged and ready for service immediately after the
freshening charge.
The battery shall have an extended comprehensive warranty of five years at least.
The battery cabinet shall have a proper and adequate ventilation system for optimal
battery operation.
Every battery cabinet (enclosure) shall have a monitored, double pole protection
breaker.
The battery management system at the UPS control shall have the ability to
continuously monitor the voltage and temperature and to carry out DC voltage level
adjustment according to battery temperature (temperature compensation).
The battery management system shall initiate an alarm in the event that a weak or
failed battery module is identified.
10.9 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
The tenderer shall install and assemble the battery and UPS panel and complete the
installation for its operation.
Page 124 of 230

The tenderer shall be responsible for the supply of detailed installation drawings and
cable sizing as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
It is the responsibility of the tenderer to commission the system and handover in the
correct operating mode.
The installation shall be carried out in a way to ensure no interference to services.
Contractor staff are not authorized to carry out any activity on live distribution systems
or make any switching without the direct supervision of power Engineer.
The system, as a while shall be tested as per test documents, to ensure satisfactory
performance and shall be handed over to Engineers. All outstanding issues shall be
cleared within four weeks from the date of commissioning.
10.10 TRAINING
The tenderer shall arrange to provide appropriate on site training on the operation and
maintenance of the system.
The Tenderer shall include a separate quotation for a training course at the
manufacturer’s works on the operation, maintenance and fault diagnosis of the
complete system.
10.11 INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH THE TENDER
Statement of compliance covering clause-by-clause breakdown stating compliance or

non-compliance shall be supplied. Quotes without clause-by-clause breakdown will not
be considered.
All manufacturer documents, information and catalogues related to offered system that
confirms the technical compliance shall be submitted. Quotes with non-original
documents (photocopied) will not be considered.
The Tenderers shall provide local references (other companies, banks…etc.) whom
are currently using the offered system.
10.12 DOCUMENTATION
Within four weeks of receipt of the order, the tenderer shall provide one set of
drawings covering the general assembly, schematic and external connections for
approval.
Two sets of (hard copies) as built drawing complete with operating and maintenance
instructions with component lists and fault finding section shall be supplied. A CD
version shall also be supplied along with hard copies at the time of delivery of the
equipment. Photocopied documents will not be acceptable.
Page 125 of 230

10.13 EQUIPMENT SERVICE CONTRACT
The UPS dealer should have the arrangement for an equipment service contract and it
is up to the owner’s option to accept or refuse.
However, the manufacturer’s recommended maintenance schedule for a period of 2

years and the price to carry out the maintenance service for 2 years shall be
submitted.
10.14 PREFERRED MANUFACTURER
Newave UP Systems – Switzerland or approved equal.
Page 126 of 230

SECTION 11 : ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
INDEX
11.1 The System
11.2 Proximity Card Reader & Proximity Cards
11.3 Electric Strike
11.4 Door Magnetic Contact
Page 127 of 230

11.1 THE SYSTEM
The Access Control System should be PC based system with software and it should
be fully automated Windows based software.
The software shall be complemented with the System Controller and shall be
configured to provide 100% Distributed Intelligence (DI), which guarantees complete
integrity of the security features even during a loss of communication to the Host(PC).
All pertinent data necessary to make card access decisions and input/output decisions
are stored in the controller and saved in the battery backed up memory for at least one
year.
The System should have the following capabilities:
 Expandable up to 32 Readers
 the Cardholder capacity – 3000-up to 10,000 Card holders
 4000 History transactions (Logs)
 4 Authorization Group per Cardholder.
 1 year battery backed clock calendar and memory
 Handicapped Access
 Automatic Card Activation &Deactivation by Date
 High security 5 state alarm supervision.
 Timed anti-pass back.
 Real-time diagnostic
 Communication via RS-484, dial-up Modem or Ethernet LAN(Optional)
 AC Power failure Indication
 DC power low indication.
 The Controller should have at least 2 Supervised Alarm Inputs for Fire Alarm
Monitoring.
11.2 PROXIMITY CARD READER & PROXIMITY CARDS
The Proximity Card Reader should have ‘weigand’ output with a minimum read range
of 10cm.
The proximity Cards should be double side printable type – HID ISO Prox or
equivalent.
11.3 ELECTRIC STRIKE
The electric strike should be “Fail Safe” heavy duty flush mounting type. Operating
voltage of the strike should be 12VDC.
11.4 DOOR MAGNETIC CONTACT
The Door Magnetic Contact should be flush mounting type. The Door Status contacts
Page 128 of 230

as well as the door monitoring contacts have to be connected to the Access Control
System.
Magnetic contact switches shall be provided for all fire escape doors and all access
control doors as shown on drawing.
Page 129 of 230

PART 12 : MATV SYSTEM
INDEX:
12.1 MATV system
Page 130 of 230

12.1 MATV SYSTEM
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply and installation of all conduits,
trunking and junction boxes for MATV System of the project.
The installation shall be carried out as a completely separate system to all other parts
of the installation and shall utilise no conduit or trunking used for any other part of the
electrical installation. No conduit less than 25mm diameter shall be used.
The detailed design and installation of MATV System to be by Specialists.
Page 131 of 230

PART 13 : MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
INDEX
13.1 Maintenance
Page 132 of 230

13.1 MAINTENANCE
a) The contractor shall maintain, replace, repair with utmost speed and at his
own expense, any part of the plant or material or work performed or furnished
under the contract for the permanent power supply system which may prove
defective in design, erection, operation, performance, workmanship or from
any act of omission on the part of the contractor that may develop under
conditions provided for by the contract and under proper use in the works or
any section thereof within 12 months after the practical completion of works or
that portion thereof, as the case may have been or has been taken over by the
employer.
b) The contractor shall obtain and submit to the Employer any guarantee or
certificates or warranty available from the manufacturers, but only as
supplementary to the Contractor’s own guarantee and in no way invalidating
them.
c) If any defect as above mentioned should occur, the Employer shall inform the
Contractor thereof stating the nature of the defect and if the Contractor
replaces or renews any portion of the works, the provisions of this Clause shall
apply to the portion of works so replaced or renewed as if that portion had
been taken over on the date of replacement or renewal.
Page 133 of 230

PART 14 : TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
INDEX
Page 134 of 230

14.1 TESTING & COMMISSIONING
a) This section shall cover testing and commissioning of all electrical equipments
such as L.T. Switchgear, cabling, wiring, earthing, fixtures etc. to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Requisite number of copies of test reports shall be
furnished to the Employer/Engineer.
b) All such tests shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer with his own instruments, meters and equipment. Necessary fees to
be paid to the Authorities shall be initially borne by the Contractor and
subsequently reimbursed by the Employer on production of necessary
receipts.
c) If any special tests in addition to the standard tests given below are required
by the Engineer, the same shall be carried out by the Contractor at no extra
cost to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
i) Insulation tests of all cables and equipments shall be carried out as

per relevant British Standards Specifications.
ii) Visual inspection of the whole installation.
iii) Operation of all accessories and items of equipment shall be checked
for proper function including such items that may have been supplied
by others but installed under this contract.
iv) The insulation resistance and earth continuity of the complete
electrical installation shall be verified on completion of work. Results of
such tests must be entered into a test report where any additional
wiring is carried out, the test shall be carried out on the whole
installation.
v) Loop impedance tests shall cover every socket outlet, fixed appliance
and exposed metal work which is specified to be bonded to earth.
vi) Test to ensure safe measure of earth bonding shall be carried out
before any loop impedance test is taken up. Where a circuit is found
to insufficiently earthed, the same shall be rectified to the satisfaction
of the Engineer prior to carrying out the series of tests again
vii) Polarity tests on socket outlets, lighting switches and all other items (
to ensure the correct connections).
viii) Testing the effectiveness of earth leakage circuit breaker.
ix) Testing of tripping of AC Units and Lifts, in case of fire. For items not
covered above it shall be Contractor’s responsibility to carry out all
tests for the entire installation under these specifications and related
drawings at no extra cost so that the complete installations are tested
and commissioned to meet all local and BS standards.
Page 135 of 230

PART 15 : BUILDER’S WORK
INDEX
15.1 Builder’s Work
Page 136 of 230

15.1 BUILDERS WORK
The expression “Builder’s Work” shall mean the ancillary work carried out by the
Contractor in connection with the Electrical installation.
Builder’s work in connection with electrical installations shall include, but not be limited
to the following:
a) Drilling, cutting or leaving of holes for conduits, cables, Trunking and the like,
through walls, floors, partitions, roofs, etc. and subsequent making good.
b) Cutting and pinning ends of supports for equipment, switchgear, fittings and
the like to walls, floors, partitions, soffits etc. and subsequent making good.
c) Cutting chases for conduit, cable, Trunking and the like in walls, floors,
partitions, etc. and subsequent making good.
d) Cutting mortices, sinking, recesses, etc. for lighting points, switch points,
socket outlet points, fitting outlet points and the like in walls, floors, partitions
etc. and subsequent making good.
e) Cutting and fitting around, boring holes through and making good or finishings
upto trunking, lighting points, switch points, socket outlet points and the like.
f) The painting of exposed G.I. conduit, trunking, cable tray, equipment etc.
g) Excavation for cable trench, back filling, making good, supply and installation of
necessary road crossing ducts, cable tiles, warning tapes, cable route markers
etc.
Page 137 of 230

DIVISION 2 PLUMBING &DRAINAGE -
INDEX TITLE
2.1.0 GENERAL
2.2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
2.3.0 REGULATIONS
2.4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PIPING & FITTINGS
2.5.0 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PIPING
2.6.0 HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEM
2.7.0 SOIL, WASTE AND DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
2.8.0 WORKMANSHIP OF WATER SUPPLY AND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS.
2.9.0 TESTING
2.10.0 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM
2.11.0 THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION OF PIPES
2.12.0 IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES
2.13.0 SHOP DRAWINGS
2.14.0 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
2.15.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Page 138 of 230

2.0.0 PLUMBING &DRAINAGE WORKS -
2.1.0 GENERAL
All work under this heading shall be subject to THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF
THE CONTRACT AND THE GENERAL CONDITIONS hereinbefore written for the
entire work, and the general requirements of the Mechanical Installation.
COORDINATION
Contractor shall be responsible to co-ordinate different services, systems and builder

works accordingly, and any discrepancy found shall be brought to the Consultant's
attention in writing, failing which the Contractor will rectify the systems or services, as
per Consultant's requirements at no extra cost.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The Contractor is to submit for the approval of the Consultant a list of the names and
addresses of the manufacturers, the trademarks and types of all materials and articles
he intends to use together with any specifications that may be required before any
orders are placed.
If any of the manufacturers, materials and the like are rejected by the Consultant, then
it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide suitable alternatives to the Consultant
within seven days of rejection. Consultant's decision is final and binding on the
Contractor.
All equipments and materials proposed for the works shall have a local agent
approved by the manufacturer. The local agent shall have stock of spares and after
sales servicing facilities available.
When so required by the Consultant, samples of goods or materials are to be provided

at the Contractor's expense. The following procedures are to be adopted.
1) All samples are to be delivered to the Consultant's office.
2) Duplicate final approved samples are to be provided for the Consultant, one
for office use and one for the site.
3) Samples are to be provided promptly to allow the Consultant adequate time

for inspection so as not to delay the Works.
4) Each sample is to be properly labeled with these details:
i. Name and quality of material.

ii. Manufacturer's name.
Page 139 of 230

iii. Project title.
iv. Contractor's name.
v. Date of submission.
vi. Specification reference.
5) Samples not to be removed until so instructed by the Consultant.
If, during the contract, any materials become unobtainable despite the Contractor's
best endeavors, then the Contractor may offer a suitable alternative. Any decision
upon alternative materials will be at the sole discretion of the Consultant and any delay
or loss occasioned by the Contractor due to his failure to provide the materials
specified will not relieve him of his obligations under the Contract. If alternative material
proves to be acceptable but there is a decrease in the quality or value a suitable price
reduction will be made, however if there is an increase in quality or value no ad-
justment will be made.
It is entirely the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that imported materials or goods

arrive on site in sufficient time to adhere to the programme of works.
All materials or manufactured items that are liable to damage are to be delivered to
site in the original package or container bearing the name of the manufacturer and the
brand.
Materials or manufactured items are to be carefully loaded, transported, unloaded and

stored in an approved manner, protected from damage and exposure to weather or
dampness during transit and after delivery to site.
The Contractor is to provide all labour, materials and transport that the Consultant's
Representative may require in carrying out tests and checks on materials and
workmanship and setting out and measuring the Works.
Contractor to submit before end of every calendar month a material flow sheet, in a
format approved by Consultant.
2.2.0. SCOPE OF WORK
This specification includes the supply, install, test, commission, handover and service
during defects liability period of the complete system of the following all as described
herein and as shown on the drawings and in any case to comply with relevant B.S.,
DIN Standard, National Plumbing Code and Standard Specification for building works
issued by Ministry of Works, Bahrain.
(1) Connection from nearest water main to above ground combined sectional
waterstorage tanks with meter,flanges, valves etc. as shown in the drawings
and as per the specifications.
(2) Below ground water supply lines from storage tanks to transfer pump sets, to
Page 140 of 230

roof sectional tanks, as shown in the drawings and as per the specifications.
(3) Water storage tanks, associated valves, piping and builder’s works, as shown
in the drawings and as per the specifications.
(4) Water booster and transfer pump sets of duty as shown in the drawings
together with all valves and fittings.
(5) Water heaters as shown in the drawings.
(6) Cold water piping to all fixtures and fittings requiring so as shown in the
drawing with valves, fittings, etc. The cold water connection to server room
and all network rooms shall be included.
(7) Domestic hot water supply piping to all fixtures and fittings requiring so as
shown in the drawing with valves, fittings etc.
(8) Thermal insulation of hot water piping, acoustic insulation of drainage pipe
work, anti-condensate insulation on condensate drains pipe works as shown
in drawings and as per specification.
(9) Water supply manifolds, manifold box with cover, PEX pipe-in-pipe system
from manifolds to all fixtures and terminations as shown in the drawings and
as per specifications. The manifold shall preferably be above ceiling and shall
be coordinated with architect for exact locations alongwith coordinated
services.
(10) All soil, waste and vent piping inside and outside of the building including
venting of first manholes as shown in the drawings and as per specifications.
Two stack system (soil and waste) along with vent shall be applied to entire
premises.
(11) All rainwater and condensate drain pipes of all air conditioning units as shown
on the drawings and as per specification and as necessary for each AC unit.
(12) All sanitary wares and accessories and their connections with all services with
stop cocks, angle valves, traps etc. as per specification.
(13) Roof rain water outlets as per specifications and details (Refer architectural
drawings also).
(14) Sewer and storm water manholes, lifting station, inspection chambers,
channels with grated covers etc. as shown on the drawings and as per
specification. The invert level of manholes shall be established by contractor
as per existing site condition for existing holding tank location. The future
connection provision shall be provided for SEPPD connections.
Page 141 of 230

(15) Floor drains, balcony drains etc. as shown in the drawings and as per
specifications.
(16) Lifting pump sets complete with level float switches, electrical supplies,
isolators, heavy duty sealed cover etc. as shown in the drawings and as per
the specifications.
(17) Packaged sewage lifting station complete with all accessories, builders works
as per the specifications and as shown in the drawings.
(18) Provision of final connections of sewerage, rain water/surface water, water

supply from the buildings to the external mains network.
(19) Complete all tests required by all rules, regulations, etc. of all authorities
having jurisdiction and prepare, complete and file all forms, tabulations,
drawings, etc., pertinent thereto with the referenced authorities, and
accomplish such work with personnel of proper caliber.
(20) Identification and labeling of all services as per specifications and as directed
by S.O.
(21) Prepare and submit requisite sets of shop drawings, as built drawings and O.
& M. Manuals as per specifications.
(22) Contractor shall be responsible for co-coordinating different services, systems

and builder’s works accordingly and any discrepancy found shall be brought to
the attention of the S.O. in writing, failing which the contractor will rectify the
systems/services as per S.O’s instructions at no extra cost.
(23) Co-ordinate with Sewerage and Drainage Directorate, Water Distribution

Directorate and other relevant authorities for the co-ordination, approval,
permits for connections etc.
(24) Any other works not specifically mentioned above, but are required as per the
drawings for the satisfactory completion of plumbing and drainage works.
Identify those in the tender submission separately.
The above shall include all labour, materials, equipment, machinery and services
necessary to make the complete system fully operative.
2.3.0 REGULATIONS
All water supply and plumbing installation work in connection with the contract shall be
executed in strict accordance with the valid edition of British, DIN Standard and
National Plumbing Code, and any supplements, addenda or published revisions
thereto up the date of submission of the contractor's Tender. The contractor shall keep
a copy of the said regulations supplements etc. on site at all times during the
Page 142 of 230

continuance of the contract.
2.4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PIPING

AND FITTINGS
Piping and fittings shall be first class and comply with the requirements of the relevant
British Standards/DIN Specification.
All piping, run in floor construction, suspended ceiling space or roof space, shall be run
parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise shown or noted on the drawings.
Water supply pipes where practicable shall be placed at same elevation and hung on
suitable hangers.
Insulated pipes shall be so installed that there will be not less than 12mm clear space
between them.
Except as otherwise specified, hangers shall be spaced not more than 3 metres apart.
Vertical lines shall be adequately supported at each floor and at their bases by a
suitable hanger placed in the horizontal line near the riser. Also vertical lines shall be
adequately braced to vertical walls, etc.
All pipe connections with fittings shall be made hydraulically tight with approved
materials.
All pipework shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove dirt and grease or oil. The inside of
pipework shall be thoroughly flushed with fresh water.
Fittings i.e. stopcocks, valves, flexible connectors, bends, etc., shall be provided where
necessary and in accordance with good practice.
Main valves and switches on pipeworks shall be stenciled to indicate their use.
All piping shall be tested before used as described in the specification.
Fittings on chromium plated brass pipe shall be cast brass, malleable iron pattern,
finished and chromium plated.
A friction wrench shall be used on plated pipe and fittings. Cut, dented or bruised pipe
will not be allowed, and if found installed, shall be removed by the Contractor.
All ends of pipe shall be reamed and filed and all burrs removed from the interior of
same.
All hot and cold water piping, shall be installed so as to pitch to drain to accessible
Page 143 of 230

locations.
Generally, all piping shall be run concealed in chases or pipe spaces adjoining fixtures
or shall otherwise be concealed in walls, unless otherwise indicated.
Air chambers, set 800mm high full size of branch shall be installed at the end of all hot
and cold water supplies to fixtures. Shock arrestors shall be provided for all water lines
to equipment with quick opening and closing valves.
All exposed piping valves and fittings in toilets shall be chromium plated. All exposed
pipework elsewhere which is not chromium plated, shall be covered according to the
specifications.
All ends of pipes, including those extending above roof, drains, and fixtures shall be
closed with caps or plugs so as to prevent dirt or building material from getting into
pipes or traps, during erection.
Dielectric fittings shall be used to connect nonferrous pipe and equipment to ferrous
pipe and equipment.
All metal pipework conveying water shall be protected from electrolytic action by the
installation of non-conductive or fiber type nipples to mechanically separate copper
pipes from galvanized tanks or galvanized steel pipework. Where the water is acidic,
approval shall be obtained of the solution to avoid possible corrosion due to electrolytic
action.
In areas where certain water or soil conditions could cause dezincification on brass
fittings, valves, etc., then the gun metal type shall be used throughout.
Approval shall be obtained prior to ordering materials which may be affected by

dezincification and the correct materials shall be used throughout the system.
Ample provision shall be made for expansion of pipework and expansion loops
constructed from steel pipe and fittings. Purpose made expansion joints and anchor
points shall be provided on the drawing or as directed by the Consultant or his
representative.
All expansion loops or breaks shall be 'cold stressed'. All pipe runs shall be approved
by the Consultant, before installation.
All pipework passing through walls, ceilings and floors shall be provided with sleeves
of suitable size to allow free movement of the pipes, and be constructed of a similar
material to that of the pipe. The gaps between sleeves and pipes shall be sealed by
fire rated sealants, the fire rating shall be equal to that of the wall/partition.
All vents, stacks and on general any PVC pipes within the building extending to
Page 144 of 230

outdoor under direct sunlight should be made of GRP (the portion extending
outdoors), PVC is not allowed on all cases to be used.
Sleeves shall be of sufficient length to finish flush with finished face of wall/ceiling or
floors, except where shown otherwise on the drawings. Sleeves shall be retained in
position before making good by lugs or plates.
2.5.0 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PIPING
2.5.1 TRENCHING
Trenches shall have shape and dimensions as shown in typical details according to
the diameter of pipes that will be laid in.
The excavated material should be placed on one side of the trench at a safe distance.
Stones and rubble should be gradually removed to avoid the possibility of their falling
accidentally on the pipes. When the excavated material is made up entirely of stones
and rubble (when excavating in rocky areas) it has to be removed from the
Neighbourhood of the trench before any attempt of laying the pipes.
The bottom of the trench should be leveled so that the full body of the pipe rests on
even bed. Big stones and rocky protrusions must be removed very carefully.
2.5.2 PIPE LAYING
All precautions shall be taken to protect the pipes, and prior to installation all pipes
shall be checked for soundness and cleanliness. Any material found to be defective
should be marked and removed from the trench in such manner that neither the pipe
nor the trench will be damaged or disturbed and so as to prevent earth or debris from
falling onto the previously prepared pipe bed. Under no circumstances shall
watermain materials be dropped or dumped into the trench. Particular care must be
taken to prevent scratching or otherwise damaging the surface of the pipe.
Pipes and fittings shall be laid and jointed according to the manufacturer's instructions
to give a watertight structure, true to line and grade.
At times when work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely
and satisfactorily closed with caps supplied by the Contractor as recommended by the
pipe manufacturer so that no water, earth or other substance will enter the pipe or
fittings.
All pipes must be inspected and approved by the Consultant before they are covered.
2.5.3 PIPE BEDDING AND SURROUND
All pipes shall be bedded and surrounded in accordance with the drawings.
Page 145 of 230

Bedding and surrounding shall be granular material free from rocks as specified and
as shown in typical details drawings.
The bedding material shall be carefully placed on the bottom of the prepared trench,
hand tamped and shaped to fit the lower portion of the pipe barrel, all to the minimum
thickness shown on the drawings. Care shall be taken to ensure that the pipe will be
uniformly supported on the bedding material and under no circumstances shall large
stones, rock projections or other hard objects are permitted to come in contact with the
pipe.
When pipe has been laid on its bedding, additional bedding material shall be placed
and thoroughly compacted by hand in successive layers not exceeding 150 mm
thickness up to the top of the pipe. The material shall be placed on both sides of the
pipe simultaneously and shall completely fill the spaces between the pipe and the
trench wall and under the haunches of the pipe.
In all cases it is essential to properly compact the bedding around the sides of the
pipe.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the alignment and grade of the pipe is not disturbed
during the operation. Couplings should be left exposed until the line has been tested.
2.5.4 BACKFILLING OF TRENCHES
2.5.4.1 Following successful testing of each length of pipe the remaining surround material
shall be placed and backfilling commenced. The first layer shall consist of selected
material from the excavation not containing material larger than 50mm sieve size.
Heavy mechanical compactors shall not be used.
2.5.4.2 All the unsuitable material i.e. soft materials, asphaltic chunks, stones larger than
60mm, organic materials, metal, debris etc. shall not be used for backfilling and shall
be removed from the site. Where unsuitable material is encountered in excavation it
shall be replaced for backfilling purposes with selected granular material from
approved sources and shall consist of good hard granular screened desert fill within
the following grading limits:
B.S. Sieve Size% By weight passing
63.5mm 100
37.5mm 85-100
20mm 60-80
10mm 40-65
5mm 30-50
2.36mm 20-40
600 Microns 10-25
75 Microns 0-10
Page 146 of 230

2.5.4.3 When the trench is excavated below the level of the base, the excess excavation shall
be filled and tamped, in the same manner as the base at the Contractor's expense.
2.5.5 COMPACTION
2.5.5.1 Compaction of the backfill shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 150mm thick
after compaction using vibrating plate compactors or rollers.
2.5.5.2 Mechanical compaction shall not be carried out below a minimum distance of 300mm
from the crown of the water pipe, where only hand tapping (compaction) is allowed.
2.5.5.3 The backfill material shall be deposited and spread in uniform, parallel layers not
exceeding 150mm thick after compaction. Before the next layer is placed, each layer
shall be compacted as required so as to obtain a thoroughly compacted mass to at
least 95% maximum Dry Density at optimum moisture content.
2.5.5.4 Where instructed by the Consultant, the Contractor shall carry out at his expense such
tests as are required to confirm that compaction has been carried out in accordance
with this Specification.
2.6.0 HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEM
2.6.1 PIPING & FITTINGS
All water pipes and fittings below ground shall be uPVC pressure pipes to BS-3505-
1986-Class-E or HDPE conforming to BS-1972-1967(for underground services).
Make shall be Gulf Plastic Industries for uPVC and Polypipe, U.K. for HDPE pipes or
equal and approved.
The fittings for HDPE pipes shall be gunmetal to BS-1400 grade LG2 including liners
and be purpose designed for use with HDPE pipes specified above.
All the above ground hot and cold water pipes upto the water supply manifolds shall
be PP-R 80 (Polypropylene Random Copolymerisate).
Make of PPR pipes shall be Banninger, Germany/Wavin, Holland .
PP-R 80 Pipes & Fittings
These shall be suitable for continuous operation with cold and hot water of 20oC to
70oC at pressure of minimum 10 bar.
The pipes and fittings shall conform to the latest DIN/BS/European Standards and
shall be suitable for carrying potable water (DIN 8077/8078/16962 Part 5A or
approved by WRC, U.K.)
Page 147 of 230

The joints shall be electro fusion socket welding and as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Qualified and competent plumbers in socket welding shall be employed to undertake

the jointing of pipes. The credentials of such plumbers shall be submitted and
approved by the consultant.
Pipes exposed to sun shall be insulated with rigid aluminium foil faced fiberglass pipe
section of density 64 Kg./m3 and covered by 4 oz canvas cloth, 1 coat of approved
vapour barrier paint and 1 coat of approved weather proof paint (Refer Section 1.11.0
for more details).
Linear expansion compensation loops shall be provided in the pipes as per

manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.6.2. WATER SUPPLY WITHIN BATHROOMS, PANTRIES AND OTHER AREAS
The water supply within the above areas shall be by means of manifolds (cold and hot
water), pipe-in-pipe PEX pipes and end fittings suitable for PEX pipes.
The PEX pipes shall be PEX-“c” or “a”.
The proposed pipes and fittings shall conform to DIN/BS Standards and shall be
approved by WRC, U.K. or DVGW, Germany.
Diameter of pipe-in-pipe shall be 16mm.
PEX shall be suitable with hot water upto 70oC at 10 bar, on continuous operation.
Manifolds for hot and cold water shall be Bronze or heavy duty plastic suitable for
temperature up to 100oC. The pipe connections to manifolds shall be by male-female
thread. The adaptors for connection of pipes to manifold shall have no rubber parts
and shall be suitable for simple jointing.
All manifolds shall be fitted in a plastic box with plastic cover, supplied by the
manufacturer of the PEX pipes.
The complete system sample shall be submitted for consultant’s approval before
ordering and procurement.
Make shall be Becker Plastics, Germany/Wavin, Holand/Wirsbo, Sweden.
2.6.3 VALVES
All the valves including angle and pressure regulating, non return valves etc. shall be
asbestos free, suitable for potable water application and approved by water Bye Laws
Scheme/WRC U.K.
Page 148 of 230

a) All main isolating valves and branch valves up to 50mm size and above
ground shall be lever operated bronze valves conforming to BS 1552-1989
and shall be rated as PN16. End threads should confirm to BS 21.
Make shall be Crane, U.K. /Hattersely, U.K. or equal and approved.
Isolation valves upto 50mm size, below ground shall be double union lever
operated plastic type conforming to BS 4346 housed in heavy duty GRP valve
box (for non traffic areas) and masonry valve chamber with heavy duty cover
for traffic areas.
These valves shall be rated minimum PN 10.
Plastic ball valves shall be with EPDM seals.
Isolation valves above 50mm shall be double union plastic ball valves
conforming to BS-4346.These valves shall be rated minimum PN 10.
Makes of plastic valves shall be Durapipe, U.K./George Fisher, U.K. or equal

and approved.
b) Local isolation of each sanitary fitting shall be by a screw operated bronze ball
valve as "Ball-O-Fix" type or angle valve as approved by the consultant.
c) Pressure reducing valves: This shall be suitable for inlet pressures upto 25 bar
and outlet pressure range of 1.5 bar – 6 bar. Maximum operating temperature
shall be 80oC.
Body of the valve shall be bronze, diaphragm and seals shall be NBR/70 or
equivalent. Valve shall be WRC approved, suitable for potable water.
Pressure reducing valves shall be fitted with “y” strainer at the inlet and
pressure gauges of Ø100mm dial at inlet and outlet sides. Bypass connection
to the PRV shall be provided with Isolation Valve.
Make shall be Watts, U.K. or equal and approved.
d) Float operated ball valve shall be gunmetal ‘ports mouth’ type up to 20mm
diameter to BS-1212 and shall be of the gunmetal 'Portsmouth' type up to
20mm diameter to BS 1212 and shall be of the low, medium or high
pressure type to suit operating conditions and shall be stamped accordingly.
They shall be complete with a rubber or similar washer and have a copper
float to BS 1968 and a gun metal float arm.
Valves above 20mm shall be the gun metal piston type to BS 1212 of gun
metal construction complete with a synthetic disc and piston bucket and a
Page 149 of 230

gun metal float arm and a copper ball float BS 1968.
All ball valves to be fitted with a silencer discharge tube.
Make shall be Crane, U.K./Hattersely, U.K./Pegler U.K. or equal and

approved.
e) Non Return Valve: Non Return Valves up to 50mm shall be bronze/gunmetal

body, swing type conforming to BS-5154. The disk shall be gunmetal/brass.
Ends shall be threaded to BS-21. Pressure rating shall be PN16 and suitable
for water temperatures up to 100oC.
Sizes above 50mm shall be flange type, horizontal swing pattern cast iron
body, cast iron disk and cast iron cover, conforming to BS: 5153, PIN16.
Flange connections shall conform to BS-10.
Make shall be Crane, U.K. /Hattersely, U.K. or equal and approved.
2.6.4 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
Provide automatic air vents at all high points and/or where shown on drawings and/or
as needed and directed by the S.O., Air valves and other similar items shall conform to
BS 2591. Automatic air valves shall incorporate a stainless steel ball float and bronze
seat. The valve body to be of bronze or malleable iron and shall have screwed inlet
connection. Incorporated with each automatic air valve a copper alloy gate valve shall
be fitted to the inlet connection. Polyethene/Polybutelene drain pipes shall be
connected to nearest drain or shall discharge to a location approved by the S.O.
Where possible, the air vents shall be mounted on an air bottle of at least the same
size as the pipe but not more than 50mm nominal bore.
2.6.5 AIR BOTTLES
Air bottles shall be used where possible for each automatic air eliminator as described
above.
Air bottles shall be used with manual air vent cock in positions where the systems are
likely to be under suction. They shall be used where rapid filling of a system is
required. The air bottle shall be made from a pipe at least the same nominal bore and
material of the pipework it serves but not larger than 50mm nominal bore. The length
may vary with the available space but a 250mm length shall be allowed within the
tender with a 6mm or 9mm vent cock on top. Discharge pipe shall be allowed for as
for Automatic Air Eliminators above.
2.6.6 STRAINERS
Page 150 of 230

Suction headers of all pump sets shall be fitted with “Y” type strainers.
All strainers up to 50mm shall be bronze construction Y type strainers screwed ends.
Screwed ends shall conform to BS-21 and strainers shall be with drain plug.
All strainers 65mm and above shall be cast iron construction Y type strainers flanged
ends conforming to BS-4504, PIN16 and with drain flange.
Strainer (Y pattern) shall be provided where shown on Mechanical drawings, on inlet

side of control valve and/or as directed by the S.O. Screens shall be stainless steel
with approximately 0.8mm perforations for sizes upto 50mm and smaller, and
approximately 1.6mm perforations for larger sizes.
One spare strainer basket for each strainer shall be handed over to the S.O.
Strainers shall be arranged to allow them to be by passed, with isolation valves in

bypass connection.
Make shall be Crane, U.K./Hattersely, U.K. or equal and approved.
2.6.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
Flexible connectors shall be provided on all pump suction and discharge and
anywhere else required and/or as shown on drawings.
Flexible connectors shall be double rubber bellow type, rated for 16 bar working
pressure, with forged steel triangular flanges; multiply nylon fabric reinforcement and
neoprene rubber cover liner.
Shall be suitable for ambient temperature up to 60oC, burst pressure of 60 bar at 20oC.
Flexible connectors shall be supplied with suitable couplers/end connections for

copper/PPR Pipes.
Flanges shall be epoxy powder coated and nuts and bolts zinc electroplated.
Make shall be WEICCO, or equal and approved by the Consultant.
Flexible connectors shall be tested as per BS-5150: 1974.
2.6.8 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS
Where pipes of dissimilar metals are jointed, provide dielectric (insulating) couplings,
fittings, unions or flanges.
2.6.9 EXPANSION JOINTS
Page 151 of 230

Expansion joints shall be of the double rubber bellows type brained stainless steel
constructions with flanged ends axial type.
2.6.10 WATER PUMPING SETS
2.6.10.1 Booster Pump Sets:
The booster pumping sets shall be variable speed type and of the duties stated on the
drawings and shall each comprise:-
a) Two Vertical, multistage, inline centrifugal type pumps, duty sharing. The
pumps shall be of heavy duty construction with fully stainless steel casing
(AISI-316L), stainless steel impeller (AISI-316L) and shaft (AISI-316L), and
with a mechanical, self adjusting, self lubricated shaft seal. The pumps shall
be as manufactured by Grundfos/Armstrong/Pullen/DP Pumps/Lowara.
The pumps motors shall be of the totally enclosed, fan cooled type and must
be rated for continuous operation at 50oC ambient temperature, IP-55
protection and with class “F” insulation motors.
b) Pressure vessel of manufacturer’s recommended size. Sizing of the

membrane tank has to be done by the manufacturer and shall be submitted
for Consultant’s approval.
c) Variable speed drive, pressure transmitter & control unit.
The variable speed drive pump set shall maintain a constant system pressure
by continuously varying the speed of the pump via an external frequency
converter.
Pump set is proposed to be with 2 numbers of duty sharing pumps.
Apart from the variation in speed, the pumps shall change over automatically
depends on trip of working pump, for equal operating hours, between two
starts and if the set pressure is not achieved by one pump, the second pump
will also start running. In this case the second pump will run at variable speed
while the first pump will be running at full speed.
d) The ancillaries (i.e. isolating valves, check valves, strainers, pressure gauges
etc.) as indicated on the drawings and/or as required for a proper and trouble
free operation. All components used must comply to the specifications stated
in the section "Piping Materials". The ancillaries, suction and discharge
headers together with isolation and check valves shall be preinstalled by the
pump manufacturer along with membrane tank on an epoxy coated common
base frame.
e) The control panel shall be supplied alongwith the pumpsets in the same
Page 152 of 230

common base frame and shall have the following components. Incoming
isolator, automatic starters, overload relays, MCBs, Hand-off-auto selector
switches for each pump, selector switch between two pumps, on delay timer,
impulse delay, automatic change over between two pumps based on run
hours and failure of one pump, indication lamps for pump run, trip, low water
level and alarm for high water level. There shall be provisions for wiring from
the field devices such as low level & high level float switches, pressure switch
etc.
f) The pumps, pressure vessel, control panel, suction and discharge headers
with valves etc. shall be mounted on a common base frame of epoxy coated
heavy gauge steel with vibration isolation neoprene pads.
g) Low level float switches from water tanks to be interlocked with pump sets for
protection against dryrun.
h) The control of the booster pump set shall be by pressure switch and low level
float switch in water tanks.
i) Necessary adaptor fittings recommended by the pump manufacturer and

flexible connectors specified in Section 2.6.7 shall be used to connect suction
and discharge headers of the pump sets with the rest of the piping.
2.6.10.2 TRANSFER PUMP SETS
All specifications are same as 2.6.10.1 for booster pump set, except that transfer
pump sets are not with variable speed drive and do not require membrane vessel and
the control of the pump set shall be by low/high level float switches in the roof tank and
by low level float switch in the ground tank.
2.6.11 INSULATED WATER TANKS (FOR IRRIGATION)
a) Water tanks at ground level near near boundary walls shall be

GRP/Polyethelene, 4 layer insulated type, water storage tanks complying with
ASTM 1998-96 of capacities shown in the drawings.
b) The walls insulation shall be layered type using highly specialized chemical
foaming which maintains the content condition as stored level. It shall be able
to withstand to an extreme temperatures upto 110 Deg. C.
c) The tanks shall be suitable for installation exposed to solar radiations and shall
be UV stabilized to withstand against ultra-violet radiations.
d) The tanks shall be made from food graded raw materials and shall be suitable
for storage of potable/ irrigation water.
e) The tank surfaces shall be such that accumulation of algae, fungs and baterial
Page 153 of 230

is not possible.
f) The tanks shall be complete with inlet, outlet, over flow, vent drain and access
cover.
Make shall be Al Zamil, KSA or equal and approved.

2.6.12 SECTIONAL WATER TANKS:
The water tanks one combined for fire and water and another on roof for water supply
shall be sectional type water tanks with insulated panels construction for keeping the
water at supply temperatures. The make shall be Bridgestone Japan or Europe origin
shall be certified for potable use by international agencies and shall have installations /
service support in Bahrain. The tank shall be manufactures in accordance with BS
7491 and BSEN 13280 shall be approved by WRAS.
The tanks shall be of panel construction, hydro glass sectional type. Tank connector fittings shall be
provided for pipes connected to the tank. The holding capacity of the water tank shall
not be less than as shown on the drawings.
The tank shall be divided into two equal portions by means of internal partitions. The
water (incoming/outgoing) connections shall be arranged in such a way that each
portion can be used independently.
Water tank shall be of following specification:-
 HYDROGLASS sectional tanks shall be constructed from the following basic

glass reinforced plastic mouldings, produced by hot press matched metal tool
moulding processes.
The material consists of the following basic constituents.
Reinforcement a Chopped 'E' glass rovings, 60 end

with chrome complex finish to BS
3691 or equivalent.
b. Continuous filament 'E' glass mat to

BS 3496 or equivalent.
Resin - Unsaturated isophthalic modified polyester resin to BS 3532 or

equivalent, U.V. stabilized.
Filler - Calcium carbonate.
Catalyst - Ditertiary butyl peroxytrimethyl cyclohexane.
Moulding Process - The mouldings shall be produced in matched metal tools,

at a temperature of 140o C and at a moulding pressure of 1.7 MN/m2 (250
lb/in2)
Page 154 of 230

 Materials
The materials to be used in the construction of the water storage tank shall be
compatible with World Health Organisation Standards for drinking water and
should not contribute to the growth of alga etc. in the tank.
Bolts, nuts and washer exposed/in-contact with water shall conform to BS

3692 and shall be in stainless steel type 316/A4.
 Flanges of Panels
The flanges of the panels shall be molded square to the face of the panel and
shall be free from irregularities. They shall be insulated sandwiched panels.
Bolt holes shall be drilled at 152mm (6") pitch and alike panels shall be inter-
changeable.
 Sealing Material
The sealant strip used shall be based on a partially cross linked butyl rubber
which shall be non toxic and does not support bacteriological or fungi growth.
 Bolts, Nuts and Washers
Each flange bolt shall be fitted with one flat washer under the head, and one
washer under the nut, the diameter of the bolts being 12 mm(0.5").
 Corsetry
The sides and ends of externally corseted tanks shall be supported by rolled
steel `I' sections to BS. 4 Part 1, 1972. The design of the corsetry complies
with BS 449 Part 1, 1970.
The lower tiers of tanks deeper than 1.22mm (4) consist of 1.22m x 0.61m
(4'x2') panels.
 Internal Staying
The sides and ends of internally stayed tanks shall be supported by stays
made from either glass reinforced plastic or type 316/A4 stainless steel. The
stays shall be attached either directly to the panel flanges or by means of
glass reinforced plastic brackets bolted to the panels.
 Connections
Pads for connections, shall be bonded to the inside and/or outside of the tank
Page 155 of 230

panel complete with bolts or studs as required.
Pads shall be in accordance with the relevant imperial or metric standard and
should be provided to suit requirements.
Connections should be positioned so as to avoid external corsetry.
 Tank Covers
Covers for tanks shall be heavy-duty type suitable for inside or outside use.
These shall be constructed from standard tank panels, bolted and sealed as
the tank is built and supported from the base of the tank by glass reinforced
plastic tubular struts.
Tanks shall be provided with a manhole, giving clear access to the inside of
the tank, and also with a screened vent pipe.
 Ball Valve/Sump Boxes
Ball valve/Sump boxes shall be provided to ensure full design

capacity/maximum capacity of the water tanks are utilized.
 Contents Gauges
Water content gauges shall be provided for each tank, and for each
compartment of the tank.
 Access Ladders& level indicators
Internal ladders shall be provided in GRP and external ladders fabricated from
stainless steel. The level indicators shall be provided.
2.6.13. DOMESTIC WATER HEATER
Domestic water heater shall be electric type, suitable for operation with
240V/1Ph./50Hz. power supply.
The heaters shall be suitable for installation on wall brackets above the false ceiling/
under counter in kitchens as shown in the drawings.
Inner casing shall be heavy gauge steel with protective copper lining, suitable for
maximum working pressure of 8 bar.
Outer casing shall be of same material with polymerized coating finish.
Water heaters shall be listed to UL 174. Heating element shall be screw type
Page 156 of 230

immersion element. The heater shall be externally insulated with non CFC foam
insulation and glass lined internally, vitrified at 900oC or baked on fused ceramic shield
lining, fused to steel at 870oC (Polymer linings are not acceptable) for ensuring clean
and odourless water. Protective magnesium anode rod shall be provided to inhibit
corrosion of tank interior.
The heater shall be complete with factory installed nipples. Fast acting surface
mounted thermostats shall be provided for automatic temperature control. Also factory
installed sensitive energy cut off for safety to prevent overheating to be provided.
Unit shall be equipped with an external, electric junction box.
Special intake dip tube to be provided to guide cold water to the bottom of the tank,
which will eliminate mixing of cold and hot water.
All heater shall be provided with temperature & pressure relief valves.
All heaters shall be provided with indicator light to show supply is on/off.
All heaters shall have temperature indicator of surface mounted type.
All heaters shall be provided with inlet control unit/valve complete with non-return and
safety features.
The capacity in litres and heating element capacity shall be as per the drawings.
All the replaceable parts such as thermostat, heating elements, magnesium anode
road, dip tube, drain valve, shall have a minimum warranty of 2 years and the tank
casing and internal lining shall have a minimum of 5 years warranty.
Make of heaters shall be A.O. Smith, U.S.A./Bradford White, U.S.A./American Water

Heaters, U.S.A. /Ariston, Ecotherm, or equal approved.
2.7.0 SOIL, WASTE AND DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS

2.7.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS
1) All above ground soil, waste and vent pipes and fittings 75mm and above shall be
uPVC pipes to BS 4514.
2) All above ground waste and vent pipes and fittings 50mm and below shall be
uPVC pipes to BS 5255.
3) All underground gravity soil and waste pipes and fitting shall be uPVC pipes
according to BS 4660 (Golden brown pipes).
Page 157 of 230

4) Soil, waste, rain water pipes in the ceiling voids of floor below which is
living/dining/foyer/bedroom/passage etc. shall be low noise uPVC pipes similar to
WavinAS or equal and approved.
5) Floor/ceiling cleanouts shall be provided for all drainage piping as shown on the
drawings and or as required.
6) All horizontal drainage piping shall have a minimum slope of 1 : 50 except as

otherwise noted on the drawings.
2.7.2 RAINWATER OUTLETS
a) Flat Roofs
Wherever shown in the drawings, the circular outlets shall be domed with cast
aluminium with aluminium dome, membrane clamping facility and spigot
suitable for 110mm diameter PVC pipe connection. A stainless steel sedi-
ment bucket shall be incorporated. Outlets shall have anti-vortex performance.
Make shall be Wade, U.K. /Harmer (AV 400 Model) or equal and approved.
Wherever shown in the drawings side discharge, parapet type (two way) rain
water outlets shall be used. Material specification shall be cast aluminium
body and grating and stainless steel bolts/screws.
Make shall be Wade, U.K. (WF series)/Harmer (4 TW model) or equal and

approved.
b) Balconies and Paved Terraces
Wherever shown in the drawing, outlets shall be cast-aluminium body with

membrane clamping facility, circular flat grating made from nickel-bronze,
spigot suitable for Ø 80mm PVC pipe connection as indicated on the
drawings.
Type of outlet shall be suitable for the construction detail of the balcony (flat
grating at tile level and slotted collar and membrane clamping collar below the
tile level where water proofing layer is below the tile and insulation layers).
Refer also architectural drawings. Make shall be Wade U.K./Harmer or equal

and approved.
2.7.3 FLOOR DRAINS/ Back inlet Gulley
a) Bathrooms/Toilets/Pantry Areas
Floor drains shall comprise a 100mm diameter uPVC trapped gulley with three
Page 158 of 230

inlet bosses, each 50mm diameter, and an 80mm outlet with rodding access.
Grating shall be nickel-bronze of size, 150mm x 150mm
Make of floor trap shall be Wavin/Terrain or equal and aapproved.
Make of grating shall be Wade U.K./Harmer (AS 150) or equal and approved.
b) Back inlet Gulley
uPVC back inlet gully of diameter 300/230mm with 160/110mm diameter

outlet pipe and three number back inlet connections. Grating/ cover shall be
300x300mm/ 230mmx230mm size and shall be stainless steel and the gully
shall be with stainless steel sediment basket. Oval shaped stainless steel
funnel shall be provided as part of the grating, which has to be screwed to the
grating cover.
2.7.4 MANHOLE
1. All manholes shall be constructed strictly in accordance with the specification,

standard drawings and requirements of Ministry of Works, Sewerage
Directorate, Kingdom of Bahrain.
2. A manhole shall be provided at every point at which a sewer changes either its
direction or its gradient and elsewhere so as to ensure that the maximum
distance between manholes does not exceed 45 metres.
3. A manhole shall be of sufficient size to allow access to the drain for rodding.
Shallow manholes (less than 1000 mm deep) shall normally be not less thank
600 mm x 600 mm (Refer Standard details drawings)
Deeper manholes shall be not less than 800mm x 800mm or have an internal
diameter not less than 800 mm when it is circular (Refer Standard details
drawings).
4. A manhole shall be constructed of concrete brickwork, in situ concrete or

precast concrete sections in such manner as to exclude all subsoil water and
surface water. The concrete brickwork, in situ concrete or concrete sections
shall be carried upto ground or floor level and shall have a concrete roof slab
and be provided with a sealed manhole cover of suitable duty to DIN or
approved equivalent standard.
Covers for shallow manholes shall have a clear opening of not less than
600mm x 600mm. Covers for deeper manholes shall have a clear opening of
not less than 600mm x 600mm. The minimum thickness of concrete brickwork
shall be 200mm.
Page 159 of 230

5. Benchings shall be formed above the level of every drainage channel in a
manhole and fall towards the channel. The minimum slope between inlet
and outlet pipe in a manhole shall be 30mm.
6. The benchings of every manhole shall be rendered with cement mortar to

provide a smooth and impervious surface.
7. Every drainage channel in a manhole shall have a diameter not less than that
of the largest drainage inlet into, and not more than that of the outlet from
manhole or inspection chamber.
8. Every drainage inlet into a manhole shall discharge into the drainage channel
therein with properly made bends constructed within the benching of the
manhole, such that the flow travels in a similar direction to that in the channel.
9. The manhole cover shall be ductile iron, black bitumen coated, non skid
checker design and shall conform to BS-497/EN-124 and of duty detailed in
drainage standard details drawings.
Manhole Step Irons:Step irons shall be galvanised malleable cast iron to B.S.
1247
2.7.5 Sewerage Lifting Stations and Pumps
2.7.5.1 Sewerage Lifting Station
It is intended to use packaged lifting station for pumping the soil and waste water from
toilets as shown in drawing as per SDD guidelines.
The package lifting stations shall be complete with above ground, RC plinth mounted
synthetic and fully sealed tank complies with BS/DIN Standards, duty and standby
pumps of duty specified, integral non-return valve system including cleaning openings
and junction piece for twin units. Central discharge line outlet port with transition piece
for synthetic valves, with number of inlet ports at different heights and with different
diameters DN 50/70/100/150.
Shall be supplied complete with connection facility (DN 40) for hand membrance
pump.
Pump motor shall be suitable for 400V/3Ph. /50Hz or 230V/1Ph./50Hz, Class-F

insulation, IP-68 protection, water pressure tight encapsulated fully flood proof.
Refer drawings for more details.
Make shall be ABS/GRUNDFOS/LOWARA or equal and approved by consultant.
Page 160 of 230

2.8.0 WORKMANSHIP
2.8.1 Pipework
Water supply pipes where practicable shall be placed at same elevation and hung on
suitable hangers.
Insulated pipes shall be so installed that there will be not less than 25mm clear space
between the surfaces of the insulation.
Water supply pipework shall be fixed or supported at intervals not exceeding the
following:- (Refer also the recommendations of the manufacturer).
Diameter of Horizontal Vertical

Tube Pipe Pipe
15mm 1.2m 1.8m

20mm 1.2m 1.8m
25mm 1.5m 2.4m
32mm 1.5m 2.4m
40mm 1.8m 3.0m
50mm 1.8m 3.0m
65mm 1.8m 3.0m
80mm 1.8m 3.0m
110mm 1.8m 3.0m
materials.
All pipework shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove dirt and grease or oil. The inside of
pipework shall be thoroughly flushed with fresh water.
Fittings i.e. stopcocks, valves, flexible connectors, bends, etc., shall be provided
where necessary and in accordance with good practice.
Main valves and switches on pipeworks shall be stenciled to indicate their use.
All piping shall be tested before used as described in the specification.
A friction wrench shall not be used on plated pipe and fittings. Cut, dented or bruised
pipe will not be allowed, and if found installed, shall be removed by the Contractor.
Page 161 of 230

same.
All hot and cold water piping, shall be installed so as to pitch to drain to accessible
locations.
Generally, all piping shall be run concealed in chases or pipe spaces adjoining fixtures
or shall otherwise be concealed in walls, unless otherwise indicated.
Air chambers, set 800mm high full size of branch shall be installed at the end of all hot
and cold water supplies to fixtures. Shock arrestors shall be provided for all water lines
to equipment with quick opening and closing valves.
pipe and equipment.
All metal pipework conveying water shall be protected from electrolytic action by the
installation of non-conductive or fibre type nipples to mechanically separate copper
pipes from galvanized tanks or galvanized steel pipework. Where the water is acidic,
action.
In areas where certain water or soil conditions could cause dezincification on brass
fittings, valves, etc., then the gun metal type shall be used throughout.
Approval shall be obtained prior to ordering materials which may be affected by

dezincification and the correct materials shall be used throughout the system.
Ample provision shall be made for expansion of pipework and expansion loops
points shall be provided on the drawing or as directed by the S.O. or his
representative.
by the S.O., before installation.
All pipework passing through walls, ceilings and floors shall be provided with sleeves
material to that of the pipe. The gaps between sleeves and pipes shall be sealed by
fire rated sealants, the fire rating shall be equal to that of the wall/partition.
All vents, stacks and in general any PVC pipes within the building extending to
Page 162 of 230

outdoor under direct sunlight should be made of GRP (the portion extending
outdoors), PVC is not allowed on all cases to be used.
Sleeves shall be of sufficient length to finish flush with finished face of wall or ceiling
and 13mm proud of the finished face of all floors except where shown otherwise on
the drawings. Sleeves shall be retained in position before making good by lugs or
plates.
2.8.2. THERMAL EXPANSION - PVC DRAINAGE
Where piping is installed in such a way as to prevent slight movement a seal ring shall
be used between the fixed points.
Where boss or branch connections are made into the stack the maximum distance
between that entry and the nearest fixed point shall not exceed 510mm (20 ins). For
all other support and fixing centres see table hereafter.
Where pipework penetrates fire barriers, the pipework must be fire stopped but
capable of thermal movement.
The fixed points on the stack are the drain connections and the WC branch on the first
floor. Provision for thermal movement must be made between these points. Where
there are no ground floor connections a caulking bush should be used for the drain
connection.
Where a sink or other connection is made to this stack, it is preferable to use an

expansion coupling above the connection (if access is required use a caulking ring on
the foot of the stack). The WC branch should be fixed to ensure stability at this point.
The vent pipe above the bossed connections shall be provided with:
a. Expansion coupling above the highest boss on the stack

OR
b. Seal ring adaptor fitted to the lowest socket of the off-set.
2.8.3 FIXING OF PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONS - PVC DRAINAGE
The fixings used shall comply with the following minimum requirements:
1) The wall thickness of fixings manufactured from uPVC shall in no case be less than
that of the pipe with which they are to be used.
2) In the case of eared fixings the centre to centre dimension fixing of the holes
should be such as to avoid damage to the pipe when installing the system with the
pipe in position.
Page 163 of 230

3) When assembled the pipe and fixing should provide a secure installation.
4) Every length of pipe shall be independently supported. Intermediate supports shall

be provided for long lengths of pipe where necessary in accordance with the
following table:-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nominal Maximum Support Distance Maximum exp.
Size Vertical Horizontal Joint distance
vertical and
horizontal
mm/inch Metres Metres Metres
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
32 1.2 .5 1.8
40 1.2 .9 1.8
50 1.2 .9 1.8
80 1.8 .9 3.6
110 1.8 .9 3.6
160 1.8 1.0 3.6
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Any metal fixing shall be suitably protected against corrosion.
6. Screws for use in brickwork, concrete or masonry should be non-corrodible, not

less than 45mm long and of minimum size No.12.
7. Pipe shall be fixed at a minimum distance (from the outside of the barrel of the
pipe) of 25mm from walls.
8. Seal ring expansion joints shall be provided on fittings by means of a seal ring
adaptor so that thermal movement between fixed points can be taken up.
9. Care must be taken to anchor each unit of pipework to prevent accumulative

movement or escalation, which in extreme cases can lead to pulling out of joints.
10. Seal ring joints shall be used between fixed points if they are more than 900mm
apart.
11. In suspended horizontal pipework the brackets at expansion points must be braced
to ensure fixed points. Suitable brackets are available as proprietary items or can
be purpose made. It is essential that the width of the clamping ring should not
exceed 22mm (7/8 inch) for size number 160mm (6") socket and 15mm (5/8 inch)
for number 110mm (4") or number 75mm (3") socket.
Page 164 of 230

12. Wherever pipes passes through building expansion joints, expansion fittings shall
be provided.
2.9.0 TESTING
2.9.1 Hot and Cold Water Systems
Pipework to be properly supported, cleaned, flushed through and refilled with clean
water. A hydraulic test at 10 bar pressure shall be maintained for a minimum period of
12 hours with no loss of pressure.
Testing may be carried out in sections as work proceeds and shall be done before the
application of any insulation or paint, and before being concealed.
On final completion the whole system shall be subject to a further hydraulic test. This
may be carried out after insulation except at previously untested joints.
2.9.2 Drainage Systems
All soil, waste, rainwater, condensate and vent piping shall be tested in sections as
work progresses and before being covered over or concealed. Expanding test plugs
shall be used at open ends. Each section shall be cleaned, flushed through and
refilled with clean water, using an extension pipe where necessary, to a level 1.2 metre
above the highest point of the section being tested.
After a period of settlement and topping up until equilibrium is reached the level shall
be maintained for a period of 4 hours without dropping.
2.9.3 Test Records
Test sheets shall be submitted for each individual test and a set of record drawings
marked up to indicate which pipes have been tested.
2.10.0 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM (WATER SUPPLY)
Upon completion of all tests and necessary repairs or replacements, all water piping
systems shall be subjected to a disinfection procedure as herein specified. The
systems to be disinfected shall include hot, cold and recirculating water piping and any
other systems that may be connected to the same supply source. The disinfection
shall be applied to all piping included in the contract from the main cut-off valve
through pumps and other appurtenances connected thereto.
These systems shall be thoroughly flushed with water to remove sediment. Following
this flushing, they shall be disinfected in accordance with one of the following methods.
Page 165 of 230

1) The systems shall be filled with a solution containing 50 parts per million of
available chlorine. The solution shall be retained in the systems for not less than
four (4) hours and then drained.
2) The systems shall be filled with a solution containing 100 parts per million of
available chlorine. The solution shall be retained in the systems for not less than
two (2) hours, and then drained.
After the systems are drained, they shall be thoroughly flushed with fresh water, and
returned to service.
2.11.0 THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION
2.11.1 Hot and Cold Water Pipework (Refer also the drawings).
The following pipework shall be insulated:-
 Hot water supply and return (where applicable) pipes from water heaters to the
fixtures.
 Cold water pipe work exposed to sun.
2.11.2 Drainage Pipework
The following pipework shall be insulated.
 Condensate drains.
2.11.3 Materials
Hot and cold water pipework shall be insulated with sectional fiberglass insulation
0.042 w/m degrees Celsius conductivity at 50oC and 64 kg/cub m density, with
reinforced aluminium foil. Sections to be close butted and all longitudinal overlaps to
be sealed with 75 mm wide aluminium foil tape. Bends, tees, valves, etc. shall be
insulated with same material mitred and cut to fit on site. The ends of the insulation
and points where the covering is penetrated are to be sealed with vapour barrier paint.
The thickness of the sectional fiberglass insulation shall be as per the following table.
Pipe Diameter Thickness of Insulation
10mm to 50mm 25mm
Condensate drains shall be insulated to prevent condensation with closed cell

polyurethane flexible insulation 19mm thick.
All insulation shall be finished with two coats of 4 oz canvas cloth, 2 coats of vapour
Page 166 of 230

barrier paint and 2 coats of water proof paint (for outdoor installation).
Make for insulation shall be Kimmco/Afico and vapour barrier paint shall be
Foster/Ideal, U.S.A. (antifungal type) or equal and approved.
2.11.4 WORKMANSHIP
The insulation work shall be carried out by specialists, approved by the S.O.,
employing skilled craftsmen used to the class of work and finish required and shall be
in accordance with B.S. 5422 : 1977. All thermal conductivity figures shall be in
accordance with BS 874 and BS 2972 relevant ASTM, ASHRAE and/or DIN and as
specified.
No insulation shall be applied until all piping and equipment have been tested and
cleaned. All hangers shall be outside the insulation.
All insulating material shall be in close contact with the surface to which it is applied
and all joints shall be sealed after ensuring that the edges of sectional material where
employed are in close contact with one another over the entire insulated surface. All
insulation jacketing and surface finish materials shall be suitable for local weather
conditions, space ambient temperature during application or finishing shall be as
directed by the manufacturer.
All adhesives, vapour coating, mastics, laggings and bedding compounds shall be
compatible with the materials to which they are applied. They shall not soften, corrode
or otherwise attach such material in either the wet or dry state and shall only be those
recommended by the manufacturer of the insulation as suitable for the application
proposed.
Insulation shall be clean and dry when installed and during the application of any
finish. Space ambient temperature during application or finishing of insulation shall not
be less than 13 degrees Celsius unless recommended otherwise by insulation
manufacturer.
Contractor shall provide the S.O. with a manufacturer's certificate of declared thermal
conductivity for each type of insulation used.
Pipework shall be clean and dry before the application of any thermal insulation.
Galvanised sheet steel ductwork shall be clean and dry before the application of any
thermal insulation.
Pipe services shall have 75mm wide coloured bands with identification letters and
directional arrows approximately every 2m, at each change of direction and adjacent
to every branch and valve. The colour coding of the bands idencifying the various
services shall comply with BS 1710- 1971 where applicable, unless otherwise
directed.
Page 167 of 230

The Contractor shall provide charts giving details of colours for the identification code.
The charts shall be 6 mm thick clear acrylic sheet with rear engraving mounted on
painted plywood boards. The charts shall be fixed to the walls of the plant rooms in
approved positions.
At bends, tees etc. the sectional insulation shall be formed in neat segments. The
sections of insulation shall be carefully butted together to ensure the absence of gaps
in the insulation and to obviate voids between the insulation and the pipework and
ductwork.
Thermal insulation may when delivered to site be subjected to:
a Tests for thickness

b Tests for uniformity of thickness
c Tests for bulk density
d Tests for thermal conductivity
e Tests for compressibility.
Materials shall be in accordance with BS 5422: 1969, BS 874: 1973, BS 2972: 1975,
BS 5970: 1981.
All applied insulation shall be of uniform thickness and shall not vary from the specified
thickness by more than 10%.
To ensure that the correct thickness of insulation has been applied, the Contractor
shall cut section of the insulation specified where directed by the S.O.
The Contractor shall allow for the cost of these cuttings and making good in his
Tender.
Should such cutting outs indicate that the insulation is in any way inadequate further
test sections shall be cut out as directed by the S.O. In the event of the insulation
being unacceptable the whole of the insulation, or such part as the S.O. shall direct,
shall be stripped and re-executed at contractors cost.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all equipment during the
application of the insulation.
All electrical and mechanical services shall be identified as per BS 1710.
All the pump sets, water tanks and water piping shall be labeled to identify their duty,
direction of flow etc.
Page 168 of 230

The Contractor shall submit within fifteen (15) days after the award of contract and
before the commencement of site works, shop drawings of all installations for
Consultant’s approval. Minimum of 3 sets of the shop drawings in white paper (A1 or
A0 sizes as directed by S.O.) shall be submitted.
Approved “As Built Drawings” shall be submitted within fifteen (15) days after
completion of works and before the issue of the substantial completion certificate.
Approved “As Built Drawings” shall be submitted in the following formats.
 Three sets of printed drawings.

 One set of drawings on ACAD CD-ROM in an agreed format, wherever
applicable.
Two sets of approved operation and maintenance manuals of all equipment’s installed
shall also be submitted to the Consultant in an agreed format, within seven (7) days
after the completion of works and before the issue of substantial completion certificate.
They shall include all test certificates and warranties apart from regular manuals.
Based on the comments of the S.O./Consultant, O. & M. Manual shall be revised, if

necessary, and resubmit 3 sets to the S.O.
Page 169 of 230

DIVISION 3 AIR CONDITIONING & MECHANICAL VENTILATION WORKS -
INDEX TITLE
3.1.0 GENERAL
3.2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
3.3.0 DESIGN CONDITIONS
3.4.0 FRESH AIR AIRCONDITIOING UNITS
3.5.0 SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNTS.
3.6.0 MINI SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
3.7.0 CLOSE CONTROL UNITS(CCU FOR MAIN SERVER ROOM)
3.8.0 CLOSE CONTROL UNITS FOR NETWORK ROOMS
3.9.0 REMOTE CONTROL AND MONITORING
3.10.0 EXHAUST AIR FANS
3.11.0 PIPING WORKS
3.12.0 THERMAL INSULATION
3.13.0 DUCTING, DAMPERS AND AIRTERMINALS
3.14.0 SOUND ATTENUATORS
3.15.0 ELECTRICAL & CONTROLS
3.16.0 CONTROL PANELS
3.17.0 ELECTRIC MOTOR STARTERS, SWITCHGEAR
3.18.0 SYSTEM TESTS
3.19.0 IDENTIFICATIONS
3.20.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
3.22.0 AS BUILT DRAWINGS.
3.23.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
Page 170 of 230

3.0.0 AIR CONDITIONING & MECHANICAL VENTILATION -
3.1.0 GENERAL
Provide all Mechanical Ventilating and Air Conditioning Work complete, in accordance
with the Contract Documents. The works shall be carried out in accordance with the
contract documents, ASHRAE Standards, SMACNA Standards, DW-144 and CPMD
Specifications.
3.1.1 CO-ORDINATION
Contractor shall be responsible to co-ordinate different services, systems and builder

3.1.2 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The Contractor is to submit for the approval of the Consultant a list of the names and
orders are placed.
If any of the manufacturers, materials and the like are rejected by the Consultant, then
it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide suitable alternatives to the Consultant
Contractor.
When so required by the Consultant, samples of goods or materials are to be provided

at the Contractor's expense. The following procedures is to be adopted.
1. All samples are to be delivered to the Consultant's office.
2. Duplicate final approved samples are to be provided for the Consultant, one
for office use and one for the site.
3. Samples are to be provided promptly to allow the Consultant adequate time

for inspection so as not to delay the Works.
4. Each sample is to be properly labeled with these details:

ii. Manufacturer's name.
iii. Project title.
Page 171 of 230

5. Samples not to be removed until so instructed by the Consultant.
best endeavours, then the Contractor may offer a suitable alternative. Any decision
upon alternative materials will be at the sole discretion of the Consultant and any delay
or loss occasioned by the Contractor due to his failure to provide the materials
specified will not relieve him of his obligations under the Contract. If alternative material
proves to be acceptable but there is a decrease in the quality or value a suitable price
reduction will be made, however if there is an increase in quality or value no ad-
justment will be made.
All equipments and materials used for the project shall have a local agent approved by
the manufacturer. The local agent shall have stock of spares and after sales servicing
facilities available.

All materials or manufactured items that are liable to damage are to be delivered to
site in the original package or container bearing the name of the manufacturer and the
brand.
Materials or manufactured items are to be carefully loaded, transported, unloaded and

stored in an approved manner, protected from damage and exposure to weather or
dampness during transit and after delivery to site.
The Contractor is to provide all labour, materials and transport that the Consultant may
require in carrying out tests and checks on materials and workmanship and setting out
and measuring the Works.
Contractor to submit before end of every calendar month a material flow sheet, in a
3.2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
This section covers the Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation and shall be read
in conjunction with the “Standard Specification” for building works issued by Ministry of
Works and Housing, Kingdom of Bahrain.
Supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning and hand over of the following
works including service during defect liability period of 12 months from date of
handover.
1. Air cooled treated fresh air units with condensing units, Air handling units and
all accessories as per drawings and specifications.
Page 172 of 230

2. Direct expansion ducted type and mini split air conditioning units wherever
shown in the drawings and as per specifications.
3. Close control units for server room and network rooms as per specifications
and as shown in the drawings. The display unit at location shown in the
drawing shall be included for temperature and humidity.
4. Duct work, grilles, diffusers, volume control dampers, splitter dampers, fire
dampers, motorized dampers, non-return dampers etc. as shown on the
drawings and as per specifications.
5. Inline Extract fans and duct work and roof mounted extract fans for toilets,
kitchens, pantry etc. as shown in the drawings and as per specifications.
6. Duct mounted sound attenuators wherever shown in the drawings.
7. Thermal insulation and acoustic lining of duct work as per specifications and
drawings. The condensate drain with insulation for all areas shall be included.
8 Thermostats, power and control wiring for all treated outdoor air units, split
units, CCU’s as required and as per the drawings and specification.
9 Power and control wiring for toilet/kitchen/pantry extract fans.
10. Starter and control panels for treated outdoor air AHUs, condensing units etc.
as per specifications and as per the drawings.
11. Furnish and set all sleeves for the passage of pipes and ducts through
structural masonry and concrete walls and floors and elsewhere as will be
required for the proper protection of each pipe and duct passing through a
wall, floor etc.
12. Testing, commissioning and balancing of complete systems.
13. Shop drawings, material submittals, as built drawings and O. & M. Manual for
the complete air conditioning and ventilation works, as per specification.
14. Any other items not specifically mentioned above, but shown in drawings or
required for the satisfactory working of the A.C. and ventilation system.
15. Builders works for the A.C. and Ventilation works.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1. Finished painting of exposed apparatus, ducts, etc.
Page 173 of 230

2. Outside air intake and discharge louvers and screens.
3. Concrete foundations, pads and blocks for equipment.
4. Access doors in building construction.
5. Base flashing for all roof equipment, ductwork and piping penetrations.
6. Excavation and backfill.
3.3.0 DESIGN CONDITIONS
The scheme shall be based on the conditions specified below and drawings.
a) General Indoor design conditions in air conditioned areas:

Summer DB - 22oC ± 1.C, Relative Humidity not exceeding 60%.
Winter 22oC + 1.1oC, RH not exceeding 60%. The server room shall be having
precise control of temperature and humidity 21 deg. centigrade and 50% RH.
The network rooms shall have precise temperature control and high humidity
control i.e. humidity shall not be more than 55%RH.
b) Kitchen/Pantries and lift lobbies 24oC + 1.1oC, RH not exceeding 60%.
c) Toilets – mechanical ventilation as shown.
d) General outdoor design conditions: 43.3oC DB/30.5oC WB (Summer), 12oC

DB/11oC WB (Winter).
e) Noise level in all indoor areas except shall not exceed NC 30. Treated fresh
air air-conditioning units, and fans shall be selected to have duct borne and
breakout noise lower than NC 30 at occupied rooms.
f) Outdoor air supply – Refer Layout drawings.
3.4.0 FRESH AIR HANDLING UNITS
The air handling units shall be of the draw-through type with variable speed, self
contained including cooling coils, 50mm thick washable permanent pre filter , bag
filter, supply fans, condensate drain, drip eliminator etc. as specified and as shown on
drawings.
Page 174 of 230

The air moving, coil capacities, fan and other characteristics shall be as shown on the
drawings, and shall be ARI certified. The unit can be single or split as air handling
and condensing type. Contractor shall ensure the space availability and there shall
not be any cost variations as far unit and control wirings, builders work etc. are
concerne
The unit shall be suitable to operate up to 52oC outdoor air temperature entering the
condenser.
The condensing units shall be completely packaged and air cooled type, with factory piping,
wiring and tested at factory before shipment. The units shall be pre charged with R-
410A/R407C in factory.
Unit shall be assembled on heavy gauge steel mounting/lifting rails and shall be weather
proofed.
Units shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standards 210/240, 340/360, or 365.
(a) Casing
Frame shall be made with anodised aluminium, or steel coated with antirust paint,
sections specially designed to avoid bridging. All casing panels to be of substantial
gauge steel metal) heavily protected against corrosion or alternatively, anodised
aluminium. It should be double skin of airtight design with approximate thickness of
50mm for all units, high quality mineral wool/polyurethane foam, sound and thermal
insulation in between the two skins and inside the frame. All panel sections shall be air
tight and joint with a continuous neoprene gasket. U-value not to exceed 0.65 w/m²K.
As an alternative to the high quality mineral wool, other types of insulation such as
polyurethane may be accepted subject to the following:
 Melting points of mineral wool is about 1100 – 12000C and should omit
hazardous and toxic gases.
 The units for outdoor installation shall be fully weatherized and externally
sealed with permanent elastic sealing compound. Hinged access doors with
heavy-duty handles are to be provided on all compartments for maintenance
purposes. These shall be tightly sealed with neoprene gaskets.
 The unit shall include one-piece insulated drain pans, one under the coil
section and one under the fan section and shall have drain connections on
both sides.
 All unit panels shall be chemically cleaned, spray painted baked and coated
with an additional exterior coat of enamel after final assembly.
 The casing shall be designed so that assembling and disassembling of the
unit on site can be easily carried out.
Page 175 of 230

 Sections shall be supported on a painted metal base of a minimum height of
150mm. The units shall be properly secured on their base through rubber in
shear isolators. The base frame shall be constructed from galvanized steel
with adjustable feet.
 All units, indoor or outdoor, shall be equipped with an explosion proof light
fixture, one per section, controllable from externally mounted light switch in
the fan section.
(b) Motor
The Motor shall be especially designed for quite operation. It should be totally
enclosed, fan-cooled class F, suitable for 380V - 3phase - 50Hz. Motor over load
protection shall be provided to cut off electrical supply to the motor when drawn current
exceeds a pre-set value. Motor shall be mounted on common, torsion ally rigid
galvanised steel base frame.
(c) Fan
The unit fans shall be double width double inlet type with GI steel casing backward
inclined airfoil construction. Fan shall have a minimum balancing accuracy of G 2.5.
Fan shaft bearings shall be designed for at least 200,000 running hour’s life
expectancy. All rotating parts shall be dynamically balanced, individually and after final
assembly. Bearings shall be mounted externally for servicing without dismantling of
unit. The shaft shall be designed for a critical speed at least 10% higher than the
maximum fan speed.
All fans shall be tested in accordance with AMCA 300 & 301 standard and all
components shall be factory approved by AMCA or other competent authority and
shall be currently catalogued product. Fan shall be tested AMCA 300 –85.
The fan shall be reinforced with suitable bolted angle flanges or by any other approved
means to safeguard full rigidity of the unit.
The fan shall be belt driven with adjustable motor sheaf. Belts shall be of the oil
resistant V-type to suit horsepower transmitted.
The fan motor and belt drive shall be mounted on a robust beam frame effectively
separated from the unit casing by internal spring type anti-vibration mountings, so that
the vibration and noise from the units shall not be transmitted to the building structure.
Belt drive guard shall be factory supplied and installed. Back curved fan should be
coated with 60-micron epoxy painting of high quality. Fan shall not exceed a maximum
outlet velocity of 15 m/sec.
Page 176 of 230

The static resistance of the various systems have been calculated by the Engineer and
the Sub-Contractor shall be required to check and recalculate the resistance in the
system taking into consideration the resistance through the equipment that is finally
approved and satisfy himself that the resistance figures for the fan is adequate. If
necessary the total fan resistance shall be adjusted and agreed with the Engineer. No
claim shall be allowed by the Engineer if the Sub-Contractor fails to fully acquaint
himself with the capabilities of the various systems. The fan shall have provision for
connecting variable frequency device.
(d) Sound attenuator
Sound attenuators shall be provided on all FAHU’s. The sound attenuators shall
consist of baffle elements of a non-flammable sound absorption material of mineral
wool retained by an outer layer of woven glass fibre fabric. The sound attenuator shall
be installed at both the inlet and the outlet of each air-handling unit to maintain the
specified sound pressure levels.
(e) Coils
Cooling Coils shall have capacities as shown on the drawings.
The coils shall be manufactured from copper tubes and aluminum fins. There shall be
electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant flow rate in response to supply air
temperature.
(f) Mixing Box (if applicable)
The filter mixing box shall be of the high efficiency type with opposed blade dampers
for the recalculated, fresh and exhaust air, as shown on the AHU schedule on the
drawings, positioned across the short dimension of each air - opening.
The mixing box shall be especially designed to provide high efficiency mixing of air
streams at different temperatures. The dampers shall have extended shafts and
galvanized pivot rods, suitable for the control sequence specified. The blades of the
dampers shall be airtight of airfoil design made of rigid, double skin construction of
painted galvanized steel or extruded aluminum sections.
(g) Filters
The pre-filter section shall contain 50mm thick throw-away heavy duty filters, glass-
fibres of progressive density, with 75%(EU4) arrestance efficiency. Air face velocity
through the filters shall not exceed 2m/s. Filter frame shall be permanent type
aluminium with pull-out hooks. Filter elements shall be held in place with sturdy metal
retainers.
Page 177 of 230

The bag filters shall be high capacity filters with dust spot efficiency of 85% (EU7).
They shall comprise of a corrosion resistant frame housing the filter media, which shall
be supported by a 3mm-dia. wire assembly, designed to keep the media cartridge in a
fully open position. The media cartridge shall be preformed and shall consist of glass
fibers. Filter shall be capable to operate under high humidity conditions. The bag length
shall not be less than 500mm.
Filter efficiencies shall be according to EUROVENT 4/5.
Filters shall be flame retardant to BS 5588.Pt. 9:1989. Pressure tapings together with
inclined manometers for visual indication of filters pressure drop shall be provided
before and after each filter. See Control section for any additional tapings.
h) Sand Trap Louver:
Shall be provided to trap sand particles with access for maintenance. The fresh air
intake louver shall be connected to the suction side with sand trap louver. The louvre
shall be with aluminium wire mesh screen. The sizes shall be selected to have air intake
velocity less than 1.75 m/s.
CONDENSING UNIT
These units shall be of the capacities shown in the drawings.
The units shall be factory assembled, internally wired, fully charged with R-407C/410A
refrigerant and fully run tested at the factory in accordance with ARI Standard, air cooled,
outdoor, roof mounted type, mounted on steel supporting framework/structure.
The units shall comprise, not limited to, compressors, air cooled condenser coils and fans,
factory installed interconnecting refrigerant piping, controls and wiring.
The units shall be tested in factory before despatching to the site.
The units shall be suitable to start and run up to an ambient temperature of 520C.
The electrical characteristics of the unit shall be 400V/3 phase/50 Hz.
Each unit shall be capacity tested in the presence of the Consultant after the
installation, during the summer when the ambient temperature is higher than 400C.
Compressors shall be guaranteed for 5 years from the date of commissioning and
handing over to the Client.
The units shall be with the condenser airflow shall be vertically upwards.
The make of the units shall be Carrier/York/Trane or equal and approved by the
consultant and Client.
Page 178 of 230

COMPRESSOR.
The compressors shall be scroll/reciprocating type with integral centrifugal type oil
pump. The compressor motor shall be suction gas cooled and shall be suitable to
operate on a voltage variation of + 10% of the name plate voltage.
The compressors shall be mounted on spring isolators and shall have sound muffler.
Protection devices such as low and high pressure switches, internal overload
protection, oil pressure switch, crank case heaters, time delay relays etc. shall be
provided.
The compressors shall be guaranteed for 5 years from the date of

commissioning and handing over to the Client.
CASING.
The unit casing shall be weather-proof (dust and water proof) and shall be constructed
from heavy gauge galvanised steel.
The casing shall have sufficient number of access panels for accessing all internal
components.
The exterior of the unit shall be powder coated and weather-proof. The casing shall be
tested and cleared by salt spray test of minimum of 500 hr., when tested with 20% salt
spray test as per ASTM Standard B117.
The casing shall be insulated with fire resistant fibreglass panels/injected polyurethane
foam.
Each unit has a sloped and insulated condensate drain pan. The condensate drain
pan shall be of one piece construction.
The unit shall be mounted on restrained spring type vibration isolators.
AIR COOLED CONDENSER.
CONDENSER COILS.
The tube shall be internally finned copper tubes, mechanically bonded to configured
aluminium plate fins.
Coils shall be leak tested at factory at pressure of 200 psig and pressure tested at 550
psig.
The coil fins shall be aluminium configured construction and shall be coated with
Page 179 of 230

phenolic coating for long life in seashore environment.. Coil fins without phenolic
coating will not be accepted.
The coils and fins shall be guaranteed for a minimum of 7 years from the date of
commissioning and handing over to the Client.
The coil shall be fitted with PVC coated steel wire guard for protection against
vandalism.
CONDENSER FANS.
Condenser fans shall be direct drive, propeller type with vertical upward air discharge.
The fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
The fan motors shall be permanently lubricated type, shall have built-in thermal
overload protection, totally enclosed fan cooled type and with Class F insulation.
The fan blades shall be heavy gauge aluminium and to be aerofoil construction
General Notes
The Contractor is obliged to calculate the resistances of the system taking into
consideration the pressure drops of all the equipment to be installed (i.e attenuators,
dampers, diffusers etc.) as well as the pressure drops in the duct runs. The contractor
before finalizing the order of the required A.H.U's must submit to the S.O. for approval
the Make and type of the units selected together with detailed calculations on which
the selection/s is/are based. No claim shall be considered due to the Contractor's
failure to fully acquaint himself with the capabilities and requirements of the various
systems. Also, the contractor must submit detailed shop drawings for the plant areas
to be approved in order to decide the AHU configuration prior to ordering the units.
All components shall be factory approved by AMCA or other competent authority and
shall be currently catalogued products.
Page 180 of 230

3.4.1. Guarantee of Equipment and Parts
The following guarantee period shall apply for equipment, parts and labour/installation
supplied under the contract, from the date of practical completion.
1. Five (5) years guarantee for all refrigeration compressor/s.
2. One (1) year guarantee with full maintenance for the complete equipment
from the date of practical completion.
3. Five (5) years guarantee for aluminium fins of air cooled condensers against
corrosion.
4. In the event of a manufacturing defect or defects arising within the guarantee

period, the Contractor shall make good all defects noted at his own expense to
the satisfaction of the S.O.
5. During the defect liability period and before the end of guarantee period, the
Contractor shall service all plants and equipment installed at least once a year
after the date of handing over. The time of servicing shall be decided by the
S.O.
6. To comply with Clause 14.1.5 of the M.O.W.A. Standard Specification, the

manufacturer shall maintain a service agency in Bahrain available seven days
a week, 24 hours per day for emergency service calls
3.5.0 DUCTED SPLIT(DX) AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
The capacities and types of split units shall be as per the layout drawings and the
“Schedule of Equipments” listed in drawings. THE REFRIGERANT USED SHALL BE
ENVIRONMENT FRIENDLY.
These units shall comprise outdoor condensing unit containing compressor, coils,
controls and condenser fan, indoor blower unit, ceiling concealed ducted type with
return air plenum with filter, cooling coil, centrifugal fan, condensate drain pan etc.
Condenser coil fins shall be protected against corrosion by durable black epoxy
coating.
The filter shall be washable, synthetic type, 25mm thick. Insulated drain pan shall be
provided for all units. The indoor unit shall be quieter with low operating noise level &
low height type.
Interconnecting refrigerant piping and condensate drain all insulated with minimum
19mm thick Armaflex type closed cell insulation with vapour seal.
Page 181 of 230

Control to be by wall mounted thermostat incorporating on/off switch, 3 speed control
and temperature control. The thermostat shall have LCD display of actual
temperature and set point.
Electrical supply shall be 220V, 1 Phase, 50 Hz/400 V/3Ph/50Hz for fan coil units and
either 220V/1/50 HZ or 400V/3 ph./50 Hz for condensing units.
Actual capacity of each unit as indicated on Contract Drawings.
Fan coil units shall be supplied with electric heaters.
Power cabling from TPN isolator near condensing unit to the Cond. Unit and from DP
switch to the fan coil unit motor and electric heater shall be done by the a.c. sub-
contractor.
Control cabling between thermostats, FCU and Cond. Unit and necessary relays shall
be by a.c. contractor. Electrical contractor will provide PVC conduits between Cond.
Unit, FCU and thermostat.
Compressors and condenser coil coating shall be guaranteed for minimum five years
from the date of commissioning and handing over. The safety features like HP trip, LP
trip, High current, Low Current, Earth leakage protection shall be provided,
The make of the unit shall be Carrier/York/Trane.
3.6.0 MINISPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
The capacities and types of split units shall be as per the layout drawings. The unit
shall use Environment Friendly refrigerant.
These units shall comprise outdoor condensing unit containing compressor, coils,
controls and condenser fan, indoor unit, high wall mounted type with cooling coil and
fan.
The filter shall be washable, synthetic type, 13mm thick. The indoor unit shall be
quieter with low operating noise level & low height type.
Interconnecting refrigerant piping and condensate drain all insulated with minimum
19mm thick closed cell insulation with vapor seal.
Control to be by wireless remote control thermostat incorporating on/off switch. The

thermostat shall have LCD display of actual temperature and set point.
Electrical supply shall be 220V, 1 Phase, 50 Hz for indoor units and either 220V/1/50
HZ or 400V/3 ph./50 Hz for condensing units.
Units shall be suitable to work upto 55oC ambient temperature.
Page 182 of 230

Capacity of each unit as indicated on Contract Drawings.
Power cabling from SPN/TPN isolator near condensing unit to the Cond. Unit and
from DP switch to the indoor unit shall be done by the a.c. sub-contractor.
Control cabling between thermostats, indoor unit and Cond. Unit shall be by a.c.
contractor. Electrical contractor will provide PVC conduits between Cond. Unit, Indoor
Unit and thermostat. The safety features like HP trip, LP trip, High current, Low
Current, Earth leakage protection shall be provided,
Compressor shall be guaranteed for minimum 5 years from the date of commissioning
and handing over.
Make shall be Carrier/York/Trane.
3.7.0 CLOSE CONTROL UNITS (SERVER ROOM 3 BIG CAPACITY UNITS)
The technical parameters are as indicated in tender drawings. The unit construction
shall include but not limited to Compressors mounted in condenser unit, electronic
expansion valve, cooling coil, stainless steel drain tray, forward curved double inlet,
double width, centrifugal blower, thyristor controlled electric heater, steam humidifier,
microprocessor controls, Lon Works/ Bac net compatible gateway to have a complete
third party integration to monitor, control or generate reports as necessary. The unit
shall be Eurovent/ ARI certified. The units shall be able to perform at 50 degree
ambient conditions. The parameters to be achieved shall be complying to ASHRAE
guideline pertaining to Class 1 of Data processing and Electronic office areas., like
temperature, relative humidity, dew point (max 17 0C) temperature rate of change (5
0
K / h), filtration quality (MERV 11) etc.
3.7.1 UNIT CONSTRUCTION
The unit shall be constructed from rigid aluminium frame with insulated panels. The
electrical panel shall be accessed from the front with swing-out electrical box. The
return air shall be from the top configuration, suitable for connecting to return ductwork
with necessary flanges and fire retardant flexible connectors. The close control unit
shall be downward discharge type and mounted on anti-vibration neoprene rubber
pads.
3.7.2 COILS
The coil shall be of aluminium fins and copper tubes. The DX coil shall be made from
3/8” copper tube. The expansion valve shall be electronic expansion valve. The coil
fins shall be pitched at 12 FPI (472 Fins/m.) with sinusoidal wave configuration. The
coil shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. The coil shall be tested at
Page 183 of 230

24 bar air pressure under water. The drain pan shall be constructed with SS 304 with
connector suitable to connect to uPVC drain connector trap. The coil shall be
designed for a face velocity not exceeding 2.5 m/s without any condensate being
carried away from the coil.
3.7.3 COMPRESSORS
The compressors shall be fully hermetic, digital scroll compressors located in

condenser units, suitable to operate with R410a Refrigerant. Each compressor shall
be fitted with back seating isolating valves with and oil level sight glass, with high & low
pressure switches.
The compressors shall be warranted against failure for free replacement any time in a
period of 5 years from the date of practical completion certificate or established date of
beneficial use as decided by the engineer.
However, the manufacturer shall ensure that the following safety features are added to
protect the compressors.
1) a) Pressure Cut Outs

HP & LP
b) Internal overload protection
c) External overload protection. This may be thermal overload relay

and/ or a circuit breaker. The external overload protection shall have over
current protection, locked rotor protection, single phasing protection.
d) Discharge gas temperature protection shall be installed on discharge

gas line, set at 126 oC. The sensing element shall be installed at 150mm
distance from the discharge port.
2) System Safety
a) Crank case heater of suitable power rating to protect against off cycle
migration of refrigerant.
b) Liquid line solenoid valve shall be used to isolate the liquid charge in the
condenser side to prevent charge transfer or excessive migration of liquid
refrigerant to compressor during off cycles.
c) Pump down cycle.
d) Suction accumulator to avoid refrigerant flood back.
3.7.4. FAN
a) The fan/s shall be of the double width, double inlet centrifugal type, forward
curved construction. All rotating parts shall be dynamically balanced, both
before and after final assembly. Bearings shall be mounted externally for
servicing without dismantling the unit. The fans shall have modulating controls
for humidity and cooling requirements.
Page 184 of 230

b) All fan/s shall be tested in accordance with AMCA / Eurovent standards.
The unit shall be reinforced with suitable bolted angle flanges or by any other
approved means to ensure full rigidity of the unit.
c) The fan/s shall be belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves. The belts shall
be of the oil resistant V-type and suitable to the horsepower transmitted.
d) The fan, motor and belt drive shall be mounted on a robust steel base frame
effectively separated from the unit casing by spring vibration isolators.
A belt guard shall be provided for the drive.
e) Fan shaft bearing shall be 200,000 hour life lubricated.
f) Unless otherwise stated, centrifugal fans shall be medium pressure fans

selected for high efficiency and be well within the maximum permissible total
operating pressure limits of the fan construction.
g) A drain and plug shall be fitted to the casing at its lowest point. Impellers shall
be of mild steel of welded construction with spiders or hubs of robust design
and shall be capable of running without adverse effects, continuously at ten
per cent in excess of the specified duty. Impellers shall be keyed to a mild
steel shaft, constructed to take well in excess of the fan design speeds and
pressures.
h) Double inlet, double width fans shall have a pedestal mounted bearing at each
side of the fan. Fan bearings shall be ring oiling sleeve bearings. The bearing
pedestal shall not be attached to the fan casing and ring oiling sleeve bearings
shall be designed for quiet operation.
i) The fans shall be belt driven by super silent electric motors.
j) The fan outlet shall be connected to unit casing with fire retardant flexible
connection.
3.7.5 MOTOR
a) The motor/s shall be specially designed for quiet operation.
b) The motor shall be of high efficiency, totally enclosed, fan-cooled suitable for
400V-3 phase-50Hz.
c) Inherent as well as external motor over-load protection shall be provided to cut

off the electrical supply to the motor when drawn current exceeds a pre-set
value.
d) The motors must be suitable for 55 Degree Centigrade continuous operation.
Page 185 of 230

e) Fan motor ratings shall be selected to exceed the absorbed kw by a minimum
of 20%.
3.7.6 FILTERS
Disposable pleated filters with 100mm deep to EU5 shall be provided. A differential
pressure filter clog switch shall be provided to indicate alarm on display that the filter is
clogged when exceeding the rated pressure drop.
One set of spare filters shall be supplied after commissioning.
3.7.7 HEATER
The unit shall be provided with thyristor controlled electric heater for reheat to maintain
the specified indoor conditions. The heater shall be with steel fins and safety cut out.
The capacities shall be as indicated in drawings.
3.7.8 HUMIDIFIER
The humidifier shall be steam humidifier with electrode boiler with the proportional
control. An interface directly communicating to the central microprocessor shall be
provided to control the humidifier. The contractor shall ensure the water quality
available is suitable for the use for the humidifier. A conductivity monitor shall be
provided to indicate a maintenance alarm in the display. The capacities shall be as
indicated in drawings.
3.7.9. SMS (SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE)
The system have the ability to communicate important information directly by SMS
message through a GSM modem. It should be able to send at least 5 messages and
to 5 different telephone numbers simultaneously. It should also have direct remote
communication to the security and reception of the same alarm messages.
3.7.10 CONTROLS
Display:
The large screen display shall comprise the following:

 A minimum 8 row LCD unit function.
 The unit function status like Unit run, Cool, Heat, Humidify, Dehumidify etc.
 The selected, updated data in real time.
 The graphical LCD shall indicate unit functions, parameters, menus historic data,
logging, alarm buffer and access to other controllers via. network interface.
 Programme keys providing access to display features.
 Alarm keys to view active alarms.
Page 186 of 230

 Input/output points.
The following points but not limited to shall be provided on the base controller.
Inputs
 Unit remote on/off

 Air flow fail
 Filter blocked
 Fire alarm interface
 Water on floor
 Humidifier water level
 % valve open (feed back)
 High temp. Alarm
 Low humidity alarm
 Supply air temp.
 Return air temp.
 Supply air humidity
 Return air humidity
 Humidifier conductivity
 Ambient temperature
 Heater status (On/off)
 Heater % control (thyristor)
Output
 Unit fan
 Dehumidification
 Heater Thyristor enable
 Humidifier power contactor
 Humidifier fill valve
 Humidifier drain valve
 Critical alarm
 Maintenance alarm
 Flow wet alarm
 Common alarm
Make: country of origin shall Europe or America.
3.8.0 CLOSE CONTROL UNITS (NETWORK ROOMS/ SMALL CAPACITY UNITS)
The technical parameters are as indicated in tender drawings. The unit construction
shall include but not limited to Compressors mounted in condenser unit, thermostatic
expansion valve, cooling coil, stainless steel drain tray, forward curved double inlet,
double width, centrifugal blower, thyristor controlled electric heater, steam humidifier,
Page 187 of 230

microprocessor controls, Lon Works/ Bac net compatible gateway to have a complete
third party integration to monitor, control or generate reports as necessary. The unit
shall be Eurovent/ ARI certified. The units shall be able to perform at 50 degree
ambient conditions. The parameters to be achieved shall be complying to ASHRAE
guideline pertaining to Class 1 of Data processing and Electronic office areas., like
temperature, relative humidity, dew point (max 17 0C) temperature rate of change (5
0
K / h), filtration quality (MERV 11) etc.
3.8.1 UNIT CONSTRUCTION
The unit shall be constructed from rigid aluminium frame with insulated panels. The
electrical panel shall be accessed from the front with swing-out electrical box. The
return air shall be from the top configuration, suitable for connecting to return ductwork
with necessary flanges and fire retardant flexible connectors. The close control unit
shall be downward discharge type and mounted on anti-vibration neoprene rubber
pads.
3.8.2 COILS
The coil shall be of aluminium fins and copper tubes. The DX coil shall be made from
3/8” copper tube. The expansion valve shall be electronic expansion valve. The coil
fins shall be pitched at 12 FPI (472 Fins/m.) with sinusoidal wave configuration. The
coil shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. The coil shall be tested at
24 bar air pressure under water. The drain pan shall be constructed with SS 304 with
connector suitable to connect to uPVC drain connector trap. The coil shall be
designed for a face velocity not exceeding 2.5 m/s without any condensate being
carried away from the coil.
3.8.3 COMPRESSORS
The compressors shall be fully hermetic, scroll compressors located in condenser

units, suitable to operate with R410a Refrigerant. Each compressor shall be fitted with
back seating isolating valves with and oil level sight glass, with high & low pressure
switches.
The compressors shall be warranted against failure for free replacement any time in a
period of 5 years from the date of practical completion certificate or established date of
beneficial use as decided by the engineer.
However, the manufacturer shall ensure that the following safety features are added to
protect the compressors.
1) a) Pressure Cut Outs

HP & LP
b) Internal overload protection
c) External overload protection. This may be thermal overload relay

and/ or a circuit breaker. The external overload protection shall have over
current protection, locked rotor protection, single phasing protection.
Page 188 of 230

d) Discharge gas temperature protection shall be installed on discharge
gas line, set at 126 oC. The sensing element shall be installed at 150mm
distance from the discharge port.
2) System Safety
a) Crank case heater of suitable power rating to protect against off cycle
migration of refrigerant.
b) Liquid line solenoid valve shall be used to isolate the liquid charge in the
condenser side to prevent charge transfer or excessive migration of liquid
refrigerant to compressor during off cycles.
c) Pump down cycle.
d) Suction accumulator to avoid refrigerant flood back.
3.8.4. FAN
a) The fan/s shall be of the double width, double inlet centrifugal type, forward
curved construction. All rotating parts shall be dynamically balanced, both
before and after final assembly. Bearings shall be mounted externally for
servicing without dismantling the unit. The fans shall have modulating controls
for humidity.
b) All fan/s shall be tested in accordance with AMCA / Eurovent standards.

The unit shall be reinforced with suitable bolted angle flanges or by any other
approved means to ensure full rigidity of the unit.
c) The fan/s shall be belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves. The belts shall
be of the oil resistant V-type and suitable to the horsepower transmitted.
d) The fan, motor and belt drive shall be mounted on a robust steel base frame
effectively separated from the unit casing by spring vibration isolators.
A belt guard shall be provided for the drive.
e) Fan shaft bearing shall be 200,000 hour life lubricated.
f) Unless otherwise stated, centrifugal fans shall be medium pressure fans

selected for high efficiency and be well within the maximum permissible total
operating pressure limits of the fan construction.
g) A drain and plug shall be fitted to the casing at its lowest point. Impellers shall
be of mild steel of welded construction with spiders or hubs of robust design
and shall be capable of running without adverse effects, continuously at ten
per cent in excess of the specified duty. Impellers shall be keyed to a mild
steel shaft, constructed to take well in excess of the fan design speeds and
pressures.
Page 189 of 230

h) Double inlet, double width fans shall have a pedestal mounted bearing at each
side of the fan. Fan bearings shall be ring oiling sleeve bearings. The bearing
pedestal shall not be attached to the fan casing and ring oiling sleeve bearings
shall be designed for quiet operation.
i) The fans shall be belt driven by super silent electric motors.
j) The fan outlet shall be connected to unit casing with fire retardant flexible
connection.
3.8.5 MOTOR
a) The motor/s shall be specially designed for quiet operation.
b) The motor shall be of high efficiency, totally enclosed, fan-cooled suitable for
400V-3 phase-50Hz.
c) Inherent as well as external motor over-load protection shall be provided to cut

off the electrical supply to the motor when drawn current exceeds a pre-set
value.
d) The motors must be suitable for 55 Degree Centigrade continuous operation.
e) Fan motor ratings shall be selected to exceed the absorbed kw by a minimum

of 20%.
3.8.6 FILTERS
Disposable pleated filters with 100mm deep to EU5 shall be provided. A differential
pressure filter clog switch shall be provided to indicate alarm on display that the filter is
clogged when exceeding the rated pressure drop.
One set of spare filters shall be supplied after commissioning.
3.8.7 HEATER
The unit shall be provided with thyristor controlled electric heater for reheat to maintain
the specified indoor conditions. The heater shall be with steel fins and safety cut out.
The capacities shall be as indicated in drawings.
3.8.8 HUMIDIFIER
The humidifier shall be steam humidifier with electrode boiler with the proportional
control. An interface directly communicating to the central microprocessor shall be
provided to control the humidifier. The contractor shall ensure the water quality
Page 190 of 230

available is suitable for the use for the humidifier. A conductivity monitor shall be
provided to indicate a maintenance alarm in the display. The capacities shall be as
indicated in drawings.
3.8.9. SMS (SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE)
The system have the ability to communicate important information directly by SMS
message through a GSM modem. It should be able to send at least 5 messages and
to 5 different telephone numbers simultaneously. It should also have direct remote
communication to the security and reception of the same alarm messages. The web
card and IP card shall be included for all the units of network rooms.
3.8.10 CONTROLS
Display:
The display shall comprise the following:

 A minimum 8 row LCD unit function.
 The unit function status like Unit run, Cool, Heat, Humidify, Dehumidify etc.
 The selected, updated data in real time.
 The graphical LCD shall indicate unit functions, parameters, menus historic data,
logging, alarm buffer and access to other controllers via. network interface.
 Programme keys providing access to display features.
 Alarm keys to view active alarms.
 Input/output points.
The following points but not limited to shall be provided on the base controller.
Inputs
 Unit remote on/off

 Air flow fail
 Filter blocked
 Fire alarm interface
 Water on floor
 Humidifier water level
 % valve open (feed back)
 High temp. Alarm
 Low humidity alarm
 Supply air temp.
 Return air temp.
 Supply air humidity
 Return air humidity
 Humidifier conductivity
 Ambient temperature
 Heater status (On/off)
Page 191 of 230

 Heater % control (thyristor)
Output
 Unit fan
 Dehumidification
 Heater Thyristor enable
 Humidifier power contactor
 Humidifier fill valve
 Humidifier drain valve
 Critical alarm
 Maintenance alarm
 Flow wet alarm
 Common alarm
Make: country of origin shall Europe or America.
3.9.0 REMOTE CONTROL / MONITORING
The whole messages / alarms /scheduling / trends etc generated from the main
CCUs, network CCU’s etc. shall be networked and displayed through a remote
monitoring station within the building. This shall be achieved using a PC and a
dedicated 132 characters / line high resolution dot matrix printer. This will be carried
out by international protocols like LON WORKS, BAC Net etc. Alarms generated shall
be displayed in dialogue boxes on the PC and printed in dot matrix printer and shall be
acknowledged from PC or individual CCUs. Basic parameters like ambient
temperature ambient relative humidity, room temperature, room relative humidity etc.,
shall be displayed on the screen at all times. The web card, IP card and the software
shall be included for the control and monitoring. Five persons shall be configured to
receive emails & SMS.
3.10.0 EXHAUST AIR FANS
3.10.1 GENERAL
a. The static resistances of the various systems have been calculated by the
Consultant Engineer and the Contractor shall be required to check and
recalculate the resistance in the system taking into consideration the
resistances through the equipment that is finally ordered and satisfy himself
that the resistance figures for the fan is adequate. If necessary the total fan
resistance must be adjusted and agreed with the Consultant Engineer. No
claim will be allowed by the Consultant Engineer if the Contractor fails to fully
acquaint himself with the capabilities of the various systems.
b. All centrifugal/axial roof extract fans shall have a heavy gauge housing, made
of aluminum stiffened against drumming, with flanged outlet and spigot inlet,
Page 192 of 230

complete with sound attenuating curbs.
c. Each fan impeller shall be carefully balanced, both statically and dynamically
and rigidly keyed to the fan shaft. The fan shaft shall be constructed from best
quality mild steel, each shaft being adequately sized to ensure that running
speed is not more than 55% of the first critical speed.
d. All fan bearings shall be grease lubricated ball or roller bearings.
e. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent the ingress of dirt and dust
to the bearings, and adequate facilities for bearing lubrication shall be
furnished.
f. Each fan casing shall be provided with a large access door in the fan scroll to
enable inspection and cleaning to be made with the minimum of dismantling.
g. The drain pan and plug shall be provided at the lowest point of the scroll.
h. Any exposed fan inlets or outlets shall be protected with a stout galvanized
wire mesh guard.
i. All fans shall be selected at a point of pressure volume curve which allows for
a twenty per cent variation in volume, without operating in unstable range.
j. The contractor shall furnish all fan driving motors, and these shall not run at
more than the recommended r.p.m. and be of the T.E.F.C. type motor, IP 55
protection (IP 44 for indoor fans) (Class F insulation for outdoor air fan and
Class-B insulation for indoor fans).
k. The motors must be selected for the fan duty specified taking into account the
torque required for starting the fans.
l. All the fans shall be provided with on/off switch and electronic speed controller
supplied by the manufacturer of the fans.
m. All fans of inline ducted type shall be fitted with thermal overload protection.
3.10.2 TOILET/ PANTRY/ EXTRACT FANS:
 For some of the toilets/pantries/storage rooms, wall mounted exhaust fans are
indicated in the drawings. Wall mounted fans shall be with back draught damper,
PVC grille, wire mesh and shall be complete mounting frame with extension if
necessary, to suit the wall thickness.
 For other toilets, central in line ducted exhaust fans are proposed.
 Inline ducted exhaust fans shall be centrifugal/mixed flow type.
 The inline fans shall be housed in heavy gauge galvanised steel casing and to be
supported from the ceiling slabs by supporting rods and angle iron frames.
 Flexible connections shall be used at the inlet and outlet side of the fan for
connections to ducts.
Page 193 of 230

 The selection of fans shall be done to keep the break out noise and noise level at
extract grille to be kept lower than NC 30. To achieve low noise levels in the
extract area, duct silencer shall be used, if necessary and the static pressure of
the fans shall be recalculated to include the pressure drop across duct silencer
also.
 The fans shall not be operated by pull cord and the operation shall be through
on/off switch and electronic speed controller.
 Discharge end of all fans shall be with automatic back draught damper and wire
mesh of heavy gaugue aluminium.
 Duties shall be as shown in the drawings.
 Make shall be Woods, U.K./Xpelair/Nuaire/Elta, U.K./Ventaxia or equal and

approved.
3.11.0 PIPING WORKS
3.11.1. REFRIGERANT PIPE WORK
i. Material - shall be type 'L' copper tubing, hard drawn with wrought copper
solder type fittings suitable for connection with silver solder. Shall be
refrigerant grade copper pipes.
ii. Joints - All piping joints shall be made with silver solder. The piping shall be
charged with dry nitrogen while constructing the joints.
iii. After the freon piping has been completed, the refrigerant system shall be
pressure tested at a pressure of 20 bar (high side) and 10 bar (low side).
While the system is being pressure tested, an electronic leak detector shall be
used to check for leaks. Pressure shall be maintained on the system for a
minimum of 12 hours. The system shall be evacuated when the surrounding
ambient air is not less than 15 degrees C.
A minimum vacuum of 2.0mm of mercury shall be pulled on the system and

maintained for 12 hours. The vacuum pressure displacement shall be not less
than 9m3/h. The vacuum shall be checked with an electronic gauge.
3.11.2 CONDENSATE DRAIN
Condensate Drains: shall be uPVC to BS 3505 Class 'E' of sizes shown in the
drawings and insulated with 13mm thick closed cell polyurethane foam pipe sections.
Minimum water seal of 75mm shall be provided in each Package Unit and Split Unit U-
Page 194 of 230

trap, with access clean out for cleaning.
3.12.0 THERMAL INSULATION GENERAL
The insulation work shall be carried out by specialists, approved by the Consultant,
employing skilled craftsmen used to the class of work and finish required and shall be
in accordance with relevant British Standards/European Standards. All thermal
conductivity figures shall be in accordance with relevant British/European
Standards/ASTM, ASHRAE and/or DIN and as specified.
Fire classification shall be compliant with UL-723, NFPA 255 and BS 476 (Part 4).
No insulation shall be applied until all piping and equipment have been tested and
cleaned. All hangers shall be outside the insulation.
All insulating material shall be in close contact with the surface to which it is applied
and all joints shall be sealed after ensuring that the edges of sectional material where
employed are in close contact with one another over the entire insulated surface. All
insulation jacketing and surface finish materials shall be suitable for local weather
conditions, space ambient temperature during application or finishing shall be as
directed by the manufacturer. Contractor also should calculate and adjust thickness of
insulation to ensure design temperatures at equipment.
All adhesives, vapour coating, mastics, lagging and bedding compounds shall be
compatible with the materials to which they are applied. They shall not soften, corrode
or otherwise attack such material in either the wet or dry state and shall only be those
recommended by the manufacturer of the insulation as suitable for the application
proposed.
Insulation shall be clean and dry when installed and during the application of any
finish. Space ambient temperature during application or finishing of insulation shall not
be less than 13 degrees Celsius unless recommended otherwise by insulation
manufacturer.
Refrigeration pipework shall be insulated with 19 mm thick closed cell polyurethane

foam pipe sections and painted with two coats of white chlorinated paint.
All insulation to unions, thermostatic valves, valves and flange joints shall not be fitted
until the particular pipeline has been in operation for at least two weeks at the design
conditions.
Contractor shall provide the Consultant with a manufacturer's certificate of declared

thermal conductivity for each type of insulation used.
Galvanised and copper pipework shall be clean and dry before the application of any
thermal insulation.
Page 195 of 230

Galvanised sheet steel ductwork shall be clean and dry before the application of any
thermal insulation.
Pipe services and ducts both insulated and uninsulated shall have 75mm wide
coloured bands with identification letters and directional arrows approximately every
2m, at each change of direction and adjacent to every branch and valve. The colour
coding of the bands identifying the various services shall comply with BS 1710- 1971
where applicable, unless otherwise directed.
The Contractor shall provide charts giving details of colours for the identification code.
The charts shall be 6mm thick clear acrylic sheet with rear engraving mounted on
painted plywood boards. The charts shall be fixed to the walls of the plant rooms in
approved positions.
At bends, tees etc. the sectional insulation shall be formed in neat segments. The
sections of insulation shall be carefully butted together to ensure the absence of gaps
in the insulation and to obviate voids between the insulation and the pipework and
ductwork.
Thermal insulation may when delivered to site be subjected to:
a Tests for thickness

b Tests for uniformity of thickness
c Tests for bulk density
d Tests for thermal conductivity
e Tests for compressibility.
Materials shall be in accordance with BS 5422: 1969, BS 874: 1973, BS 2972: 1975,
BS 5970: 1981.
All applied insulation shall be of uniform thickness and shall not vary from the specified
thickness by more than 10%.
To ensure that the correct thickness of insulation has been applied, the Contractor
shall cut section of the insulation specified where directed by the Consultant.
The Contractor shall allow for the cost of these cuttings and making good in his
Tender.
Should such cutting outs indicate that the insulation is in any way inadequate further
test sections shall be cut out as directed by the Consultant. In the event of the
insulation being unacceptable the whole of the insulation, or such part as the
Consultant shall direct, shall be stripped and re-executed at contractor’s cost.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all equipment during the
application of the insulation.
Page 196 of 230

All exposed pipework and ductwork on roof shall be insulated as above and then
covered with aluminium cladding 0.8mm thick.
3.12.1 INSULATION (DUCTWORK)
All ductwork shall be insulated including supply air, return air, extract air and fresh air.
Thermal conductivity of the insulation shall not be more than 0.037 W/MoC at 25oC
mean temperature.
Insulation shall comprise rigid fibre glass slabs, of pre-formed sections of 25 mm

thickness 24 Kg./m3 for indoor and 50 mm thickness 48 Kg/m3 for outdoor with factory
applied vapour barrier consisting of glass filament reinforced aluminium foil finish,
adhered to the duct with overall adhesives which shall be covered by matching self-
adhesive aluminium foil tape at all joints. 2 layers of 4 oz. Canvas cloth with two coats
of approved vapour barrier anti-fungal paint. [Foster 30-36 (AF) or Ideal IVS-30-36
(AF) or equal and approved]
Outdoor ducts insulation shall be same as indoor except that after two coats of vapour
barrier paint (Foster-30-36-AF/Ideal IVS-30-36AF), two coats of approved weather
proof paint (Isoflex of Isola or equal and approved) shall be applied over the aluminium
foil for the finish for vapour barrier purpose and weather proof purpose for the entire
surface of the ducts.
Additional support shall be given to insulation on the faces of ducts and casings by the
use of hangers bonded to the duct with neoprene adhesive and push plates at 0.25m
centres approximately.
Butt all joints tightly, and seal all breaks and joints by adhering a 100mm aluminium foil
vapour barrier tape with a fire retardant adhesive. For concealed duct or the following
alternative:
Flexible connections shall be complete with flexible insulation and vapour sealed
where applicable and where test holes are provided, the insulation shall be bevelled to
form a neat access hole 75 mm in diameter around the test hole. The test hole plug
shall be complete with insulated cover. Access doors shall be left clear of insulation to
enable them to be readily opened. They shall afford the same degree of insulation
and vapour seal as that on the ductwork.
Insulation and vapour seal where applicable shall be carried over flanges, fittings,
dampers etc. at full thickness. The duct vapour seal shall be returned to the duct
surface wider side of flexible connections, dampers and heater/cooler sections. In
addition, the vapour seal shall be bonded down to the pipe either side of any fitting
which would normally penetrate the outer vapour seal.
All insulation on the roof shall be provided with aluminium cladding of 0.8mm
Page 197 of 230

thickness.
Make of insulation shall be Kimmco/Afico.
3.12.2 ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING
Supply, return and extract duct for the initial 3 metre from the packaged air-
conditioners and fans shall be acoustically insulated.
Bonded glass fibre type, 25mm thick, formed into a semi rigid 48 kg/cu.m density
(minimum) and faced with non-woven and dimensionally stable black glass tissue
conforming with British, American and/or German Standards.
Sound absorption coefficient at frequency of 500 cycles per second shall be 0.80
minimum.
Thermal conductivity 'K' factor of 0.037 w/mOC.at 24oC.
Adhere liner to all interior sides of duct with minimum 50 coverage of fire-retardant
adhesive. Black tissue side to face air stream. Mechanically fasten lining to duct
using welded pins on maximum 250 mm centers on top and side sections (apply
SMACNA recommendations). Dimensions of lined ductwork shown on drawings
indicate inside measurements of acoustic lining.
Contractor must add 50mm to horizontal and vertical dimensions for correct sheet
metal duct sizes.
All joints should be secured with special "Z" formed GI sheet, corner joints should be
tight fit and apply a special approved lagging adhesive.
Make shall be Kimmo/Afico.
3.12.3 FINISHES
Where canvas is specified for the final finish to thermal insulation, the canvas shall be
a minimum of 4 oz. weight.
All outdoor insulation of any kind shall be clad with 0.8mm thick aluminium, after
applying vapour barrier, and weather proof paints.
Compressive strength - 6KN/m2 to produce less than 10% deflection.
(a) Vapour Barrier Paint.
Temperature range (-20oC) to (80oC)
Page 198 of 230

Perm. rating at 0.8mm
dry film thickness 0.9 perms (metric)
Application rate 1.5 m2/litre per coat
Two coats shall be applied onto 4 oz. canvas.
(b) Weather Proof Paint:
It shall have the following properties.
Temperature Limits (-30oC) to (120oC)

Perm rating at 0.7mm
dry film thickness 0.08perm
Application rate 1.06m2/Kg. per coat.
Two coats shall be applied.
(c) Vapour Sealing Terminal Points and Interruptions in Insulation
An approved Sealant shall be applied to butt all longitudinal insulation joints.
3.12.4 ALUMINIUM CLADDING:
Where aluminium cladding is specified, it shall be as manufactured by Atlas Products,

Erith, Kent or approved equal. It shall have the following properties:
Aluminium of 99% purity to BS 1470 - SIC - 1/2 H4 - Half hard temperature.
Thickness - 0.8mm
Transverse reeding at 6.35mm pitch, parallel across roll.
Pressed aluminium "Humped" corners shall be used on bends in pipe lines.
Fixing bands shall be used to secure aluminium jacketing in place. No self tapping
screws or rivets will be permitted.
The cladding shall be supported and stiffened with 'approved ' channels. All joints will
be sealed with Foster metal seal 95-44, as recommended by the manufacturer, to
prevent ingress of moisture.
3.13.0 DUCTING, DAMPERS AND AIRTERMINALS
3.13.1 LOW PRESSURE CASINGS & DUCTS
a. All casings and plenum chambers shall be not less than 1.5mm zinc steel. All
exposed uninsulated ductwork shall have flat seams and be properly stiffened
Page 199 of 230

over 450mm width. Ductwork shall be constructed to satisfy the requirements
as described in the SMACNA and DW-144 Standards. Material shall be zinc
coated sheet steel with minimum coating of 275gm/m2 when tested as per
triple spot test.
Samples taken from each thickness of sheet per each delivery consignment to
the site, shall be tested in an independent and approved laboratory, shall be
submitted for the review and approval of the consultant.
b. All joints in casings and plenum chambers shall be string seam (screwed,
bolted or riveted) with angle bracing. Angles shall be screwed or bolted to the
casing on 150mm centers. Angles shall be spaced not more than 600mm
apart. All joints in casings shall be completely air tight. Casings shall be ar-
ranged substantially as shown on the drawings but shall be modified to the
extent required to make them fit filters, coils etc.
c. Ductwork shall be constructed from galvanised mild steel sheet in accordance

with SMACNA or DW-144 Radius bends with vanes and splitters shall be
used wherever possible.
d. Where square elbows are shown, factory made turning vanes shall be used.
Long radius elbows shall be used in all other cases. Where branch ducts take
off at right angles to the mains provide "Santrols" as manufactured by the
"Tuttle and Baily Company" or equal. Provide access doors where "Santrols"
cannot be reached through inlet or discharge grilles or through lift-out ceilings.
All curves bends, offsets and other transformations shall be made for an easy
and noiseless flow or air. Generally straight transformations shall be made at
an angle not to exceed 15 degrees.
e. All ductwork, generally, shall be supported from the ceiling, by galvanized

strap hangers fastened to the slab construction by means of anchor bolts and
approved type inserts. Straps shall be not less than 4mm by 25mm flat iron
spaced approximately 1200mm on centres and screwed or bolted to the duct.
Casing angles shall be securely fastened to the floor or ceiling construction by
means of expansion bolts. Vertical ducts passing through floor shall be
supported at each floor level by 40x40x4mm angles bolted or screwed to the
ductwork and fastened to the floor slab or sides of the shaft in an approved
manner.
f. Access doors shall be installed in casings, plenum chambers and ducts where
shown and wherever else required for ready access to the operating parts of
any kind such as dampers, thermostats, valves, bulbs, etc. Doors shall be
constructed of steel angle frame with builders cleats and a double wall
insulated door panel fitted with a profiled rubber seal. Where the sheet metal
connects to the intake and discharge of each fan or fan unit, there shall be
installed a flexible canvas connection which shall be securely fastened to the
apparatus and adjacent ductwork in such a manner that it may be readily
Page 200 of 230

adjusted or replaced. Such canvas connection should have adequate length
to avoid any transfer of vibration. In cases where this canvas is exposed to
adverse atmospheric conditions the material should be able to withstand such
conditions.
g. Whatever ductwork passes through walls, mechanical contractor to provide

wooden sleeves. Openings between concrete or masonry and ductwork shall
be neatly caulked or sealed to prevent movement of air from one space to the
adjoining space.
h. Provide required holes in ductwork for use in balancing system. These holes
shall have a removable plug and be neatly finished.
i. Provide volume control/split dampers where shown on the drawings or where

necessary for the correct balancing of the air system.
j. Fire dampers shall be provided to all ducts crossing for zones masonry fire
retaining walls and slabs, and as required by the Local Authorities.
k. Fire Dampers shall be UL listed and comply with Clause 14.8.4 of the
M.O.W.A Standard Specification, having a 2 hour fire rating and with stainless
steel blades in a housing. Operation shall be fuisible link at 70oC.’
Fire dampers shall be installed on walls with securely bolted to the wall with
angle iron frame work. Access panels shall be provided for each fire damper
in the ducts.
Make shall be Ruskin-Atai/or equal and approved.
3.13.2 FLEXIBLE DUCTING
This shall be thermally pre-insulated externally (min. 25mm thick) as factory supplied
and complete with acoustic lining/jacket on the inner wall (min. 25mm thick). External
finish shall be aluminium FRK vapour barrier.
All flexible ducts shall be suspended on approved straps/bands with drive cleat and
clamp. Straps shall be sufficient width in order to prevent tearing apart of the vapour
barrier at the load-bearing area. Straps shall have rubber lining on the inside.
Flexible ducting shall be used to connect metal ducting and plenum boxes of
grilles/diffusers.
3.13.3 AUTOMATIC DAMPERS / VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS/MOTORISED

DAMPERS/ NON RETURN DAMPERS
a. Type - The automatic dampers shall be of the opposed blade, 100% shut-off
Page 201 of 230

type, suitable for the static pressure shown on the drawings.
b. Frame - The damper frame shall be 2mm zinc-coated steel and shall be
provided with mounting holes. The frame shall be roll-formed, interlocked and
welded at corners. The frame shall be 100mm width.
c. Blade - Blades shall be constructed of 2mm roll-formed zinc-coated steel not

to exceed 150mm in depth and shall be formed with double 90o bends to in-
sure positive air lock and maximum strength. Blades shall be felt tipped to
ensure tight closure and noiseless operation.
d. Sections - Damper and damper frame may be made in one section up to
1200mm in width and 300mm height. Larger sizes shall be made in sections.
e. Linkage - The damper shall have dual blade linkage concealed in the jambs
and connected with steel rods. The blades shall rotate on 12mm diameter
pivot assembly in permanently lubricated bearings. Blades shall be capable of
opening to a full 90o and linkage shall incorporate positive 90o opening stop.
Operation shaft shall be suitable for motor operation.
f. Installation - The damper and damper frame shall be installed dead level in
both directions. The blades shall not touch any adjacent material throughout
the full travel of the blades.
The damper and damper frame shall be installed so that there is no torsion or
twist in the frame to prevent smooth operation of the damper.
g. Final adjustment - After installation, the linkage of the automatic damper shall
be adjusted to the air flow quantities shown on the drawings.
h. Cleaning - The damper and linkage shall be cleaned of all construction dirt.
Any debris or dirt that could cause binding shall be thoroughly removed.
i. The damper, damper frame and linkage shall be the product of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of high quality dampers.
j. Motorised dampers shall be with the similar specification as above. In

addition, the damper shall be low leakage type and actuated by on/off electric
actuator. The electric actuators shall be rated for 230V/1ph/50Hz or 24V
supply. Electric actuators shall be selected to suit the torque required to open
and close the damper and shall be of make Belimo/or equal and approved.
Make shall be Ruskin Atai/Equal and approved.
3.13.4 FIRE DAMPER
Fire damper shall be as per Civil Defense Requirement. Shall be installed in all ducts
passing through fire zones and in all fresh air duct entries to individual floors. Shall be
as per sizes of duct and fusible link type.
Page 202 of 230

3.13.5 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
All grilles, registers and diffusers shall be constructed from extruded aluminium and
with powder coated finish. The colour finish shall be as per the approval of the
Architect. Samples shall be submitted and approval obtained for all types grilles,
diffusers, louvers etc. before proceeding with the order.
Make shall be Airmaster, UAE/Trox, U.K./Titus, Canada or equal and approved.
The duct behind all grilles registers and diffusers to be painted black to obstruct the
light behind the grille.
1. Supply Air Registers.
a. Shall be double deflection with horizontal face bars and vertical rear
bars complete with damper, rubber gasket between the periphery of
the register and the building surface, and aluminium fixing screws.
Effective area of the register not less than 80%. Bars shall be
adjustable and shall hold deflection setting under all conditions of
velocity and pressure.
b. The damper shall be of the opposed blade type and shall be key
operated with a detachable key. An adequate number of keys shall be
furnished for these registers.
2. Return or Exhaust Grilles/Registers
a. Shall be of the single deflection type with fixed horizontal front bars
complete with rubber gasket and aluminium fixing screws.
The grilles shall have the horizontal front bars set at an angle of 35
degrees downward where installed below 1500mm and 35 degrees
upward where installed more than 1500mm from the floor.
Registers shall have a volume damper.
b. Effective area of the grilles not less than 75%.
3. Supply, return or Exhaust Ceiling Diffusers
a. Square diffusers shall be square outlet flush types. Each diffuser shall
be complete with distributing grid, volume damper, gasket and
aluminium fixing screws and shall have the dimensions shown on
drawings. Diffusers shall be equipped with volume control damper of
the multiblade type. Damper operator shall be equipped with a spring
type lock nut which may be adjusted to the required friction to prevent
Page 203 of 230

readjustment by unauthorized persons and to prevent closing of the
damper when in the partially open position because of static pressure.
b. Distributing grid shall be provided on all diffusers to insure that the

supply air is distributed uniformly in the neck of the diffuser. Grid shall
be constructed of a series of adjustable bars set in frame, which is
attached to the duct collar.
c. Mechanical sub-contractor shall coordinate the location of the diffuser,

ceiling lights, and any other ceiling outlets and shall produce working
drawings indicating the position of the grilles relative to these.
4. Supply/Return Air Slot Diffusers:
Number of slots shall be as shown in the drawings. The diffusers shall be

extruded aluminimum construction with powder coated finish. Volume control
dampers and plenum boxes shall be provided for the supply air portion of the
slot diffusers.
Curved/Circular slot diffusers shall be supplied with the radius agreed during
the shop drawing stage.
5. Supply/Return Air linear bar grille.
Size of the linear grille shall be as shown in the drawings. The grille shall be
extruded aluminimum construction with powder coated finish. Volume control
dampers and plenum boxes shall be provided for the supply air portion of the
linear grilles.
6. Door Grilles.
Adjustable frame from 25mm to 65mm to fit on wooden doors V-blade design
shall not permit vision through the grilles. Spacing between INVERTED V-
blades shall not be more than 12mm and the grille free area not less than
65%. Aluminium extruded frame shall have a rounded edge with all corners
mitred and rigidly staked to angle corner piece.
7. Outdoor air louvers
Frame and blade shall be constructed from extruded aluminium. An

aluminium wire mesh screen shall be fitted to the rear face of the louver.
Frame shall not be less than 30mm wide and the spacing of blades not less
than 38mm. Wherever shown in the drawings, prefilters shall be fitted with
louvers.
Page 204 of 230

8. Egg Crate Grilles
Sizes shall be as shown in the drawings. VCD shall be provided for all grilles.
Frame shall be extruded aluminium and core shall be 12.5 x 12.5 x 12.5mm
aluminium grids.
Foam gasket should be provided at the back of the frame.
Finish shall be powder coated.
9. Perforated Diffuser/Floor Grills (For Server Room)
Shall be as per details & able to deliver required air quantity. Contractor shall
propose based on performance & ESP calculations. Architect’s approval is
required for finishes.
3.14.0. SOUND ATTENUATORS
Sound attenuators shall be provided to maintain the specified Noise level in the
spaces. The attenuation achieved must be such that a NC 30 must not be exceeded.
The sound attenuators shall consist of baffle elements between which the air-flow
passes. The baffle elements shall consist of a non flammable sound absorption
material of (e.g mineral wool) retained by an outer layer of woven glass fibre fabric.
Sound attenuators shall be installed as shown in the drawings.
The lengths shown in the drawings are only indicative and actual lengths and sizes
have to be proposed by the contractor, based on the noise level of the equipment
selected, duct layout etc.
Manufacturer shall be Gulf Acoustics, U.A.E./Atai, KSA or equal and approved. The
selection calculations of the attenuators shall be submitted and approved by
consultant before proceeding with the order.
3.15.0 ELECTRICAL / CONTROLS
3.15.1 a. The electrical contractor will bring supply of the electricity to the local
isolating switches of all A.C. equipment and Exhaust Fans.
From thereon it will be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to

supply, install and connect all necessary Switchgear cables, wiring etc. for the
complete installation of the machinery, equipment including all controls and
wiring. Final electrical connection for Split units and all control wiring shall be
by the Mechanical Contractor.
Refer section of split units for the scope of work.
b. All electrical work must be as per IEE Wiring Regulations 15th Edition, and or
Page 205 of 230

BSED Regulations and must meet the approval of the Local Authorities.
Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approval from the
Electrical Department of the electrical installations in connection with the
mechanical works.
c. Electronic speed controllers for exhaust fans shall be wired with the exhaust
fans by the Contractor.
3.15.2 CONTROLS
3.15.2.1 AHU Control
i) The control of fresh air AHU required is the constant supply air temperature
and RH leaving the coil and heat pipes by way of staging the compressors in
the condensing units.
ii) Temperature & RH sensor shall be with a minimum of 2 metre long sensing
wire, installed in the supply air duct (Averaging Type Sensor).
iii) Auto/off/manual switch & 2 speed control of the AHU motor shall be housed in
AHU Control Panel as shown in the drawing.
iv) PID Control type DDC controller, signal converters etc. shall be included and
shall be housed in a separate DDC Control Panel.
DDC controller will send signals for the condensing unit to stage the
compressors based on the signal from T & RH sensor.
v) Control wiring between all control components and between DDC Controller
and condensing units should be included .
vi) DDC controller shall be with LCD display for actual measured variables and
set point values.
vii) The DDC control should also start/stop condensing unit and AHU and
monitoring the status of AHU fan and filters by DP switches, monitoring the
run/trip status of condensing units.
viii) Contractor should submit control scheme for the approval of the consultant,
before procurement.
ix) The make of the DDC controller and other control system components shall
be Siemens/CSI Controls/Honey Well/Johnson/Trend or equal and approved.
x) The Control System make proposed should have a local agent in Bahrain who
can provide installation, backup service and spares.
Page 206 of 230

3.15.2.2. FCU Control
A wall mounted cooling/heating thermostat with heat/cool, on/off and 3 speed control
of fan shall be supplied. The thermostat shall be with LCD display of actual room
temperature and of set point value. The electrical supply shall be 230V/1Ph/50Hz.
Necessary auxiliary contacts/relays shall be included for bringing in electric heaters,
when temperature drops below a set value.
For public and common areas, transparent lockable guards should be provided for
thermostats (eg. Lift lobbies).
3.16.0 CONTROL PANELS
General
Any control panels supplied and installed by the Mechanical Contractor shall comply
with the following:-
The cabinets shall be folded mild steel sheet having a minimum thickness of 2.5mm or
of stiffened proprietary construction.
The control panels shall be Zintex coated to a BS 4800 colour to be specified by the
S.O. at a later date.
The panel and all equipment contained therein shall comply with all current regulations
and standards. Particular attention shall be paid to the B.S.E.D Regulations for
Electrical Installations earth leakage requirements.
The supply system will be 400 v 3 ph 50 Hz 4 wire. Control circuit voltage shall not
exceed 110v A.C or D.C.
Main isolators shall be interlocked with the panel doors, which shall be lockable. All
isolators shall be capable of making and breaking under fault conditions.
Moulded case circuit breakers and miniature circuit breakers shall be used for
overcurrent/short circuit protection. Fuses shall not be used.
Each motor drive circuit, main supplies to individual items of plant shall each be
supplied through and M.C.B or M.C.C.B of suitable rating equipped with auxiliary
contacts which will isolate the individual drives control circuit. Each of the control
circuits shall be supplied through an M.C.B.
Where miscellaneous circuits are controlled by means of relays, these shall be formed
into small logical groups of about eight each group being protected by an M.C.B.
E.L.V circuits to thermostats, valve controls, instruments and similar items of

equipment shall be formed into small logical groups of about six, each group being
Page 207 of 230

protected by an M.C.B.
All starters motors rated at 1 kva and above shall have separate compartments within
the panel.
Motor starters shall be provided with a manual pre-set thermal overload incorporating
single phasing protection.
Relays will generally be 110v, 11 pin plug type, low voltage relays will generally be 8
pin plug type, and a suitable colour coded code shall be used to indicate the voltage
applied.
Control switches shall be of the rotary type, fitted with a suitably engraved panel label.
A main earth bar shall be provided close to the incoming supply point.
Wiring within the panel shall be carried out in PVC insulated cable of the appropriate
cross sectional area, minimum size 1.5mm and phase colour. Extra low voltage A.C
wiring will be coloured white.
All wiring shall be carried on the front surface of the mounting plate in plastic cable
trunking. Cable conductor sizes will be noted to take into account all grouping and
enclosing factors.
All outgoing electrical cables shall be terminated at a numbered terminal strip at the
top of the panel. The terminals shall be fully numbered in consecutive order and sized
to cater for long runs, where voltage drops may necessitate increased cable cross
sectional area.
All components shall be identified with an engraved label.
Notes:
1) AHU control panels shall house all starters, isolators, MCCB/MCB, single
phase preventors, over load relays, ELCB, other protective and safety
devices. The Control panel shall have RYB indication lights, H-O-A selector
switch, air flow indication via. an air flow switch, AHU motor low/high speed
selector switch, AHU motor run/trip indications etc. shall be provided.
AHU motor off/low/high indication lamps shall be provided.
3.17.0 ELECTRIC MOTOR STARTERS, SWITCHGEAR
All starters shall be automatic unless otherwise specified.
Each starter shall be housed in a dustproof casing, having front access door. Each
Page 208 of 230

starter shall be complete with the following:
a) On-load isolators to isolate all power and control circuits simultaneously.
b) Thermal trips for overload.
c) Single phase preventors.
d) No-volt trip coils with auto reset.
e) All necessary auxiliary contacts, switches etc.
f) Contactor coil arranged to operate off 230V line voltage AC supply.
g) Ammeter with protective fuse for all 3 phase starters above 3.75 KW rating.
h) Auxiliary contacts and fuses for all necessary control circuits etc.
i) Remote/local control switch. This switch shall work in the 24 volt control
circuits only and not the 230V line voltage contactor coil circuit.
j) Local ON/OFF or ON/DUTY/STANDBY/OFF where motors with automatic

change overs or where two-speed motor the ON shall be replaced with
HIGH/LOW switch. The control switches shall work in the 24 Volt control
circuit only and not on the 230 line voltage.
k) 230/24 Volt double wound transformer. This transformer shall be supply from
the switched side of the on-load isolator to ensure current control and signal
indication. This transformer shall feed the control circuits and pilot lights in the
starter and the various control panels associated with the starter.
l) RUN/DUTY/STANDBY/FAULT or RUN/FAULT pilot lights or if a two speed

motor, then the RUN shall be replaced with HIGH/LOW.
All starters required to be installed shall be automatic and shall be built in the
Control Panels. All starters for motors rated above 3.75 KW shall be
star/delta.
3.18.0 SYSTEM TESTS
a. Scope - Subsequent to the final air balance test, the entire air conditioning
and ventilation system shall be tested to satisfy performance of all units as a
satisfactory system.
b. Air conditioning system - The entire air conditioning system shall be tested at
the first summer weather next following the completion of the building, and it
Page 209 of 230

shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing
satisfactorily and that all units are cooling satisfactorily. The systems shall be
checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected.
c Ventilation system - The entire ventilation system shall be tested at the

completion of the project; and it shall be established that controls are
performing satisfactorily and that all rooms are ventilating properly. The
systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such
conditions corrected.
d. Final clean -up - At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project
shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, under
equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided under
this section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new
filters during final clean-up.
e. Painting - At the completion of all work all equipment of the project shall be
checked for painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been
damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal or
especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new
material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
3.19.0 IDENTIFICATIONS
a. Scope - All ductwork, piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project
shall be identified as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily
visible from the floor or usual point of vision.
b. Ductwork - All ductwork shall be as identified as to the service of the duct and
the direction of flow. The letters shall be at least 50mm high and the flow arrow
shall be at least 150mm long. The letters and flow arrow shall be made by
precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can. Concealed ducts
need not be identified.
c. Piping - All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the
normal direction of flow.
The letters shall be 25mm high on small pipe sizes and 50mm high on large
pipe sizes and the flow arrows shall be at least 150mm long. The letters and
the flow arrows shall be at least 150mm long. The letters and flow arrows
shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can.
Concealed pipes need not be identified.
d. Equipment - All equipment, except in finished rooms shall be identified by

stenciling the title of the equipment as taken from the plans in a position that is
clearly visible from the floor. The letters shall be made with black paint and
shall be not less than 50mm high. The titles shall be short and concise and
Page 210 of 230

abbreviations may be used as long as the meaning is clear. In finished rooms,
equipment shall be identified by engraved nameplates as specified in the next
paragraph.
e. Control Panel - All panel mounted controls and instruments shall be identified
by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The
engraved nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal
plastic, which will be black and show white letters when engraved. Letters
shall be 15mm high.
f. Time of application - No identification shall be done until all painting required

under the architectural section of these specifications has been accomplished.
3.20.0 TESTING & COMMISSIONING
Prior to the completion of all the works described herein or shown on the drawings the
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Consultant a program for the
commissioning of the installations.
The contractor shall take measurements of:
(a) The power absorbed by all the equipment, volts and amps.
(b) The air-flow of AHUs, Split & Window Units and at individual diffusers.
(c) Refrigerant suction pressure & head pressure.
(d) Temperature and humidity in all areas.
(e) Entering and leaving air DB/WB of cooling coil and heat pipes to compute
the cooling capacity.
(f) Noise rating in each room in dB.
(g) Blower speed, static pressure of all AHUs.
(h) External temperature & relative humidity.
The contractor shall submit those measurements in a tabular form and graphs shall be
drawn by the contractor indicating the variation of the temperature and the humidity of
the Air Conditioned areas in respect to the variations in the ambient temperature and
humidity against a reasonable period which shall be agreed with the Consultant.
After the consideration of the above by the Consultant, the Contractor may be directed
to execute adjustments or modifications on the system until its performance satisfies
the goals of the Consultant.
 All systems shall be operated simultaneously for a period of 72 hours without any
failure before final acceptance.
 If the systems are commissioned outside the months of June-September, a further

set of commission readings shall be taken when the ambient DB temperature
exceeds 40oC to verify the adequacy of the cooling capacity.
Page 211 of 230

 Condensing units and AHUs commissioning shall be carried out by the local agent
of the manufacturer of the equipment and commissioning log sheets shall be
submitted to the consultant.
The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of the shop drawings within fifteen (15) days after
the award of contract and before the commencement of site works, of all installations
for Consultant’s approval. Shop drawings shall be in Autocad and in A0/A1 size
sheets.
 One set of drawings on ACAD CD-ROM in an agreed format, wherever

applicable.
Two sets of approved operation and maintenance manuals of all equipments installed
shall also be submitted to the Consultant in an agreed format, within seven (7) days
after the completion of works and before the issue of substantial completion certificate.
Based on the comments of the S.O./Consultant, O. & M. Manual shall be revised, if

necessary, and resubmit 3 sets to the S.O.
Page 212 of 230

DIVISION 4 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
INDEX TITLE
4.1.0 GENERAL
4.2.0 SCOPE OF WORKS
4.3.0 REGULATIONS
4.4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF ALL PIPING AND FITTINGS.
4.5.0 DRY RISER SYSTEM
4.6.0 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
4.7.0 FIRE HOSE REELS, FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND FIRE BLANKETS
4.8.0 INERGEN FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM AND WATER LEAK DETECTION FOR
SERVER ROOMS AND NETWORK ROOMS.
4.9.0 INSPECTION, TESTS, COMMISSIONING AND APPROVALS.
4.10.0 SPARE PARTS
4.12.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Page 213 of 230

4.1.0 GENERAL
All work under this heading shall be subject to THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF
THE CONTRACT AND THE GENERAL CONDITIONS hereinbefore written for the
entire work, and the general requirements of the Mechanical Installation.
The works shall be carried out by contractor/sub-contractor having minimum 10 years

experience of similar installations. The project execution team shall be subject to
review and approval by the Architect/Services Consultants.
COORDINATION
The complete works shall be carried out in close co-ordination with the Civil and
Interior Decoration Works and the phasing/sequencing of works shall be detailed
accordingly.
Contractor shall be responsible to co-ordinate different services, systems and builder’s

The drawings are generally diagrammatic and are not intended to show the exact
physical location or configuration of work except where actual dimensions are
indicated. The tender drawings are prepared essentially so that, in conjunction with the
specifications, a correct engineering interpretation may be put on the design scheme
for the works and an estimate of cost prepared.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Consultant a list of the names and
orders are placed.
The materials shall be procured from manufacturers having a local agent/authorized

dealer who shall be maintaining essential spares all the time and having a team of
technicians/engineers to provide service back up.
If any of the manufacturers, materials and the like is rejected by the Consultant, then it
is the Contractor's responsibility to provide suitable alternatives to the Consultant
Contractor.
When so required by the Consultant, samples of goods or materials shall be provided

at the Contractor's expense. The following procedures shall be adopted.
1) All samples shall be delivered to the Site Office.
Page 214 of 230

2) Duplicate final approved samples shall be provided for the Consultant, one for
office reference and one for the site.
3) Samples shall be provided promptly to allow the Consultant adequate time for
inspection so as not to delay the Works.
4) Each sample shall be properly labeled with these details:

ii. Manufacturer's name and country of origin.
iii. Project title.
vii. Location for use of product.
5) Samples shall not be removed until so instructed by the Consultant.
best endeavors, then the Contractor may offer a suitable alternative. Any decision
upon alternative materials shall be at the sole discretion of the Consultant and any
delay or loss occasioned by the Contractor due to his failure to provide the materials
specified shall not relieve him of his obligations under the Contract. If alternative
material proves to be acceptable but there is a decrease in the quality or value a
suitable price reduction shall be made, however if there is an increase in quality or
value no adjustment shall be made.

All materials or manufactured items that are liable to damage shall be delivered to site
in the original package or container bearing the name of the manufacturer and the
brand.
Materials or manufactured items shall be carefully loaded, transported, unloaded and

stored in an approved manner as per manufacturer’s recommendations and protected
from damage and exposure to weather or dampness during transit and after delivery
to site.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials and transport that the Consultant's
Representative may require in carrying out tests and checks on materials and
workmanship and setting out and measuring the Works.
Contractor shall submit before end of every calendar month a material flow sheet, in a
Page 215 of 230

4.2.0 SCOPE OF WORKS.
The Contractor’s scope of work shall include, supply, installation, testing,

commissioning and free maintenance during the Defects Liability Period of 12 months
from the date of handing over of various fire protection services described herein.
1. Hot dip galvanized fittings with puddle flanges for inlet, outlet, overflow, drain,
level indicators for the fire water tank.
2. Pump set comprising duty, standby and jockey pumps, control panel, pressure
switches, diaphragm tank, suction/discharge headers with isolation & non
return valves mounted on a steel base frame for the sprinkler/fire hose reel
systems.
3. The heavy duty GI pipe shall be used from pump room for underground piping
of firefighting system up to riser with corrosion proof denso tape.
4. ERW Class B Factory Galvanized or Black Seamless Schedule 40 pipework

for Dry rising main, including breeching in connection.
5. ERW Class B Factory Galvanized or Black Seamless Schedule 40 pipework

for sprinkler, fire hose reel systems including lockable isolation valves.
6. Complete hose reel system including Landing valves, nozzles and fire hoses
in cabinets.
7. Complete dry riser systems in areas where specified with landing valves,
pressure regulating valves, breeching inlets in cabinets as per architect’s
details for finishes.
8. Complete sprinkler system including automatic concealed type sprinklers,

installation control and alarm valves, supervisory control & lockable isolation
valves, zone control valves for sprinkler system.
9. Automatic fire hose reels in cabinets with pressure reducing valves and 30 m
25 mm diameter automatic swing stainless steel finish as per architect’s
requirements.
10. Portable fire extinguishers in lower section of the cabinets.
11. INERGEN fire suppression system for server rooms and network rooms shall
be designed, supplied and installed by specialist.
12. Water leak detection system shall be designed, supplied and installed by
specialist for all server rooms and network rooms.
13. Automatic dry powder ceiling mounted extinguishers for electrical rooms.
Page 216 of 230

14. Fire Blankets for pantry area.
4.3.0 REGULATIONS.
The complete installations shall be in compliance with the requirements of British

standard BS: 5306 and 5274, LPCB and recommendations from Civil Defence and
Fire Services Directorate, Ministry of Interior, Kingdom of Bahrain.
The complete installation shall be subject to approval and acceptance tests by the Civil
Defence and Fire Services Directorate, Ministry of Interior, Kingdom of Bahrain.
Contractor to obtain CDFSD approval for drawings before start of work & before
handing over.
4.4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PIPING AND FITTINGS
Piping and fittings shall be first class and comply with the requirements of the relevant
British Standards, ISO or DIN Specification.
Except as otherwise specified, hangers shall be spaced not more than 3 metres apart.
materials.
All pipe work shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove dirt and grease or oil. The inside
of pipe work shall be thoroughly flushed with fresh water.
All piping shall be tested in a phased manner according to construction

schedule/program before use as described in the specification.
A friction wrench shall be used on plated pipe and fittings. Cut, dented or bruised pipe
will not be allowed, and if found installed, shall be removed by the Contractor.
same.
All piping, shall be installed so as to pitch to drain to accessible locations.

Lockable isolating valves of lever operated quarter turn full bore ball type shall be
provided on sprinkler & hose reel systems as shown.
Pressure regulating valves shall be provided on fire hose reel system as indicated.
Page 217 of 230

pipe and equipment.
All metal pipe work conveying water shall be protected from electrolytic action by the
installation of non-conductive or fiber type nipples to mechanically separate copper
pipes from galvanized tanks or galvanized steel pipe work. Where the water is acidic,
action.
Ample provision shall be made for expansion of pipe work and expansion loops
points shall be provided on the drawing or as directed by the Consultant or his
representative.
by the Consultant, before installation.
All pipe work passing through walls, ceilings and floors shall be provided with sleeves
material to that of the pipe. The gaps between the pipes and sleeves shall be sealed
with appropriate sealant or polyurethane foam.
Sleeves shall be of sufficient length to finish flush with finished face of wall or ceiling
and 13mm proud of the finished face of all floors except where shown otherwise on
the drawings. Sleeves shall be retained in position before making good by lugs or
plates.
4.5.0 DRY RISER SYSTEM
4.5.1 Dry riser pipe as shown in the drawing with breaching inlet is provided at the building .
4.5.2 Pump set for Fire Protection System.(sprinkler pumps and fire hose reel pumps)
The pump set shall be as follows:
Drive and power arrangements
The pressure-flow characteristics of pumps shall be as given in drawings. Pumps

shall be driven directly by an electric motor with a maximum power output not less
than 1.1 times the power needed to drive the pump at any flow within its
characteristics. With two pumps, each pump when operating alone shall provide not
less than the flow and pressure specified shall have compatible pressure flow
Page 218 of 230

characteristics so that when operating in parallel it is not overloaded at any point.
When both pumps are electrically driven either:
(a) they shall be separately driven by independent supplies; or
(b) they shall both be driven from the same supply with an automatic changeover
to a completely independent supply in the event of failure of the first supply.
Starting and test facilities:
Starting. A single stage pump set shall be fitted with a starting device suitable for
sprinkler service immediately downstream of the outlet check valve. A multistage
high-rise pump shall be fitted with a starting device suitable for sprinkler service
immediately downstream of each stage outlet check valve.
The starting device shall open a normally closed electrical circuit and cause the pumps
to operate when the pressure in the water supply trunk main has fallen to a value not
less than 80% of the pressure attained in the trunk main when the pump or pumps are
churning. The pumps shall be fully operational in not more than 30s.
A push button manual start device, protected by a quick access front, shall be
provided at the control panel.
Means shall be provided for emergency manual starting and for testing starting by
reduction of the water pressure applied to each starting device.
Where a drain valve is fitted to test the starting device and to facilitate servicing, an
isolating valve with a bypass shall be fitted on the hydraulic connection. The bypass
shall incorporate a 3mm diameter orifice and a check valve allowing flow towards the
trunk main. A pressure gauge to indicate the pressure at which the pump starts shall
be placed between the isolating and drain valves in such a position that it can be read
during the pump starting test.
Control panel. The starting devices shall be housed in an enclosure with a degree of
protection not less than IP65 as specified in BS 5490.
Stopping. The pump shall not have any automatic stopping device.
Alarms. Means shall be provided to initiate visual and audible warnings in an area
with responsible manning as follows:
(when the pump is not running) when the sprinkler trunk main pressure falls to a value
at which the pump, or the first pump when more than one forms the supply, should
start; and
Page 219 of 230

When the water level in the priming tank is not being maintained by its normal source.
These warnings shall latch in until cancelled manually.
Pump output test facility. A test facility, including a direct reading flow meter suitable
for sprinkler service, shall be provided at the pump delivery branch downstream of
each outlet check valve to permit a running pressure test of the pump at the full load
condition (Qmax) or nominal rating as appropriate.
Where the installation main control valves are remote from the pump(s) an additional
test facility shall be provided upstream of each group of control valve sets.
This facility should be such that the full load condition of the pump is not exceeded
when the test valve is fully open.
The test pipe work should have means for automatic or manual drainage.
Adequate provision should be made for the disposal of the waste water.
Bypass on booster pumps. Booster pumps shall be fitted with a bypass with a stop
valve and a check valve. The bypass size shall be not less than the size of the water
supply pipe to the pump.
Cooling. Means shall be provided to allow a continuous flow of water through a pump
at a sufficient rate to prevent overheating of the pump when churning, with adequate
provision for disposal of any cooling water run to waste.
Air release. A manual or automatic air vent shall be provided to release any air
trapped in the upper part of the pump case, and arrangements shall be made to
automatically prevent any pump in operation drawing air from any associated non-
operating pump or pumps, for example through the pump air venting means, the
pump priming tank connection (if fitted) or the pump anti-overheating circulating water
pipe.
The inlet suction valve, and valves to isolate the priming tank (if any), air vent and anti-
overheating circulating water pipe from the pump installation normally shall be
strapped open.
Power supply. The power supply circuit for the motor shall be separate from all other
circuits in the premises.
Each connection to the power supply shall be via an isolating protective device, e.g. an
isolating switch-fuse, reserved solely for sprinkler service and independent of any
other main or sub-main circuit. Such devices shall be secured against un authorized
operation and shall, except for maintenance, be kept locked on.
Switch rooms supplying power to sprinkler pump motors shall be situated where
Page 220 of 230

access by the fire brigade is readily available.
Supply indicator lamps. Duplicate indicator lamps shall be provided in the vicinity of
the pump to show that power is available for the motor. Where the supply is A.C. the
failure of any one phase of the supply shall be indicated.
The indicator lamps should be placed so that they can be readily seen by
maintenance personnel.
Automatic power failure alarm. Visual and audible automatic warning of power
failure to the motor starting switch, or in the case of an A.C. supply failure of any one
phase, shall be given at an area with responsible manning.
Electric circuit protection. The electricity supply shall be fitted with high rupturing
capacity fuses capable of carrying the stalled motor current for a period of not less
than 75% of the period needed for the motor windings to fail.
Any no-volt release mechanism shall be of the automatic resetting type so that on
restoration of the supply the motor can be restarted automatically if the trunk main
pressure fails.
Magnetic and thermal overload trips shall not be used.
Cable and cable routes. Motor supply cables inside buildings shall be:
category AWX or SWX cables complying with BS 6387; or
mineral-insulated copper-sheathed cables complying with BS 6207; or protected from

direct exposure to fire.
External overhead cable shall not be used within 6m of any window, door or other
opening in:
any sprinkler-protected building; or
any building within 15m of a sprinkler-protected building.
Where there are two or three electrically driven pumps, failure (by mechanical
breakdown or fire damage) of equipment or cables supplying any pump shall not
affect the supply to the other pumps. In general, all wiring associated with the electric
motor driven pump, including the monitoring circuits should be in accordance with the
Regulations for Electrical Installations (Wiring Regulations) (15th Edition, 1981, IEE)
and BSED requirements.
4.5.3 a) The pipe work shall be GI heavy duty with welded/flanged joints.
b) All pipe work shall be installed in a neat manner running parallel to walls, floors
Page 221 of 230

or roofs and shall be supported in an approved manner. In general, the
installation of the pipe work shall comply to the recommendations stated in the
Rules of the Fire Officers Committee (29th Edition).
c) Sleeves shall be supplied and installed where pipes cross slabs wall or
partitions. Sleeves shall be made of galvanized steel sheet with longitudinal
seam and with an internal diameter larger than the outside diameter of the
bare pipe. All piping shall be installed in such a manner as to allow for ease of
air escape and gravity draining of the system as shown on the drawings.
d) All piping shall be supported in such a manner as to allow free movement for
expansion and contraction. Pipe supports shall be fabricated from mild steel
sections. Drop rods shall be fully threaded, galvanized mild steel. Spacing of
supports shall be as shown in the table below:
PIPE DIA. (MM) MAX DISTANCE BETWEEN SUPPORTS (M)
25 2.0
40 2.5
50, 65 3.0
e) All pipes shall be installed with a minimum slope of 2mm in 1m. sloping
towards the installation control valve.
f) All pipes and ancillaries running exposed shall receive a complete coating
system (compatible to the galvanized pipes). The final coat shall be applied
after the completion of the commissioning test. The color of the final coat shall
be red.
Any pipe work concealed within wall shall be protected with denso tape /
greasy wrap.
4.5.4 Dry riser landing valves shall be manufactured in accordance with BS: 5041 and shall
be flanged end inlet, 65mm diameter instantaneous outlet in oblique pattern, complete
with pressure regulating valve.
The landing valves shall be mounted in powder coated MS cabinet, recessed

mounted, with identification labels.
4.5.5. A twin breeching inlet connection with 65mm instantaneous inlet in copper alloy to BS:
1400, flanged outlet to BS: 4504 Class 16, body in spherodial graphite iron to BS:
2789/BS: 1452 mounted in powder coated steel cabinet, with wire meshed glass door
to BS: 5041. Shall be provided as per CD & FSD requirements.
4.6.0 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM.
Page 222 of 230

4.6.1 The complete sprinkler system shall be in accordance with BS: 5306 and LPCB
UK.
4.6.2 a) The complete pipe work shall be ERW class B, painted red after testing,
screwed/threaded joints.
bare pipe. All piping shall be installed in such a manner as to allow for ease of
sections. Drop rods shall be fully threaded, galvanized mild steel. Spacing of
25 2.0
40 2.5
50, 65 3.0
system (compatible to the galvanized pipes). The final coat shall be applied
after the completion of the commissioning test. The color of the final coat shall
be post office red.
Any pipe work concealed within wall shall be protected with densotape.
4.6.3 Alarm valves and gong/bells shall be provided.
4.6.4 The installation control valve/supervisory control valve shall be linked with the Central
Alarm panel in service building, with suitable signal cabling run in ducts.
4.6.5 The installation shall be generally as indicated on the drawings. However, the
contractor shall verify the adequacy/correctness of all pipe sizes as per BS: 5306 and
allow for any revisions.
Page 223 of 230

Contractor shall obtain approval for the complete sprinkler installation from LPCB/CD
& FSD and submit copy of approved/certified drawing to consultant.
4.7.0 FIRE HOSE REELS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS.
Fire hose reel cabinets shall be provided as detailed in the drawings with finishes of
stainless steel approved by architect. The lower compartment shall include fire
extinguishers.
4.7.1 HOSE REEL PIPEWORK
a) Hose reel piping shall be heavy duty galvanized steel tube conforming to B.S
1387. Screwed connections shall be used throughout and pipe threads shall
conform to B.S. 21. Galvanized malleable iron fittings shall be used.
Reinforced malleable iron fittings shall be CRANE or equal and approved.
barepipe. All piping shall be installed in such a manner as to allow for ease of
sections. Drop rods shall be fully threaded, galvanised mild steel. Spacing of
25 2.0
40 2.5
50, 65 3.0
system (compatible to the galvanised pipes). The final coat shall be applied
after the completion of the commissioning test. The colour of the final coat
shall be post office red.
Any pipework concealed within wall shall be protected with densotape.
Page 224 of 230

4.7.2 FIRE HOSE REELS & FIRE EXTINGUSHER
The fire hose reel and fire extingusher shallbe inside the double compartment cabinet.
The above compartment shall have hose reel and lower shall have fire extinguisher.
a) Cabinet and door
Fabricated from 12 SWG Mild Steel Degreased primed and finished white
enamel inside and stainless steel door.
b) Door Support Frame
Fabricated from 3mm mild steel degreased primed and finished white enamel.
Locations and door opening direction shall be as per CD & FSD guidelines
and site requirements
c) Recessed Hand Pull
Aluminum extruded section tubs 1474-HE 9TF anodizing quality.
d) Architrave
25x25x5 stainless steel angle-brushed satin finish
e) Fire hose reels shall be recessed, swinging, automatic type complete with
cabinet door and signs. An isolating lock shield valve shall be incorporated.
The hose shall be 30 meters long, 19-mille meters diameter with an adjustable
spray nozzle in gunmetal/chrome plated metal.
f) Hose reels shall comply with B.S. 5274 and B.S. 5306 Part 1.
g) Fixing shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.7.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS/ FIRE BLANKETS
a) A recessed cabinet containing 1 No. 9 liter water/Co2 type fire extinguisher and
1 No. 2 Kg. Co2 extinguisher should be provided adjacent to, or below each
hose reel cabinet, and shall be of matching appearance and specification.
b) Additional extinguishers shall be installed in cabinets in the plant/AHU rooms,

electrical switch room and pump rooms. The pantries shall be provided with
Page 225 of 230

fire blankets.
c) The complete system electrical installation, and all auxiliary components, shall
be connected to earth ground in accordance with the National Electrical
Code.
4.7.4 AUTIOMATIC CEILING MOUNTED DRY POWDER FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
All the electrical rooms shall be provided with automatic ceiling mounted dry powder
fire extinguishers as per CDFSD requirements. The capacity of the extinguishers shall
be as per coverage area. Contractor shall calculate exact quantity and quote
accordingly.
4.8.0. INERGEN FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM AND WATER LEAK DETECTION

SYSTEM FOR SERVER ROOMS AND NETWORK ROOMS:
All the server rooms and network rooms shall be provided with fire suppression system
which shall be designed , supplied and installed by specialist. The system shall be in
accordance with GDCD guidelines and relevant NFPA codes dealing with clean agent
system.
NFPA 2001 - Clean Agent Fire Fighting Systems
NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 75 - Standard for Protective Signaling
The automatic operation of each protected area shall be as follows:
 Actuation of one (1) detector, within the system shall:

Illuminate a WARNING lamp on the control panel
Energize an alarm bell and visual indicator
 Actuation of a second detector, within the system, shall:

Illuminate a PRE-DISCHARGE lamp on the control panel.
Energize an alarm horn
Start the time delay sequence
Enable the system abort sequence
Shut down the HVAC system and / or close dampers(shall be included in
scope the interfacing with FACP).
Close all doors to be protected.
 After completion of the time delay sequence the agent shall be discharged
and the following shall occur:
Illuminate a SYSTEM FIRED lamp on the control panel
Energize visual indicator outside the hazard in which the discharge occurred
Energize the SYSTEM FIRED audible device. The contractor shall appoint
specialist design supplier for designing the inergen system. The system shall
include but not limited to:
1. Cover the entire areas shown on the drawing including raised floor and
Page 226 of 230

ceiling voids.
2. The water leak detection system for any leakage in raised floor and the
same shall be connected to alarm and remote monitoring station for all the
server areas and network rooms. The water leak detection system shall
consists of leak/water sensors(tapes) shall be spread on raised flooring
and shall be connected to control panel which shall generate audio visual
alarm and also can be monitored through remote monitors.
The system shall provide a clean agent gas (inergen) concentration as per NFPA
guidelines.
Each system shall be actuated by a two zones optical some detectors installed at a
maximum coverage of 25m2 per detector. In room and sub-floor/ false floor of
protected area. Detection shall be wired to provide a double knock signal using cross-
zone detection method of operation
3 Audible circuits
Diagnostic LED’s for easy trouble shooting
Solid state field programmable time delay 0 to 60 seconds
Protective covers over high voltage terminals
Connections to power a remote annunciation
Cross-zone principle of agent discharge
MANUAL RELEASE SWITCH
This is a dual action device for manual discharge of the agent. The manual actuation
shall bypass the time delay and abort functions, shall cause the system discharge and
shall initiate all the alarm and shut down functions
ABORT STATION
An abort station shall be located next to each manual release switch and shall be
monitored by the control panel. Upon activation of the abort switch a signal shall be
generated at the main control panel producing a visual indication.
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARMS

Provide 150 mm diameter bell, alarm horn and visual alarm strobe lamp with label
attached to strobe lens.
CAUTION/ADVISORY SIGNS
Provide, in Arabic and English, signs are required to comply with NFPA and Local Civil
Defense recommendations at each entrance to the protected areas, for all manual
discharge stations and for each strobe light.
FIRE DOORS TO PROTECTED AREAS

Provide automatic self-closing fire doors at all exits to the protected areas. Each door
leaf shall be provided with an electrically actuated magnetic door holder and door
return device ( To be provided by others ) .
The exit doors shall close automatically upon receiving a signal from the control panel.
Each door shall also close manually.
Page 227 of 230

WALL PENETRATIONS
Seal all openings in walls, floors and ceilings within each protected area with 2 hours
rated fire proof sealant (To be provided b y others).
PIPE AND FITTINGS

Pipes shall comply with NFPA 2001, section 2-2.3, seamless steel pipe schedule 40 to
ASTM A53 grade B. Non-metallic pipes shall not be allowed.
Pipe’s fittings (Threaded & Grooved) shall comply with NFPA 2001, UL/ FM approved.
Threaded fittings shall be ductile iron rated at 300 psi.
GAS CYLINDERS
Gas cylinders shall be manufactured from high strength alloy steel, conforming to
NPFA 2001 for refillable steel gas cylinders and tested to a pressure of 700 psi.
UL/FM approved.
DISCHARGE NOZZLES
Provide and install agent discharge nozzles providing a full 360O / 180O discharge
pattern. The specialist shall determine the number of nozzles required.
SMOKE DETECTORS
Provide and install suitable smoke detectors as detailed earlier in this section.
FIRE-DETECTION CABLES
Fire-detection cabling shall be FP-200 or approved equal and shall be installed as
recommended by the manufacturer
CONTROL CABLING
All inter-communication and control cable shall be run in fire rated cable ( FP-200 /
approved equal ) and conduit system.
CONTROL CABLE
Each protected area shall be provided with a dedicated control panel providing the
functions as outlined above.
Each panel shall be wall mounted and constructed from sheet steel with red paint
finish. The cabinet shall be suitable for electrical circuits complete with all safety
features as described in the electrical specification.
Each panel shall be provided complete with a self contained 24 volt DC emergency
power pack rated at 6 amp hours including battery charger and rechargeable
batteries.
The fire suppression system shall be interfaced with FACP. However it shall be able to
work independently based on above details of operations.
Page 228 of 230

4.9.0 INSPECTION, TESTS, COMMISSIONING AND APPROVALS.
The Contractor shall test all of the equipment installed under this specification and
demonstrate its proper operation to the Consultant. No shop or final inspection of test
results will be accepted without the prior formal notice, by letter or telex to the
Consultant and his presence during the test.
The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, fuel, water and appliances required for
the tests and shall meet all expenses of said tests.
The Contractor shall also furnish the electricity (generator or otherwise) required for the
testing of all the equipment.
The Contractor shall take all necessary measurements for the safe execution of the
tests and shall bear all the responsibility for any damages or losses, which might be the
result of his actions.
If tests show that the work is in any way defective or at variance with the specification
requirements the Contractor shall immediately make all changes necessary to correct
the same and remedy defects to the satisfaction of the Consultant. In the event the
Contractor does not remedy all defects and make all changes demanded by the
Consultant within a reasonable time, the right is reserved to have defects remedied or
charges made and to charge the cost of same against the account of the Contractor.
All piping that is to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove dirt and grease or
oil. All piping shall be flushed out prior to testing of equipment and all strainers shall be
cleaned.
The Contractor shall liaise with CD & FSD and arrange for their inspection and/or
witnessing of performance tests for the installation in parts and on completion of entire
project as required by construction program/schedule and obtain CD & FSD clearance
certificates/approval.
4.10 .0 SPARE PARTS
The contractor shall indicate separately price for supply of Spare Parts recommended
by Manufacturer/Supplier for not less than five years of continuous operation, under the
local climatic conditions.
A fully itemized list of the recommended Spare Parts shall be submitted with the tender
documents.
Page 229 of 230

All fire protection systems shall be identified as per BS 1710.
4.12 .0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Testing and Commissioning of all mechanical services should be carried out in

accordance with the relevant British Standards. Also refer to Clause 4.8.0.
The Contractor shall submit in duplicate within fifteen (15) days after the award of
contract and before the commencement of site works, shop drawings of all installations
for Consultant’s approval.

 One set of drawings on ACAD diskettes in an agreed format, wherever applicable.
Three sets of approved operation and maintenance manuals of all equipments in-
stalled shall also be submitted to the Consultant in an agreed format, within fifteen (15)
days after the completion of works and before the issue of substantial completion
certificate.
Page 230 of 230

ATTACHMENT 2
TO
ANNEX A
DRAWINGS
Attachment 2 to Annex A – Drawings A2/A-1 CO-227-2012

ATTACHMENT 3
TO
ANNEX A
PROJECT SCHEDULE
Attachment 3 to Annex A – Project Schedule A3/A-1 CO-227-2012

ATTACHMENT 4
TO
ANNEX A
SITE LOCATION PLAN
Attachment 4 to Annex A – Site Location Plan A4/A-1 CO-227-2012

ATTACHMENT 5
TO
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF MAJOR SUBCONTRACTORS
APPROX VALUE AS A %
DISCIPLINE SUBCONTRACTOR NAME
OF CONTRACT SUM
Attachment 5 to Annex A – Major SubContractors A5/A-1 CO-227-2012

ANNEX B
COMPENSATION
Provided always that Contractor performs and observes its obligations under this Contract, and
subject to the terms and conditions of this Contract, Company shall pay Contractor the
remuneration set forth in this Annex B, which shall be deemed to be full Compensation for all the
Work provided under this Contract.
RATES FIRM:
Except as otherwise provided in the Contract all rates provided for herein are firm and not subject
to re-measurement, escalation or amendment for any reason whatsoever.
1. FIXED PRICE LUMP SUM
The Contract is based on a Fixed Price Lump Sum amount made up of the following section
headings taken directly from the Bill of Quantities as detailed in Attachment 2 of this Annex
B.
The Fixed Price Lump Sum is deemed to include all works necessary to satisfactorily
complete the Project.
The Fixed Price Lump Sum Amount of BHD[ ] is made up of the following: -
Preliminaries
Earthworks Excavation & Earthwork
Concrete Work
Brickwork & Blockwork
Masonry
Roofing
Woodwork
Structural Steelwork
Metalwork
Plumbing & Mechanical Engineering
Electrical Installations
Floor, Wall and Ceiling Finishes
Glazing
Painting & Decorating
Annex B - Compensation B-1 CO-227-2012

Interior Design Work
External Works
Dayworks
Provisional and Prime Cost Sums
Additional (Contractor inserted) Items
TOTAL FIXED PRICE LUMP SUM: BHD
2. CURRENCY OF PAYMENT AND REIMBURSABLE EXPENSES
All rates and other compensation set forth in this Contract are stated in Bahraini Dinar
(“BHD”) and the currency of payment to Contractor will be in Bahraini Dinar (“BHD”).
If there are any Approved reimbursable expenses which are paid by Contractor in a currency
other than Dollars, then the statement of such expenses shall be reported in Bahraini Dinar
(“BHD”) at the rate of exchange prevailing when such expenses were paid by Contractor, and
Contractor shall be reimbursed at cost for such expenditures in Bahraini Dinar (“BHD”)
based on such rate of exchange.
3. PRORATION AND APPLICATION OF RATES
This Contract is based upon the agreed Lump Sum Fixed Price Offer as detailed below in
Section 5 Compensation. The Bill of Quantities contained within Attachment 2 to this Annex
B is included for reference purposes only, and to be used in the fair valuation of legitimate
project changes and the Contractor’s monthly valuations.
All rates detailed within the Daywork section of the BoQ contained in Attachment 2 to this
Annex B, shall be prorated to the nearest one-half hour.
4. RATES INCLUSIVE
The Compensation payable hereunder is fully inclusive and covers all of Contractor’s
expenses, liabilities and obligations in connection with performing the Work and includes
mobilization and demobilization of Contractor Items and Contractor Personnel from their
respective point of origin to the Worksite and from the Worksite to their respective point of
origin or other demobilization location selected by Contractor.
The description of each schedule of rates and prices in this Annex B and its Attachments
(which descriptions shall imply reference to any heading, sub-heading, preamble or other
clause or item which shall apply) shall be held to include all labor, materials and
workmanship including all duties, taxes and other dues levied by the Kingdom of Bahrain,
landing charges, transport charges of whatever description, overheads and profit to complete
the work. Any doubt or ambiguity, actual or alleged shall be referred to the Company
Representative who shall thereupon remove such doubt or ambiguity and his explanation,
recommendation or amendment shall be deemed final.

All items given in the Schedule of Rates and Prices in Annex B are net measurements of
finished work and the Contractor must estimate for himself all contingent or temporary works
which may be required to enable him to complete the works to the true intent and meaning of
the Contract.
5. NEGOTIATED LUMP-SUM RATES
Company may request Contractor, from time to time, to negotiate special lump-sum
payments or rates for specific jobs under the Contract. Any such agreements for lump-sum
rates will be recorded in writing and subject to all other terms and conditions under the
Contract.
6. COMPENSATION
6.1 Timing of Compensation

Contractor may apply for payment for work completed on site at no more frequency than
monthly periods. These applications for payment will be made in accordance with the
Contract and in line with the guidelines set out below.
Valuations shall be calculated and presented in gross progress to date, less amount paid to
date.
Cash Retention will be applied to each Valuation at a rate of 5%, upon issuance of the Final
Certificate of Completion 2.5% of the cumulative retention amount will be released in the
next applicable valuation, the final 2.5% being held for a period of 12 months (the defect
liability period).
Payment by Company shall be made in accordance with the Contract.
6.2 Works Generally

Company shall pay Contractor for the performance of all Work properly undertaken and
covered by the Annex A and all of its Attachments. The value of payments shall be
calculated using the contract rates set forth in this Annex B.
7. PRICING GUIDELINES AND MEASUREMENT RULES
Please refer to Attachment 1 of this Annex B for Measurement Preambles.
8. BILL OF QUANTITIES
Please refer to Attachment 2 of this Annex B for Bill of Quantities (for reference
only).

ATTACHMENT 1
TO
ANNEX B
MEASUREMENT PREAMBLES
Attachment 1 to Annex B – Measurement Preambles A1/B-1 CO-227-2012

TATWEER PETROLEUM - Supply Chain Management
Preambles to the Bill of Quantities
General
Work to be executed under the Contract
A All work indicated on the drawings or described in this document shall be executed under the
Contract unless specifically excluded in writing by the Architect.
Quantities
B All quantities are measured net as fixed in position.
C The quantities are for the Tenderers guidance only, he shall check the quantities, and amend any
quantity which he considers to be wrong, and, if necessary insert items if he considers these to
have been omitted. The Tenderer shall not, however, alter any quantity marked ‘Provisional’, as
these quantities will be measured at completion.
D The quantities shall be at the Contractor’s risk, and no variation in price will be allowed, due to
error, or, omission, in the quantities, or error in the computation of the Tender discovered after
signing in the Contract.
E In the event of variations, the quantities of omissions shall be measured and agreed from the
Contract drawings and Quantities of additions shall be measured and agreed from the variation
drawings.
Descriptions
F The item descriptions should complement where necessary the Drawings and Specifications.
Should any information, additional to that shown on the drawings, or described in the
specifications, be given in the descriptions hereinafter, the same shall be regarded as forming part
of the Particular Specification.
G The descriptions included in the Schedule of Rates to describe the workmanship and materials
necessary for each item, are not necessarily complete. The Tenderer is referred to the
Specifications, Conditions of Contract and other Documents and the Drawings for further
information concerning the Works and no claim or variation will be considered on account of his
failure to acquaint himself with such information.
H In the event of any discrepancy arising between the Schedule of Rates, the Drawings and/or
Specification as previously described, the drawings and/or specification shall prevail.
Variations
J The rates inserted in the Schedule of Rates will be used to value any variations to the Works,
whether omissions or additions. The Contractor shall not be entitled to payment for profit and
overheads on the value of work omitted.
CO-227-2012 - Preambles to the Bill of Quantities Page 1 of 12

General (Cont’d)
Items to be Fully Inclusive
A The Schedule of Rates has been prepared in such a manner that the description of each item
(which description shall imply reference to any heading or sub-heading, preambles or other clause
or item which shall apply), shall be held to include all labour, materials, plant and workmanship, all
customs duties, port dues, import duties, taxes and other dues levied by the Government, landing
charges, transport charges of whatever description, overheads and profit to complete the work.
“Fixing Only”
B Where the Contractor is requested to price for ‘Fixing Only’ his price shall include for taking
delivery, unloading, storing, hoisting, protecting, assembling, replacing goods damaged, broken,
lost or stolen, until the issue of the Taking Over Certificate, and for cutting, preparing, and waste.
“Extra Over”
C Where the term “Extra Over” is used the rate inserted shall be the extra cost only for the item
described.
“Prime Cost” (P.C.) Sums and Rates
D Where “P.C.” sums or rates are included, the Contractor is to include in his price the full amount
shown. The Architect will select or approved the materials of Sub Contractors for which pc sums
or rates are shown. The pc sums or rates shall be adjusted in accordance with the actual amount
paid in the Final Account.
“General Attendance” and “Special Attendance”
E The terms General Attendance and Special Attendance shall be construed in accordance with the
definition of these terms set out in the Standard Specification for Building Works, published by the
Ministry of Works of Bahrain.
F Definitions
no = number item = composite item

kg = kilograms Bd = Bahrain Dinars
m = linear metres ga = gauge
m2 = square metres unit = unit of measurement
m3 = cubic metres rate = price per unit
Dwg = drawing det = detail

Measurement & Rates
Method of Measurement
A The Method of measurement shall be deemed to be based upon the Principles of Measurement
(International) published by The Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors, except as modified by
the following particular clauses.
Demolition and Alterations
B All rates shall include for clearing away debris and rubbish to an approved disposal site as the
work proceeds and for making good finishings and all work disturbed to match existing unless
otherwise described.
Excavation and Earthworks
C Quantities for all excavations and filling have been measured net and no allowance made for
bulking or compaction.
D Excavation in pits, trenches and the like have been measured in successive stages of 1.50m, the
volume in each dig stage being given separately. Pipe and duct trenches shall be similarly
measured but quantified per linear meter.
E Rates for excavation shall include for:-
i) Excavating in any material including in solid rock & below ground water table.
ii) Working space and backfilling same.
iii) Levelling or grading and compacting where necessary.
iv) Keeping excavations free, from water by pumping or otherwise, as may be necessary.
v) Ascertaining the location of underground services and hand excavation around these.
vi) Earthwork supports.
F The Contractor shall take and accept all responsibility for the character of the ground and no extra
price will be allowed if rock, debris, rubble, boulders, loose stones, running sand, mud, etc are
encountered.
G The Contractor shall ensure that no damage, pollution or silting up shall occur to any gully, ditch,
culvert or watercourse, or damage to public or private property as a result of keeping the
excavations free from water.
H The rates for fill shall include for compaction, levelling or grading and thickness of beds and
blinding is the thickness after consolidation.
J The rates for polythene sheeting shall include for extra material at overlaps, all straight, raking
and circular cutting and for notching around all obstructions and for vertical dressing at perimeters.

Measurements & Rates (Cont’d)
Concrete Work
A Plain and reinforced concrete shall be measured net by volume or surface area based on
dimensions as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Architect no deductions shall be made
for the volume of any steelwork embedded or encased in concrete.
B Concrete work and associated items shall be deemed to be horizontal or vertical as appropriate
unless specified otherwise.
C Beams shall be measured as that part projecting above or below the attached slabs.
D Beams described as isolated are those, which are not attached to slabs.
E The rates for Concrete Work shall include placing and compacting by hand or by mechanical
means as specified. Levelling or grading to falls, trowelling or leaving the surface ready for
screeds or pavings, and for curing and protecting are deemed to be included.
F Construction joints are to be included in the rates for concrete slabs, beams, walls, etc. Formwork
to movement joints shall be included in the unit rates.
G Formwork shall be measured net by surface in contact with the concrete.
H Steel reinforcement shall be measured net in kilograms. Allowance for rolling margin or for
overlaps shall be made in the prices.
J The rates for bar reinforcement shall include for bending as required, cleaning, etc and supporting
in position during concreting including all necessary supports and space-bars, (excluding stirrups
and links), steel binding wire, approved distance pieces and steel chairs where specified.
K The rates for fabric reinforcement shall include for straightening before fixing, for all steel binding
wire, approved distance pieces and steel chairs where specified, and for all overlaps and cutting
and notching.
L The rates for formwork shall include for all props, struts, stays, wedges, bolts, all cutting at
intersections, overlaps, passings at angles, cutting and fitting around projections and pipes, all
grooves, stops, chamfers not exceeding 50 mm wide, splayed angles 15mm wide, mould oil,
strutting and supporting to a height not exceeding 3.50m and for easing, striking and removal.
M Formwork to soffits of slabs and beams (considered separately) over 3.50m above floor level shall
be separately measured in further stages of 1.50m.
N Formwork to sides of beams shall be grouped with the quantities for the appropriate beam soffits.

Concrete Work (Cont’d)
A Formwork to outer strings of staircase shall include for all cutting to profile of treads and risers.
B The rates for precast concrete shall include for moulds, finishing fair on all exposed faces,
providing any lifting holes or other devices to the approval of the Architect, hoisting, building in,
and any necessary strutting and supporting.
C The rates for precast concrete sills, coping, purlins and the like shall include for angles and ends.
D The rates for all concrete shall include for filling into any formwork and for working around
reinforcement.
Blockwork
E The rates for block work shall include for all fair and rough cutting, fair, returns, wedging and
pinning up to soffits, building to any height off slabs or beams, raking out joints or hacking
surfaces to form a key, building in door and window frames and the like, building in or cutting and
pinning ends of lintels, bearing bars, steel sections and the like, holes for pipes, mortices and
making good in connection with building in and cutting and pinning.
F The rates for hollow block work shall include for filling blocks solid with plain insitu concrete at
sides or openings and intersections, ends of walls, and for providing a solid course of block work
at work site level of all openings, under copings and bearings of all insitu or precast concrete and
at the top of all free-standing walls.
G Damp proof courses shall be measured net as laid and rates shall include for overlaps.

Roofing
A The rates for flexible sheet or similar roofing shall include for preparing the base surface, cutting,
notching, bending and lapping, holes for pipes, standards, and the like, angles, ends, extra
material for laps and turning into grooves, and forming small openings.
B The rates for skirtings, fascias, aprons, gutters, valleys, kerbs, channels and the like shall include
for ends, angles, outlets, intersections and extra material for turning into grooves.
C The rates for roof screeds shall include for laying in bays with dividing strips.
D The rates for corrugated or toughed sheet roofing shall include for all cutting, holes for pipes,
standards and the like fittings and filling to fair ends, angles, intersections at hips, ridges, cappings
or barge boards and forming small openings.
E The rates for sheet metal flashings and gutters shall include for angles, intersections, ends, extra
material in laps, seams, passing at ends, dressing to outlets and ends, angles, and intersections.
Carpentry and Joinery
F All timber under the heading “Carpentry” shall be deemed to be sawn, i.e. as cut, and that under
the heading “Joinery” shall be deemed to have wrought surfaces, i.e. planed, unless otherwise
specified. Sawn timber shall have the nominal sizes as measured; sizes of wrought timbers are
the actual dimensions required after planning. Wherever the terms sawn and wrought occur
elsewhere as applied to timber used in this context, they shall be interpreted in a similar manner.
G Rates shall include for all scribing, splaying, notching, forming joints etc., and for forming all ends,
angles and the like. They shall also include for all necessary nails, screws and fixing accessories.
H Work described as “plugged” has been given relative to the structure irrespective of any applied
finishings. Plugging shall be carried out similarly for all trades.
J Rates for flush doors shall include for incorporating fixing blocks for ironmongery, as specified.
K Rates for doors, sashes and casements shall include for fitting and hanging.
L Rates for ironmongery shall include notching, screws for fixing and for all necessary sinking,
boring, etc. They shall also include for taking off and re-fixing after decorations have been
completed.
M The rates for softwood joinery in contact with the structure shall include for priming the contact
surfaces.

Steelwork
A Steelwork shall be measured net as fixed and the weight given in kilograms with no allowance
made for rolling margin. Rates shall include for making all connections and providing all
accessories such as caps, haunches, gussets, end plates, splice plates, cleats, brackets,
stiffeners, distance pieces, separators, diaphragms, packings, shop and site bolts, nuts, washers
and rivets, and for drilling, welding, rolling margin etc.
B Rates for painting shall include for touching up shop-applied primer on site as necessary to
include bolts, fixings, etc.
Metalwork
C The rates for metal work are to include for rolling margin, joints in the running length, notches,
holes, slots, angles, ends and all cutting, etc.
D In the absence of specific requirements to the contrary, the techniques and materials employed in
welding shall be selected with due regard to the character of the work and the materials being
connected. The rates for welding are to include for grinding to a smooth finish.
E The rates for all galvanized work are to include for the treatment of cut ends, etc., as required by
the Specification. Galvanizing shall be done after fabrication.
F The rates for work in sheet metal shall include for all cutting, edges, angles, seams, nailing and
screwing and all other labours.
Plaster work and Other Floor, Wall and Ceiling Finishes
G The rates for all insitu finishings shall include for using bonding agent on all concrete surfaces and
raking out joint to form key, brushing, cleaning off and dampening the background of block work
surfaces before application of finishings.
H The rates for finishings shall include for fair edges, splayed edges, rounded edges, grooves and
the like, all ends and angles, all fair joints and fair cuttings, making good or cutting and fitting
around pipes, bars, cables, conduits, ducting, sanitary fittings and the like, dishing to gullies and
outlets, mortices and sinkings, and all other labours.
J The rates for all finishings shall include for all narrow widths and work in small areas, cutting and
waste.

Plaster work and Other Floor, Wall and Ceiling Finishes (Cont’d)
A Rates for suspended ceilings shall include for supplying shop drawings and for obtaining approval
of details before commencing the work. Rates shall also include for primary and secondary grids
as necessary and for suspending same with requisite hangers from the soffits. Perimeter trim and
all cutting and fitting are deemed to be included in the rates. The cost of providing proprietary
system access panels shall be included in the rates.
B Rates for suspended ceilings shall include for any additional suspension members necessary to
support lighting fittings or similar.
Glazing
C Rates shall include for sealing and priming all glazing rebates and for taking out and re-fixing
beads.
D Rates shall include for replacing any cracked or broken panes as necessary.
E Rates for wired glass shall include for aligning wires in adjacent panes.
Painting and Decorating
F The rates for painting shall include for preparing all surfaces as specified or as recommended by
the manufacturer, rubbing down between coats, work in multicolours, work in narrow widths or
small areas cutting to line.
Plumbing and Engineering Installations
G Rates for all tubing are to include for providing suitable sleeves where tubing passes through
internal and external walls, partitions, ceilings, etc.
H Rates for all pipes and tubing shall include for all short lengths, sockets, running couplings and
joints, standard pipe supports, cutting and waste.
J Unless otherwise stated, tee couplings and connections are identified by the nominal diameter of
the largest pipe connected thereto and the rates for these items are to include for any reducing tee
required.
K Rates shall include for stopping ends of pipes by an approved method while the work is in
progress to prevent ingress of rubbish and for leaving all pipes clean and clear on completion.
L Rates for bends, junctions, valves, etc., on all types of pipes shall include for extra joints of all
types and cutting and waste on pipes.

Electrical Installation
A The rates for the installation shall include for any portion of the works which could reasonably and
obviously be inferred as necessary for the complete, and satisfactory operation of the installation
as a whole, although not expressly described or specified.
B The rates for switchboards, switchgear, distribution boards, control gear, fittings, equipment and
the like shall include for:
(i) All identification labels, warning notices, circuit schedules and the like.
(ii) The completion of the circuit schedules.
(iii) All necessary gland plates and cable entry boxes.
(iv) All earth tapes, cables and connections to associated cable termination glands, conduit and/or
trunking.
C Main circuits (defined as “the incoming supply to the distribution boards within a Building”) shall
be measured as follows:-
a) Cables shall be measured by length and shall be deemed to include colour coding,
marking, joints, boxes, line tops, shrouds, termination glands, connectors, supports, sleeves,
plates and the like.
b) Conduit shall be measured by length and shall be deemed to include conduit boxes, all
fittings, saddles, crampets, bending, cutting, screwing, jointing and the like.
c) Trays and trunking shall be measured by length and shall be deemed to include all fittings,
stools, saddles, cleats, clips, fire barriers, pin racks, cutting, jointing, earth continuity
continuity components and the like. Trunking shall also be deemed to include forming
openings for entries from equipment and control gear and associated bushing material.
D Submain circuits (defined as “supply from a distribution board to points, outlets, equipment and the
like”) shall be enumerated and separately identified as appropriate.
E The rates for enumerated points, outlets, equipment and the like shall be deemed to include
cables, conduit, trunking, trays, earthing tape and all equipment and accessories necessary to
provide power.
F Spacing of components for supporting earthing tapes or cables has not been stated and the rates
for earthing tapes and cables shall include for all saddles, cleats, clips, hold-fasts and the like to
suit site conditions.

Electrical Installation (Cont’d)
A The length of pendant drops are not stated and the rates for lighting fittings shall include for
pendant drops, boxes, conduit boxes, wood blocks, moulded pattresses, break joint rings, ceiling
roses, connector-blocks, dome covers, back plates, ball and socket back plates, earth continuity,
flexible cords, conduit, chains, hooks, lamp-holders, swan neck bends and the like.
B The rates for incandescent and fluorescent lighting fittings shall include for boxes, conduit boxes,
wood blocks, moulded pattresses, break joint rings, ceiling roses, connector blocks, flexible cords,
earth continuity, chokes, capacitors, starters, lampholders and the like.
C The rates for all lighting fittings shall include for all associated lamps, control gear, diffusers,
shades and the like.
D The rates for clocks, telephones, fire alarm, burglar alarms, loudspeakers and the like shall include
where required for all boxes, conduit boxes, wood blocks, moulded pattresses, cover plates and
the like.
E The rates for all socket outlets shall include for associated plug tops.
F The rates for surface accessories shall include for any necessary back plates and surface
mounting boxes.
G The rates for all accessories, fittings, equipments and the like shall include for all necessary
earthing tails and terminals.
H The term ‘connection unit’ also covers spur units, and spur boxes.

Airconditioning Installation
A The rates for the installation are to include for all incidental sundry components necessary for the
complete execution of the Works and for the proper operation of the installation, with their labour
charges, whether or not these sundry components are mentioned in detail in the tender
documents issued in connection with the contract.
B The rates for all ductwork are to include for all joints in the running length for all hardwood
insulators, stiffeners, mild steel supports, brackets and hangers and the like inclusive of painting
and fixing.
C The rates for all ductwork are to include for turning vanes, midfeathers, test holes, covers, access
doors and forming and stiffening all openings.
D The rates for ducting insulation are to include for working insulation around test holes, covers,
access doors, bends, fittings, grilles and the like and for identification bands.
E The rates for pipework (measured over all pipe fittings) are to include for all joints in the running
length, short lengths, pipe supports, hangers and brackets, cutting and waste. Header pipes shall
be included with the general pipework.
F Rates for all pipework are to include for providing sleeves where passing through the structure.
G The fittings on pipework have been identified by the diameter of the largest pipe connected thereto
and described as equal, where all three connections are the same or unequal, where one or more
connections are of differing diameters. Rates are to include for any reducers which may be
required.
External Works and Drainage
H The clauses contained above for each work section shall apply equally to the items in External
Works and Drainage.
J Rates for drain pipes shall include for all back stops, wooden plugs and retaining and alignment
pegs required in laying and for the extra involved over normal trench excavation in handpacking
and tamping selected fine material around the lower half of the pipes. Rates are to include for
leaving all pipes clean and clear.
K Pipes shall be measured net as laid and shall include for all cutting, etc and for laying in trenches
of any depth. Rates for bends, junctions, etc on all types of drainpipes shall include for extra joints
of all types and cutting and waste on pipes.

Services Generally
A The Contractor shall be completely responsible for obtaining the requirements for holes, fixings,
and any other builder’s work. He shall co-ordinate the requirements for builder’s work between
trades and ensure that such information as is shown on the drawings is in accordance with his
own and the employer’s requirements. Details of builder’s work which is not shown on the
drawings but which are required by the Contractor shall be forwarded to the Company
Representative for his written approval before the work is put in hand. Any cost of unnecessary
work due to the Contractor failing to comply with these conditions or failing to act upon such
information given will be borne entirely by the Contractor.
B The drilling, cutting or leaving of holes or apertures through structural floors, walls, beams, etc.,
shall be avoided, but where this become a necessity the Contractor must obtain the written
approval of the Company Representative before such work is put in hand.
C The expression used herein, ‘Builder’s Work’ incorporates the following:-
a) Drilling, cutting or leaving of holes for pipes, ducts and the like through walls, floors,
partitions, roofs, etc., and subsequently making good.
b) Cutting and pinning ends of supports for pipes, equipment, appliances, fittings and the like to
walls, floors, partitions, soffits, etc., and making good.
c) Cutting or leaving mortices, sinking, etc., for holding down bolts, brackets, supports and the
like and grouting in.
d) Cutting chases for pipes and the like in walls, floors, partitions, etc., and subsequently
making good.
e) Cutting and fitting around, boring holes through and making good of finishings up to pipes,
supports, brackets and the like.
f) The formation of small concrete bases, plinths, etc not exceeding 0.5 m3 for plant, tanks,
and equipment, including anti-vibration pads if necessary.
g) The painting of exposed pipework, fittings, equipment, etc.
D ‘Builder’s Work’ will include all the above, but it should be noted that this list is not intended to be
exhaustive and everything necessary will be deemed to be included.

ATTACHMENT 2
TO
ANNEX B
BILL OF QUANTITIES
(for reference only)
Attachment 2 to Annex B - BoQ A2/B-1 CO-227-2012

TATWEER PETROLEUM-Bahrain Field Development Company W.L.L
Bill of Quantities Document
Rate Amount
Item Description Qty Unit
BHD BHD
EXCAVATION & EARTHWORKS
Excavation in any ground
A Allowance for levelling the existing site to (+/-)

250mm item
B Excavation to reduced level in all types of ground

inclusive of rock. 8,813 m³
C Extra over for excavation in ground defined as hard

rock. 3,648 m³
D Levelling and compaction to bottom of excavation

and top of backfill item
E Columns footing excavation 560 m³
F Ground beam excavation 62 m³
G Excavation and compaction beneath floor slab;

300mm deep 971 m³
Fill including compaction
H Filling and compaction with desert fill to produce

final site working surface
J Backfilling to foundations with desert fill 339 m³
K Backfilling beneath foundations with approved type

class 3 fill laid in layers of 150 mm to achieve 95%
modified proctor density. 971 m³
Termite Control
L Allow for anti-termite treatment to oversite area item
M Allow for anti-termite treatment to excavations item
Dewatering provision
N Allow for keeping excavation free from water

including dewatering if necessary item
To Collection BHD
2.1.1
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
SUBSTRUCTURE
Blinding concrete using sulphate resisting Portland

cement; minimum cube strength of 20 MPA
A 50mm thick blinding concrete under foundations &

ground beams 57 m³
Crusher fines
B 50mm thick crusher fines under grade slab 3,237 m²
Reinforced cast-in-situ concrete using sulphate

resisting Portland cement, cube strength of 30
MPA, (formwork and reinforcement measured
separately)
C Concrete to column footing 222 m³
D Concrete to ground beams 76 m³
E Concrete to column shaft 16 m³
F Concrete to lift wall 8 m³
G Thickening under the stair case 3 m³
Reinforced cast-in-situ concrete using normal

Portland cement, cube strength of 30 MPA,
(formwork and reinforcement measured separately)
H 150mm thick grade slab to building 486 m³
Formwork
J Formwork in side of columns footing 900 m²
K Formwork in side of columns shafts 97 m²
L Formwork in side of lift footing 67 m²
M Formwork in side of lift wall up to dpc 81 m²
Damp Proof course

127 m²
N Damp Proof course to ground beam
To Collection BHD
2.1.2
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
SUBSTRUCTURE (continued…)
Expansion joint filler including sealant and all

necessary fixing accessories
A 12mm compressive filler board 810 m
B Bitumen impregnated compressible filler board

20mm thick 1,215 m
C Cold poured sealant 12mm wide 1,215 m
Construction joint
D Groove to be saw cut 20 hours after concreting and

to be filled with polysulphide sealant. item
Waterproofing to foundations
E 150mm high of 1000 gauge polyethylene sheet to

the sides of grade slab 232 m²
F 2 layers 1000 gauge polyethylene sheet to soffit of

grade slab 3,237 m²
G Water proofing to footings vertically 616 m²
H Ditto; sides of ground beam 882 m²
J Ditto; top of the footing 434 m²
K Ditto; beneath footing 447 m²
L Ditto; column shaft 1,796 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.3
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
SUBSTRUCTURE (continued…)
Steel reinforcement; hot rolled deformed high yield

bond steel bar reinforcement in any diameter as
specified on the drawings
A Ground beam 7,040 kg
B Columns 9,344 kg
C Footings 15,594 kg
D Stairs Footing 336 kg
E Lift footing 2,478 kg
F Lift wall 2,148 kg
Steel fabric mesh reinforcement
G Type BS A 193 steel mesh 3,237 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.4
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
SUPERSTRUCTURE
Reinforced cast-in-situ concrete using normal

Portland cement, cube strength f'c = 40 MPA,
(formwork and reinforcement measured separately)
A Beams 27 m³
B Columns 176 m³
C Lintels 18 m³
D Stairs with landings 30 m³
E 150mm thick concrete slab 7 m³
F Lift wall concrete up to dpc 81 m³
G Wall thickening 51 m³
Formwork
H To sides of beams 315 m²
J To sides of columns 1,796 m²
K To soffit of staircase and landing 116 m²
L To riser of staircase and landing 51 m²
M To sides of staircase and landing 30 m²
N To sides of floor slab 1,011 m
P To side of lift wall 783 m²
Q To lintels 265 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.5
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
SUPERSTRUCTURE (continued…)
Post Tension Flat Slab
Reinforced insitu concrete post tensioned flat slab;

designed by PT agency; including reinforcement
with all necessary laps and cutting; complete as
described. NB: Thickness of slab and reinforcement
to be clarified with designer, and as approved by
the Engineer
A PT flat slab, First Level 3,185 m²
B PT flat slab, Second Level 3,218 m²
C PT flat slab, Roof Level 3,242 m²
Formwork
Formwork including ends, projections, reveals and

forming chamfers, nibs, rebates, corbels, grooves,
recesses and the like as described
D PT flat slab, First Level 3,191 m²
E PT flat slab, Second Level 3,225 m²
F PT flat slab, Roof Level 3,280 m²
Wet area waterproofing
G Waterproofing membrane including levelling screed

as specified 531 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.6
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
SUPERSTRUCTURE (continued…)

A Beams 3,400 kg
B Columns 29,664 kg
C Lintels 3,903 kg
D Stairs and landings 5,010 kg
E Suspended floor slabs 558 kg
F Lift wall 13,668 kg
Expansion joints including flexi board, rubber

sealant, fire barrier etc as per the specification
G 20mm thick flexel board at joint with fire barrier

sealant 146 m
H 20mm expansion joint, FWF-80 surface mounted

ceiling and width cover 146 m
J 50mm expansion joint with stainless steel joint

cover SJP-200S as per specification 49 m
K 25mm expansion joint with stainless steel rigid

strips, W70 standard duty as per specification 98 m
To Collection BHD
2.1.7
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
MASONRY
Precast concrete insulated external block walls

including cement and sand mortar, fire retardant
fillers at joints, ties, anchors and all necessary
accessories
A 200mm Block wall 2,553 m²
B 200mm Block wall (parapet wall 855 m²
Precast concrete hollow block internal walls

including cement and sand mortar, fire retardant
fillers at joints, ties, anchors and all necessary
accessories
C 200mm Block wall 2,616 m²
D 100mm Block wall 2,978 m²
METAL WORKS
E 1000mm high stainless steel pipe wall mounted

handrail (mirror finish) 180 m
F Half round bull nose with polished edge to the stair

case 415 m
G Laminated glass (w/ low e) skylight 33 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.8
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
ROOFING
Waterproofing system to roof and terrace areas
A 1.2mm thick polymeric water-proofing membrane

("evalon" or equivalent) 3,325 m²
B 1.2mm thick polymeric water-proofing membrane

vertical 1,036 m²
C 1mm x 150mm aluminium flashing 296 m²
D 500x500x50mm Precast concrete tiles 3,325 m²
E 60mm extruded polystyrene insulation 3,325 m²
F Gravel top of the roof 2 m3
G Light weight concrete laid to slope 3,325 m²
H Polysulphide sealant 298 m²
J
Tile pad bottom of the Precast concrete tiles in roof
13,530 m
K Separation layer 3,325 m²
L Top of all parapets to receive cementitious water

proofing 178 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.9
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
TIMBER DOORS
Timber doors including wood frames, sub-frames,

oil base semi-gloss painting, ironmongery, hardware
sets and all necessary accessories
A Type - D1, 1500 x 2400mm high 45mm thk. solid

core veneer finish double
shutter door with 50mm thk.rmt wooden frame,
self closing single swing door. with vision panel
8mmthk. wired glass with architrave (one hour fire
rating) 2 nr
B Type - D2, 1500 x 2400mm high 45mm thk. solid

8mmthk. wired glass with architrave (one hour fire
rating) 8 nr
C Type - D2A, 1500 x 2400mm high 45mm thk. solid

8mmthk. wired glass with access control(one hour
fire rating) 12 nr
D Type - D05 1000 x 2200mm high 45mm thk. semi

solid core veneer finish flush
door with 15mm thk stainless steel polish
finish strip on 50mm thk. Polished wooden
frame, single swing door with complete
ironmongeries, with architrave 42 nr
E Type - D05A 1000 x 2200mm high 45mm thk. semi

ironmongeries, with access control 6 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.10
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
TIMBER DOORS (continued…)

A Type - D06 900 x 2200mm high 45mm thk. semi

ironmongeries, with architrave 12 nr
B Type - D07 800 x 2200mm high 45mm thk. semi

solid core laminated finish both
sides with red miranti polished lipping single
shutter door with concealed over head door
closer with complete ironmongeries,
with architrave(one hour fire rating) 47 nr
C Type - D08 1000 x 2725mm high 45mm thk. semi

door with 50mm thk. Polished wooden frame,
self closing single swing door. with vision
panel of 8mmthk. smoked tempered glass,
with architrave 4 nr
D Type - D09 1000 x 2400mm high 45mm thk. semi

solid core veneer finish single
door with 50mm thk. rmt wooden frame, with
polished 100x20 rmt architrave.(fire exit door)
with magnetic control (one hour fire rating) 3 nr
E Type - D10 1000 x 2400mm high 45mm thk. painted

flush doors with 50 mm thk
painted wooden frame with architrave, fire
rated 38mmthk. soureland tubular board, with
intumecent strip all around (one and half hour fire
rating) 6 nr
F Type - 10A 1000 x 2400mm high 45mm thk. painted

flush doors with 50 mm thk
painted wooden frame with architrave, fire
rated 38mmthk. soureland tubular board, with
intumecent strip all around with access control (one
and half hour fire rating) 3 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.11
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
TIMBER DOORS (continued…)

A Type - D12A 1500 x 2200mm high 45mm thk. semi

ironmongeries, with access control 3 nr
B Type - 15 1200 x 2200mm high 45mm thk. semi

door with 50mm thk. painted wooden frame ,
15mm thk metal strip on front side .with
complete ironmongeries and architrave.
(provision for access control) 3 nr
ALUMINUM DOORS
Aluminium doors including frames, sub-frames and

all necessary accessories
C Type - D11, 1500 x 2400mm high powder-coated

aluminium framed double shutter door with 8mm thk
tempered glass (technal or approved. equal ) with
appropriate ironmongery.(provision for access
controlling) 4 nr
D
Type - D12 1500 x 2400mm high powder-coated
aluminium framed door w/ powder-coated
louvers (technal or similar), and with appropriate
ironmongery, fly mesh to be provided from inside.
(provision for access controlling )
1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.12
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
A Type - W1, 2650 x 3425mm high frameless single

glazed ( 12mm thick toughened glass ) (technal
system or approved. equal) structural glazing colour
to be approved by specialist 2 nr
B Type - W2, 1200 x 2200mm high double glazed

(6mm thick reflective tempered glass + 12mm air
gap + 6mm thick clear tempered glass ) bottom
hung window (technal or equal) with thermal
brake powder coated aluminium frame .tint colour
as per approval 49 nr
C Type - W3, 1200 x 2200mm high double glazed

D Type - W4, 1200 x 1200mm high double glazed

E Type - W5,3850 x 2000mm high frame less double

glazed (6mm thick reflective tempered glass +
12mm air gap + 6mm thick clear tempered glass )
.tint colour as per approval 2 nr
F Type - W6, 5100 x 2000mm high frameless single

glazed ( 12mm thick toughened glass ) (technal
system or approved. equal) structural glazing colour
to be approved by specialist 2 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.13
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
GLASS DOORS
A Type - D03, 1000 x 2200mm high 12mm thick frame

less tempered glass
double swing door with one side etching
with appropriate ironmongery 14 nr
B
Type - D03A, 1000 x 2200mm high 12mm thick
frame less tempered glass
with appropriate ironmongery and access control
1 nr
C Type - D04, 2700 x 2400mm high 12mm thick frame

less tempered glass
with appropriate ironmongery 4 nr
GLASS WINDOWS
D Type - GL01 - 6200 x 3425mm high frameless

single glazed ( 12mm thick toughened glass )
(technal system or approved. equal) structural
glazing with single side etching
colour to be approved by specialist 1 nr
E Type - GL 02 3200 x 3700mm high frameless

single glazed ( 12mm thick toughened glass )
(technal system or approved. equal) structural
glazing with single side etching
colour to be approved by specialist with electro
magnetic and access control system, sliding panel
with logo acid wash 300mm ht 1 nr
F Type - GL 03 3500 x 2725mm high frameless part

fixed and part hinged double swing openable door
(12mm thk.clear tempered glass) with sand blast
sticker, floor springs and with necessary s.s.patch
fittings and s.s.pull handle
71 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.14
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
GLASS WINDOWS (continued…)
A
Type - GL 03A 4000 x 2725mm high frameless part
3 nr
B
Type - GL 04 2600 x 2725mm high frameless part
6 nr
C
Type - GL 05 4800 x 2725mm high frameless part
(12mm thk.full frosted tempered glass)
floor springs and with necessary s.s.patch fittings
and s.s.pull handle
2 nr
D
Type - GL 06, 2900 x 2725mm high frameless part
and s.s.pull handle
6 nr
E
and s.s.pull handle
2 nr
F
and s.s.pull handle
4 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.15
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
GLASS WINDOWS (continued…)
A
and s.s.pull handle
3 nr
B
and s.s.pull handle
2 nr
C Type - GL 11, 1500 x 2725mm high frameless part

and s.s.pull handle 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.16
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
FLOOR FINISHES
Porcelain floor tiling including cement and sand

mortar, setting materials, finishing, and grouting
A Homogeneous porcelain tile 600mm x 600mm 678 m²
B 150mm high homogeneous porcelain skirting 700 m
C 8mm thick non slippery water resistant porcelain tile 360 m²
Laminate wood flooring including materials,

finishing, and fixings required as per specification
D Laminated parquet flooring 445 m²
E 18mm x 100mm high red meranti wood skirting with

paint finish 295 m
F High Pressure Laminate as per the specification 182 m²
Cement and sand screed finishes
G 300mm thick levelling screed 3,150 m²
Carpet flooring including grippers, fixings, glue and

accessories as per the specification
H Carpet as per specification 7 m²
J Carpet tile/rolls 5,975 m²
Miscellaneous floor finishes including all necessary

fixings, accessories and the like
K Access floor panel 600mmx600mm 7,688 m²
L Epoxy paint finished 13 m²
M 100mm high stainless steel (brush finish) skirting on

mdf backing 2,770 m
N Granite 95 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.17
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
WALL FINISHES
Cement and sand plaster including metal lath,

beads and necessary fixings as required
A 15mm plaster thick to walls to receive paint finish 1,194 m²
B Gypsum internal dry wall partition 4,968 m²
C Render 20mm thick to external walls to receive

paint finish 4,263 m²
Prepare and apply emulsion based painting and

coating including primer, intermediate and finishing
coats
D Emulsion paint to plastered walls 1,194 m²
E Emulsion paint to rendered walls externally 4,263 m²
F Emulsion paint on plaster (Silk phoenomastic

interior grade) 16,921 m²
Wall tile finishes including cement and sand mortar,

setting materials and grouting
G Ceramic tiles 677 m²
H Water resistant homogeneous porcelain tile 2,197 m²
J 600 X 300mm porcelain tile 49 m²
Laminate wood wall panelling including materials,

finishing, and fixings required as per specification
K Veneer wall panelling 966 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.18
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
CEILING FINISHES
Gypsum suspended ceiling systems including

supports, suspension systems and all necessary
accessories (painting measured separately)
A Plain gypsum board suspended ceiling 6,895 m²
B Moisture-resistant gypsum board 805 m²
C 600 x 600 acoustic gypsum board ceiling 6,261 m²
D
Suspended ceiling with 600mm x 600mm moisture
resistant gypsum tiles in concealed grid
247 m²
Wooden ceiling systems including supports,

suspension systems and all necessary accessories
(painting measured separately)
E Lightweight wood plank 110 m²
Prepare and apply emulsion based painting and

coating including primer, intermediate and finishing
coats
F Emulsion paint to ceilings 185 m²
G Spray plaster & emulsion paint 17 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.19
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
FURNITURE, FITTINGS & EQUIPMENT
Manufacture, supply and install kitchen base and

wall units in accordance with the specification
A 1580mm long kitchen base unit 1 nr
B 2980mm long "L" shape kitchen base unit 4 nr
C 3100mm long "L" shape kitchen base unit 1 nr
D 3300mm long kitchen base unit 2 nr
E 3500mm long kitchen base unit 1 nr
F 4000mm long kitchen base unit 1 nr
G 4630mm long kitchen base unit 1 nr
H 5170mm long kitchen base unit 1 nr
J 6150mm long kitchen base unit 1 nr
Manufacture, supply and install cupboard and

storage units in accordance with the specification
K 1100 x 600 x 900mm high shelving unit 2 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.20
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
PLUMBING
Sanitary fittings including mixer taps, angle valves,

waste outlets traps etc. and assembling, jointing
and fixing, for full description refer to Drawings and
Specification
A Under counter oval wash basin as specified 53 nr
B
Half pedestal wash basin for disabled as/ approval.
2 nr
C European W.C as per approval 3 nr
D
Wall mounted W.C with seat flusher and sensor
activated flush meters and cover with concealed.
45 nr
E Bidet, as specified 5 nr
F Urinal as per approval, complete with all fittings

(Electronic sensor, cistern, etc) 15 nr
G 250mm wide & up to 1500mm height ledge with

concealed cistern 34 nr
H Kitchen sink 12 nr
J
Single lever basin mixer (chrome finish) as specified
55 nr
Sanitary accessories including fixing and brackets

and complete as specified
K Stainless steel tissue roll holder 48 nr
L Stainless steel 150x150mm floor tarp cover 57 nr
M Concealed vanity counter mounted liquid soap

dispenser. 53 nr
N
Stainless steel wall mounted liquid soap dispenser
1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.21
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
PLUMBING (continued…)
Sanitary accessories including fixing and brackets

and complete as specified (continued…)
A Stainless steel coat hook 46 nr
B Stainless steel waste bin with pedestal lever 9 nr
C
Stainless steel finish tissue paper dispenser box
9 nr
D Swing and grab bar Stainless steel satin finish /

Stainless steel hand rail as specified 2 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.22
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Supply and install mirrors to bathrooms
A 8mm thick 5250mm long float glass mirror full

silvered with protective coating from behind and
with WP plywood backing fixed on wall and with
Stainless steel polished trim around. 1 nr
B 8mm thick 5550mm long float glass mirror full

C 8mm thick 5800mm long float glass mirror full

D 8mm thick 5750mm long float glass mirror full

E 8mm thick 3150mm long float glass mirror full

F 8mm thick 3300mm long float glass mirror full

G 8mm thick 3600mm long float glass mirror full

H 8mm thick 1750mm long float glass mirror full

To Collection BHD
2.1.23
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Storm Water Drainage Installation
UPVC above ground pipe work and fittings including

all necessary fixing accessories, supports, covers
and blanked connections complete as specified
A 82 mm diameter (RWP) 268 m
B 82 mm diameter 'Y' socket 25 nr
C 82 mm diameter 45° bend 43 nr
UPVC below ground pipe work and fittings including

all necessary fixing accessories, supports, covers
and blanked connections complete as specified
D 82 mm diameter (RWP) 48 m
E 82 mm diameter 'Y' socket 6 nr
F 82 mm diameter 45° bend 3 nr
G 83 mm diameter 45° bend 2 nr
Ancillaries and accessories including connection to

pipe work
H Rain water outlet 18 nr
J Rain water floor clean outlet 4 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.24
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Foul Water Drainage Installation
UPVC Soil and waste above ground pipe work and

fittings including all necessary fixing
accessories,supports,covers and blanked
connections excavation, backfilling complete as
specified.
A 50 mm diameter 94 m
B 82 mm diameter 225 m
C 110 mm diameter 216 m
D 110 mm diameter 'Y' socket 67 nr
E 110 mm diameter 90° bend 52 nr
F 110 mm diameter 45° bend 67 nr
G 82mm dia 45° bend 69 nr
H 82 mm diameter 'Y' socket 73 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.25
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Foul Water Drainage Installation (continued…)
UPVC Soil and waste below ground pipe work and

fittings including all necessary fixing
accessories,supports,covers and blanked
connections excavation, backfilling complete as
specified.
C 100mm diameter, high pressure pipe 29 m
D 110 mm diameter 87 m
E 150 mm diameter 170 m
F 150 mm diameter 'Y' socket 5 nr
G 110 mm diameter 'Y' socket 22 nr
H 110 mm diameter 90° bend 21 nr
J 110 mm diameter 45° bend 17 nr
K 82mm dia 45° bend 26 nr
L 82 mm diameter 'Y' socket 26 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.26
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

pipe work.
A Floor drains 81 nr
B 50mm Clean outlets 2 nr
C 82mm Clean outlets 34 nr
D 110mm Clean outlets 27 nr
E 150mm Clean outlets 31 nr
F Back inlet gully 8 nr
G Manhole, Ref; MH 1 nr
H Manhole, Ref; MH-1 1 nr
J Manhole, Ref; MH-2 1 nr
K Manhole, Ref; MH-3 1 nr
L Manhole, Ref; MH-4 1 nr
M Manhole, Ref; MH-5 1 nr
N Manhole, Ref; MH-6 1 nr
P Manhole, Ref; MH-7 1 nr
Q Manhole, Ref; MH-8 1 nr
R Manhole, Ref; MH-9 1 nr
S Pressure breaker manhole. 1 nr
T Manhole as per site condition 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.27
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

pipe work (continued…)
A Sewage tank complete as described in drawings

and specifications. 1 nr
B Lifting station,(As per SDD Details) with lifting pump

set (1No. Duty and 1No. Standby) 1 L/s @ 1.5 Bar.
Complete as described in drawings and
specifications 1 nr
UPVC Vent pipes and fittings including supports,

fixings and connections.

pipe work.
E Vent cowl, for 50mm diameter pipe 7 nr
F Vent cowl, for 82mm diameter pipe 8 nr
UPVC Condensate drain pipes and fittings to above

ground including supports, fixings and connections.
G 82 mm diameter 126 m
To Collection BHD
2.1.28
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Hot and Cold Water installation
PP-R Cold water pipe work above ground including

all necessary fittings, fixing accessories, supports,
pipe clips, hangers and blanked connections
complete as specified.
D 50mm diameter 22 m
PP-R Cold water pipe work below ground including

all necessary fittings, fixing accessories, supports,
pipe clips, hangers and blanked connections
complete as specified.
PP-R Cold water pipe work exposed at the roof

level, including all necessary fittings, fixing
accessories, supports, pipe clips, hangers and
blanked connections complete as specified.
F 15 mm diameter 43 m
G 25 mm diameter 104 m
H 40 mm diameter 16 m
J 50mm diameter 78 m
To Collection BHD
2.1.29
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Hot and Cold Water installation (continued…)

pipe work.
A 25 mm dia Isolation valve 24 nr
B 32 mm dia Isolation valve 16 nr
C 40 mm dia Isolation valve 1 nr
D 50 mm dia Isolation valve 17 nr
E 25 mm dia pressure regulating valve 5 nr
F 32 mm dia pressure regulating valve 2 nr
G 50 mm dia pressure regulating valve 6 nr
H 40 mm dia Non return valve 1 nr
J 50 mm dia Non return valve 3 nr
K 40 mm dia Drain valve 1 nr
L 41 mm dia Strainer 1 nr
Pex cold water pipe work including all necessary

fittings, fixing accessories,supports,pipe clips,
hangers and blanked connections ,insulations
complete as per the specification
M 16 mm diameter 1,141 m
To Collection BHD
2.1.30
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Fixtures including all necessary fittings, accessories

as per the specification
A Water meter including gate valves, back-flow

preventers, connection and accessories as per the
specification 1 nr
B Cold water distribution manifold 17 nr
C Bip tap 4 nr
PP-R Hot water pipe work including all necessary

fittings, fixing accessories,supports,pipe clips,
hangers and blanked connections ,insulations
complete as specified
Pex pipe work including all necessary fittings, fixing

accessories,supports,pipe clips, hangers and
blanked connections ,insulations complete as per
the specification
Fixtures including all necessary fittings, accessories

as per the specification
F Hot water distribution manifolds 12 nr
Electric water heater, including valves and fittings,

complete as described in drawings and
specifications.
G Electrictric water heater, 30 Litre. 16 nr
H Electrictric water heater, 50 Litre. 8 nr
J Electrictric water heater, 100 Litre. 2 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.31
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Cold water booster pump set 2.6 L/s @ 2 bar,

complete including interconnecting pipe work and
fittings, valves, pressure gages, non return valves
and control panel in accordance with the
specification
A Booster pump set 1 nr
Cold water transfer pump set 2.7 L/s @ 2.5 bar,

complete including interconnecting pipe work and
fittings, valves, pressure gages, non return valves
and control panel in accordance with the
specification
B Transfer pump set 1 nr
Cold Water tanks as per the specification
C Domestic & Fire water tank total 120 cubic meters

(60 cubic meter for fire) 1 nr
D
Over head sectional water tank, 20 cubic meter.
1 nr
General
E Allow for testing item
F Allow for commissioning item
To Collection BHD
2.1.32
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
FIRE FIGHTING
Sprinkler System
Sprinkler System pipe work and fittings; complete

including supports and connections and
accessories.
Below ground pipe work
A 50mm pipe 13 m
B 100mm pipe 52 m
C 150mm pipe 38 m
Above ground pipe work.
D 25mm pipe 1,843 m
E 32mm pipe 72 m
F 40mm pipe 338 m
G 50mm pipe 389 m
H 65mm pipe 304 m
J 80mm pipe 148 m
K 100mm pipe 152 m
L 150mm pipe 108 m
Fire hose reel pipe work and fittings; complete

including supports and connections and
accessories.
Below ground pipe work
M 100mm pipe 36 m
Above ground pipe work.
N 25mm pipe 98 m
P 100mm pipe 248 m
To Collection BHD
2.1.33
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
FIRE FIGHTING (continued…)
Sprinkler System (continued…)
Fire fighting valves and fittings compete as

described.
A Landing valve, 65mm dia 12 nr
B Isolation valve, 65mm dia 12 nr
C Isolation valve, 150mm dia 5 nr
D Isolation valve, 50mm dia 1 nr
E Isolation valve, 100mm dia 1 nr
F Automatic Air Valve, 50mm dia 1 nr
G Automatic Air Valve, 100mm dia 1 nr
H Automatic Air Valve, 150mm dia 1 nr
J Check valve, 150mm dia 2 nr
K Two way breeching inlets 5 nr
L Floor control valve arrangement, including all valves

and fittings, complete as described in drawings and
specifications 3 nr
Sprinkler heads, complete including fittings,

accessories, guards and connections.
M Pendent sprinkler head 797 nr
N Allow for connection to existing main headers,

complete. item
To Collection BHD
2.1.34
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
FIRE FIGHTING (continued…)
Sprinkler System (continued…)
Equipment and misc items
A Fire protection pump set ( 1No. Duty, 1No. Standby

electric pump and 1No. Jockey pump) 350 GPM@
8 bar, complete as described in drawings and
specification. 1 nr
B Hose reel/ extinguisher vertical combined cabinet,

recessed mounted vertical configuration, finishes
shall be stainless steel, complete as described. 13 nr
C Automatic dry powder fire extinguisher 9 nr
D 5 Kg, CO2 Fire extinguishers 13 nr
E 10 Lit. H2OFire extinguishers 13 nr
F FE & FE1 Fire extinguisher 2 nr
G Fire blanket 10 nr
H Control panel 8 nr
General
J
Allow for all 'Builders Work' in connection with the
Fire fighting Installation, including cutting or forming
all holes and chases, building in all necessary pipe
sleeves, brackets, etc. cutting and fitting and
making good to all floor, wall and ceiling finishing's,
painting all exposed pipe work constructing tank,
pump and pipe work, plinths, supports, etc.
item
K Allow for testing item
L Allow for commissioning item
To Collection BHD
2.1.35
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
ELECTRICAL
Containment System
Containment systems for LV and Power including

supports and fixings complete as described
A 350x50mm 3 compartment G.I floor trunking 1,235 m
B 600mm wide G.I cable tray 63 m
C 300mm wide G.I cable tray 52 m
Containment systems for LV and Power including

supports and fixings exposed at the roof level
complete as described
D 100mm wide G.I cable tray 18 m
E 225mm wide G.I cable tray 81 m
F 300mm wide G.I cable tray 34 m
G 600mm wide G.I cable tray 13 m
To Collection BHD
2.1.36
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
ELECTRICAL (continued…)
Power Installations
EDD meter complete as per specification
A EDD meter; ref: EDD nr
Main panel board complete including MCCB's,

breakers, earthing strip, meters etc.
B Main panel board; ref: MDP/GF 1 nr
C Main panel board; ref: MDP/GF(E) 1 nr
Sub Main Distribution Boards complete including all

necessary connections, etc. as per the specification
D Sub Main Distribution boards; ref SMDB/GF 1 nr
E Sub Main Distribution boards; ref SMDB/GF(E) 1 nr
F Sub Main Distribution boards; ref SMDB/FF 1 nr
G Sub Main Distribution boards; ref SMDB/FF(E) 1 nr
H Sub Main Distribution boards; ref SMDB/SF 1 nr
J Sub Main Distribution boards; ref SMDB/SF(E) 1 nr
K Sub Main Distribution boards; ref SMDB/UPS1 1 nr
L Sub Main Distribution boards; ref SMDB/UPS2 1 nr
M Sub Main Distribution boards; ref SMDB/RF1 1 nr
N Sub Main Distribution boards; ref SMDB/RF2 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.37
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Power Installations (continued…)
Distribution Boards complete including all necessary

connections, etc. as per the specification
A Feeder pillar; ref FP-01 1 nr
B Feeder pillar; ref FP-02 1 nr
C Distribution boards; ref DB/GL1 1 nr
D Distribution boards; ref DB/GL2 1 nr
E Distribution boards; ref DB/GP1 1 nr
F Distribution boards; ref DB/GP2 1 nr
G Distribution boards; ref DB/GP3 1 nr
H Distribution boards; ref DB/GF/AC1 1 nr
J Distribution boards; ref DB/GF/AC2 1 nr
K Distribution boards; ref DB/GF/AC3 1 nr
L Distribution boards; ref DB/GF/AC4 1 nr
M Distribution boards; ref DB/Ext 1 nr
N Distribution boards; ref DB/GF(E) 1 nr
P Distribution boards; ref DB/FF(E) 1 nr
Q Distribution boards; ref DB/SF(E) 1 nr
R Distribution boards; ref DB/GF/UPS 1 nr
S Distribution boards; ref DB/FF/UPS 1 nr
T Distribution boards; ref DB/SF/UPS 1 nr
U Distribution boards; ref DB/FL1 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.38
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Distribution Boards complete including all necessary

connections, etc. as per the specification
A Distribution boards; ref DB/FL2 1 nr
B Distribution boards; ref DB/FP1 1 nr
C Distribution boards; ref DB/FP2 1 nr
D Distribution boards; ref DB/FP3 1 nr
E Distribution boards; ref DB/FF/AC1 1 nr
F Distribution boards; ref DB/FF/AC2 1 nr
G Distribution boards; ref DB/FF/AC3 1 nr
H Distribution boards; ref DB/FF/AC4 1 nr
J Distribution boards; ref DB/SL1 1 nr
K Distribution boards; ref DB/SL2 1 nr
L Distribution boards; ref DB/SP1 1 nr
M Distribution boards; ref DB/SP2 1 nr
N Distribution boards; ref DB/SP3 1 nr
P Distribution boards; ref DB/SF/AC1 1 nr
Q Distribution boards; ref DB/SF/AC2 1 nr
R Distribution boards; ref DB/RF 1 nr
100A 4P External maintenance change over panel

with inter lock 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.39
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Sub main circuits, cables and conduits including

trunking, tray, terminations etc. complete as
specified
A
From EDD to MDP/GF (1); 7nrs 1core 1000mm sq.
XLPE/AWA/PVC cable From EDD to MDP/GF (1)
item
B From EDD to MDP/GF (2); 7nrs 1core 1000mm sq.

XLPE/AWA/PVC cable item
C From MDP/GF to SMDB/GF; 2nrs 4Cx185mm

square Cu. XLPE/SWA/PVC cable+ 1Cx185mm
square Cu. ECC item
D From MDP/GF to SMDB/FF; 2nrs 4Cx185mm

square Cu. ECC item
E From MDP/GF to SMDB/SF; 2nrs 4Cx185mm

square Cu. ECC item
F From MDP/GF to SMDB/RF1; 4nrs 1Cx500mm

square Cu. XLPE/SWA/PVC cable item
G From MDP/GF to SMDB/RF2; 2nrs 4Cx185mm

square Cu. ECC item
H
From MDP/GF to DB/EXT; 4Cx25mm square Cu.
XLPE/AWA/PVC cable + 1Cx16mm square Cu.ECC
item
J
From MDP/GF to FP-01 4Cx35mm square Cu.
item
K
From MDP/GF to FP-02 4Cx35mm square Cu.
item
To Collection BHD
2.1.40
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specified
A From MDP/GF to ATS; 4nrs 300mm square Cu.

B From ATS to MDP/GF(E); 4nrs 300mm square Cu.

C From ATS to generator set; 4nrs 300mm square Cu.

D From MDP (E) to SMDB/GF(E); 4Cx50mm square

Cu. XLPE/SWA/PVC cable + 1Cx25mm square Cu.
ECC item
E From MDP (E) to SMDB/FF(E); 4Cx50mm square

ECC item
F From MDP (E) to SMDB/SF(E); 4Cx50mm square

ECC item
G From MDP (E) to SMDB/UPS-2; 4Cx50mm square

ECC item
H From MDP (E) to SMDB/UPS-1 through 40kvA UPS

(1); 4Cx35mm square Cu. XLPE/SWA/PVC cable +
1Cx16mm square Cu. ECC item
J From MDP (E) to SMDB/UPS-1 through 40kvA UPS

(2); 4Cx35mm square Cu. XLPE/SWA/PVC cable +
K From MDP (E) to 100A TPN Isolator (Fire pump);

4Cx50mm square Cu. XLPE/SWA/PVC cable +
To Collection BHD
2.1.41
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specified
A From MDP (E) to 32A TPN Isolator (Transfer pump);

B From SMDB/UPS to DB/GF/UPS; 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
C From SMDB/UPS to DB/FF/UPS; 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
D From SMDB/UPS to DB/SF/UPS; 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
E From SMDB/GF to DB/GL1; 4Cx25mm square Cu.

XLPE/SWA/PVC cable + 1Cx16mm square Cu.
ECC item
F From SMDB/GF to DB/GL2; 4Cx25mm square Cu.

ECC item
G From SMDB/GF to DB/GP1; 4Cx35mm square Cu.

ECC item
H From SMDB/GF to DB/GP2; 4Cx35mm square Cu.

ECC item
J From SMDB/GF to DB/GP3; 4Cx25mm square Cu.

ECC item
To Collection BHD
2.1.42
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specified
A From SMDB/GF to DB/GF/AC1; 4Cx16mm square

ECC item
B From SMDB/FF to DB/FL1; 4Cx25mm square Cu.

ECC item
C From SMDB/FF to DB/FL2; 4Cx25mm square Cu.

ECC item
D From SMDB/FF to DB/FP1; 4Cx35mm square Cu.

ECC item
E From SMDB/FF to DB/FP2; 4Cx35mm square Cu.

ECC item
F From SMDB/FF to DB/FP3; 4Cx25mm square Cu.

ECC item
G From SMDB/FF to DB/FP/AC1; 4Cx16mm square

ECC item
H From SMDB/SF to DB/SL1; 4Cx25mm square Cu.

ECC item
J From SMDB/SF to DB/SL2; 4Cx25mm square Cu.

ECC item
To Collection BHD
2.1.43
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specified
A From SMDB/SF to DB/SP1; 4Cx35mm square Cu.

ECC item
B From SMDB/SF to DB/SP2; 4Cx35mm square Cu.

ECC item
C From SMDB/SF to DB/SP3; 4Cx25mm square Cu.

ECC item
D From SMDB/SF to DB/SF/AC1; 4Cx16mm square

ECC item
E From SMDB/RF1 to DB/RF; 4Cx16mm square Cu.

ECC item
F From SMDB/RF1 to DB/GF/AC2; 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
G From SMDB/RF1 to DB/GF/AC3; 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
H From SMDB/RF1 to DB/GF/AC4; 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
J From SMDB/RF1 to DB/FF/AC2; 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
To Collection BHD
2.1.44
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specified
A From SMDB/RF1 to DB/FF/AC3; 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
B From SMDB/RF1 to DB/FF/AC4; 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
C From SMDB/RF1 to DB/SF/AC2; 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
D From SMDB/GF(E) to DB/GF(E); 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
E From SMDB/GF(E) to 32A TPN (CCU-G1);

F From SMDB/GF(E) to 32A TPN (CCU-G2);

G From SMDB/FF(E) to DB/FF (E); 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
H From SMDB/FF(E) to 32A TPN (CCU-F1);

J From SMDB/FF(E) to 32A TPN (CCU-F2);

K From SMDB/FF(E) to 32A TPN (CCU-F3);

To Collection BHD
2.1.45
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specified
A From SMDB/FF(E) to 32A TPN (CCU-F4);

B From SMDB/SF(E) to DB/SF (E); 4Cx25mm square

ECC item
C From SMDB/SF(E) to 100A TPN (CCU-S1);

D From SMDB/SF(E) to 100A TPN (CCU-S2);

E From SMDB/SF(E) to 100A TPN (CCU-S3);

F From SMDB/SF(E) to 32A TPN (CCU-S4);

G From SMDB/SF(E) to 45A TPN (Lift-1); 4Cx10mm

square Cu. XLPE/SWA/PVC cable + 1Cx6mm
square Cu. ECC item
H From SMDB/SF(E) to 45A TPN (Lift-2); 4Cx10mm

square Cu. ECC item
J From SMDB/SF(E) to 45A TPN (Lift-3); 4Cx10mm

square Cu. ECC item
To Collection BHD
2.1.46
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specified
A From SMDB/SF(E) to 45A TPN (Service Lift);

B From SMDB/RF-2 to 63A TPN (PU-1); 4Cx16mm

square Cu. ECC item
C From SMDB/RF-2 to 45A TPN (PU-2); 4Cx16mm

square Cu. ECC item
D From SMDB/RF-2 to 45A TPN (PU-3); 4Cx16mm

square Cu. ECC item
E From SMDB/RF-2 to 45A TPN (PU-4); 4Cx16mm

square Cu. ECC item
F From SMDB/RF-2 to 45A TPN (PU-5); 4Cx16mm

square Cu. ECC item
G From SMDB/RF-2 to 45A TPN (PU-6); 4Cx16mm

square Cu. ECC item
H From SMDB/RF-2 to 63A TPN (PU-7); 4Cx16mm

square Cu. ECC item
J From SMDB/RF-2 to 45A TPN (PU-8); 4Cx16mm

square Cu. ECC item
To Collection BHD
2.1.47
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specified
A From SMDB/RF-2 to 125A TPN (FAHU-1);

B From SMDB/RF-2 to 125A TPN (FAHU-2);

Standby Power Generation System
Equipment
C Conneciton only to existing generator set 1 nr
D
Automatic transfer switch (ATS) With maintenance
bypass arrangement, complete as described.
1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.48
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Standby Power Generation System

(continued…)
UPS System complete as described in drawings

and specifications.
A 40kvA UPS, 2 nr
Isolators complete as described
B 63A, TPN Isolator 4 nr
C 32A, TPN Isolator 1 nr
D 100A, TPN Isolator 3 nr
E 100A,TPN Isolator 6 nr
F 63A TPN Isolator weather proof 2 nr
G 125A TPN Isolator weather proof 2 nr
H 100A,TPN Isolator weather proof 7 nr
J 32A, TPN Isolator weather proof 3 nr
K 16A TPN Isolator weather proof 61 nr
L 16A SPN Isolator weather proof 10 nr
M 20A SPN Isolator weather proof 13 nr
N 45A TPN Isolator weather proof 10 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.49
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Small Power Installations
Final sub circuits cables and 25mm dia G.I flexible

conduits including connections etc, complete as
specified
A 13A Single switched socket outlet points. 117 nr
13A twin switched socket outlet points. 474 nr
13A Single switched socket outlet points W/P 10 nr
B 32A TPN Industrial type socket outlet with plug top

points. 40 nr
3 Compartment raised floor outlet box consisting of

2No. 13A twin socket outlet, 2No.TEL/DATA outlet
points. 471 nr
C 20A DP switch with neon indicator points. 141 nr
D Connection box/ Junction box points. 30 nr
E Isolator points. 92 nr
Equipment and accessories complete as specified
F 13A Single switched socket outlets 117 nr
G 13A twin switched socket outlets 474 nr
H
32A TPN Industrial type socket outlet with plug top
40 nr
J
3 Compartment raised floor outlet box consisting of
2No. 13A twin socket outlet, 2No.TEL/DATA outlet.
471 nr
K 20A DP switch with neon indicator 141 nr
L Connection box/ Junction box 30 nr
M 13A Single switched socket outlets W/P 10 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.50
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Lighting Installations
Final sub circuits cables and conduits including

trunking tray, connections complete as specified
A Cables and conduits to lighting points 2,605 nr
B Ditto to lighting switch points 336 nr
Accessories complete as specified
C 10A one way grid switch 157 nr
D 10A intermediate grid switch 21 nr
E 10A one way grid switch, 2 gang 27 nr
F 10A two way grid switch 99 nr
G 10A two way grid switch, 3 gang 14 nr
H 10A one way grid switch, 4 gang 10 nr
J 10A one way grid switch, 3 gang 3 nr
K 10A two way grid switch, 2 gang 3 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.51
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Lighting Installations (continued…)
Light Fittings including assembling, connecting and

fixing with bulbs, tubes complete as per the
specification
A RA; .600mm Recessed fluorescent direct/indirect

luminaries with twin louver optic. Lamp -2x55 watts
TC-L-H.F Ballast 1,178 nr
B RA+E - Same as Type 'RA' but with 1No. Lamp on

3hrs. Duration battery back-up 10 nr
C RB - 600mm x 600mm recessed fluorescent fitting 276 nr

suitable for exposed ceiling grid system. White
D RB+E - Same as type 'RB' but with 1No. Lamp on
3hrs. Duration battery back-up. 40 nr
E RC - Recessed down fitting lamp 10 watts led

complete with necessary 191 nr
F RD - Fixed LV down light. Lamp -35W 12V, QRCBC

with electronic ballast. 69 nr
G
RE - Recessed compact fluorescent down light
sandblasted die-cast aluminium body,
polycarbonate gear cover anodised aluminium
reflector IP 54 glass cover. Lamp-2x18W, TC-DEL
80 nr
H RE+E - Same as type "RH' fitting, but with 1No.

Lamp on 3hrs duration emergency back-up.
J RF - 150x150mm recessed compact fluorescent

fitting lamp - 1x26W TEC-DEL 86 nr
K RG - 64x64mm recessed LV down fitting. Lamp-

35W 12V, QRCS1 with electronic ballast. 257 nr
L SA - 2x36 Watts surface mounted dust tight and

waterproof fluorescent fitting. Reinforced impact
resistance polyester body polycarbonate diffuser
stainless steel mounting & retaining clips. Electronic
control gear IP 65 rating. 15 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.52
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specification
A SA+E - Same as type "SA' but with 1No. Lamp on

3hrs emergency battery pack (maintained
switchable version). 9 nr
B SB - Fluorescent cove light. T5 Lamp. Electronic

control gear lamp: 14,21,24,28,35 or 54Watts.
C
SC - Ceiling light - IP44 rating. Die cast aluminium
body, opal star diffuser lamp: 2TC-D 18Watts.
8 nr
D SD - Low profile circular surface mounted ceiling

light. Light grey, fire retardant polycarbonate body
with opal polycarbonate diffuser. HPF Control gear
lamp 16W 2D 28 nr
E SD+E - Same as above fitting but with switchable

maintained 3hrs duration battery back-up. Lamp
16W 2D 16 nr
F SE - Self-contained emergency exit light maintained

type lamp 8Watt fluorescent screen printed legend
panel. 3hr operation. Sheet steel body with white
stove enamel finish. 48 nr
G SF - IP65 Rated bulkhead fitting. Die cast

aluminium body, prismatic polycarbonate diffuser.
HF ballast. Lamp - 18W TC-L 12 nr
H SG - Surface mounted IP65 rated wall light. Die

cast aluminium blade body, opal polycarbonate
diffuser with visor. Lamp-26W TC-TEL. 84 nr
J SH - Fluorescent mirror light, suitable for 14W, T5

Lamp. IP 44 rated extruded aluminium body, opal
polycarbonate diffuser. Die cast aluminium end cap.
HF control gear. 49 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.53
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specification
A XA - External decorative pole light with indirect

lighting lamp. 150Watt HIT. IP65 rated 4200mt.
High cylindrical pole with base galvanized steel
body, polyester powdered paint protect against UV
rays & corrosion. 92 nr
B Bath room mirror lights 9 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.54
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Extra Low Voltage System
Final sub circuits cables and 25mm dia G.I conduits

including trunking tray, connections complete as
specified
A Telephone outlet points 113 nr
B Data Outlet points 124 nr
C TV Outlet points 1 nr
Accessories complete as specified
D Telephone outlets 113 nr
E Data Outlets 124 nr
F TV Outlets 1 nr
Equipments complete as specified
G Data Cabinets 22 no
Access Control System
Final sub circuits cables and 25mm dia PVC

conduits including trunking tray, connections
complete as specified
H Facilities for Access control system, complete as

per the specification item
J Access system controller points 13 nr
K Junction box points 42 nr
L Magnetic door contact switch points 51 nr
M Magnetic card reader points 86 nr
N Electric door latch points 43 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.55
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Extra Low Voltage System
Accessories complete as per the specification
A Access system controller main 1 nr
B Access system controller 13 nr
C Junction box 42 nr
D Magnetic door contact switch 51 nr
E Magnetic card reader 86 nr
F Electric door latch 43 nr
Fire Alarm System
Cables and conduiting with all interface units and

connections complete as described
G To Fire alarm control panel, 4Loop 1 nr
H To Fire alarm repeater panel 1 nr
J Break glass points 25 nr
K Fire alarm sounder points 23 nr
L Multi sensor device points. 287 nr
M Fire alarm sounder points weather proof 2 nr
N 20A DP Fused spur outlet points 2 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.56
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Fire Alarm System (continued…)
Accessories complete as per the specification
A Fire alarm control panel, 4 Loop 1 nr
B Fire alarm repeater panel 1 nr
C Break glass 25 nr
D Fire alarm sounder 23 nr
E Multi sensor device 287 nr
F Fire alarm sounder weather proof 2 nr
G 20A DP Fused spur outlets 2 nr
Misc Electrical Equipment
H Projectors, complete as described 16 nr
J Projector screens, complete as scribed 16 nr
K Hand Dryer, complete as described 9 nr
Earthing System
L Supply, installation and testing of complete earthing item

system including inspection pits and covers,
Electric Traction Elevators
M Passenger lift , 3 Stops (GF, FF and SF),Cabin 3 nr

Size 1400mm wide x 1350mm deep x 2200mm
N Service lift , 3 Stops (GF, FF and SF),Cabin Size 1 nr
1550mm wide x 1350mm deep x 2200mm high, 11
General
P Allow for all 'Builders Work' in connection with the item

Electrical Installation, including cutting or forming all
Q Allow for Testing item
R Allow for Commissioning item
To Collection BHD
2.1.57
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Fresh Air Handling Unit, complete as described in

drawings and specifications
A FAHU- 1 Air flow 3350, 57kW 1 nr
B FAHU- 2 Air flow 3100, 53kW 1 nr
Package Units complete as described in drawings

and specifications
C PU-1, Package unit; 26.0 kW 1 nr
D PU-2, Package unit; 14.1 kW 1 nr
E PU-3, Package unit; 10.1 kW 1 nr
F PU-4, Package unit; 14.1 kW 1 nr
G PU-5, Package unit; 14.1 kW 1 nr
H PU-6, Package unit; 18.6 kW 1 nr
J PU-7, Package unit; 26.0 kW 1 nr
K PU-8, Package unit; 16.5 kW 1 nr
Close control unit, complete as described in

drawings and specifications
L CCU-G-1 Close control unit 8.0 kW 1 nr
M CCU-G-2 Close control unit 8.0 kW 1 nr
N CCU-F-1 Close control unit 8.0 kW 1 nr
P CCU-F-2 Close control unit 8.0 kW 1 nr
Q CCU-F-3 Close control unit 8.0 kW 1 nr
R CCU-F-4 Close control unit 8.0 kW 1 nr
S CCU-S-1 Close control unit 31.0 kW 1 nr
T CCU-S-2 Close control unit 31.0 kW 1 nr
U CCU-S-3 Close control unit 31.0 kW 1 nr
V CCU-S-4 Close control unit 8.0 kW 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.58
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM (continued…)
Mini split unit (MSU) with condensing unit; including

all necessary vibration isolators, sight glasses and
refrigerant filters, supports, insulation, accessories,
controls, cables / wirings, conduits and connections
up to electrical power supply only; complete as per
the equipment schedule and specifications
A IU-G-12 / OU-G-12 wall mounted; 2.5kw 1 nr
B IU-G-17 / OU-G-17 wall mounted; 2.5kw 1 nr
C IU-F-20 / OU-F-20 wall mounted; 2.5kw 1 nr
D IU-S-8 / OU-S-8 wall mounted; 2.5kw 1 nr
Ducted split unit (DSU) with condensing unit;

including all necessary vibration isolators, sight
glasses and refrigerant filters, supports, insulation,
accessories, controls, cables / wirings, conduits and
connections up to electrical power supply only;
complete as per the equipment schedule and
specifications
E IU-G-1 / OU-G-1 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
F IU-G-2 / OU-G-2 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
G IU-G-3 / OU-G-3 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
H IU-G-4 / OU-G-4 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
J IU-G-5 / OU-G-5 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
K IU-G-6 / OU-G-6 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
L IU-G-7 / OU-G-7 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
M IU-G-8 / OU-G-8 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
N IU-G-9 / OU-G-9 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
P IU-G-10 / OU-G-10 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
Q IU-G-11 / OU-G-11 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.59
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

A IU-G-13 / OU-G-13 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
B IU-G-14 / OU-G-14 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
C IU-G-15 / OU-G-15 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
D IU-G-16 / OU-G-16 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
R IU-F-1 / OU-F-1 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
S IU-F-2 / OU-F-2 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
T IU-F-3 / OU-F-3 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
U IU-F-4 / OU-F-4 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.60
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

A IU-F-5 / OU-F-5 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
B IU-F-6 / OU-F-6 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
C IU-F-7 / OU-F-7 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
D IU-F-8 / OU-F-8 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
E IU-F-9 / OU-F-9 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
F IU-F-10 / OU-F-10 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
G IU-F-11 / OU-F-11 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
H IU-F-12 / OU-F-12 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
J IU-F-13 / OU-F-13 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
K IU-F-14 / OU-F-14 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
L IU-F-15 / OU-F-15 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
M IU-F-16 / OU-F-16 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
N IU-F-18 / OU-F-18 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
P IU-F-19 / OU-F-19 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
Q IU-F-21 / OU-F-21 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.61
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

F IU-S-1 / OU-S-1 ceiling concealed ; 3.9kw 1 nr
G IU-S-2 / OU-S-2 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
H IU-S-3 / OU-S-3 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
J IU-S-4 / OU-S-4 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
K IU-S-5 / OU-S-5 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
L IU-S-6 / OU-S-6 ceiling concealed ; 2.5kw 1 nr
M IU-S-7 / OU-S-7 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
N IU-S-9 / OU-S-9 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
P IU-S-10 / OU-S-10 ceiling concealed ; 2.5kw 1 nr
Q IU-S-11 / OU-S-11 ceiling concealed ; 3.9kw 1 nr
R IU-S-12 / OU-S-12 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
S IU-S-13 / OU-S-13 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
T IU-S-14 / OU-S-14 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
U IU-S-15 / OU-S-15 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.62
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Allow for the supply and installation of refrigerant

pipes, type L refrigeration quality copper pipes and
fittings ,with brazed joints, closed cell rubber
insulation,8 oz canvas coated with white chlorinated
paints, 0.9 mm thick aluminium cladding; complete
with refrigerant charge and connections as per the
specification
A IU-G-12 / OU-G-12 wall mounted; 2.5kw 1 nr
B IU-G-17 / OU-G-17 wall mounted; 2.5kw 1 nr
C IU-F-20 / OU-F-20 wall mounted; 2.5kw 1 nr
D IU-S-8 / OU-S-8 wall mounted; 2.5kw 1 nr

specification
To Collection BHD
2.1.63
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specification
A IU-G-13 / OU-G-13 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
B IU-G-14 / OU-G-14 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
C IU-G-15 / OU-G-15 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
D IU-G-16 / OU-G-16 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.64
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specification
F IU-F-10 / OU-F-10 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
G IU-F-11 / OU-F-11 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
H IU-F-12 / OU-F-12 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
J IU-F-13 / OU-F-13 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
K IU-F-14 / OU-F-14 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
L IU-F-15 / OU-F-15 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
M IU-F-16 / OU-F-16 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
N IU-F-18 / OU-F-18 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
P IU-F-19 / OU-F-19 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
Q IU-F-21 / OU-F-21 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.65
Rate Amount
BHD BHD

specification
F IU-S-1 / OU-S-1 ceiling concealed ; 3.9kw 1 nr
G IU-S-2 / OU-S-2 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
H IU-S-3 / OU-S-3 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
J IU-S-4 / OU-S-4 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
K IU-S-5 / OU-S-5 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
L IU-S-6 / OU-S-6 ceiling concealed ; 2.5kw 1 nr
M IU-S-7 / OU-S-7 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
N IU-S-9 / OU-S-9 ceiling concealed ; 3.3kw 1 nr
P IU-S-10 / OU-S-10 ceiling concealed ; 2.5kw 1 nr
Q IU-S-11 / OU-S-11 ceiling concealed ; 3.9kw 1 nr
R IU-S-12 / OU-S-12 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
S IU-S-13 / OU-S-13 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
T IU-S-14 / OU-S-14 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
U IU-S-15 / OU-S-15 ceiling concealed ; 5.6kw 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.66
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Equipments
A Extract fan, 100W: Ref EX-1 1 nr
B Extract fan, 150W: Ref EX-2 1 nr
C Extract fan, 100W: Ref EX-3 1 nr
D Extract fan, 150W: Ref EX-4 1 nr
E Extract fan, 250W: Ref EX-5 1 nr
F Extract fan, 250W: Ref EX-6 1 nr
G Extract fan, 150W: Ref EX-7 1 nr
H Extract fan, 150W: Ref EX-8 1 nr
J Extract fan, 200W: Ref EX-9 1 nr
K Extract fan, 150W: Ref EX-10 1 nr
L Extract fan, 100W: Ref EX-11 1 nr
M Extract fan, 100W: Ref EX-12 1 nr
Supply and installation of Temprature and Humidity

display as per the drawings and specifications.
N Temprature and Humidity display 6 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.67
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Ductwork
Supply air duct; galvanized sheet rectangular duct;

complete with all supports and fittings complete as
per the specification
A 150 x 150mm duct 48 m²
B 200 x 150mm duct 11 m²
C 200 x 200mm duct 3 m²
D 350 x 350mm duct 45 m²
E 400 x 250mm duct 298 m²
F 400 x 200mm duct 161 m²
G 350 x 200mm duct 151 m²
H 350 x 250mm duct 396 m²
J 400 x 300mm duct 118 m²
K 450 x 300mm duct 360 m²
L 450 x 250mm duct 346 m²
M 450 x 350mm duct 1,486 m²
N 550 x 450mm duct 120 m²
P 650 x 400mm duct 21 m²
Q 500 x 400mm duct 4 m²
R 1750 x 450mm duct 9 m²
S 750 x 750mm duct 6 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.68
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Fire Control Dampers (FCD)
A 200 x 200mm fire damper 1 nr
B 350 x 350mm fire damper 1 nr
C 400 x 250mm fire damper 39 nr
D 400 x 200mm fire damper 15 nr
E 350 x 200mm fire damper 22 nr
F 350 x 250mm fire damper 25 nr
G 400 x 300mm fire damper 1 nr
H 450 x 300mm fire damper 2 nr
J 450 x 250mm fire damper 20 nr
K 450 x 350mm fire damper 28 nr
L 500 x 400mm fire damper 1
Diffusers
M 150 x 150mm square diffuser 1 nr
N 225 x 225mm square diffuser 9 nr
P 300 x 300mm square diffuser 42 nr
Q 375 x 375mm square diffuser 99 nr
R 450 x 450mm square diffuser 115 nr
S 525 x 525mm square diffuser 45 nr
T 25mm (4500mm) 2 slot diffuser 1 nr
U 25mm (4200mm) 2 slot diffuser 1 nr
V 25mm (1000mm) 2 slot diffuser 1 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.69
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Diffusers (continued…)
A 25mm (4000mm) 3 slot diffuser 4 nr
B 25mm (3000mm) 3 slot diffuser 6 nr
C 25mm (3200mm) 3 slot diffuser 3 nr
D 25mm (2000mm) 3 slot diffuser 14 nr
E 25mm (1500mm) 3 slot diffuser 6 nr
F 25mm (1000mm) 3 slot diffuser 2 nr
G 25mm (3500mm) 3 slot diffuser 1 nr
H 25mm (2000mm) 2 slot diffuser 4 nr
J 25mm (3200mm) 2 slot diffuser 1 nr
K Extract air difuser 83 nr
Air Grills
L 500 x 100mm supply air grill (200 CFM) 4 nr
M 1000 x 100mm supply air grill (300 CFM) 4 nr
N 1000 x 100mm supply air grill (200 CFM) 3 nr
Volume Control Dampers (VCD)
P 350 x 350mm volume control damper 1 nr
Q 300 x 300mm volume control damper 1 nr
R 450 x 300mm volume control damper 2 nr
S 500 x 300mm volume control damper 1 nr
T 300 x 250mm volume control damper 1 nr
U 450 x 350mm motorized damper 6 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.70
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Ductwork
Roof-top supply air duct; galvanized sheet

rectangular duct; complete with all supports and
fittings complete as per the specification
A 650 x 400mm duct 17 m²
B 400 x 400mm duct 7 m²
C 1750 x 450mm duct 18 m²
D 750 x 750mm duct 12 m²
E 650 x 400mm fire damper 2 nr
F 400 x 400mm fire damper 1 nr
G 1750 x 450mm fire damper 1 nr
H 750 x 750mm fire damper 1 nr
Sand Trap Louver
J 4000m² sand trap louver with filter and motorized

damper 2 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.71
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Ductwork
Fresh air duct; galvanized sheet rectangular duct;

A 350 x 350mm duct 1 m²
B 400 x 300mm duct 6 m²
C 450 x 300mm duct 7 m²
D 500 x 300mm duct 2 m²
E 750 x 400mm duct 13 m²
F Fresh air duct as per specification 617 m
G Fire damper 67 nr
Ductwork
Roof-top Fresh air duct; galvanized sheet

H 750 x 400mm duct 13 m²
J 750 x 400mm fire damper 2 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.72
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Ductwork
Extract air duct; galvanized sheet rectangular duct;

A 150 x 150mm duct 6 m²
B 200 x 200mm duct 57 m²
C 250 x 250mm duct 41 m²
D 350 x 350mm duct 22 m²
E 500 x 500mm duct 10 m²
F 550 x 450mm duct 10 m²
G Extract duct 211 m
Roof-top Extarct air duct; galvanized sheet

H 150 x 150mm duct 2 m²
J 200 x 200mm duct 10 m²
K 250 x 250mm duct 12 m²
L 500 x 500mm duct 6 m²
M 550 x 450mm duct 6 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.73
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Ductwork
Return air duct; galvanized sheet rectangular duct;

A 450 x 350mm duct 16 m²
B 500 x 400mm duct 4 m²
C 650 x 400mm duct 21 m²
D 750 x 750mm duct 6 m²
E 1750 x 450mm duct 9 m²
F Return air duct 158 m
G 450 x 350 Fire damper 10 nr
Diffusers
H 225 x 225mm square diffuser 20 nr
J 300 x 300mm square diffuser 40 nr
K 375 x 375mm square diffuser 83 nr
L 450 x 450mm square diffuser 136 nr
M 525 x 525mm square diffuser 62 nr
N 25mm (4500mm) 2 slot diffuser 1 nr
P 25mm (4200mm) 2 slot diffuser 1 nr
Q 25mm (1000mm) 2 slot diffuser 1 nr
R 25mm (4000mm) 3 slot diffuser 4 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.74
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Diffusers (continued…)
A 25mm (3000mm) 3 slot diffuser 3 nr
B 25mm (3200mm) 3 slot diffuser 3 nr
C 25mm (2000mm) 3 slot diffuser 14 nr
D 25mm (1500mm) 3 slot diffuser 8 nr
E 25mm (1000mm) 3 slot diffuser 2 nr
F 25mm (1800mm) 3 slot diffuser 3 nr
G 25mm (2000mm) 2 slot diffuser 4 nr
H Extract air difuser 83 nr
Air Grills
J 1000 x 100mm supply air grill (300 CFM) 4 nr
Bell mouth
K Return air duct bell mouth as per specification 47 nr
Volume Control Dampers (VCD)
L 450 x 350mm volume control damper 10 nr
Ductwork
Roof-top Return air duct; galvanized sheet

M 500 x 400mm duct 7 m²
N 650 x 400mm duct 17 m²
P 750 x 750mm duct 12 m²
Q 1750 x 450mm duct 18 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.75
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Main Server Room HVAC Works
A Allow for all HVAC works required to service the

main server room as per dwg XXXX. The Contractor
is to include for all ducting, motorized and non-
motorized fire and volume control dampers,
perforated diffusers, floor grills, floor mounted CCU,
accesories, fixings, equipment and miselaneous
items as per the specification. item
General
B
Allow for all 'Builders Work' in connection with the
air-conditioning system installations including
cutting or forming all holes and chases for pipes,
cables, ductwork, etc. providing and building in all
pipe sleeves, lintels and hardwood linings to duct
and fan openings, cutting and fitting and making
good all floor, wall and ceiling finishing's and
constructing all necessary plant plinths
item
C Allow for Testing item
D Allow for Commissioning item
To Collection BHD
2.1.76
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
EXTERNAL WORKS
Excavation & Earthworks
Excavation in any ground including rock and

disposal
A Columns footing excavation to parking bay canopies

742 m³
B Ramp footing excavation 157 m³
Fill including compaction
C Filling and compaction with desert fill to produce

final site working surface 1,419 m³
D Backfilling to foundations with desert fill 3 m³
E Backfilling to under the ramp with desert fill 72 m³
Termite Control
F Allow for anti-termite treatment to oversite area item
G Allow for anti-termite treatment to excavations item
Dewatering provision
H Allow for keeping excavation free from water

including dewatering if necessary item
Boundary Wall
Boundary wall works including demolition,

dismantling and disposal in addition to the re-
construction of the new blockwork wall including
foundation, render, paint and the like as per the
specification
J Dismantle the existing Precast Boundary Wall 300 m
K Re-install the Dismantled same Boundary Wall 300 m
L Supply and Install New Precast Boundary Wall 260 m
To Collection BHD
2.1.77
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
EXTERNAL WORKS (continued…)
Substructure
Blinding concrete using sulphate resisting Portland

cement; minimum cube strength of 20 MPA
A 50mm thick blinding concrete 144 m³
Reinforced cast-in-situ concrete using sulphate

resisting Portland cement, cube strength of 30
MPA, (formwork and reinforcement measured
separately)
B Concrete to column footing 755 m³
C Concrete to ramp 14 m³
Formwork
D Formwork in side of columns footing 990 m²
E Formwork in side of ramp 20 m²
Waterproofing to foundations
F 150mm high of 1000 gauge polyethylene sheet to

Water proofing to footings vertically 2,340 m²
G Ditto; bottom of footing 252 m²
H Ditto; top of footing 126 m²
J Ditto; bottom of ramp 90 m²
K Ditto; bottom of side of ramp 100 m²
L Ditto; side of filled block work 387 m²
Concrete filled blockwork
M 200mm thick concrete filled blockwork 28 m²
To Collection BHD
2.1.78
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Substructure (continued…)

A Reinforcement to canopy footings 64,126 kg
B Reinforcement to ramp 277 kg
Steel fabric mesh reinforcement
C Type BS A193 steel mesh to ramp 90 m²
Metal Works
D 50mm diameter stainless steel hand railing to ramp

with hair line finish 50 m
E 2600mm x 1200mm to main entrance 1 nr
Paving Works
F
60mm thick interlock block paving on a 50mm thick
sand bed; Refer to detail 02 and specification
9,700 m²
G
80mm thick interlock block paving on a 50mm thick
sand bed; Refer to detail 02 and specification
7,515 m²
Road Kerbs
H
150mm x 330mm precast concrete radius kerbs
441 m
J 150mm x 330mm precast concrete straight kerbs 2,815 m
K Drop kerb between parking bays and road as per 1,225 m

the specification
To Collection BHD
2.1.79
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Shading canopies
Steel structured shading canopy including fabric

membrane, fixings and accessories all as per the
specification and detail no. 2
A Parking canopy, single sided 2,211 m²
B Parking canopy, double sided 2,340 m²
C
Shading canopy between existing and new building
476 m²
Road Marking
D 100mm wide white colour flat latex paint strips to

parking bays 2,580 m
Plant beds
E Planter areas including formation, topsoil and

planting as per specification 540 m²
Misc
F 1650mm x 150mm x 200mm precast concrete

wheel/car stopper 469 nr
To Collection BHD
2.1.80
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
COLLECTION
Page No. 2.1.1

Page No. 2.1.2
Page No. 2.1.3
Page No. 2.1.4
Page No. 2.1.5
Page No. 2.1.6
Page No. 2.1.7
Page No. 2.1.8
Page No. 2.1.9
Page No. 2.1.10
Page No. 2.1.11
Page No. 2.1.12
Page No. 2.1.13
Page No. 2.1.14
Page No. 2.1.15
Page No. 2.1.16
Page No. 2.1.17
Page No. 2.1.18
Page No. 2.1.19
Page No. 2.1.20
Page No. 2.1.21
Page No. 2.1.22
Page No. 2.1.23
Page No. 2.1.24
Page No. 2.1.25
Page No. 2.1.26
Page No. 2.1.27
Page No. 2.1.28
Page No. 2.1.29
Page No. 2.1.30
Page No. 2.1.31
Page No. 2.1.32
Page No. 2.1.33
Page No. 2.1.34
Page No. 2.1.35
Page No. 2.1.36
Page No. 2.1.37
Page No. 2.1.38
Page No. 2.1.39
Page No. 2.1.40
To Collection BHD
2.1.81
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
COLLECTION
Page No. 2.1.41

Page No. 2.1.42
Page No. 2.1.43
Page No. 2.1.44
Page No. 2.1.45
Page No. 2.1.46
Page No. 2.1.47
Page No. 2.1.48
Page No. 2.1.49
Page No. 2.1.50
Page No. 2.1.51
Page No. 2.1.52
Page No. 2.1.53
Page No. 2.1.54
Page No. 2.1.55
Page No. 2.1.56
Page No. 2.1.57
Page No. 2.1.58
Page No. 2.1.59
Page No. 2.1.60
Page No. 2.1.61
Page No. 2.1.62
Page No. 2.1.63
Page No. 2.1.64
Page No. 2.1.65
Page No. 2.1.66
Page No. 2.1.67
Page No. 2.1.68
Page No. 2.1.69
Page No. 2.1.70
Page No. 2.1.71
Page No. 2.1.72
Page No. 2.1.73
Page No. 2.1.74
Page No. 2.1.75
Page No. 2.1.76
Page No. 2.1.77
Page No. 2.1.78
Page No. 2.1.79
Page No. 2.1.80
To Collection BHD
2.1.82
1. Preliminaries Document
Amount
Item Description
BHD
PRELIMINARIES
GENERAL MATTERS
Definitions
The following terms shall mean:-
" UK" "United Kingdom of Great Britain and

Northern Ireland"
"ED" "Kingdom of Bahrain Electricity Directorate"
"RIBA" "Royal Institute of British Contractor Representatives"
"BS" "British Standard" current at the time of tendering
"BSCP" "British Standard Code of Practice Practice"

current at the time of tendering
"Approved" "Approved by the Contractor Representative in writing"
“Transport to Site" "Take delivery at docks, pay landing dues, import and customs
"BD", "BHD" "Bahrain Dinars"
To Collection BHD
1.1.1
Amount
Item Description
BHD
General Matters (Cont'd)
Making Good at Completion
A On completion of the Works, the Contractor shall make good all surfaces both
within and outside the curtilage of the site to the satisfaction of the Contractor
Representative.
Access to site
B The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against any damage caused to the
access roads and verges by reason of carrying out the works and shall make
good all such damage, to the approval of the Contractor Representative, at his
own expense damage, to the approval of the Contractor Representative, at his
own expense
C The Contractor shall notify and comply with all regulatory requirements with
regard to the use of public roads giving access to the site. The Contractor shall
pay (or indemnify the Employer for) any costs or claims arising out of the use of
public or private roads during the execution of this Contract.
Programme
D
If his tender is successful, the Contractor will be required to submit for approval a
fully detailed programme, in the form of a computerised gantt chart highlighting
the ‘critical path’ and incorporating nominated and domestic sub-contractors work
and work by Municipal and Statutory Undertakings, and this ‘Contract
Programme’, when approved, shall be strictly adhered to. The programme can be
in the form of Bar Chart, but shall show all activities in sequence including critical
dates.
Labour Records
E Provide each week for the Contractor Representative a daily record showing the
number and description of tradesmen and labourers employed on the Works,
including those employed by Sub-Contractors.
To Collection BHD
1.1.2
Amount
Item Description
BHD
Progress Reports
A The Contractor shall allow for submitting progress report showing

manpower/plant schedules, statement of works done during the month and
works proposed to be carried out for next month, explanation for delays if any
and other comments based on the progress relating to the Project Contract
programme. The Contractor may also be required to submit daily/fortnightly
reports as per Contractor Representatives instructions.
Plant Records
B
Before the commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall supply to the
Contractor Representative a list of the plant he proposes to use on the site,
together with capacities and sizes. Each week provide for the Contractor
Representative a daily record showing the number, type and capacity of all plant,
excluding hand tools, currently employed on the Works.
Inspection of site
C The Contractor shall inspect the drawings, visit the site and fully ascertain the
The Appendix in this document shall be signed to confirm that a detailed site
inspection has been made
Temporary Site Accommodation and Storage
D All temporary site accommodation and storage shall be located within the
curtilage of the site and in a position to be agreed with the Contractor
Representative.
Contract Drawings
E Contract Drawings, which accompany the Tender Document, are listed in the
Schedule of Drawings.
F A set of Contract Drawings and document shall be available at the site for
convenience.
To Collection BHD
1.1.3
Amount
Item Description
BHD
Dimensions
A Figured dimensions on the drawings shall be followed; no dimensions shall be

scaled; where dimensions are omitted or in doubt the Contractor shall seek the
advice of the Contractor Representative.
B The Contractor shall take dimensions from the site and works before work is
ordered or put in hand.
C It is essential that Sub-Contractors and Suppliers are likewise acquainted with

this requirement as failure to detect any discrepancy where such would have
been found by physical checking will invalidate any claim for additional payment
arising from dimensional discrepancies.
Initial Sub-Structure Requirements
D The Contractors attention is drawn to the necessity for informing in advance and
calling the Company Representative to the site to check and approve the
dimensions and layout of the building, before pouring the first substructure
concrete. The Contractor shall obtain the Company Representative's signature
after his site inspection. No concreting work shall commence on site unless the
above formality has been completed.
Working Hours
E The approval of the Contractor Representative must be obtained before work is

carried out beyond normal working hours, 6a.m. to 6p.m. Sat to Thur and on
Fridays, or on public holidays.
The Contractor shall comply with the Summer working hour limits set by the
Government.
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
1.1.4
Security Requirements
A The Contractor shall allow for completely enclosing the site area by employing
reliable watchman whose duty is to prevent unauthorized persons from entering
the site, guard against fire, damaging and theft of material.
Safety Requirements
B The Contractor shall keep upon the Works at all times a competent person who
shall be nominated as “Safety Officer” responsible for all aspects of the safety of
the work people engaged upon the Works and all other parties and property in
the vicinity of the Works. Safety helmets and shoes shall be provided for all
personnel.
C The Contractor shall obtain and hand over copies of the following Ministerial
Orders in Arabic from the Ministry of Labour and in English from Gulf Public
Relations (Bahrain) and shall comply with all the relevant requirements thereof:
Ministerial Order No. Subject
12/1977 Precautionary measures vital to the protection of

workers engaged in construction, Civil Contractor
Representativeing and Ship Building.
13/1977 Precautionary measures vital to the protecting the

workers from the hazards of grinding wheel operations.
14/1977 Precautionary measures for protecting the workers

from the dangers of work on lifting equipment.
15/1977 Precautionary measures for protecting the workers

during work from dangerous machinery
21/1977 Precautions necessary for protecting workers while

on duty from the hazards of fire
25/1977 Precautionary measures vital to the protection of

workers in places of work.
26/1977 Precautionary measures vital to protecting eyes of

workers during work from the hazards of work and
machines
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
1.1.5
Ministerial Order No. Subject
27/1977 Precautionary measures vital to the protection of workers

from the hazards of the machines used in woodworking.
31/1977 Precautions for the protection of workers during work from

hazards of highly flammable liquids and liquified
petroleum gases.
32/1977 Precautions for the protection of workers from the

hazards of steam boilers, steam containers and air receivers.
33/1977 Precautions for the protection of workers during work

from hazards of electricity.
34/1977 Precautions for the protection of workers from the

hazards of repairs and demolition of tanks, drums and
work in confined spaces.
Overtime Working
A The Contractor shall allow for working all overtime that he considers necessary to
maintain progress in accordance with his programme as no claim for additional
payments in this respect will be allowed.
B Any extension of working beyond the hours of daylight may only take place
following notification from the Contractor Representative that it is accepted by the
C Additional overtime might be requested on special occasions. They will be paid

for only if specifically ordered in writing by the Contractor Representative. Where
overtime is so ordered the net difference between normal time and overtime
rates, paid to the employee will be refunded to the Contractor. Such refund will
only be made in respect of working tradesmen and labourers and will not be
allowed for in respect of foreman and other non-manual workers. The Contractor
should provide all necessary documentation to allow such refund.
Noise Restrictions
D Noise caused by operations on site must be kept to a minimum and the

Contractor shall allow for all costs incurred in so doing.
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
Working Area
1.1.6
A
The Contractor must at all times confine his activities and those of his
workpeople to within the area of the site. The Contractor must liaise with Public
Security and Traffic Police at all times, and must adhere to all of their
requirements and instructions.
B The Contractor will be held entirely responsible for ensuring that these
requirements are complied with.
Site Levels
C The Contractor shall allow for preparing and submitting a grid of existing levels of
the site, as required by the Contractor Representative for approval prior to
commencement of construction.
Samples and Sample Panels
D The Contractor shall allow for submitting all samples of materials and
workmanship to the Contractor Representative and obtaining his approval. This
shall include preparing mock-ups / samples of workmanship for items like block
work, brick work, carpentry and joinery items, false ceiling, painting and all other
finishing items. The mockups / samples shall be at least 2m2 and shall be
prepared and Contractor Representative’s approval obtained before commencing
the actual work.
E Materials and goods delivered and workmanship executed which do not conform
to the approved mockups / samples will be rejected.
Quality of Work
F The Work should be executed in high guality finishes associated to building of

this nature, with the best workmanship, materials and goods.
Testing Materials
G The Contractor shall allow for providing all apparatus for tests to be carried out
by the Contractor or Contractor Representative, for performing all tests to be
executed by the Contractor and for transport and delivery of samples to
independent testing bodies as specified.
H The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Contractor Representative to any
independent testing body he may intend to employ.
To Collection BHD
1.1.7
Amount
Item Description
BHD
Testing Materials cont'd
A The Contractor shall allow for all fees and any other cost incurred in the testing of
materials.
B The Contractor shall arrange for the Contractor Representative to attend all tests
of materials and plant, and all offsite work executed at the premises of Sub-
Contractors or Supplier as reasonably required by the Contractor Representative
Alternative Materials
C The Contractor shall obtain the Architects written approval of alternative

materials to those specified for use in the Works. No claim shall be entertained if
approval is not given.
D
No increases to the Contract Sum will be allowed if approved alternatives are
used unless the Contractor Representative otherwise confirms in writing. Any
financial savings resulting from an approval given to use an alternative material
shall be passed to the Employer.
E All materials, which are submitted to the Contractor Representative for approval
as alternative to those specified, must have a bona fide local agent, and
evidence of this shall be produced at the time of submission.
Inspection of Work to be covered up
F The Contractor shall notify the Contractor Representative when work to be

covered up is ready for inspection.
Water for the Works
G The Contractor shall allow for ascertaining the source of supply and for providing
clean, potable water for the Works and for paying all fees and charges in
connection therewith.
H The Contractor shall allow for providing temporary storage and distribution of
water for the Works including altering and adapting as necessary and clearing
away and making good on completion.
To Collection BHD
1.1.8
Amount
Item Description
BHD
Lighting and Power for the Works
A The Contractor shall allow for ascertaining the source of supply and for providing
lighting and power for the Works and for paying all fees and charges in
connection therewith.
B The Contractor shall allow for providing construction wiring, outlets and
appliances for the distribution of power and lighting as necessary and clearing
away and making good at completion.
Keep Excavations Free from Water
C The Contractor shall keep the whole of the site and excavations free from water
from whatever source, at all times during the progress of the Works.
Locating and Maintaining Existing Services
D The Contractor shall allow for taking all necessary measures to ascertain the
location of all existing services within the boundaries of the site or in the vicinity
of the site and access thereto including liaising with local authorities, public
undertakings, the Employers representative and any other persons having
knowledge of the site to avoid damage to any existing services.
E The Contractor shall allow for protecting, upholding and maintaining all existing
services during progress of the Works and for giving all necessary notices to the
statutory authorities.
F
The Contractor shall make good any damage to existing services due to any
cause within his control at his own expense and shall pay any costs and charges
in connection therewith, and shall indemnify the Employer against the results of
any damage so caused.
Description of the Works
G The work comprises the construction of a commercial development with

approximately 1900m² gross floor area to be fitted with 2 restaurants, Vinoteca
and Café Amsterdam. Each of the restaurants will consist of 2 floors open to
public and a third floor of offices and staff area.
H The work includes the construction of the boundary wall and some external
works/landscaping.
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
1.1.9
TEMPORARY WORKS
Generally
A The siting of temporary roads, temporary buildings, and temporary hoarding and
gantries shall be agreed with the Contractor Representative before work
commences and the Contractor shall allow for any intermediate removing of
same to other agreed positions to ensure the proper progress of the Works.
Use of Adjoining Land
B If the Contractor wishes to use areas of land adjoining the site, he shall obtain
permission from adjoining owners, or Local Authorities, and shall allow for paying
all fees and charges in connection therewith.
Temporary Buildings
C Allow for providing temporary sheds, Offices, workrooms, workshops, sanitary

accommodation, and other temporary buildings for the use of the Contractor and
his Sub-Contractors.
D Allow for paying all charges on temporary buildings including those erected for or
by Sub-Contractors.
E Allow for clearing away all temporary buildings at completion and making good all
work disturbed to the entire satisfaction of the Contractor Representative.
F Allow for cleaning and disinfecting the site of all sanitary accommodation
subsequent to clearing away.
Temporary Telephone
G Allow for providing separate Contractor’s and Consultant’s temporary telephone

on site and paying for installation and all fees and charges in connection
therewith.
Temporary Fencing, Hoarding etc.

H The Contractor shall build, adapt, maintain and subsequently remove such
fencing, hoarding deemed necessary by the Contractor Representative to
enclose the site and for adequate safety of the Works and materials on site and
make good all work disturbed.
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
Temporary Works (cont'd)
1.1.10
Temporary Fencing, Hoarding etc. (cont'd)
A The Client shall have the exclusive use of advertising at the Temporary
Hoardings.
Thermometers
B The Contractor shall provide two maximum and minimum thermometers where
directed for use during the contract period and keep records as directed by the
Contractor Representative.
General Scaffolding
C The Contractor shall allow for providing general scaffolding for the proper
execution and completion of the Works, including altering, shifting and adapting
from time to time as necessary and clearing away and making good at
completion.
D The Contractor shall provide special scaffolding for Sub-Contractors where

required.
E No placards or advertisements shall be affixed to any temporary fencing,

hoarding, scaffolding, building or structure without the Contractor
Representative’s specific written approval to their design and placing.
Temporary Signboard
F The Contractor shall allow for providing, erecting and maintaining 2 no. project
signboard stating the nature of the works, details of the Employer, the
Professional Consultants, and, the Main Contractor. The design and size of the
signboard shall be as the requirements of the Contractor Representative. The
location of the signboard shall be approved by the Company Representative.
Temporary Roads
G Allow for providing and subsequently removing and making good temporary
roads, ramps, hardstandings and crossings all to the satisfaction of the
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
PROTECTING, DRYING AND CLEANING WORKS
1.1.11
Protection from Damage
A The Contractor shall protect the Works from damage and allow for making good
any damage or loss arising from insufficient protection or from carelessness of
the Contractors workmen or those workmen of his Sub-Contractors.
The term “protection” shall include the casing up and protection work, including
that of Sub-Contractors, after the work or sections of the Work has been
completed, the maintenance of the casing up and its subsequent removal on
completion.
Protecting from the Weather
B The Contractor shall protect the Works from inclement weather and allow for
making good any damage or loss arising from insufficient protection.
C Drying the Works
The Contractor shall allow for the correct and adequate drying of the Works and
D The Contractor shall protect the Works from inclement weather and allow for
making good any damage or loss arising from insufficient protection.
Drying the Works
E The Contractor shall allow for the correct and adequate drying of the Works and
control of the humidity and he shall provide all necessary labour, fuel and
appliances to comply with this requirement and to facilitate trade following upon
trade.
F The availability, insurance and maintenance of the permanent air-conditioning

plant, if used for drying or controlling the humidity of the Works, shall be at the
sole risk of the Contractor and the plant shall at all times be operated in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the instructions of the
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
Protecting, Drying and Cleaning the Works (cont'd)
Removing Rubbish and Cleaning
1.1.12
A Allow for removing rubbish and debris from time to time as it accumulates or as
may be directed including that caused by Sub-contractors or other specialists.
B Allow for thoroughly cleaning all floors, glass and sanitary fittings, eradicating
stains and splashes, removing protective coverings, and leaving the premises
clean and fit for immediate occupation prior to handing over any portion of the
Works and for leaving the site clean and tidy.
SUNDRY ITEMS
Provisional Sums
C Unless stated to the contrary, where Provisional Sums are included in this
Invoices, Receipt and Vouchers
D The Contractor shall produce for inspection when required all invoices, receipts
‘As Built’ Drawings, Shop Drawings etc.
E Allow for preparing two sets of shop drawings including all services, and
civil/structural installations with bar bending schedules all in AutoCAD 2007
format for submission to the Contractor Representative and revising the same as
required by the Contractor Representative.
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
Sundry Items (cont'd)
‘As Built’ Drawings, Shop Drawings etc. (con'td)
A Allow for preparing ‘As Built’ drawings as the work proceeds in AutoCAD 2007
format.
1.1.13
B Allow for depositing with the Contractor Representative within two weeks of
substantial completion of the Works, one set of negatives, one CD ROM
AutoCAD 2007 drawings and three sets of prints of ‘As Built’ drawings.
C Allow for depositing with the Contractor Representative at least four weeks prior
to substantial completion of the Works, a draft set of operating & maintenance
manuals for approval. Within 2 weeks of approval provide three sets of the
manuals together with test certificates, statutory authority approvals and the like.
D The Contractor will be responsible for obtaining from his Sub-contractors all
relevant drawings and certificates and for obtaining any requisite additional
supporting certificates of statutory authorities.
E The Contractor should specifically note that the Works will not be accepted as
substantially complete without the above requirements being complied with in full.
Customs Duties etc.
F The Tender Sum shall include for the incidence of Custom’s Charges, Import
Duties and associated and similar charges payable, in respect of materials, plant,
etc. imported for the Works.
Progress Photographs
G The Contractor shall allow for taking coloured progress photographs at monthly
intervals starting from commencement of the Works, which shall be handed to
the Contractor Representative not later than two weeks after exposure. They
shall consist of three prints, minimum size 150 x 100 mm, of twelve views from
positions to be indicated by the Contractor Representative, suitably mounted on
A-4 size sheets and clearly titled and dated.
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
Contractor Designed Drawings
A The Contract Drawings as listed in the ‘List of Contract Drawings’ are the
drawings from which the Tender Document was prepared and shall constitute the
Contract Drawings. Further drawings may be developed and issued as necessary
during the progress of the Works.
1.1.14
B The Contractor will be responsible for the preparation of any other drawings,
schedules and calculations required for design development of the Contract and
for construction, including shop drawings and submitting them in accordance with
the Contract programme.
C The Contractor will be responsible for the preparation of all reinforcement

bending schedules and for submitting them to the Contractor Representative for
approval.
D Any drawings, calculations etc shall be submitted for approval at least 3 weeks
prior to proceeding with the work, or manufacturing.
E The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all drawings (and other
submittals) prepared by any of his sub-contractors, suppliers, etc, and shall, prior
to submitting them to the Contractor Representative, confirm in writing that he
has checked them thoroughly and co-ordinated the same with other trades and is
fully satisfied that the drawing/submittals meets all the requirements of the
contract fully.
Working Drawings
F The Contractor will be provided with two sets of all Contract Drawings and any
further sets, if required, will be at the Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall
allow for this while pricing the document.
Co-ordination of Services
G The Contractor shall allow for co-ordination of all services within the structure
and shall co-ordinate each service with the others. Within 4 weeks of
commencement, the Contractor shall check the above, and request clarification
from the Contractor Representative where services clash, where services are to
penetrate the structure, or, where headroom may prove insufficient.
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
Measurement of Provisional Items and Variations
A The Contractor shall be responsible for the measurement and submission to the
Contractor Representative of all provisional sum items and of all variations.
Separate Contracts
1.1.15
B The Employer reserves the right to let other separate contracts in connection with
this work. The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity
for the introduction and storage of their work and shall properly connect and
coordinate his work with theirs.
C If any part of the Contractor’s work depends on, proper execution of, or results
from, work of any other Contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly
report to the Contractor Representative any defects in such work that render it
unsuitable for such proper execution and results. His failure to inspect and report
shall constitute an acceptance of the other Contractor’s work after its execution.
D To ensure the proper execution of his subsequent work the Contractor shall
measure work already in place and shall at once report to the Contractor
Representative any discrepancy between executed work and the drawings.
Material Approval
E Allow for preparing a Schedule of all materials which require approval, showing
proposed dates when submission of samples will be made.
F All proposed dates shall allow reasonable time, to be agreed by the Contractor
Representative, for acceptance/rejection/re-submission.
G The Schedule shall be prepared within 30 days of the Contract commencement.
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
SUPERVISION OF THE WORKS
A General Supervision
The Contractor shall provide adequate supervisory staff on the site constantly to
supervise and direct the work and to ensure the good progress of the various
trades and sub-contractors and in their proper sequence for the completion of the
Contract by the due date. The type and qualifications of this supervisory staff
shall be approved by the Company Representative before commencement of the
work
1.1.16
Within seven (7) days after the signing of the Contract, the Contractor must
submit an organisation chart together with qualifications and experience of his
staff for approval by the Company Representative. The Company
Representative shall have the right to interview any of the candidates before final
approval is given.
Despite such approval, the Company Representative has the right to ask the
Contractor to replace any of his staff who he thinks is not performing his duties
satisfactorily.
The Contractor will provide suitably qualified site based staff and present their
CV’s for approval by the Company Representative.
In addition, to the constant management and supervision of the Works provided

by the Contractor’s person in charge, all significant types of works must be under
the close control of competent trade supervisors to ensure maintenance of
satisfactory quality and progress.
B Contractor's Organisation
Where the Contractor sub-contracts any major part of the Works then the
Contractor shall add the sub-contractors management and supervisory staff to
the organisation chart, highlighting the sub-contractor and package of works
being managed and supervised.
Where any consultant engaged by the Contractor has or may have any
professional, legal or commercial association with any party which may give rise
conflict of interest, that consultant shall declare such interest and resign from the
Works if required by the Company.
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
Contractor's Organisation Cont…
The Contractor shall submit copies of policy certificates as evidence of

professional indemnity insurance with an endorsement letter provided by the
insurance company confirming compliance with the Contract, before
commencing design of performance-based work.
The value of the cover shall be as defined by the Contract for each and any claim
related to Contractor designed works.
C Access for Inspection
1.1.17
The Contractor shall provide not less than one Working Day’s notice to the
Company Representative before removing scaffolding and other facilities that
allow access to the Works.
PRELIMINARY ITEMS DETAILED IN ANNEX A SCOPE OF WORK TO

CONTRACT
A Correspondences
B Request for Information
C Transmittal / Submissions
D Programme
E Commissioning Programme
F Progress Management
G Cost Management
H Plant
I Quality Control & Method Statements
To Collection BHD
Amount
Item Description
BHD
COLLECTION
Page No. 1.1.1
Page No. 1.1.2
Page No. 1.1.3
Page No. 1.1.4
Page No. 1.1.5
Page No. 1.1.6
1.1.18
Page No. 1.1.7
Page No. 1.1.8
Page No. 1.1.9
Page No. 1.1.10
Page No. 1.1.11
Page No. 1.1.12
Page No. 1.1.13
Page No. 1.1.14
Page No. 1.1.15
Page No. 1.1.16
Page No. 1.1.17
Page No. 1.1.18
To Collection BHD
1.1.19
3. Dayworks
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
GENERAL
A The Contractor is required to quote against the

following quantities of labour and materials and
plant to be executed as Dayworks for the purpose
of ascertaining the cost of works where work
cannot otherwise be properly measured and
valued.
B The total value of this section as priced by the

Contractor will be deemed Provisional under the
terms of this Contract, and shall be omitted in full in
the Final Account. The value of work actually
carried out on a Daywork basis will be calculated at
the rates herein inserted by the Contractor
C The Daywork sheets shall be numbered and shall

fully described the instructions to which they refer
and shall be summarized and submitted daily to the
Company Representative for verification.
D The Contractor shall arrange for signed copies of

the daywork sheets to be returned to him by the
Company Representative. A signed copy of the
daywork sheets should then be fully priced out and
sent to the Company Representative within one
month of the work being executed.
E Except in cases of prior agreement any decision

with regard to payment on a Daywork basis for any
variation will be made by the Company
Representative.
To Collection BHD
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
3.1
3. Dayworks
OVERHEADS
A The term overheads applicable to labour, shall be
deemed to include the relevant items for head office
charges
B Site Supervision and site staff including foreman's

time and extra charges made to leading or foreman
craftsmen and gangers. Foreman and leading
hands are chargeable only when working as
tradesmen and will be brought to account at the
rate of the respective tradesmen required for the
work
C Overtime and extra payments for night or weekend

working where not specifically ordered or
subsequently sanctioned in writing by the Architect
to be worked or Daywork
D Time lost due to inclement weather
E Bonuses and all other incentive payments
F Apprentices study time
G Employer's contribution to National Insurances

including any staff pension funds
H Contributions for annual and public holidays
J Fares and time allowances for travelling
K Subsistence and periodic leave allowance
L Safety and welfare facilities
M Third party and Employer's Liability Insurance
N Sick pay or insurances in respect thereof
P Tool and other similar allowances
Q Use, repair and sharpening of small tools
R All non-mechanically operated plant, specially

erected scaffolding staging and trestles, protective
clothing, artificial lighting, storage facilities and the
like that may be in general use on the site
S All other liabilities and obligations whatsoever

To Collection BHD
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
3.2
3. Dayworks
LABOUR
A The Contractor shall quote the rate he requires for

his labourers and craftsmen in the following
schedule and shall extend the rate by the hours
stated.
B The rate quoted is to be an inclusive rate covering
all charges including:-
(a) Wages
(b) Overheads, as previously defined
(c) Profit
TRADE
C Labourer 200 hrs
D Bar Bender 50 hrs
E Mason 50 hrs
F Carpenter/Joiner 50 hrs
G Steel Fixer 50 hrs
H Plumber 50 hrs
J Plasterer/Tile Fixer 50 hrs
K Painter 50 hrs
L Transport Driver 50 hrs
M Plant Operator 50 hrs
N Electrician - Class A 50 hrs
P Electrician 50 hrs
To Collection BHD
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
MATERIALS
3.3
3. Dayworks
A
The cost of materials used in Dayworks shall be
charged at invoice cost. All invoices are to be
made available to the Architect at the time the
relevant Daywork sheets are submitted to him. All
cash discount shall be allowed to the Employer.
B
Include the Provisional Sum for BD 5000.000 for
the cost of materials to be used in connection with
Daywork as directed item 5,000.000
C
The Contractor is to quote the percentage addition
to be made to the net invoice cost of materials to
cover his Head Office charges and profit.
ADD % of BD 5000.000 item
PLANT
D Attendant labour on mechanical plant and labour
erecting and dismantling other plant will be paid for
as "labour".
E Where plant is employed on Daywork the

Contractor shall be reimbursed for the use of
mechanically operated plant and transport for the
time engaged in Daywork at the rates contained in
the Plant Schedule. These rates include for
Contractor establishment charges, overheads and
profit. Mechanical plant not included in the
Schedule will be paid for at rate analogous to the
Schedule.
F Standing and breakdown time will be deemed to be

included in the rates.
G Note 1 :- Labour involved in servicing and

maintenance of plant shall be deemed to be
included in the rates for plant
H
Note 2 :- Plant that is working inefficiently due to
mechanical defect or deficiency shall be paid at
rates pro-rata to the rated capacity of the plant
To Collection BHD
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
MATERIALS (continued…)
3.4
3. Dayworks
A Air compressor (250 cubic feet) any type of drive,

including fuel, water all consumable stores, spares,
hoses and jack hammers 20 hrs
B Ditto (125 cubic feet) ditto 20 hrs
C Concrete mixer, closed drum with hopper any type

of drive, including fuel and all consumable stores
and spares, capacity (7/5) 20 hrs
D Motor lorry, including fuel, all consumables stores

and spares (capacity 3 tonne tipper) 20 hrs
E 1 Tonne pick up truck including fuel and

consumable stores 20 hrs
F 80 mm Bore single diaphragm power driven pump

any kind of drive including fuel, hoses and fittings
and all consumable stores and spares 20 hrs
G Welding machine including all consumable stores

and spares single operator 400 amps 20 hrs
H
Water tanker 3,000 U.S. gallons capacity including
fuel, all consumables stores and spares
20 hrs
J Vibrator with 50 mm needle 20 hrs
K Plate compactor 110 kg 20 hrs
L Roller 1 tonne 20 hrs
M Drill machine, up to 25 mm bits 20 hrs
N Angle grinder up to 200 mm diameter disc 20 hrs
P Electric/pneumatic hammer 75 kg 20 hrs
To Collection BHD
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
COLLECTION
3.5
3. Dayworks
Page No. 3.1
Page No. 3.2
Page No. 3.3
Page No. 3.4
Page No. 3.5
To Summary BHD
3.6
4. Schedule of Rates
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
GENERAL
A The following rates shall be used to assess the cost

of variations involving omissions or additions of
work under the Contract
B 'The rates quoted are to include for supply and

installation, including all materials, labour charges,
travelling, supervision, fares, insurance, testing,
commissioning, supports, accessories, brackets,
joints, fixings, etc, as applicable, and overheads
and profit.
C The rates stated hereafter are to be fixed rates i.e.

not subject to variation by reason of fluctuation in
the cost of labour and/or materials
D Quantities shall be measured in accordance the

'Principles of Measurement (International) for works
of Construction,' Published by the Royal Institution
of Chartered Surveyors
To Collection BHD
4.1
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
Note: The following rates are for use in valuing
Cables including laying & connecting
A 2 Core 2.5 mm2 PVC/SWA/PVC Cu cable m
B 2 Core 4 mm2 Ditto m
C 2 Core 6 mm2 Ditto m
D 2 Core 10 mm2 Ditto m
E 4 Core 2.5 mm2 Ditto m
F 4 Core 4 mm2 Ditto m
G 4 Core 6 mm2 XLPE/SWA/PVC Cu cable m
H 4 Core 10 mm2 Ditto m
J 4 Core 16 mm2 Ditto m
K 4 Core 16 mm2 Ditto m
L 4 Core 25 mm2 Ditto m
M 4 Core 35 mm2 Ditto m
N 4 Core 50 mm2 Ditto m
P 4 Core 70 mm2 Ditto m
Q 4 Core 120 mm2 Ditto m
R 1 Core 1.5 mm2 PVC Single Core m
S 2 H 1.5 MICC m
T 2 L 1.5 Ditto m
U 2 H 2.5 Ditto m
V 2 L 2.5 Ditto m
W 2 H 4 Ditto m
To Collection BHD
4.2
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
PVC Conduit (surface mounted)
A 20 mm Diameter m
B 25 mm Ditto m
C 32 mm Ditto m
D 50 mm Ditto m
E Galvanised steel conduit surface mounted m
F 20 mm Diameter m
G 25 mm Ditto m
H 32 mm Ditto m
-------------------------
J Extra for 'flush' conduit installation

Plumber m
Galvanised cable tray including fittings hanger

and supports
K 100 mm Wide m
L 150 mm Ditto m
M 300 mm Ditto m
PVC Trunking including fittings
N 50 x 50 mm m
P 50 x 75 mm m
Q 75 x 75 mm m
R 150 x 150 mm m
To Collection BHD
4.3
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
A Split unit 2.5 TR
B Ducted split unit 4.0 TR
C Wall mounted exhaust fan 100 cfm
D Ditto 150 cfm
E Ditto 200 cfm
F Ditto 400 cfm
G In-line ducted fan 100 cfm
H Ditto 150 cfm
J Ditto 500 cfm
To Collection BHD
4.4
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
COLLECTION
Page No. 4.1
Page No. 4.2
Page No. 4.3
Page No. 4.4
To Summary BHD
4.5
5. Any Other Items
Rate Amount
BHD BHD
ANY OTHER ITEMS
A
Any other items not specifically mentioned herein
but considered by the Contractor to have a
monetary value shall be listed and priced below
Note: The Contractor shall visit the site and shall

ascertain all the work required to be carried out in
order to complete the Contract
To Summary BHD
5.1
ATTACHMENT 3
TO
ANNEX B
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
COMPLETION LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
CAP
Completion Date as detailed in

the Project Schedule as per 0.03% 10%
Attachment 3 of Annex A – plus of Contract Price / Per Day of Contract Price
zero (0) days.
Attachment 3 to Annex B – Liquidated Damages A3/B-1 CO-227-2012

ATTACHMENT 4
TO
ANNEX B
BANK GUARANTEE AMOUNT
VALUE OF BANK GUARANTEE
15% of Contract Price BHD [ ]
Attachment 4 to Annex B – Amount of PBG A4/B-1 CO-227-2012

ATTACHMENT 5
TO
ANNEX B
PAYMENT CERTIFICATE COVER
[CONTRACTOR’S LETTERHEAD]
Re: • Contract dated • (the “Contract”) between Tatweer Petroleum WLL

(“Company”) and • (“Contractor”)
I, [INSERT NAME], [INSERT TITLE] of Contractor, hereby certify the

following pursuant to Annex B of the Contract that as of the date of this Certificate:
1. The Request for Payment to which this Certificate is attached (the “Request”)
represents the amount to which Contractor is entitled pursuant to the terms of the
Contract.
2. The Milestones described in the Request as being achieved have been achieved in
their entirety and are without defects.
3. The quality of all Work reflected in the Request is in accordance with the terms of
the Contract.
4. Title to the Material and Equipment (or portion thereof) to which the Request
relates will pass, or has passed already, to Company.
5. The Work, Material and Equipment (or portion thereof) to which the Request
relates and to which all previous Requests for Payment relate are, or will be, upon
the making of payment pursuant to the Request, free and clear of all Contractor
Liens, except for the following Contractor Liens which Contractor is reasonably
and in good faith contesting.
(a) [Insert description of any Contractor Liens being contested and

describe how such Contractor Liens arose and why such Contractor
Liens are being contested]
Attachment 5 to Annex B – Payment Cert Cover A5/B-1 CO-227-2012

6. Company has heretofore paid to Contractor the amounts identified as “paid” in the
Request and, if applicable, Contractor has been paid all amounts that Contractor is
entitled to be paid for completion of the Milestones described in the immediately
preceding Request for Payment.
7. All Subcontractors have been paid, or will be paid, all amounts to which they are
entitled for Work performed on or in connection with the Facilities from proceeds
of the payment made pursuant to the Request.
8. This Certificate is made for and on behalf of Contractor and is binding upon it,
provided however, that the deponent hereof is not and will not incur any personal
liability whatsoever with respect to it or the matters referred to herein.
9. This Certificate is made with full knowledge that Company is relying on the same
for payment of the amount contemplated in the Request.
Unless otherwise defined herein, all capitalized terms used in this Certificate are as
defined in the Contract.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the undersigned has executed this Certificate as

of [Insert Date].
Per:
[NAME]
[TITLE]
Attachment 5 to Annex B – Payment Cert Cover A5/B-2 CO-227-2012

ATTACHMENT 6
TO
ANNEX B
LIEN RELEASE
[CONTRACTOR’S LETTERHEAD]
[DATE]
Tatweer Petroleum Bahrain Field Development Company W.L.L

[Insert Address]
Attention: Mr. Lyle White – Corporate Project Manager
Dear Sir,
Upon payment of the amount due under the Request for Payment dated [Insert] to the
undersigned (“Contractor”), Contractor hereby releases any and all claims of Contractor
against Tatweer Petroleum Bahrain Field Development Company WLL (“Company”)
and all other parties of the Company Group arising under or in any way connected with
payments due and owing with respect to the Material and Equipment delivered or
installed, or the Work performed through to the Final Completion Date. Contractor
certifies that each Subcontractor has been paid in full or will be paid in full from the
aforementioned Request for Payment.
All capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meaning set forth in the
Construction Services Contract executed by and between Contractor and Company on
•[insert effective date] (the “Contract”).
[Insert name of Contractor]
By: ______________________________
Name: ______________________________
Title: ______________________________
Attachment 6 to Annex B – Lien Release A6/B-1 CO-227-2012

ATTACHMENT 7
TO
ANNEX B
VARIATION ORDERS
1.0 Variations in the work

When Company instructs Contractor by means of a Change Order to execute changes to the
Scope of Work the Company will specify which of the following methods of reimbursement will
be used;
2.0 Lump Sum
Company shall invite the Contractor to submit a lump sum price for the change to the Scope of
Work.
3.0 Schedule of Rates for Valuing of Variation Orders
3.1 Bill of Quantities (as per Attachment 2 to Annex B)
a) Rates from the BoQ shall be utilized wherever possible in the valuing of changes in
the work.
b) The BoQ rates shall be fully inclusive of all the costs direct and indirect to the
Contractor for either the provision of the personnel and / material or equipment
concerned or performance of the complete Works implied by the description in the
Schedule and to the Specification. No other costs will be allowed.
c) The BoQ rates may be used as the basis for agreeing Lump Sum changes (increases
and / or decreases) to the Lump Sum Contract Price.
d) Variations the Services shall be priced using only those items in listed in the BoQ.
e) The BoQ rates shall be inclusive of all computer and printing charges.
f) The BoQ rates are to be inclusive of any airfare, accommodation, and any
mobilisation and demobilisation charges for Contractor personnel.
g) The BoQ rates shall be inclusive of all office costs and support.
h) Any Items that are un-priced or not listed shall be deemed to be included in the
specified BoQ rates.
Attachment 7 to Annex B – Variation Orders A7/B-1 CO-227-2012

3.2 Pricing Items not in the Bill of Quantities
In the event that Company shall, by means of a change order, instruct Contractor to purchase
items, or provide services, upon behalf of Company, not provided for elsewhere in the Contract,
the Contractor shall be compensated on the basis of the approved net amount of the respective
purchase order or invoice, plus an all-inclusive overhead and profit fee of [% to be inserted]
For all such purchases, the Contractor shall follow a competitive bid procedure, with a minimum
of three (3) bidders. The Company reserves the right at all times to see evidence of the bid
procedure and all associated results. It is responsibility of the Contractor to ensure the
competitive bid procedure is followed correctly so not to cause any delay.
All claims for additional works shall be supported by official invoices from Contractors suppliers.

4.0 Variation Order Templates
4.1 Instruction to Contractor
Tatweer Petroleum - Bahrain Field Development Company W.L.L
INSTRUCTION TO CONTRACTOR
Company: Tatweer Petroleum Contractor:
Contract Title: Contract No.
ITC No: XXXX Date: XXXXX
ITC Title: XXXX ITC requested XXXXX

completion Date:
Description of Instruction (expand this section as necessary)
COMPANY SUBMISSION CONTRACTOR RECEIPT

Signature : Signature :
Name : Name :
Date : Date :
This Instruction to Contractor is issued pursuant to the above referenced contract, and the terms and conditions shall apply to all services
performed under this Instruction.

4.1 Company Variation Order
Tatweer Petroleum - Bahrain Field Development Company W.L.L
COMPANY
VARIATION ORDER
COMPANY: Tatweer Petroleum CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT TITLE: COR / ITC N° : XXXXXX
CONTRACT N° : VARIATION ORDER N° : XXXXX
Title of the Change: XXXXXX
Description: xxxxxxx
Impact upon Schedule:

None
Cost Code:
Impact upon Contract Price UNIT BHD $USD

- -
- -
- -
- -
Total Variation Order Value
- -
The Documents Listed Hereunder shall be read and construed as being part of this Change Order:
CONTRACTOR COMPANY
Signature Signature
Print Name Print Name

Date Date:
In accordance w ith Agreement clause xxxx this Variation Order takes into account the full and final effects of the
subject Variation upon any and all aspects of the Agreement. Contractor hereby agrees to make no further claim
for any other consequences of Variation Orders w hether directly or indirectly resulting therefrom at the time of
Variation Orders or thereafter.

4.2 Contractor Initiated Variation Order Request
CONTRACTOR VARIATION
ORDER REQUEST
COMPANY: Tatweer Petroleum CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT TITLE: ITC N° : XXXXXX
CONTRACT N° : VARIATION ORDER REQUEST N° : XXXXX
Title of the Variation Order Request: XXXXXX
Description: xxxxxxx
Impact upon Schedule:

None
Cost Code:
Impact upon Contract Price UNIT BHD $USD

- -
- -
- -
Total Variation Order Request
-
The Documents Listed Hereunder shall be read and construed as being part of this Variation Order Request:
CONTRACTOR SUBMISSION COMPANY RECEIPT

Signature Signature
Print Name Print Name

Date Date:

ANNEX C
GENERAL INFORMATION
1. ADDRESSES OF THE PARTIES
1.1 Company
Tatweer Petroleum
Name:
Bahrain Field Development Company W.L.L
Royal University of Women Campus
Block 366
Muaskar Highway
Riffa,
Address: Safrya 942
Gate 1,
PO Box 25888,
Awali,
Kingdom of Bahrain
Telephone: + 973 -1714 8000
Facsimile: + 973 -1714 8010
1.2 Contractor
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Facsimile:
2. CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATIVE
Name:
Designation:
Telephone:
Mobile:
Facsimile:
E-mail:
Annex C – General Information C-1 CO-227-2012

3. COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
Name: Mr. Lyle White

Designation: Corporate Project Manager
Telephone: +973-1714-8555
Mobile: +973-3888-0512
Facsimile: +973-1714-8010
E-mail: lyle_white@tatweerpetroleum.com
4. WRITTEN COMMUNICATIONS TO BE COPIED TO
Name: Mr. Simon Burt

Designation: Lead-SCM Operations
Telephone: +973-1714-8155
Mobile: +973-3999-5289
Facsimile: +973-1714-8010
E-mail: simon_burt@tatweerpetroleum.com
5. REQUIRED NOTICE TO COMPLETE MOBILIZATION AFTER

CONTRACT EXECUTION
One (1) week for Contractor items and for Contractor personnel. If not mobilized within one
(1) week failure to mobilize damages maybe levied at the Contractor solely at the Company’
discretion of 0.01% of the Contract Value as detailed in Annex B, per day (or part thereof)
until such time as the Contractor is mobilized.
Mobilization is deemed to mean that the Contractor can physically commence with the Works
to the satisfaction of the Contract Representative and the Company HSE representative.
6. MOBILIZATION POINT
Site Location as detailed in Attachment 4 to Annex A.
7. DEMOBILIZATION POINT
Site Location as detailed in Attachment 4 to Annex A.
8. CONTRACTOR SUPPLY BASE
A area of land is allocated to the Contractor for his own site facilities within the boundary
shown in Attachment 4 to Annex A.
9. TERM
Effective Date As Detailed in the Preamble to the Contract

Term As Detailed in Attachment 3 to Annex A
Annex C – General Information C-2 CO-227-2012

ANNEX D
INSURANCE
In accordance with and subject to Article 39, Contractor shall obtain and maintain throughout the
term hereof, at a minimum the following insurance coverage with at least the minimum limits set
forth in this Annex D:
1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY/EXCESS LIABILITY INSURANCE

Commercial General Liability/Excess Liability insurance, including Contractor’s
contractual liability and Contractor’s protective liability insuring the indemnity
agreements set forth in the Contract, with limits not less than $10,000,000 per
occurrence, combined single limit, applicable to bodily injury, sickness or death and for
loss of or damage to property of third parties.
2. WORKER’S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

Contractor shall carry and maintain Employer’s Liability insurance, including coverage
for occupational disease, and Workers’ Compensation insurance, or similar statutory
social insurance, as required by Applicable Laws at the locations where the Work will be
performed covering all of Contractor’s employees engaged in performing the Work.
3. COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE.

Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance covering owned, non-owned and hired
vehicles with a limit of not less than $1,000,000 per accident, combined single limit
applicable to bodily injury, sickness or death and loss of or damage to property of third
parties.
4. ALL RISK INSURANCE

All Risk Physical Damage Insurance, including transit coverage, of Contractor Items and
any goods, consumables, supplies, materials, equipment and property of Company or
Company Group wherein Contractor has liability for the risk of loss, in an amount equal
to the full replacement value.
5. INSURANCE REQUIRED BY LAW

Any insurance required by Applicable Laws, including the law of the Kingdom of
Bahrain and the country of origin of Contractor.
Annex D – Insurances D-1 CO-227-2012

Document No: HSE-017
Issue: Rev 4a Dec 12
CONTRACTOR HSE Change Owner: Head Ind. S&H
PROGRAM Approved by: HSE Manager
Page No: 1 of 17
Annex E
MINIMUM HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDELINES
Without limiting or enlarging the generality and application of any Articles/Sections of the
Contract/Agreement, the Contractor shall abide by, and cause the Contractor’s personnel to abide by, the
Minimum Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) Guidelines set forth in this Exhibit/Annex. Notwithstanding
the foregoing, Company and Contractor hereby agree that nothing in this Exhibit/Annex will be deemed to
modify the provisions of the Contract/Agreement regarding assumption of liability and indemnity. The
Guidelines are subject to change by the Company in its sole discretion and as notified by the Company to the
Contractor from time to time. Capitalized terms used herein without definition shall have the meanings
assigned to them in the Contract/Agreement.
1. Health, Safety and Environmental Commitment. The Contractor shall demonstrate a strong commitment
to HSE matters and must have established HSE related policies and procedures. Copies of such policies
and procedures shall be submitted upon request for review and reference by the Company as requested.
This Exhibit/Annex contains a summary of the Company’s HSE policy, procedures and guidelines, which
shall be minimum standards applicable to the Contractor personnel during the performance of
Services/Work under this Contract/Agreement. The Contractor shall also be held responsible for
complying with its own policies and procedures related to HSE matters. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all aspects of the Contractor’s and the Contractor personnel’s HSE performance and
ensuring that the Contractor has a supervisory person at the Work Site at all times who is competent and
has the authority to properly implement the Contractor’s HSE policies and procedures. The Contractor
shall take into account and shall comply with all Applicable Law, orders, regulations and permits that are
or become effective during the life of the Contract/Agreement.
2. Definitions.
2.1. Competent Person – A person who by possession of a recognized degree or certified of

professional standing, or who by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully
demonstrated the ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject in matter and
Services/Work.
2.2. Human Factors – Human factors are generally classified in two categories; engineering and
ergonomic; e.g. positioning of controls, tools, job requirements, cramped spaces and obstructions.
2.3. H2S – Hydrogen Sulfide is known to be in some wellbores.
2.4. MSDS – A material safety data sheet is a form containing data regarding the properties of a
particular substance. An important component of product stewardship and workplace safety, it is
intended to provide workers and emergency personnel with procedures for handling or working
with that substance in a safe manner, and includes information such as physical data (melting point,
boiling point and flash point), toxicity, health effects, first aid, reactivity, storage, disposal,
protective equipment, and spill handling procedures.
2.5. Near Miss – An unplanned event that did result in injury, illness or property damage but had the
potential to do so.
2.6. PPE – Personal Protective Equipment refers to protective clothing, helmets, goggles, or other gear
designed to protect the wearer's body or clothing from injury by electrical hazards, heat, chemicals,
and infection, for job-related occupational safety and health purposes.
Annex E – Minimum HES Guidelines E-1 CO-227-2012

Page No: 2 of 17
2.7. SPCC – Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasures as defined in Spill Prevention and
Countermeasures Procedure HSE-043 (available on request).
2.8. SPOC – Single Point of Contact.
2.9. Work Site – Site in the Bahrain Field where Services/Work are being performed on behalf of the
Company.
3. Designated HSE SPOC. Contractor shall designate, in writing to the Company, a HSE SPOC.
3.1. The HSE SPOC is to ensure that the Contractor’s and Company’s specified HSE policies and
programs are implemented, by the Contractor’s personnel, on all respective Work Sites.
Furthermore, the Contractor’s HSE SPOC shall ensure that the Contractor’s personnel attend
regularly scheduled safety meetings to discuss current HSE issues and concerns.
3.2. The Contractor’s HSE SPOC will make scheduled HSE inspections, process employees HSE issues
and follow up on the correction of HSE action items. The Contractor’s HSE SPOC will ensure all
HSE inspections, HSE problems and corrective actions shall be documented and made available to
the Company’s HSE SPOC (specifically named) upon request.
4. Safety Representation. The Contractor shall ensure that for its personnel working under any
contract/agreement with the Company there are appointed HSE advisors to provide the level of cover
outlined below. These HSE advisors shall each be a Competent Person and shall be subject to the prior
approval of the Company, as requested.
4.1. 0 - 50 workers: one full time HSE advisor.
4.2. 51 -100 workers: two full time HSE advisors.
4.3. Thereafter, one additional HSE advisor per 100 workers (i.e. for 100-200 workers, Contractor will
provide three full time HSE advisors).
4.4. In addition, for greater than 150 workers, one safety supervisor/manager (who shall be a Competent
Person) shall be provided and dedicated specifically to the Contractor’s activities related to the
Contract/Agreement.
4.5. A “Contractor Safety Representative” shall be a key staff member approved by the Company’s
HSE SPOC. The Contractor Safety Representative shall be authorized by the Contractor to stop the
Services/Work if adverse safety and health conditions exist.
5. Near Miss and Incident Reporting and Investigation. The following shall govern Contractor incident
reporting and investigation roles and procedures:
5.1. The Near Miss reporting programme is an essential continual improvement activity and is devised
to capture trends and minimize incidents through communication of corrective actions. Near
Misses will be reported, trended, corrective actions identified and this information shall be
submitted to the Company’s HSE SPOC.
5.2. Contractor shall be required to immediately verbally notify the Company’s Work Site
manager/supervisor (or designated Company Representative) and/or the Company’s HSE SPOC of
all incidents involving injury or illness to the Contractor’s personnel, damage to Company or
Contractor equipment as a result of Contractor activities at the Work Site and any spill/release of
produced fluids, chemicals or gas. The notification shall be made by calling the Company’s
Emergency Control Room on 1775-8333.

Page No: 3 of 17
5.3. Contractor shall submit an initial preliminary written incident report within 24 hours with known
facts to the Company’s Site manager/ supervisor (or the designated Company Representative) and
the Company’s HSE SPOC.
5.4. Contractor shall promptly investigate all incidents (injury/illness, equipment/property damage,
environmental spills/releases and near misses).
5.5. Contractor shall provide written interim incident investigation reports for all incidents within seven
calendar days.
5.6. Interim reports shall be updated every seven calendar days until the final report is issued (including
recommendations and action plans identified during investigations) to the Company.
5.7. Contractor shall provide a written final root cause incident investigation reports for Significant and
Important Incidents in accordance with Sections 7.1 and 7.2 of the Incident Investigation and
Reporting Procedure HSE-012 within 30 calendar days.
5.8. Contractor shall afford for, as designated by the Company, Company personnel’s participation in
any Contractor investigation of Significant and Important Incidents (as defined in Section 3 of the
Incident Investigation and Reporting Procedure HSE-012).
5.9. Contractor shall allow personnel designated by the Company to photograph all Work Site audits
and incidents for the purpose of correction, training, investigation and root cause analysis.
5.10. Contractor shall provide the Company Representative and Company’s HSE SPOC with copies of
all incident reports that result in formal notification to any Governmental Entity.
5.11. Contractor shall promptly notify the Company of any inspections or investigations of, or penalties
assessed on, the Contractor or the Contractor’s personnel relating to or in connection with this
Contract/Agreement by any Governmental Entity.
5.12. The minimum contents of an Incident Investigation Report shall include:
5.12.1. Work Site (facility name and address).
5.12.2. Specific part of the facility and/or equipment (name plate data).
5.12.3. A time-log of the incident chronology from pre-incident status through end of incident
(e.g. computer equipment event recorder printouts and strip charts).
5.12.4. Injury details (treatment facility, name, age, years of service, time in current position,
body part injured, medical treatment received or recommended, shift time).
5.12.5. Incident Classification.
5.12.6. Impact of the incident on life, the community, the environment or the Company assets.
5.12.7. Activity involving regulatory agencies, legal action, citation or proposed fines.
5.12.8. Analysis of the design, maintenance and operation of the systems that were in place to
prevent such incidents.
5.12.9. Analysis of protective equipment performance (e.g. emergency shutdown systems, fire
alarms, sprinklers, water supplies, process controls, instruments and containment
systems); any impairment of protective equipment; and measures taken to restore
protection.

Page No: 4 of 17
5.12.10. Analysis of administrative and human factors (e.g. were there written procedures, were
the procedures followed, were procedures adequate).
5.12.11. Analysis of emergency response (e.g. civil defense, fire brigade, public fire department,
spill plan, public notification and reporting to authorities).
5.12.12. Root cause(s) of the incident.
5.12.13. Immediate actions taken to prevent reoccurrence.
5.12.14. Recommendations and corrective action plans with responsible party and
completion/target date.
5.12.15. Date(s) that corrective action follow-up reports will be issued.
5.12.16. List of people, and their titles, who provided information included in the Incident
Investigation Report.
5.12.17. List of the members of the investigation team.
5.13. Safety Bulletins will be issued at the Work Site and provided to the Company’s HSE SPOC for
wider communication (e.g. monthly Contractor meetings).
6. General Health, Safety and Welfare. Contractor is responsible for maintaining all of Contractor’s
facilities under the Contractor’s direction or responsibility in a manner which does not create or otherwise
contribute to an unhealthy working or living environment. In order to accomplish this objective, the
Contractor shall ensure the following:
6.1. Information/Postings/Signs. Emergency, safety and operational information/postings/signs shall

be communicated in a format to ensure comprehension by all of the Contractor’s personnel at the
Work Site.
6.2. English Language Proficiency. Contractor shall ensure that critical Contractor management,
Work Site supervisory personnel, and the persons appointed pursuant to Section 4 (Safety
Representation) of these guidelines, are proficient in speaking, reading and writing of English
language, and the dominant language of the workforce, unless agreed otherwise in writing by the
Company.
6.3. Rig/Equipment Move Plan. Contractor shall develop and follow a move plan for every rig move.
The move plan shall be made available, upon request, to the Company Representative and/or
Company HSE SPOC prior to initiating rig move.
6.4. Short Service Employee. Contractor shall have a short service employee (SSE) program. The
program shall define the Contractors criteria for a SSE. In addition, the program shall identify the
process by which new and/or transferred Contractor personnel shall be mentored, obtain the
knowledge, skills and abilities required to graduate out of the SSE program and have a formal
process to graduate (checklist, supervisors verification of knowledge and skills and abilities). The
Contractor shall have a process that uniquely identifies all SSE (e.g. stickers and identifiable hard
hats) and have established a specified minimum timeframe for the SSE to be in the program.
Contractor SSE programs will be evaluated and approved on a case by case basis by the Company
HSE SPOC.
6.4.1. Contractor shall have no more than 35% SSE per crew, gang or Work Site.
6.5. Medical Fitness/Personal Hygiene. Contractor shall have an established health preventative
program covering all its personnel who are undertaking activities related to the
Contract/Agreement, which shall include the following as a minimum:

Page No: 5 of 17
 pre-employment medical screening prior to start of the work; and

 periodic medical examinations that should be based on a risk assessment carried out for all
types of work during the Contract/Agreement, and should be related to the occupational
hazards to which the Contractor’s personnel are exposed.
All medical records should be documented and maintained confidential. These should be available
to the Company’s health professionals when it is required.
6.6. Personal Protective Equipment. Contractor shall ensure all its personnel wears appropriate PPE,
for the hazards present, at all Work Sites. Contractor shall ensure the following PPE is worn/used
by all Contractor personnel, along with the appropriate training in the proper use and care of such
PPE. Actual PPE requirements shall be determined as per risk assessments and MSDS for products
Contractor personnel may be exposed to at the Work Site. Contractor shall ensure all Contractor’s
personnel PPE meets the applicable American National Standards Institute (ANSI), British
Standard (BS), American Standard Testing Methods (ASTM), National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA), National Institute of Occupation Health and Safety (NIOSH) or equivalent standards. The
following items of PPE shall be worn by all Contractor personnel at all times at the Work Sites:
6.6.1. hard hats
6.6.2. protective eyewear; and
6.6.3. protective footwear (boots).
6.6.4. The following is an example list of PPE that may be required for the Services/Work and
the standards (current revision) that certify and/or specify them:
6.6.4.1. head protection ANSI Z89.1 Class 1 Type E&G or international equivalent;
6.6.4.2. eye and face protection, appropriate for the Services/Work

environment/conditions (lighting, dust, etc.) ANSI Z87.1 or international
equivalent;
6.6.4.3. foot protection ASTM F 2413 or international equivalent standard;
6.6.4.4. hearing protection ANSI Z95 or international equivalent standard;
6.6.4.5. hand protection; e.g. gloves, barrier creams or etc.;
6.6.4.6. flame retardant clothing (as identified by regulation or approved by

Company management);
6.6.4.7. PPE for handling hazardous chemicals; hand, face, body, etc.;
6.6.4.8. fall protection (full body harness) ANSI 359.0-4 or international equivalent;
6.6.4.9. respirators NIOSH certified or international equivalent;
6.6.4.10. other as identified by the Contractor PPE Hazard/Risk Assessment; and
6.6.4.11. H2S detection as appropriate.
6.7. Hand Safety. Contractor shall have a hand safety awareness and prevention program targeting
hazard zones such as: pinch points, hold points, soft grips, cutting devices, proper hand tools,
hot/cold conditions and chemical handling.

Page No: 6 of 17
6.7.1. The Contractor’s personnel are required to use appropriate hand protection when they
encounter the following hazards (the Company’s HSE Department will provide
guidance as requested):
6.7.1.1. thermal;
6.7.1.2. sharp materials;
6.7.1.3. electrical current;
6.7.1.4. chemical exposure; and
6.7.1.5. abrasive materials.
6.7.2. Supervisors and workers shall reference the MSDS when handling chemicals to identify
the appropriate PPE.
6.7.3. Selection of appropriate hand protection shall be based on an evaluation of the

performance characteristics of the hand protection relative to the task(s) to be
performed, conditions present, duration of use, and the hazards and potential hazards
identified.
6.7.4. Welders shall wear leather gloves equipped with a long gauntlet (welder’s gloves) for
electric welding and naked flame cutting/welding operations.
6.8. Clothing and Other Apparel. If determined by the Contractor PPE Hazard/Risk Assessment, outer
garments of 100% cotton or fire retardant clothing shall be worn for those specific tasks. Drilling
requires 100% cotton or fire retardant clothing outer garment at all Work Sites. Long pants and
sleeved shirts or coveralls should be worn at all times during the performance of Services/Work.
Long hair shall be restrained as not to be an entanglement hazard. Ragged or loose clothing and
jewelry (bracelets, necklaces hanging more than two inches from the neck, dangling or hoop
earrings, etc.) are not to be worn when on Work Site. Any clothing that becomes saturated with
petroleum products or hazardous chemicals should be promptly removed. These items and issues
shall be addressed by the Contractor in site orientation, pre-tour and/or pre-job (tool box talks)
safety meetings.
6.9. Substance Abuse, Dangerous Materials and Firearms/Weapons. Without prejudice to the
Company’s other remedies under this Contract/Agreement, any Contractor personnel who are in
breach of the provisions of the Company’s rules, regulations, and policies relating to substance
abuse, dangerous materials, and firearms/weapons, as notified to the Contractor by the Company
from time to time, shall be removed from the Work Site. Access to the Work Site is conditional
upon the Company’s right to conduct unannounced searches with respect to the rules, regulations
and policies of this Section 6.9. The Contractor shall cause its personnel to comply with and be
subject to all such rules, regulations, and policies.
6.9.1. Prescription and nonprescription substances which are behavior or mood-altering, abuse
of chemical substances, alcohol and being under the influence of any of the
aforementioned, firearms or weapons (instruments intended for use to cause harm), and
non-work-related dangerous materials, are adverse to a safe work environment. The
purchase, sale, use, distribution and possession of any of the aforementioned items at all
of the Work Sites, including parking lots, Company vehicles, any facility where the
Company business activity or any hereunder is being conducted, or in any vehicle used
for Company purposes, is prohibited, except when and to the extent specifically
exempted by the Company in writing. The abuse or inappropriate use of any substance
which causes or tends to contribute to unacceptable work performance is also
prohibited. Reporting to work or working while under the influence of alcohol or illegal
drugs is prohibited. Reporting to work or working while under the influence of a legal

Page No: 7 of 17
drug is prohibited if the individual's use of the legal drug poses a threat to the safety of
the personnel of the Company or the Contractor, or the public or if the individual's job
performance is significantly affected by the legal drug.
6.9.2. Pre-employment and random drug screening may be required of Contractor personnel
who perform an operation, maintenance, or emergency response function on facilities or
pipelines. Drug testing may be performed on individuals involved in work related
accidents/incidents for “reasonable cause” where it appears the individual may have
been impaired by alcohol or drugs in his actions.
6.10. Safety Training. Contractor shall have conducted a training needs assessment representative of the
contracted Work Site tasks and have developed a training matrix inclusive of all regulatory training
requirements, by occupation. Contractor shall ensure that Contractor personnel have been given the
identified job-related training (drilling and well servicing requires International
Association of Drilling Contractors (IADC) Rig Pass for all Contractor personnel and the IADC’s
WellCap training for supervisory Contractor personnel responsible for responding in a well control
situation, or a country, local or international equivalent training). Training records must be
available for review, for all Contractor personnel working at the Work Site, upon Company request.
The Contractor shall ensure that training certificates, required by local law or equivalent
international laws, regulations and standards, have been obtained for all Contractor personnel
working on or traveling to any Work Site and are available for inspection by Company personnel.
6.11. Supervisor Safety Training. The Contractor’s on-site supervisory personnel shall be trained in,
and be knowledgeable about, the Contractor’s applicable HSE programs and procedures and shall
work to effectively implement them at the Work Site.
6.12. Behavior Based Safety. Contractor shall have a “Behavioral Based Safety” or equivalent safety
behavioral program implemented to encourage good safety leadership and behavior.
6.13. First Aid/CPR. Contractor shall ensure sufficient first aid/CPR equipment and trained (Red Cross,
Medic First Aid or equivalent) personnel are available at Work Site as per local regulations.
6.13.1. First aid/CPR kit(s) containing an appropriate quantity of supplies, as prescribed by a

professionally qualified medical officer, shall be maintained on location at all times.
6.14. HSE Orientation. Contractor shall ensure all Contractor personnel are given an onsite Work Site
HSE operation orientation. Orientation shall be given to all Contractor personnel and Work Site
visitors, regardless of prior experience, before they are allowed to enter the existing Work Site.
This orientation shall address operation hazards, emergency plans, procedures, rules, and
regulations.
6.14.1. Contractor shall ensure that a member of its personnel is designated the role of ensuring
that all visitors have been accounted for, PPE validated, safe areas defined and oriented
to the hazards of the current operation.
6.15. Contractor personnel ID badges and vehicle ID badges. Upon attending and completing the
Company’s HSE orientation program, the Contractor’s personnel shall apply for Company ID
badges. The Company ID badges must be obtained prior to starting work under the
Contract/Agreement.
6.15.1. Contractor personnel ID badges application process:
6.15.1.1. Complete Contractor ID badge request form and stamp with the Contractor’s
official company stamp.
6.15.1.2. Provide and attach copies of applicant’s passport, CPR, Residence Permit
and signed HSE orientation certificate (the certificate proving that the

Page No: 8 of 17
employee has undertaken the Company’s HSE computer based training

program).
6.15.1.3. All Contractor ID badge request forms should be agreed by the Company’s
Contract/Agreement proponent.
6.15.1.4. Submit the request forms and attachments to Company’s Security

Department, who will coordinate obtaining security clearance where required
and photographs with the Contractor Representative and issue badges to
6.15.1.5. Contractor Representative will return ID badges of its personnel and

subcontractors to the Company’s Security Department upon completion of
the Services/Work or the Contract/Agreement or termination/ transfer of any
member of the Contractor personnel. Any lost/unreturned badge(s) will be
charged at current rates.
6.15.2. Contractor vehicle ID badges application process.
6.15.2.1. Complete Contractor vehicle ID badge request form and stamp with the
Contractor’s official company stamp.
6.15.2.2. Provide copies of vehicle registration disc, vehicle ownership certificate and
vehicle insurance certificate.
6.15.2.3. All Contractor vehicle ID badge request forms should be agreed by the
Company’s Contract/Agreement proponent.
6.15.2.4. Submit the request forms and attachments to the Company’s Security
Department, who will issue badges to the Contractor Representative.
6.15.2.5. Badges will be displayed on vehicle windscreen (top middle).
6.15.2.6. Vehicles ID badges will be renewed at specified intervals.
6.15.2.7. Contractor Representative will return ID vehicle ID badges upon the

completion of the Services/Work or the Contract/Agreement. Any
lost/unreturned badge(s) will be charged at current rates.
6.16. HSE Meetings. Each crew shall hold at least daily/shift HSE meetings and pre-job, job safety
analysis and toolbox talks. Such HSE meetings shall include all affected Contractor personnel on
the Work Site and the subjects discussed/reviewed shall be documented and copies made available
to the Company Representative, as requested.
6.16.1. Contractor shall review, with all affected parties, job safety analysis prior to performing
non-routine and/or high risk tasks.
6.16.2. On Work Sites where simultaneous operations will be conducted, daily pre-job planning
meeting(s) will be held involving representatives from all potentially affected parties.
6.17. Emergency Action Plan. Contractor, in conjunction with the Company, shall confirm the
Contractor and Company Emergency Action Plans (EAP) are aligned and that all of the
Contractor’s personnel clearly understand their roles and responsibilities in an emergency.

Page No: 9 of 17
6.17.1. Contractor shall ensure all emergency notification and evacuation procedures are posted
in Contractor Work Site offices and communicated to all Contractor personnel at the
Work Site.
6.17.2. Contractor EAP shall include where applicable, but not be limited to:
6.17.2.1. weather/natural disasters/hazardous environments;
6.17.2.2. well control;
6.17.2.3. emergency medical management;
6.17.2.4. fire/explosion;
6.17.2.5. security;
6.17.2.6. Hydrogen Sulfide operations;
6.17.2.7. journey management;
6.17.2.8. environmental spills/releases;
6.17.2.9. equipment/structure damage;
6.17.2.10. communication/emergency contact lists;
6.17.2.11. others as determined by local hazards; and
6.17.2.12. evacuation provisions/procedures for all applicable scenarios.
6.18. Emergency Drills. The Contractor shall conduct and document periodic safety drills, the frequency
and scope of which shall be agreed upon by the Company and the Contractor. Company will be
notified in advance of emergency drills.
6.19. HSE Statistics. Contractor shall provide a monthly HSE statistics report (the Contractor Monthly
Report) as part of the respective Contract/Agreement, which shall be provided no later than the fifth
working day of the month for the proceeding calendar month or as requested by the Company. The
monthly cut off for each report shall be the close of business up to and including the final day of
each month. The form of the Contractor Monthly Report is attached to these guidelines as
Attachment B. All man-hours worked at Work Sites by the Company’s Contractors and their
subcontractors shall be reported to the Company’s HSE SPOC on the Contractor Monthly Report
with the exception of the following:
 Contractor and subcontractor support staff (e.g., administrative, business development,

finance, accounting, etc.) that are located in offices outside of Work Sites.
 Services that are performed for the Contractor or subcontractor (i) on a periodic or as needed
basis and (ii) are not specified in the Contract/Agreement’s Scope of Work or elsewhere as
part of the Services/Work being provided by the Contractor (and its subcontractors) under the
Contract/Agreement. Examples of such services include: copier machine repairs, delivery
services, maintenance/repairs of equipment, and repairs of buildings/portacabins.
 Contractor and subcontractor travel, provided, however, that travel to/from/within Work Sites
by Contractor and subcontractor personnel that have clocked in or otherwise reported to work
for their shifts, and have not clocked out or completed their shifts for the day, should be
reported.
 Contractor or subcontractor employees approved by the Company to work at a Work Site in a
“trainee” or similar capacity and are not being billed, directly or indirectly, to the Company.

Page No: 10 of 17
 Other Contractor or subcontractor work activities or services as approved by HSE SPOC on a

case by case basis.
Any questions regarding the reporting of man-hour worked should be directed to the Company’s
HSE SPOC.
6.20. Powered Lifting Device Safety. All Contractor personnel operating a powered lifting device
(forklift, cranes and winches, excluding drilling and (or) workover rig derricks) shall maintain
current certification/training per British Standards or equivalent local or international regulations.
The Contractor shall keep a current record of powered lifting device training to present when
requested by the Company. The record shall include the name of the operator, date of the
certification/training, date of evaluation and the name of the person(s) giving the training and
evaluation/testing.
6.21. Auditing & Monitoring. HSE performance of the Contractor is a key element in the Company’s
contractor management process. The Company’s proponent department and HSE representatives
shall audit and monitor the Contractor’s performance on a regular basis. The Company’s HSE
checklist shall be used and results compared with previous audit results and findings.
6.22. Journey Management. The Contractor shall ensure that all Contractor modes of transportation are
fit for purpose for travel to/from/within the Work Site. The Contractor shall ensure compliance
with all local laws and regulations or equivalent international laws, regulations and standards.
6.22.1. Ensure that only valid operators authorized by the Contractor are allowed to operate the
Contractor’s modes of transportation.
6.22.2. Contractor personnel must hold legal operator qualifications including possession of a
valid, in-country approved, operator’s license (e.g. Bahrain driving license).
6.22.3. Transportation source(s) are compliant with safety/performance inspections for respective
modes of transportation.
6.22.4. Provide a means of communication (i.e. cellular phone, satellite phone and radio) in each
mode of transportation for emergency contact.
6.22.5. Provide emergency equipment for each mode of transportation (first-aid kit(s), flash light,
safety triangle etc.)
6.22.6. Cellular phone safety shall be addressed.
6.22.7. Overhead power lines and communication lines shall be identified along the transportation
route to prevent electrocution and (or) property damage.
6.23. Commencement of Services on any Company Work Site. The Contractor shall not commence any
Services/Work at any Work Sites until authorized to do so by the Company Representative.
6.24. Confined Space Entry. The Contractor shall ensure full compliance with Confined Space Entry
Procedure HSE-024 (available on request).
6.25. Heat Stress. All of the Contractor’s personnel who are working outdoors or work in hot
environments may be at risk of heat stress. The Contractor shall provide its personnel that
undertake activities related to the Contract/Agreement with training in the prevention of heat stress,
and suitable shelters in the workplace with adequate supply of drinking water and frequent breaks
in accordance with Heat Stress Management Procedure HSE-061 (available on request).
6.26. HSE Plan. Prior to commencement of the Contract/Agreement, the Contractor is required to
submit a HSE plan detailing the system and procedures, which will apply during the term of the

Page No: 11 of 17
Contract/Agreement. The HSE plan is to be completed and submitted to the Company’s HSE
Department for approval within one week of the Contract/Agreement execution date.
6.27. Material Safety Data Sheets. Contractor shall ensure that all Contractor products/materials
supplied to the Work Site are accompanied with two copies, with one copy for the Company’s HSE
SPOC of the MSDS upon delivery.
6.27.1. Contractor personnel shall be instructed in the safe use of the chemicals in accordance
with an appropriate written “Hazard Communication Program” as dictated by local
regulatory requirements.
6.27.2. Contractor shall ensure all MSDS are reviewed by the Contractor’s personnel prior to
exposure to chemicals and discussed as part of any tool box talk.
6.27.3. Contractor shall ensure that copies of the MSDS are available at proper location or at the
Work Site and that the Contractor’s personnel are aware of the existence and location of
such copies of the MSDS.
6.27.4. Contractor shall only use licensed and approved chemicals as per the Bahraini regulations
on import and use of chemicals.
6.27.5. Contractor shall obtain a written permit from the Supreme Council for the Environment to
use and/or import chemicals before the chemicals arrive in Bahrain and/or the Work Site.
6.28. Inappropriate Behavior. Inappropriate behavior is prohibited while performing Services/Work for
the Company or while on Company property (workplace violence, horseplay, practical jokes,
offensive remarks or gestures).
6.29. Smoking, Lighter/Matches. Smoking is only permitted in Contractor or Company designated

smoking areas. Lighters and matches should be stored in safe areas away from flammable or
combustible materials.
6.30. Housekeeping. The Contractor shall ensure good housekeeping practices are conducted at the
Work Site by all Contractor personnel to provide for a safe and orderly working environment.
Notwithstanding anything herein, Contractor’s obligations are limited to Contractor-generated
waste. Aisles, emergency exits, and controls must be kept free of obstacles at all times. All wastes
are to be properly and safely disposed of. The Contractor shall leave all Work Sites clean, orderly
and in good condition. For additional information see Section 7 (Environmental Management) of
these guidelines
6.31. Compressed Gas and Air Cylinders. Compressed gas cylinders shall be properly used, maintained
(mechanical integrity program), stored, secured, handled and transported as designated by local
laws and regulations or equivalent international laws, regulations and standards.
6.31.1. Compressed gas and air equipment shall be constructed in accordance with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII Edition 1968 or equivalent local or international
laws or regulations, including but not limited to safety devices; flame arrestors (at torch
and cylinder), regulators, pressure gauges, check valves, pressure relief valves and
labeling.
6.31.2. All compressed gas cylinders shall be returned promptly to a suitable/designated storage
area after use.
6.31.3. Protective caps shall be placed over the cylinder valves when not in use or when being
transported.

Page No: 12 of 17
6.31.4. Compressed gas cylinders shall be kept away from heat, fire, molten metal or electrical
lines, and shall not be transported by mobile cranes unless a special carrier is used.
6.31.5. Compressed gas cylinders shall be stored in the upright position and secured.
6.31.6. Acetylene or liquid compressed gas cylinders shall never be used in a horizontal position,
as the liquid may be forced out through the hose causing a fire hazard or explosion.
6.31.7. Oxygen/Acetylene cutting torch lines shall include flash back arrestors (at least at cylinder
end).
6.31.8. Compressed air shall not be used for cleaning clothing or parts of the body.
6.31.9. If compressed air is used for other cleaning, the discharge shall not exceed 30 psi – 2.07
Bar and eye/face protection shall be worn.
6.32. Storage, Use, and Labeling of Chemicals, and Hazardous/Flammable Materials. Contractor shall
ensure all hazardous and/or flammable materials/products are handled, dispensed and stored in
accordance with local laws and regulations or equivalent international laws, regulations and
standards.
6.32.1. All chemicals, paints and hazardous/flammable materials shall be kept in appropriate
containers, which are clearly labeled as to the respective contents, and stored in fit-for-
purpose storage containers (uniquely identified and vented). Labeling shall be consistent
with local laws and regulations or equivalent international laws, regulations and standards.
6.32.2. Low flash point solvents shall not be used for any washing or cleaning. The use of low
flash point solvents for anything other than the intended purpose is not permitted at the
Work Site.
6.33. HSE Related Equipment. Contractor shall provide adequate safety equipment of an approved type
and amount as is expressly required hereunder for the performance of Services/Work for the
Contractor’s personnel as per local or equivalent international regulations and the Company’s
standards, guidelines and policies.
6.33.1. Contractor shall ensure that all Contractor personnel utilize, install, control and maintain in
good and safe working condition: all equipment and materials needed for the protection
and safety of the environment and all personnel, materials and equipment located at and
near the Work Site, including equipment and materials for remediation, fire and gas
detection, fire fighting, blowout prevention, well control, first aid, rescue and evacuation,
all in compliance with this Contract/Agreement and applicable recommendations and
instructions of certifying authorities and equipment manufacturers. See further Section 6.6
(Personal Protective Equipment) of these guidelines.
6.33.2. Contractor shall maintain its equipment in a professional manner as dictated by original
equipment manufacturer standards. In addition, the Contractor shall keep up-to-date
service, maintenance and repair records of all said equipment.
6.33.3. Eyewash stations and/or safety showers shall be accessible in the immediate area of all
chemical mixing stations.
6.34. Overhead Work/Suspended Loads. When working overhead, the area below shall be barricaded or
other equivalent measures taken to protect workers on the Work Site. No one shall be permitted to
pass under any suspended load.
6.35. Lifting and Rigging. Contractor shall ensure full compliance with Lifting and Rigging Operations
Procedure HSE-026 (available on request). Contractor shall maintain a lifting gear registry for all

Page No: 13 of 17
lifting gear at the Work Site inclusive of a listing of all lifting gear, copies of equipment certificates
(manufacturer, safe working load, serial number) and the inspection/recertification frequency.
6.35.1. Identify weights and dimensions and categorize lifts to ensure that the relevant lift plan has
been prepared and submitted to the Company’s Lifting and Rigging Coordinator (LRC) for
review prior to lift operation taking place allowing suitable timing for review and
approval.
6.35.2. Any multiple/tandem lift operation shall be classified as an engineered lift and the relevant
lift plan in accordance with Lifting and Rigging Operations Procedure HSE-026.
6.35.3. All pre-lift safety checks have to be carried out by crane operator and rigging personnel
prior to lift taking place in accordance with Lifting and Rigging Operations Procedure
HSE HSE-026.
6.35.4. All vendors supplied below the hook rigging devices shall also comply with the following
requirements: identify the manufacturer; safe working load; service/manufactured date
and serial/identification number; and valid certification.
6.35.5. Lifting device (all below the hook rigging) shall identify manufacturer, safe working load,
service/manufactured date and serial/identification number and valid certification.
6.35.6. Lifting devices shall be managed in a formal maintenance program; i.e. in service/out of
service date, color coding and rejection criteria.
6.35.7. Chains or chain slings are prohibited to use for any lifting purposes on all Work Sites.
6.35.8. Home-made or modified lifting devices are prohibited to use on all Work Sites.
6.35.9. Contractor shall be responsible for providing Lift Plans in accordance with Lifting and
Rigging Operations Procedure HSE-026.
6.35.10. All crane operators shall carry a minimum of two (2) qualified riggers. With one (1) of
these riggers qualified to grade 1 (Mandatory) the second rigger can be a grade 2 qualified.
6.36. Dropped Objects. Contractor shall have a dropped object prevention program, for all overhead or
elevated tasks. In particular:
6.36.1. Lifting during construction and maintenance activities.
6.36.2. Derrick/mast/substructure shall be surveyed and all redundant equipment removed.
6.36.3. Equipment suspended in the derrick/mast/substructure shall have a secondary means for
retention, should the primary means fail.
6.36.4. An inventory of all equipment suspended in the derrick/mast/substructure shall be

maintained and regular inspection of derrick/mast/substructure shall be carried out and
recorded.
6.36.5. Securing and inventorying tools and parts taken into the derrick/mast/substructure, to
ensure nothing is left behind, for maintenance, repair and/or other activities.
6.37. Scaffolds or Platforms. All scaffolds or platforms used for installation and maintenance or
removal of machinery and equipment shall be erected, maintained, and used in compliance with
local or international equivalent regulation. All scaffolds are to be inspected and tagged by a
Competent Person prior to use.

Page No: 14 of 17
6.38. Safety Harnesses and Lifelines. When working outside of properly guarded work platforms a full
body safety harness and lifeline complete with shock absorbing lanyard(s) shall be supplied by the
Contractor and worn by all workers when working above six (6) feet.
6.39. Machine Guarding. Contractor shall ensure that all Contractor-provided equipment machine
(permanent, temporary and portable) guarding is properly installed and maintained. Before
removing guards to service/maintenance guarded equipment, it shall be isolated, locked out, tagged
out and tried. This shall include all rotating equipment; e.g. pump shafts, fans and catheads.
6.40. Portable Hand Tools. All portable hand tools shall have proper insulation, grounding and guarding
as per manufacturer requirements. All portable tools shall be properly maintained and used per
manufacturer original design and intended purpose. Tools shall be regularly inspected; damaged or
worn tools shall be taken out of service. No homemade or modified hand tools shall be used on the
Work Site.
6.41. Radioactive Sources/Substances. Contractor shall ensure all radioactive sources/substances

provided or controlled by Contractor are properly stored, handled and disposed of. Contractor shall
ensure all of the Contractor’s personnel are properly trained in radiation safety techniques.
Contractor shall notify the Company Representative before bringing radioactive sources on the
Work Site.
6.41.1. Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM) shall be handled by

certified/competent personnel only and shall be stored, transported and disposed of as per
local regulations. See Handling NORM Contaminated Materials and Equipment
Procedure HSE-019 (available on request).
6.41.2. Radioactive Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) and logging sources shall be handled by
certified contractors only as per their internal safety processes and procedures and shall
comply with all local regulations or equivalent to American Petroleum Institute (API)
standards.
6.42. Permit to Work. Contractor shall ensure that all Services/Work performed by the Contractor’s
personnel are performed in compliance with Permit to Work System Procedure HSE-023 (available
on request).
6.43. Excavation and Trenching. All excavation and trenching activities shall be performed in
accordance with Excavation and Trenching Procedure HSE-029 (available on request). The
Contractor shall notify the Company Representative of any excavation to be carried at least 48
hours prior to commencement of the work, and all excavation and trenching activities shall be
covered under Company Permit to Work System regardless of excavation depth.
6.44. Management of Change (MOC). Contractor shall have a formal MOC process implemented for all
equipment, other than “like in kind” using original manufacturers’ equipment, or
process/procedural changes. Contractor shall ensure no Contractor equipment is used or modified
outside of manufacturers recommend usage and/or design specification.
6.45. Hydrogen Sulfide. When the presence of hydrogen sulfide gas is in the wellbore, formation,
facilities or production stream, the Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the Contractor
personnel are properly trained, qualified, equipped and medically fit tested in accordance with
Hydrogen Sulfide Procedure HSE-015 and Respiratory Protection Procedure HSE-057 (both
available on request) or equivalent local or international laws/regulations.
6.46. Fire Protection. The Contractor shall, based on a risk assessment, provide and maintain fire
protection equipment for the Contractor’s scope of Services/Work. Fire protection shall be in
compliance with all local regulatory requirements.

Page No: 15 of 17
6.46.1. Any Services/Work that have the potential to produce a spark or open flame (e.g. welding,
cutting, grinding, electrical and grilling) in areas where flammable vapors or combustible
materials exist, is strictly prohibited.
6.46.2. Hot work permits are required for Services/Work that may introduce any source of
ignition and occur outside the designated safe welding area.
6.46.3. All hot work activities shall include a designated/competent fire watch(es). Fire watch
shall remain a minimum of 30 minutes post hot work activity.
6.46.4. Firefighting equipment (fire hoses and nozzles) shall be used for firefighting only.
6.47. Electrical Safety. Contractor shall have an electrical safety program, which identifies the levels of
all electrical and associated tasks to be performed, and the position qualified to perform each of
these tasks as per local regulations or equivalent standards.
6.47.1. Contractor electricians shall be competent/certified/qualified to perform electrical

activities on all Contractor equipment on the Work Site as required by local regulations or
equivalent standards.
6.47.2. Contractor personnel working in areas where there are electrical hazards shall be provided
with, and shall use, protective equipment that is designed and constructed for the specific
part of the body to be protected and for the Services/Work to be performed.
6.47.3. All Lifting and Rigging activities related to overhead power lines shall be in full
compliance with Lifting and Rigging Operations Procedure HSE-026 (available on
request) and British Standard B.S.7121.
6.47.4. Contractor personnel shall consider all overhead power lines to be energized unless proper
measures have been taken for de-energizing. Where the Services/Work is being
performed near energized overhead power-lines, such performance shall be in compliance
with British Standard B.S.7121.
6.47.5. Contractor shall ensure no masts are raised, lowered or positioned within the natural fall
lane of energized overhead electrical lines.
6.47.6. Contractor shall ensure that the Contractor’s personnel who are conducting maintenance
activities (raising/lowering mast, ladders, moving equipment, etc.) maintain a minimum
ten meters radius, in accordance with local or equivalent international laws/regulations, to
determine actual safe radius, of overhead energized equipment, have de-energized all
related components and performed lock, tag and try procedures, prior to starting the
Services/Work.
6.47.7. Contractor shall ensure that all of the Contractor’s personnel use only portable ladders,
scaffolding or other elevating devices, made of non-conductive material (excludes the use
of metallic, metallic blended and wood), when working around energized electrical
equipment.
6.47.8. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that all equipment used is properly grounded and that
accidental contact with ungrounded electrical sources is prevented.
6.47.9. Contractor shall ensure all Contractor electrical components are maintained in safe
working condition and fit-for-purpose.
6.47.10. Proper grounding procedures shall be determined by a competent, certified, qualified

electrician and a schematic shall be provided at the Work Site.

Page No: 16 of 17
6.48. Security. Contractor shall provide or cause to be provided safe and secure working conditions for
the Contractor’s personnel at all Work Sites. The Contractor shall report to the Company any
actual or suspected unlawful or unauthorized activity by the Contractor’s personnel or other
personnel at or near any Work Site, regardless whether a loss has occurred. Unlawful or
unauthorized activity shall include:
6.48.1. Arson, assault, battery, breaking and entering, burglary, commercial bribery, conflict of
interest, electronic surveillance, wiretapping, embezzlement, extortion, forgery, fraud,
hijacking involving the Company’s vehicles, homicide, industrial espionage, inventory
shortage or manipulation, kickbacks, kidnapping, larceny or theft, possession, use or sale
of dangerous drugs or narcotics, sabotage, threat of serious bodily harm, unauthorized
possession or use of a dangerous weapon at the Work Site, use of the Company’s assets
without authority, for unauthorized purposes, or vandalism.
6.48.2. Actual or suspected loss or compromise of information that could result in damage or
embarrassment to the Company.
6.48.3. Attempts to counsel, solicit, plan or commit any of the above offenses.
7. Environmental Management. Contractor shall pay due regard to the Work Site environment and shall
act responsibly in order to protect the Work Site environment from adverse effects resulting from the
Services/Work and minimize any adverse impact which may arise from the Services/Work. Contractor
shall ensure that all appropriate local or international environmental permits, licenses, registrations have
been obtained before Services/Work begins.
7.1. All Services/Work and maintenance shall be completed in such a manner as to avoid contamination
of land sites and surface/subterranean fresh water zones through proper and best practices and by
adhering to laws, regulations, and other applicable industry equivalent standards such as API and
MARPOL.
7.2. Spills or releases shall be reported to the Company, in accordance with Section 5 (Near Miss and
Incident Reporting and Investigation) of these guidelines, cleaned up immediately including
recovered material and shall be properly disposed of by the party responsible, for the spill, at their
expense.
7.3. Contractor shall ensure that open pits at the Work Site, remain free of debris, empty containers,
household/industrial trash, waste oils and hazardous chemicals.
7.4. When requested by the Company, Contractor shall install sound absorption and mitigation devices.
7.5. Contractor shall have in place a waste management program for Contractor-generated waste which
addresses waste streams classification, storage, labeling, and disposal and/or recycling procedures
as well as waste minimization initiatives and reporting in accordance with Applicable Law and
Company Waste Management Procedure HSE-046 (available on request).
7.6. Contractor shall ensure all Contractor owned or controlled tanks or vessels for fuel, and lubricants
storage are properly maintained (mechanical integrity program), closed, installed at ground level
and provided with secondary containment (berms, dikes, diversionary structures or equivalent
measures) capable of containing as a minimum 110% of the capacity of the largest tank or vessel,
or greater as per local or equivalent international laws/regulations. Tanks or vessels shall comply
with all technical and safety requirements to avoid excessive evaporation, contamination, explosion
or spill and releases. Contractor shall inspect these tanks on a daily basis and any accumulation of
fuel, oil or hazardous substances shall be removed, daily, to preclude eventual overflows and
seepage into the ground.

Page No: 17 of 17
7.7. Contractor shall ensure all wash down water and other water derived from execution of
Services/Work or maintenance is to be controlled and managed in such a manner as to prevent
direct discharge to land or seas.
7.8. Contractor shall not hunt, trap, trade animals, harass, feed, or keep wild animals in captivity on
Work Sites.
7.9. Contractor shall respect and follow applicable environmental laws, regulations and procedures for
protecting archeological, cultural and natural resources such as artifacts, historical land marks,
cultural places, protected ecosystems, wildlife habitats, threatened or endangered species, etc.
7.10. Contractor shall provide assistance to obtain environmental permits in a timely manner, where
required. Contractor shall also comply with any permit requirements (e.g. environmental
monitoring and reporting) as dictated by the Supreme Council for the Environment.
7.11. Contractor is responsible for all of its waste streams and shall have a waste manifest system, which
clearly states the waste name, quantity, transporter and disposal location.
7.12. Contractor shall handle its own waste in accordance with local law and Waste Management
Procedure HSE-046 and shall not dispose of any of its waste on the Company’s premises.
7.13. Contractor shall submit a monthly waste management report in the required format.
7.14. Contractor shall only provide work and services as per their licensed activities and shall not execute
any unrelated work task e.g. removing asbestos material.
7.15. Contractor shall include waste management in the task/project method statement.
7.16. Contactor shall use septic tanks with spare capacity for sanitary waste collection and shall arrange
with vacuum truck transporter to deliver the sanitary waste to an approved waste treatment plant.
Discharging sanitary waste into land or pits is not acceptable.
7.17. Whenever in doubt, the Contractor shall consult the Company to discuss and reach a mutual
agreement on the arising issues.
8. Social Responsibility. The Company is committed to respecting the culture, customs, laws and rights of
the communities in which it conducts business. This commitment is defined in the Company’s HSE and
Social Responsibility Policies, which are available upon request. The Contractor shall be familiar with
these policies and conduct business for the Company in full compliance with such policies. Any questions
or concerns related to these matters should be promptly communicated to the Company’s HSE SPOC.

ANNEX F
SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Annex F – Special Terms & Conditions F-1 CO-227-2012

ANNEX G
FORM OF BANK GUARANTEE
(SPECIMEN)
BANK NAME ADDRESS
GUARANTEE NO.: _____________
DATE: ________________________
TO: Tatweer Petroleum

Awali Campus,
BAPCO Compound
Awali
Kingdom of Bahrain
SUBJECT : CONTRACT AGREEMENT - NO. CO-227-2012
WHEREAS, ..................................., having its main office in................................. ("Contractor") and

Tatweer Petroleum, doing business in the Kingdom of Bahrain ("Company") have agreed to enter into
the contract for the [insert project description] ("Agreement") on condition that Contractor provides
Company, upon the signing of the ("Agreement") an unconditional, irrevocable on-demand bank
guarantee or bond in order to guarantee the fulfillment by Contractor of all of its obligations under the
Agreement.
NOW THEREFORE, we, .................................. Bank of P.O. Box [insert Address] ("Guarantor"), on
condition that Company and CONTRACTOR, in fact, enter into the Agreement, do hereby
unconditionally and irrevocably undertake and guarantee to pay Company an amount or amounts up
to ____________________ Bahraini Dinar (BD _______), the exact amount or amounts to be solely
determined by Company, immediately upon first written demand by Company for any such amount or
amounts, notwithstanding any objection or contestation by Contractor.
Guarantor hereby waives any right it may have to first require Company to proceed against or enforce
any other rights or other guarantee or security with respect to or claim payment from Contractor
before making a demand against or claiming from Guarantor hereunder. Furthermore, Guarantor's
obligations hereunder shall not be exonerated by the following described actions, circumstances,
matter or thing which, but for this provision, might operate to release or otherwise exonerate
Guarantor from its obligations, including without limitation and whether known or not known to
Guarantor or Company:
(1) any amendment, modification, extension, indulgence, time, waiver or concession granted to
Contractor, whether as to payment, time performance, or otherwise, under the Agreement;
Annex G – Performance Guarantee G-1 CO-227-2012

(2) any legal limitation, disability, incapacity or other similar circumstances relating to the
Contractor; and/or
(3) any unenforceability or invalidity of any of Contractor's obligations to be performed by it

under the Agreement.
This Guarantee shall be governed by the laws of England.
This Guarantee shall be solely related to the Agreement.
This Guarantee shall be valid from the date first above written and shall remain in full force and effect
until [insert date which is 12 months following scheduled date for completion of installation and
commissioning]. both days inclusive. Upon expiry of the said term, this Guarantee shall be null and
void without the necessity of it being returned to us.
Yours faithfully,
[Name of Bank]
SIGNED: ..............................................................
TYPED NAME: ..............................................................
TITLE: ..............................................................
Annex G – Performance Guarantee G-2 CO-227-2012

ANNEX H
CODE OF BUSINESS CONDUCT
Annex H – Code of Business Conduct H-1 CO-227-2012

ANNEX I
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL
1.0 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CONTRACTOR shall operate an effective documented quality management system based on the
requirements of ISO 9001:2008, or a COMPANY approved equivalent such as ASME or API.
2.0 SCOPE
CONTRACTOR’s quality management system shall be for those service categories consistent
with the Scope of Work and defined in the CONTRACTOR’s quality manual.
CONTRACTOR shall have sole and total responsibility for the quality of all aspects of the
CONTRACTOR’S Work performed under this Contract including that performed by all subcontractors.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the quality standards and their implementation in the
subcontractor’s facilities and shall undertake all surveillance to uphold his responsibility.
3.0 QUALITY PLAN - CONTENT
CONTRACTOR shall produce a quality plan which shall describe the systems that shall
determine how they will operate including, but not limited to, the following:
- CONTRACTOR’s quality, safety and environmental policies;
- Description of CONTRACTOR’s management system;
- CONTRACTOR’s organization;
- Planning and setting of CONTRACTOR’s standards;
- Audit and review of CONTRACTOR
4.0 REVIEW OF QUALITY PLAN
CONTRACTOR’s quality plan shall be subject to review and approval by COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR’s system shall include all appropriate quality assurance, safety management and
environmental management system elements, as appropriate to the Work. In addition to listing all
controlling documents, the quality plan shall include, but not limited to, responsibilities within
CONTRACTOR’s organization for the production and implementation of each document,
authority for the documents’ review and implementation of each approved document and all cross
references to controlling manuals, codes and standards.
5.0 CONTRACTOR’S INSPECTION AND TEST PLANS

The quality plan shall include CONTRACTOR’s proposed inspection and test plans (“I&TPs”)
which shall set out specific routines, events, procedures and acceptance criteria to implement the
activities relevant to the Work, including that performed by CONTRACTOR’s subcontractors.
The I&TP(s) shall be accompanied by a complete package of supporting documentation including
procedures and associated forms, specific to the Work, in respect to special processes and
activities.
6.0 WITNESSING OF TESTS

COMPANY reserves the right to witness any or all tests as set forth in the specifications and data
sheets, either at CONTRACTOR’s and/or subcontractor/vendor facilities and/or during onsite
installation and erection. Where a hold point or witness point is shown on an I&TP the
Annex I – Quality Assurance and Control I-1 CO-227-2012

CONTRACTOR shall notify COMPANY at least 48 hrs ahead of the event in order that they can
make the necessary arrangements to send representatives.
7.0 QUALITY AUDITS

Quality audits may be undertaken at any time by COMPANY of the CONTRACTOR and/or its
subcontractor / vendor’s. CONTRACTOR shall be advised of the audit scope and intention to
audit, seven (7) days prior to audit and shall provide full co-operation and access.
8.0 NON CONFORMANCES

Where non conformances are identified during audits or inspections and tests, CONTRACTOR
shall remedy at no cost to COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall take measures to prevent the
recurrence of non conformances by ascertaining and removing their causes.
9.0 COMPANY’S REVIEW

Schedule for Review
Throughout the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall submit, at COMPANY’s

request method statements, schedules, detailed procedures, calculations, drawings and the like for
COMPANY's review, for that particular part of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall allow for the
COMPANY review process set forth in this Annex K.
10.0 CLARIFICATION OF APPROVAL / REVIEW INTENTION

For the avoidance of doubt it is stated that COMPANY does not intend to approve any of
CONTRACTOR's activities unless specifically stated otherwise elsewhere in this Agreement.
However, COMPANY wishes to be offered the opportunity to review CONTRACTOR's
upcoming activities ahead of their execution and is particularly interested in major events i.e.
major installation, major lifts, hydrotests, Factory Acceptance Tests and System Integration Tests,
mobilization, load out for transportation, marine cargo etc, in order to be able to comment on
CONTRACTOR's proposed methods. CONTRACTOR is expected to incorporate COMPANY's
comments into the execution of the Work unless specifically agreed otherwise in writing.
Annex I – Quality Assurance and Control I-2 CO-227-2012

ANNEX J
SURVEILLANCE AND TECHNOLOGY GUIDELINES
Without limiting or enlarging the generality and application of any Articles of the Contract, the
Contractor shall abide by, and cause the Contractor Personnel / Contractor Group to abide by, the
Surveillance Technology Guidelines set forth in this Annex. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
Company and Contractor hereby agree that nothing in this Annex will be deemed to modify the
provisions of the Contract regarding assumption of liability and indemnity. Further, the Parties
hereby agree that the obligation to “ensure” a particular matter as used in this Annex requires
only that a Party take reasonable steps to obtain the desired result, and does not constitute or
require a guaranty or warranty of any kind.
1. Digital Canopy Initiative: In order to ensure the highest quality of safety and security,
Company uses its Active Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) / Global Positioning
System (GPS) based Personnel Safety Real Time Location System (“PS-RTLS”) to allow
field personnel to initiate distress signaling upon accident and to assist search and rescue
efforts. In the event of a safety incident, the location and number of persons not yet
evacuated will be available in real time.
2. The data gathered from this system also allows validation of Contractor billed time and
optimization of operations workflows. Company also uses a Passive RFID based Asset
Lifecycle Management system to assist with loss-prevention, inventory management,
tracing of product to the source and export compliance.
3. Operational Video Surveillance: Company deploys video cameras throughout

all key facilities for operational surveillance and safety compliance purposes. The
camera feed is monitored from control rooms 24 x 7 and from authorized
computers on demand. Video is archived for a defined period of time.
Company’s authorized users have access to the video archival. All videos are
Company property.
4. The following shall govern Contractor responsibilities in this respect:
 Contractor shall receive, manage and return at the end of the Contract all
identification equipment provided by Company.
 Contractor shall be responsible for any costs associated with repair and replacement
of lost or damaged identification equipment.
 Using the Company provided system, Contractor shall commission the identification
equipment when first assigned to a person or asset and shall update the system with
any subsequent reassignments.
 Contractor shall ensure all personnel and equipment located or working on any
Company site carry the assigned identification equipment at all times while providing
services to Company.
 Contractor shall promptly report to Company any loss of identification equipment.
Annex J – Surveillance and Technology Guidelines J-1 CO-227-2012

 Contractor acknowledges PS-RTLS records shall be used to validate Contractor’s
billing.
 Company’s video archival data shall stand as an official record for incident
documentation and investigation.
 Contractor hereby acknowledges Company’s right to perform the activities described
in this Annex.
Annex J – Surveillance and Technology Guidelines J-2 CO-227-2012

CO-227-2012 Schedule of Annexs PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CO-227-2012 Schedule of Annexs PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE BUILDING FACILITY

The stages of work covered by this document include as follows:

1. Construction Period – as per Project Schedule contained in Attachment 3 to this Annex A.

2.0 BREIF DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT

3.0 SCOPE OF THE DOCUMENT

4.0 OVERALL RESPONSIBILITIES

Provision of Site Company

Annex A – Scope of Work A-1 CO-227-2012

5.1 CONSTRUCTION SCOPE

5.2 PROJECT SCHEDULE

5.3 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS

5.5 SUB CONTRACTOR MANAGEMENT

5.6 HEALTH AND SAFETY

5.7 INCIDENTAL/MOBILIZATION SCOPE

The Contractor shall mobilise as follows:

Annex A – Scope of Work A-2 CO-227-2012

5.8 SITE PREPARATION

Annex A – Scope of Work A-3 CO-227-2012

5.9.2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

Annex A – Scope of Work A-4 CO-227-2012

6.0 COMPANY PROJECT MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITIES

7.0 COMPANY DESIGN CONSULTANT RESPONSIBILITIES

8.0 COMPANY RESPONSIBILITIES

9.0 SITE LOCATION PLAN

Please see following page.

Annex A – Scope of Work A-5 CO-227-2012

All mail shall be delivered by the Contractor to the Company Representative .

11.0 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

Company Representative (2 no. sets)

Separate codes and sequential numbers are to be used for:-

SD - Shop Drawings and Schedules

The documents shall also contain the following information:-

 Unique reference number

Annex A – Scope of Work A-7 CO-227-2012

Submittal Status Regime

 A No objection – proceed to procurement, fabrication, installation and construction.

 B Objection with comments – proceed to procurement, fabrication, installation and

 C Objection - Contractor to re-submit for approval following incorporation of the Company

Submittal Return Periods

Sun - Thurs 0600 - 15:30 hours

Drawings Provided to the Contractor

Annex A – Scope of Work A-8 CO-227-2012

Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Composite Coordination Drawings

The Company Representative`s approval of such specifications or drawings prepared by the

Product Data is defined as illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions,

Annex A – Scope of Work A-9 CO-227-2012

Door Hardware Contractor Submittals

i) The Hardware Contractor shall submit the following:

Annex A – Scope of Work A-10 CO-227-2012

ii) Hardware Schedule:

Organize hardware schedule into Hardware Sets indicating complete designations of

 Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item.

iii) Keying Schedule:

Submit a separate detailed keying schedule as agreed with Company Representative.

 Dates of which the Contractor shall commence the drawings

Annex A – Scope of Work A-11 CO-227-2012

Activities must be identified as detailed a manner as possible so as to minimise SS (start-to-start),

Annex A – Scope of Work A-12 CO-227-2012

Submittal Review Time: Include review and re-submittal times of "shop/working

Initial completion in preparation for Taking-Over by Employer: Indicate initial

Contractual and discretionary milestones must be indicated.

Annex A – Scope of Work A-13 CO-227-2012

One hard colour copy of each schedule as described hereinafter;